diff options
Diffstat (limited to 'Documentation')
293 files changed, 7942 insertions, 3530 deletions
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-class-tpm b/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-class-tpm index 9f790eebb5d2..c0e23830f56a 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-class-tpm +++ b/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-class-tpm @@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ Description: The "pubek" property will return the TPM's public endorsement owner's authorization. Since the TPM driver doesn't store any secrets, it can't authorize its own request for the pubek, making it unaccessible. The public endorsement key is gener- - ated at TPM menufacture time and exists for the life of the + ated at TPM manufacture time and exists for the life of the chip. Example output: @@ -163,7 +163,7 @@ Date: April 2006 KernelVersion: 2.6.17 Contact: tpmdd-devel@lists.sf.net Description: The "temp_deactivated" property returns a '1' if the chip has - been temporarily dectivated, usually until the next power + been temporarily deactivated, usually until the next power cycle. Whether a warm boot (reboot) will clear a TPM chip from a temp_deactivated state is platform specific. diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-firmware-opal-elog b/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-firmware-opal-elog index e1f3058f5954..2536434d49d0 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-firmware-opal-elog +++ b/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-firmware-opal-elog @@ -57,4 +57,4 @@ Description: Shortly after acknowledging it, the log entry will be removed from sysfs. Reading this file will list the supported - operations (curently just acknowledge).
\ No newline at end of file + operations (currently just acknowledge). diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/configfs-stp-policy b/Documentation/ABI/testing/configfs-stp-policy new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..421ce6825c66 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/configfs-stp-policy @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ +What: /config/stp-policy +Date: June 2015 +KernelVersion: 4.3 +Description: + This group contains policies mandating Master/Channel allocation + for software sources wishing to send trace data over an STM + device. + +What: /config/stp-policy/<device>.<policy> +Date: June 2015 +KernelVersion: 4.3 +Description: + This group is the root of a policy; its name is a concatenation + of an stm device name to which this policy applies and an + arbitrary string. If <device> part doesn't match an existing + stm device, mkdir will fail with ENODEV; if that device already + has a policy assigned to it, mkdir will fail with EBUSY. + +What: /config/stp-policy/<device>.<policy>/device +Date: June 2015 +KernelVersion: 4.3 +Description: + STM device to which this policy applies, read only. Same as the + <device> component of its parent directory. + +What: /config/stp-policy/<device>.<policy>/<node> +Date: June 2015 +KernelVersion: 4.3 +Description: + Policy node is a string identifier that software clients will + use to request a master/channel to be allocated and assigned to + them. + +What: /config/stp-policy/<device>.<policy>/<node>/masters +Date: June 2015 +KernelVersion: 4.3 +Description: + Range of masters from which to allocate for users of this node. + Write two numbers: the first master and the last master number. + +What: /config/stp-policy/<device>.<policy>/<node>/channels +Date: June 2015 +KernelVersion: 4.3 +Description: + Range of channels from which to allocate for users of this node. + Write two numbers: the first channel and the last channel + number. + diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-block b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-block index 8df003963d99..71d184dbb70d 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-block +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-block @@ -60,6 +60,13 @@ Description: Indicates whether a storage device is capable of storing integrity metadata. Set if the device is T10 PI-capable. +What: /sys/block/<disk>/integrity/protection_interval_bytes +Date: July 2015 +Contact: Martin K. Petersen <martin.petersen@oracle.com> +Description: + Describes the number of data bytes which are protected + by one integrity tuple. Typically the device's logical + block size. What: /sys/block/<disk>/integrity/write_generate Date: June 2008 diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-coresight-devices-etm3x b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-coresight-devices-etm3x index d72ca1736ba4..924265a1295d 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-coresight-devices-etm3x +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-coresight-devices-etm3x @@ -8,13 +8,6 @@ Description: (RW) Enable/disable tracing on this specific trace entiry. of coresight components linking the source to the sink is configured and managed automatically by the coresight framework. -What: /sys/bus/coresight/devices/<memory_map>.[etm|ptm]/status -Date: November 2014 -KernelVersion: 3.19 -Contact: Mathieu Poirier <mathieu.poirier@linaro.org> -Description: (R) List various control and status registers. The specific - layout and content is driver specific. - What: /sys/bus/coresight/devices/<memory_map>.[etm|ptm]/addr_idx Date: November 2014 KernelVersion: 3.19 @@ -251,3 +244,79 @@ Date: November 2014 KernelVersion: 3.19 Contact: Mathieu Poirier <mathieu.poirier@linaro.org> Description: (RW) Define the event that controls the trigger. + +What: /sys/bus/coresight/devices/<memory_map>.[etm|ptm]/cpu +Date: October 2015 +KernelVersion: 4.4 +Contact: Mathieu Poirier <mathieu.poirier@linaro.org> +Description: (RO) Holds the cpu number this tracer is affined to. + +What: /sys/bus/coresight/devices/<memory_map>.[etm|ptm]/mgmt/etmccr +Date: September 2015 +KernelVersion: 4.4 +Contact: Mathieu Poirier <mathieu.poirier@linaro.org> +Description: (RO) Print the content of the ETM Configuration Code register + (0x004). The value is read directly from the HW. + +What: /sys/bus/coresight/devices/<memory_map>.[etm|ptm]/mgmt/etmccer +Date: September 2015 +KernelVersion: 4.4 +Contact: Mathieu Poirier <mathieu.poirier@linaro.org> +Description: (RO) Print the content of the ETM Configuration Code Extension + register (0x1e8). The value is read directly from the HW. + +What: /sys/bus/coresight/devices/<memory_map>.[etm|ptm]/mgmt/etmscr +Date: September 2015 +KernelVersion: 4.4 +Contact: Mathieu Poirier <mathieu.poirier@linaro.org> +Description: (RO) Print the content of the ETM System Configuration + register (0x014). The value is read directly from the HW. + +What: /sys/bus/coresight/devices/<memory_map>.[etm|ptm]/mgmt/etmidr +Date: September 2015 +KernelVersion: 4.4 +Contact: Mathieu Poirier <mathieu.poirier@linaro.org> +Description: (RO) Print the content of the ETM ID register (0x1e4). The + value is read directly from the HW. + +What: /sys/bus/coresight/devices/<memory_map>.[etm|ptm]/mgmt/etmcr +Date: September 2015 +KernelVersion: 4.4 +Contact: Mathieu Poirier <mathieu.poirier@linaro.org> +Description: (RO) Print the content of the ETM Main Control register (0x000). + The value is read directly from the HW. + +What: /sys/bus/coresight/devices/<memory_map>.[etm|ptm]/mgmt/etmtraceidr +Date: September 2015 +KernelVersion: 4.4 +Contact: Mathieu Poirier <mathieu.poirier@linaro.org> +Description: (RO) Print the content of the ETM Trace ID register (0x200). + The value is read directly from the HW. + +What: /sys/bus/coresight/devices/<memory_map>.[etm|ptm]/mgmt/etmteevr +Date: September 2015 +KernelVersion: 4.4 +Contact: Mathieu Poirier <mathieu.poirier@linaro.org> +Description: (RO) Print the content of the ETM Trace Enable Event register + (0x020). The value is read directly from the HW. + +What: /sys/bus/coresight/devices/<memory_map>.[etm|ptm]/mgmt/etmtsscr +Date: September 2015 +KernelVersion: 4.4 +Contact: Mathieu Poirier <mathieu.poirier@linaro.org> +Description: (RO) Print the content of the ETM Trace Start/Stop Conrol + register (0x018). The value is read directly from the HW. + +What: /sys/bus/coresight/devices/<memory_map>.[etm|ptm]/mgmt/etmtecr1 +Date: September 2015 +KernelVersion: 4.4 +Contact: Mathieu Poirier <mathieu.poirier@linaro.org> +Description: (RO) Print the content of the ETM Enable Conrol #1 + register (0x024). The value is read directly from the HW. + +What: /sys/bus/coresight/devices/<memory_map>.[etm|ptm]/mgmt/etmtecr2 +Date: September 2015 +KernelVersion: 4.4 +Contact: Mathieu Poirier <mathieu.poirier@linaro.org> +Description: (RO) Print the content of the ETM Enable Conrol #2 + register (0x01c). The value is read directly from the HW. diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-iio b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-iio index 42d360fe66a5..0439c2aaf741 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-iio +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-iio @@ -581,6 +581,7 @@ What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/events/in_voltageY_supply_thresh_rising_en What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/events/in_voltageY_supply_thresh_falling_en What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/events/in_voltageY_thresh_rising_en What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/events/in_voltageY_thresh_falling_en +What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/events/in_voltageY_thresh_either_en What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/events/in_tempY_thresh_rising_en What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/events/in_tempY_thresh_falling_en KernelVersion: 2.6.37 @@ -1459,3 +1460,34 @@ Description: measurements and return the average value as output data. Each value resulted from <type>[_name]_oversampling_ratio measurements is considered as one sample for <type>[_name]_sampling_frequency. + +What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_concentration_raw +What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_concentrationX_raw +What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_concentration_co2_raw +What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_concentrationX_co2_raw +What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_concentration_voc_raw +What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_concentrationX_voc_raw +KernelVersion: 4.3 +Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org +Description: + Raw (unscaled no offset etc.) percentage reading of a substance. + +What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_resistance_raw +What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_resistanceX_raw +What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/out_resistance_raw +What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/out_resistanceX_raw +KernelVersion: 4.3 +Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org +Description: + Raw (unscaled no offset etc.) resistance reading that can be processed + into an ohm value. + +What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/heater_enable +KernelVersion: 4.1.0 +Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org +Description: + '1' (enable) or '0' (disable) specifying the enable + of heater function. Same reading values apply + This ABI is especially applicable for humidity sensors + to heatup the device and get rid of any condensation + in some humidity environment diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-iio-adc-hi8435 b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-iio-adc-hi8435 new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..f30b4c424fb6 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-iio-adc-hi8435 @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ +What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_voltageY_sensing_mode +Date: August 2015 +KernelVersion: 4.2.0 +Contact: source@cogentembedded.com +Description: + Program sensor type for threshold detector inputs. + Could be either "GND-Open" or "Supply-Open" mode. Y is a + threshold detector input channel. Channels 0..7, 8..15, 16..23 + and 24..31 has common sensor types. + +What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/events/in_voltageY_thresh_falling_value +Date: August 2015 +KernelVersion: 4.2.0 +Contact: source@cogentembedded.com +Description: + Channel Y low voltage threshold. If sensor input voltage goes lower then + this value then the threshold falling event is pushed. + Depending on in_voltageY_sensing_mode the low voltage threshold + is separately set for "GND-Open" and "Supply-Open" modes. + Channels 0..31 have common low threshold values, but could have different + sensing_modes. + The low voltage threshold range is between 2..21V. + Hysteresis between low and high thresholds can not be lower then 2 and + can not be odd. + If falling threshold results hysteresis to odd value then rising + threshold is automatically subtracted by one. + +What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/events/in_voltageY_thresh_rising_value +Date: August 2015 +KernelVersion: 4.2.0 +Contact: source@cogentembedded.com +Description: + Channel Y high voltage threshold. If sensor input voltage goes higher then + this value then the threshold rising event is pushed. + Depending on in_voltageY_sensing_mode the high voltage threshold + is separately set for "GND-Open" and "Supply-Open" modes. + Channels 0..31 have common high threshold values, but could have different + sensing_modes. + The high voltage threshold range is between 3..22V. + Hysteresis between low and high thresholds can not be lower then 2 and + can not be odd. + If rising threshold results hysteresis to odd value then falling + threshold is automatically appended by one. diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-iio-chemical-vz89x b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-iio-chemical-vz89x new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..c0c1ea924535 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-iio-chemical-vz89x @@ -0,0 +1,7 @@ +What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_concentration_VOC_short_raw +Date: September 2015 +KernelVersion: 4.3 +Contact: Matt Ranostay <mranostay@gmail.com> +Description: + Get the raw calibration VOC value from the sensor. + This value has little application outside of calibration. diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-iio-humidity-hdc100x b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-iio-humidity-hdc100x new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..b72bb62552cf --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-iio-humidity-hdc100x @@ -0,0 +1,9 @@ +What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/out_current_heater_raw +What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/out_current_heater_raw_available +KernelVersion: 4.3 +Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org +Description: + Controls the heater device within the humidity sensor to get + rid of excess condensation. + + Valid control values are 0 = OFF, and 1 = ON. diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-iio-meas-spec b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-iio-meas-spec new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..1a6265e92e2f --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-iio-meas-spec @@ -0,0 +1,8 @@ +What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/battery_low +KernelVersion: 4.1.0 +Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org +Description: + Reading returns either '1' or '0'. '1' means that the + battery level supplied to sensor is below 2.25V. + This ABI is available for tsys02d, htu21, ms8607 + This ABI is available for htu21, ms8607 diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-iio-trigger-sysfs b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-iio-trigger-sysfs index bbb039237a25..04ac62305018 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-iio-trigger-sysfs +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-iio-trigger-sysfs @@ -18,3 +18,25 @@ Description: trigger. In order to associate the trigger with an IIO device one should write this name string to /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceY/trigger/current_trigger. + +What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio_sysfs_trigger/add_trigger +KernelVersion: 2.6.39 +Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org +Description: + This attribute is provided by the iio-trig-sysfs stand-alone + driver and it is used to activate the creation of a new trigger. + In order to achieve this, one should write a positive integer + into the associated file, which will serve as the id of the + trigger. If the trigger with the specified id is already present + in the system, an invalid argument message will be returned. + +What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio_sysfs_trigger/remove_trigger +KernelVersion: 2.6.39 +Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org +Description: + This attribute is used to unregister and delete a previously + created trigger from the list of available triggers. In order to + achieve this, one should write a positive integer into the + associated file, representing the id of the trigger that needs + to be removed. If the trigger can't be found, an invalid + argument message will be returned to the user. diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-intel_th-devices-gth b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-intel_th-devices-gth new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..22d0843849a8 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-intel_th-devices-gth @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ +What: /sys/bus/intel_th/devices/<intel_th_id>-gth/masters/* +Date: June 2015 +KernelVersion: 4.3 +Contact: Alexander Shishkin <alexander.shishkin@linux.intel.com> +Description: (RW) Configure output ports for STP masters. Writing -1 + disables a master; any + +What: /sys/bus/intel_th/devices/<intel_th_id>-gth/outputs/[0-7]_port +Date: June 2015 +KernelVersion: 4.3 +Contact: Alexander Shishkin <alexander.shishkin@linux.intel.com> +Description: (RO) Output port type: + 0: not present, + 1: MSU (Memory Storage Unit) + 2: CTP (Common Trace Port) + 4: PTI (MIPI PTI). + +What: /sys/bus/intel_th/devices/<intel_th_id>-gth/outputs/[0-7]_drop +Date: June 2015 +KernelVersion: 4.3 +Contact: Alexander Shishkin <alexander.shishkin@linux.intel.com> +Description: (RW) Data retention policy setting: keep (0) or drop (1) + incoming data while output port is in reset. + +What: /sys/bus/intel_th/devices/<intel_th_id>-gth/outputs/[0-7]_null +Date: June 2015 +KernelVersion: 4.3 +Contact: Alexander Shishkin <alexander.shishkin@linux.intel.com> +Description: (RW) STP NULL packet generation: enabled (1) or disabled (0). + +What: /sys/bus/intel_th/devices/<intel_th_id>-gth/outputs/[0-7]_flush +Date: June 2015 +KernelVersion: 4.3 +Contact: Alexander Shishkin <alexander.shishkin@linux.intel.com> +Description: (RW) Force flush data from byte packing buffer for the output + port. + +What: /sys/bus/intel_th/devices/<intel_th_id>-gth/outputs/[0-7]_reset +Date: June 2015 +KernelVersion: 4.3 +Contact: Alexander Shishkin <alexander.shishkin@linux.intel.com> +Description: (RO) Output port is in reset (1). + +What: /sys/bus/intel_th/devices/<intel_th_id>-gth/outputs/[0-7]_smcfreq +Date: June 2015 +KernelVersion: 4.3 +Contact: Alexander Shishkin <alexander.shishkin@linux.intel.com> +Description: (RW) STP sync packet frequency for the port. Specifies the + number of clocks between mainenance packets. diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-intel_th-devices-msc b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-intel_th-devices-msc new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..b940c5d91cf7 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-intel_th-devices-msc @@ -0,0 +1,33 @@ +What: /sys/bus/intel_th/devices/<intel_th_id>-msc<msc-id>/wrap +Date: June 2015 +KernelVersion: 4.3 +Contact: Alexander Shishkin <alexander.shishkin@linux.intel.com> +Description: (RW) Configure MSC buffer wrapping. 1 == wrapping enabled. + +What: /sys/bus/intel_th/devices/<intel_th_id>-msc<msc-id>/mode +Date: June 2015 +KernelVersion: 4.3 +Contact: Alexander Shishkin <alexander.shishkin@linux.intel.com> +Description: (RW) Configure MSC operating mode: + - "single", for contiguous buffer mode (high-order alloc); + - "multi", for multiblock mode; + - "ExI", for DCI handler mode; + - "debug", for debug mode. + If operating mode changes, existing buffer is deallocated, + provided there are no active users and tracing is not enabled, + otherwise the write will fail. + +What: /sys/bus/intel_th/devices/<intel_th_id>-msc<msc-id>/nr_pages +Date: June 2015 +KernelVersion: 4.3 +Contact: Alexander Shishkin <alexander.shishkin@linux.intel.com> +Description: (RW) Configure MSC buffer size for "single" or "multi" modes. + In single mode, this is a single number of pages, has to be + power of 2. In multiblock mode, this is a comma-separated list + of numbers of pages for each window to be allocated. Number of + windows is not limited. + Writing to this file deallocates existing buffer (provided + there are no active users and tracing is not enabled) and then + allocates a new one. + + diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-intel_th-devices-pti b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-intel_th-devices-pti new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..df0b24fd0218 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-intel_th-devices-pti @@ -0,0 +1,24 @@ +What: /sys/bus/intel_th/devices/<intel_th_id>-pti/mode +Date: June 2015 +KernelVersion: 4.3 +Contact: Alexander Shishkin <alexander.shishkin@linux.intel.com> +Description: (RW) Configure PTI output width. Currently supported values + are 4, 8, 12, 16. + +What: /sys/bus/intel_th/devices/<intel_th_id>-pti/freerunning_clock +Date: June 2015 +KernelVersion: 4.3 +Contact: Alexander Shishkin <alexander.shishkin@linux.intel.com> +Description: (RW) 0: PTI trace clock acts as a strobe which only toggles + when there is trace data to send. 1: PTI trace clock is a + free-running clock. + +What: /sys/bus/intel_th/devices/<intel_th_id>-pti/clock_divider +Date: June 2015 +KernelVersion: 4.3 +Contact: Alexander Shishkin <alexander.shishkin@linux.intel.com> +Description: (RW) Configure PTI port clock divider: + - 0: Intel TH clock rate, + - 1: 1/2 Intel TH clock rate, + - 2: 1/4 Intel TH clock rate, + - 3: 1/8 Intel TH clock rate. diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-intel_th-output-devices b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-intel_th-output-devices new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..4d48a9451866 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-intel_th-output-devices @@ -0,0 +1,13 @@ +What: /sys/bus/intel_th/devices/<intel_th_id>-<device><id>/active +Date: June 2015 +KernelVersion: 4.3 +Contact: Alexander Shishkin <alexander.shishkin@linux.intel.com> +Description: (RW) Writes of 1 or 0 enable or disable trace output to this + output device. Reads return current status. + +What: /sys/bus/intel_th/devices/<intel_th_id>-msc<msc-id>/port +Date: June 2015 +KernelVersion: 4.3 +Contact: Alexander Shishkin <alexander.shishkin@linux.intel.com> +Description: (RO) Port number, corresponding to this output device on the + switch (GTH). diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-mei b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-mei index 20e4d1638bac..6bd45346ac7e 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-mei +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-mei @@ -19,3 +19,10 @@ KernelVersion: 4.2 Contact: Tomas Winkler <tomas.winkler@intel.com> Description: Stores mei client device uuid Format: xxxxxxxx-xxxx-xxxx-xxxx-xxxxxxxxxxxx + +What: /sys/bus/mei/devices/.../version +Date: Aug 2015 +KernelVersion: 4.3 +Contact: Tomas Winkler <tomas.winkler@intel.com> +Description: Stores mei client protocol version + Format: %d diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-usb b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-usb index 864637f25bee..3a4abfc44f5e 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-usb +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-usb @@ -1,3 +1,23 @@ +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/INTERFACE/authorized +Date: August 2015 +Description: + This allows to authorize (1) or deauthorize (0) + individual interfaces instead a whole device + in contrast to the device authorization. + If a deauthorized interface will be authorized + so the driver probing must be triggered manually + by writing INTERFACE to /sys/bus/usb/drivers_probe + This allows to avoid side-effects with drivers + that need multiple interfaces. + A deauthorized interface cannot be probed or claimed. + +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/usbX/interface_authorized_default +Date: August 2015 +Description: + This is used as value that determines if interfaces + would be authorized by default. + The value can be 1 or 0. It's by default 1. + What: /sys/bus/usb/device/.../authorized Date: July 2008 KernelVersion: 2.6.26 diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-fpga-manager b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-fpga-manager new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..23056c532fdd --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-fpga-manager @@ -0,0 +1,37 @@ +What: /sys/class/fpga_manager/<fpga>/name +Date: August 2015 +KernelVersion: 4.3 +Contact: Alan Tull <atull@opensource.altera.com> +Description: Name of low level fpga manager driver. + +What: /sys/class/fpga_manager/<fpga>/state +Date: August 2015 +KernelVersion: 4.3 +Contact: Alan Tull <atull@opensource.altera.com> +Description: Read fpga manager state as a string. + The intent is to provide enough detail that if something goes + wrong during FPGA programming (something that the driver can't + fix) then userspace can know, i.e. if the firmware request + fails, that could be due to not being able to find the firmware + file. + + This is a superset of FPGA states and fpga manager driver + states. The fpga manager driver is walking through these steps + to get the FPGA into a known operating state. It's a sequence, + though some steps may get skipped. Valid FPGA states will vary + by manufacturer; this is a superset. + + * unknown = can't determine state + * power off = FPGA power is off + * power up = FPGA reports power is up + * reset = FPGA held in reset state + * firmware request = firmware class request in progress + * firmware request error = firmware request failed + * write init = preparing FPGA for programming + * write init error = Error while preparing FPGA for + programming + * write = FPGA ready to receive image data + * write error = Error while programming + * write complete = Doing post programming steps + * write complete error = Error while doing post programming + * operating = FPGA is programmed and operating diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-mic.txt b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-mic.txt index 13f48afc534f..d45eed2bf128 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-mic.txt +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-mic.txt @@ -41,18 +41,15 @@ Description: When read, this entry provides the current state of an Intel MIC device in the context of the card OS. Possible values that will be read are: - "offline" - The MIC device is ready to boot the card OS. On + "ready" - The MIC device is ready to boot the card OS. On reading this entry after an OSPM resume, a "boot" has to be written to this entry if the card was previously shutdown during OSPM suspend. - "online" - The MIC device has initiated booting a card OS. + "booting" - The MIC device has initiated booting a card OS. + "online" - The MIC device has completed boot and is online "shutting_down" - The card OS is shutting down. + "resetting" - A reset has been initiated for the MIC device "reset_failed" - The MIC device has failed to reset. - "suspending" - The MIC device is currently being prepared for - suspend. On reading this entry, a "suspend" has to be written - to the state sysfs entry to ensure the card is shutdown during - OSPM suspend. - "suspended" - The MIC device has been suspended. When written, this sysfs entry triggers different state change operations depending upon the current state of the card OS. @@ -62,8 +59,6 @@ Description: sysfs entries. "reset" - Initiates device reset. "shutdown" - Initiates card OS shutdown. - "suspend" - Initiates card OS shutdown and also marks the card - as suspended. What: /sys/class/mic/mic(x)/shutdown_status Date: October 2013 @@ -126,7 +121,7 @@ Description: the card. This sysfs entry can be written with the following valid strings: a) linux - Boot a Linux image. - b) elf - Boot an elf image for flash updates. + b) flash - Boot an image for flash updates. What: /sys/class/mic/mic(x)/log_buf_addr Date: October 2013 @@ -155,3 +150,17 @@ Description: daemon to set the log buffer length address. The correct log buffer length address to be written can be found in the System.map file of the card OS. + +What: /sys/class/mic/mic(x)/heartbeat_enable +Date: March 2015 +KernelVersion: 3.20 +Contact: Ashutosh Dixit <ashutosh.dixit@intel.com> +Description: + The MIC drivers detect and inform user space about card crashes + via a heartbeat mechanism (see the description of + shutdown_status above). User space can turn off this + notification by setting heartbeat_enable to 0 and enable it by + setting this entry to 1. If this notification is disabled it is + the responsibility of user space to detect card crashes via + alternative means such as a network ping. This setting is + enabled by default. diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-power b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-power index 369d2a2d7d3e..fa05719f9981 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-power +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-power @@ -74,3 +74,61 @@ Description: Valid values: - 0 - 70 (minutes), step by 10 (rounded down) + +What: /sys/class/power_supply/bq24257-charger/ovp_voltage +Date: October 2015 +KernelVersion: 4.4.0 +Contact: Andreas Dannenberg <dannenberg@ti.com> +Description: + This entry configures the overvoltage protection feature of bq24257- + type charger devices. This feature protects the device and other + components against damage from overvoltage on the input supply. See + device datasheet for details. + + Valid values: + - 6000000, 6500000, 7000000, 8000000, 9000000, 9500000, 10000000, + 10500000 (all uV) + +What: /sys/class/power_supply/bq24257-charger/in_dpm_voltage +Date: October 2015 +KernelVersion: 4.4.0 +Contact: Andreas Dannenberg <dannenberg@ti.com> +Description: + This entry configures the input dynamic power path management voltage of + bq24257-type charger devices. Once the supply drops to the configured + voltage, the input current limit is reduced down to prevent the further + drop of the supply. When the IC enters this mode, the charge current is + lower than the set value. See device datasheet for details. + + Valid values: + - 4200000, 4280000, 4360000, 4440000, 4520000, 4600000, 4680000, + 4760000 (all uV) + +What: /sys/class/power_supply/bq24257-charger/high_impedance_enable +Date: October 2015 +KernelVersion: 4.4.0 +Contact: Andreas Dannenberg <dannenberg@ti.com> +Description: + This entry allows enabling the high-impedance mode of bq24257-type + charger devices. If enabled, it places the charger IC into low power + standby mode with the switch mode controller disabled. When disabled, + the charger operates normally. See device datasheet for details. + + Valid values: + - 1: enabled + - 0: disabled + +What: /sys/class/power_supply/bq24257-charger/sysoff_enable +Date: October 2015 +KernelVersion: 4.4.0 +Contact: Andreas Dannenberg <dannenberg@ti.com> +Description: + This entry allows enabling the sysoff mode of bq24257-type charger + devices. If enabled and the input is removed, the internal battery FET + is turned off in order to reduce the leakage from the BAT pin to less + than 1uA. Note that on some devices/systems this disconnects the battery + from the system. See device datasheet for details. + + Valid values: + - 1: enabled + - 0: disabled diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-stm b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-stm new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..c9aa4f3fc9a7 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-stm @@ -0,0 +1,14 @@ +What: /sys/class/stm/<stm>/masters +Date: June 2015 +KernelVersion: 4.3 +Contact: Alexander Shishkin <alexander.shishkin@linux.intel.com> +Description: + Shows first and last available to software master numbers on + this STM device. + +What: /sys/class/stm/<stm>/channels +Date: June 2015 +KernelVersion: 4.3 +Contact: Alexander Shishkin <alexander.shishkin@linux.intel.com> +Description: + Shows the number of channels per master on this STM device. diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-stm_source b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-stm_source new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..57b8dd39bbf7 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-stm_source @@ -0,0 +1,11 @@ +What: /sys/class/stm_source/<stm_source>/stm_source_link +Date: June 2015 +KernelVersion: 4.3 +Contact: Alexander Shishkin <alexander.shishkin@linux.intel.com> +Description: + stm_source device linkage to stm device, where its tracing data + is directed. Reads return an existing connection or "<none>" if + this stm_source is not connected to any stm device yet. + Write an existing (registered) stm device's name here to + connect that device. If a device is already connected to this + stm_source, it will first be disconnected. diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-ppi b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-ppi index 7d1435bc976c..9921ef285899 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-ppi +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-ppi @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -What: /sys/devices/pnp0/<bus-num>/ppi/ +What: /sys/class/tpm/tpmX/ppi/ Date: August 2012 Kernel Version: 3.6 Contact: xiaoyan.zhang@intel.com @@ -8,9 +8,14 @@ Description: folder makes sense. The folder path can be got by command 'find /sys/ -name 'pcrs''. For the detail information of PPI, please refer to the PPI specification from + http://www.trustedcomputinggroup.org/ -What: /sys/devices/pnp0/<bus-num>/ppi/version + In Linux 4.2 ppi was moved to the character device directory. + A symlink from tpmX/device/ppi to tpmX/ppi to provide backwards + compatibility. + +What: /sys/class/tpm/tpmX/ppi/version Date: August 2012 Contact: xiaoyan.zhang@intel.com Description: @@ -18,7 +23,7 @@ Description: platform. This file is readonly. -What: /sys/devices/pnp0/<bus-num>/ppi/request +What: /sys/class/tpm/tpmX/ppi/request Date: August 2012 Contact: xiaoyan.zhang@intel.com Description: @@ -28,7 +33,7 @@ Description: integer value range from 1 to 160, and 0 means no request. This file can be read and written. -What: /sys/devices/pnp0/00:<bus-num>/ppi/response +What: /sys/class/tpm/tpmX/ppi/response Date: August 2012 Contact: xiaoyan.zhang@intel.com Description: @@ -37,7 +42,7 @@ Description: : <response description>". This file is readonly. -What: /sys/devices/pnp0/<bus-num>/ppi/transition_action +What: /sys/class/tpm/tpmX/ppi/transition_action Date: August 2012 Contact: xiaoyan.zhang@intel.com Description: @@ -47,7 +52,7 @@ Description: description>". This file is readonly. -What: /sys/devices/pnp0/<bus-num>/ppi/tcg_operations +What: /sys/class/tpm/tpmX/ppi/tcg_operations Date: August 2012 Contact: xiaoyan.zhang@intel.com Description: @@ -58,7 +63,7 @@ Description: This attribute is only supported by PPI version 1.2+. This file is readonly. -What: /sys/devices/pnp0/<bus-num>/ppi/vs_operations +What: /sys/class/tpm/tpmX/ppi/vs_operations Date: August 2012 Contact: xiaoyan.zhang@intel.com Description: diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-fs-f2fs b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-fs-f2fs index 2c4cc42006e8..0345f2d1c727 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-fs-f2fs +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-fs-f2fs @@ -80,3 +80,15 @@ Date: February 2015 Contact: "Jaegeuk Kim" <jaegeuk@kernel.org> Description: Controls the trimming rate in batch mode. + +What: /sys/fs/f2fs/<disk>/cp_interval +Date: October 2015 +Contact: "Jaegeuk Kim" <jaegeuk@kernel.org> +Description: + Controls the checkpoint timing. + +What: /sys/fs/f2fs/<disk>/ra_nid_pages +Date: October 2015 +Contact: "Chao Yu" <chao2.yu@samsung.com> +Description: + Controls the count of nid pages to be readaheaded. diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-power b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-power index f4551816329e..50b368d490b5 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-power +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-power @@ -256,3 +256,15 @@ Description: Writing a "1" enables this printing while writing a "0" disables it. The default value is "0". Reading from this file will display the current value. + +What: /sys/power/pm_wakeup_irq +Date: April 2015 +Contact: Alexandra Yates <alexandra.yates@linux.intel.org> +Description: + The /sys/power/pm_wakeup_irq file reports to user space the IRQ + number of the first wakeup interrupt (that is, the first + interrupt from an IRQ line armed for system wakeup) seen by the + kernel during the most recent system suspend/resume cycle. + + This output is useful for system wakeup diagnostics of spurious + wakeup interrupts. diff --git a/Documentation/Changes b/Documentation/Changes index 6d8863004858..ec97b77c8b00 100644 --- a/Documentation/Changes +++ b/Documentation/Changes @@ -43,7 +43,8 @@ o udev 081 # udevd --version o grub 0.93 # grub --version || grub-install --version o mcelog 0.6 # mcelog --version o iptables 1.4.2 # iptables -V -o openssl & libcrypto 1.0.1k # openssl version +o openssl & libcrypto 1.0.0 # openssl version +o bc 1.06.95 # bc --version Kernel compilation diff --git a/Documentation/DMA-API-HOWTO.txt b/Documentation/DMA-API-HOWTO.txt index 55b70b903ead..d69b3fc64e14 100644 --- a/Documentation/DMA-API-HOWTO.txt +++ b/Documentation/DMA-API-HOWTO.txt @@ -681,6 +681,11 @@ or: as appropriate. +PLEASE NOTE: The 'nents' argument to dma_sync_sg_for_cpu() and + dma_sync_sg_for_device() must be the same passed to + dma_map_sg(). It is _NOT_ the count returned by + dma_map_sg(). + After the last DMA transfer call one of the DMA unmap routines dma_unmap_{single,sg}(). If you don't touch the data from the first dma_map_*() call till dma_unmap_*(), then you don't have to call the diff --git a/Documentation/DMA-API.txt b/Documentation/DMA-API.txt index edccacd4f048..8d065d6ec956 100644 --- a/Documentation/DMA-API.txt +++ b/Documentation/DMA-API.txt @@ -340,7 +340,7 @@ accessed sg->address and sg->length as shown above. void dma_unmap_sg(struct device *dev, struct scatterlist *sg, - int nhwentries, enum dma_data_direction direction) + int nents, enum dma_data_direction direction) Unmap the previously mapped scatter/gather list. All the parameters must be the same as those and passed in to the scatter/gather mapping @@ -356,10 +356,10 @@ void dma_sync_single_for_device(struct device *dev, dma_addr_t dma_handle, size_t size, enum dma_data_direction direction) void -dma_sync_sg_for_cpu(struct device *dev, struct scatterlist *sg, int nelems, +dma_sync_sg_for_cpu(struct device *dev, struct scatterlist *sg, int nents, enum dma_data_direction direction) void -dma_sync_sg_for_device(struct device *dev, struct scatterlist *sg, int nelems, +dma_sync_sg_for_device(struct device *dev, struct scatterlist *sg, int nents, enum dma_data_direction direction) Synchronise a single contiguous or scatter/gather mapping for the CPU diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/.gitignore b/Documentation/DocBook/.gitignore index 7ebd5465d927..e05da3f7aa21 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/.gitignore +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/.gitignore @@ -11,5 +11,7 @@ *.png *.gif *.svg +*.proc +*.db media-indices.tmpl media-entities.tmpl diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/80211.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/80211.tmpl index aac9357d4866..f9b9ad7894f5 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/80211.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/80211.tmpl @@ -154,8 +154,9 @@ !Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_scan_request !Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_scan_done !Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_bss -!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_inform_bss_width_frame -!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_inform_bss_width +!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_inform_bss +!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_inform_bss_frame_data +!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_inform_bss_data !Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_unlink_bss !Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_find_ie !Finclude/net/cfg80211.h ieee80211_bss_get_ie diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/Makefile b/Documentation/DocBook/Makefile index 93eff64387cd..d2544961b67a 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/Makefile +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/Makefile @@ -69,6 +69,12 @@ installmandocs: mandocs KERNELDOCXMLREF = $(srctree)/scripts/kernel-doc-xml-ref KERNELDOC = $(srctree)/scripts/kernel-doc DOCPROC = $(objtree)/scripts/docproc +CHECK_LC_CTYPE = $(objtree)/scripts/check-lc_ctype + +# Use a fixed encoding - UTF-8 if the C library has support built-in +# or ASCII if not +LC_CTYPE := $(call try-run, LC_CTYPE=C.UTF-8 $(CHECK_LC_CTYPE),C.UTF-8,C) +export LC_CTYPE XMLTOFLAGS = -m $(srctree)/$(src)/stylesheet.xsl XMLTOFLAGS += --skip-validation diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/alsa-driver-api.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/alsa-driver-api.tmpl index e94a10bb4a9e..53f439dcc94b 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/alsa-driver-api.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/alsa-driver-api.tmpl @@ -112,6 +112,8 @@ !Esound/soc/soc-devres.c !Esound/soc/soc-io.c !Esound/soc/soc-pcm.c +!Esound/soc/soc-ops.c +!Esound/soc/soc-compress.c </sect1> <sect1><title>ASoC DAPM API</title> !Esound/soc/soc-dapm.c diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/device-drivers.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/device-drivers.tmpl index 1d6008d51b55..42a2d8593e39 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/device-drivers.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/device-drivers.tmpl @@ -221,6 +221,9 @@ X!Isound/sound_firmware.c <title>Media Devices</title> <sect1><title>Video2Linux devices</title> +!Iinclude/media/tuner.h +!Iinclude/media/tuner-types.h +!Iinclude/media/tveeprom.h !Iinclude/media/v4l2-async.h !Iinclude/media/v4l2-ctrls.h !Iinclude/media/v4l2-dv-timings.h @@ -231,6 +234,7 @@ X!Isound/sound_firmware.c !Iinclude/media/v4l2-of.h !Iinclude/media/v4l2-subdev.h !Iinclude/media/videobuf2-core.h +!Iinclude/media/videobuf2-v4l2.h !Iinclude/media/videobuf2-memops.h </sect1> <sect1><title>Digital TV (DVB) devices</title> @@ -239,15 +243,82 @@ X!Isound/sound_firmware.c !Idrivers/media/dvb-core/dvb_math.h !Idrivers/media/dvb-core/dvb_ringbuffer.h !Idrivers/media/dvb-core/dvbdev.h - </sect1> - <sect1><title>Remote Controller devices</title> + <sect1><title>Digital TV Demux API</title> + <para>The kernel demux API defines a driver-internal interface for + registering low-level, hardware specific driver to a hardware + independent demux layer. It is only of interest for Digital TV + device driver writers. The header file for this API is named + <constant>demux.h</constant> and located in + <constant>drivers/media/dvb-core</constant>.</para> + + <para>The demux API should be implemented for each demux in the + system. It is used to select the TS source of a demux and to manage + the demux resources. When the demux client allocates a resource via + the demux API, it receives a pointer to the API of that + resource.</para> + <para>Each demux receives its TS input from a DVB front-end or from + memory, as set via this demux API. In a system with more than one + front-end, the API can be used to select one of the DVB front-ends + as a TS source for a demux, unless this is fixed in the HW platform. + The demux API only controls front-ends regarding to their connections + with demuxes; the APIs used to set the other front-end parameters, + such as tuning, are not defined in this document.</para> + <para>The functions that implement the abstract interface demux should + be defined static or module private and registered to the Demux + core for external access. It is not necessary to implement every + function in the struct <constant>dmx_demux</constant>. For example, + a demux interface might support Section filtering, but not PES + filtering. The API client is expected to check the value of any + function pointer before calling the function: the value of NULL means + that the “function is not available”.</para> + <para>Whenever the functions of the demux API modify shared data, + the possibilities of lost update and race condition problems should + be addressed, e.g. by protecting parts of code with mutexes.</para> + <para>Note that functions called from a bottom half context must not + sleep. Even a simple memory allocation without using GFP_ATOMIC can + result in a kernel thread being put to sleep if swapping is needed. + For example, the Linux kernel calls the functions of a network device + interface from a bottom half context. Thus, if a demux API function + is called from network device code, the function must not sleep. + </para> + </sect1> + + <section id="demux_callback_api"> + <title>Demux Callback API</title> + <para>This kernel-space API comprises the callback functions that + deliver filtered data to the demux client. Unlike the other DVB + kABIs, these functions are provided by the client and called from + the demux code.</para> + <para>The function pointers of this abstract interface are not + packed into a structure as in the other demux APIs, because the + callback functions are registered and used independent of each + other. As an example, it is possible for the API client to provide + several callback functions for receiving TS packets and no + callbacks for PES packets or sections.</para> + <para>The functions that implement the callback API need not be + re-entrant: when a demux driver calls one of these functions, + the driver is not allowed to call the function again before + the original call returns. If a callback is triggered by a + hardware interrupt, it is recommended to use the Linux + “bottom half” mechanism or start a tasklet instead of + making the callback function call directly from a hardware + interrupt.</para> + <para>This mechanism is implemented by + <link linkend='API-dmx-ts-cb'>dmx_ts_cb()</link> and + <link linkend='API-dmx-section-cb'>dmx_section_cb()</link>.</para> + </section> + +!Idrivers/media/dvb-core/demux.h + </sect1> + <sect1><title>Remote Controller devices</title> !Iinclude/media/rc-core.h - </sect1> - <sect1><title>Media Controller devices</title> +!Iinclude/media/lirc_dev.h + </sect1> + <sect1><title>Media Controller devices</title> !Iinclude/media/media-device.h !Iinclude/media/media-devnode.h !Iinclude/media/media-entity.h - </sect1> + </sect1> </chapter> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/iio.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/iio.tmpl index 06bb53de5a47..98be322673da 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/iio.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/iio.tmpl @@ -578,7 +578,7 @@ work together. </para> <sect2 id="iiotrigbufsetup"> <title> IIO triggered buffer setup</title> -!Edrivers/iio/industrialio-triggered-buffer.c +!Edrivers/iio/buffer/industrialio-triggered-buffer.c !Finclude/linux/iio/iio.h iio_buffer_setup_ops diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/dvb/dvbapi.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/dvb/dvbapi.xml index 858fd7d17104..8576481e20ae 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/dvb/dvbapi.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/dvb/dvbapi.xml @@ -125,9 +125,6 @@ Added ISDB-T test originally written by Patrick Boettcher &sub-audio; </section> </chapter> - <chapter id="dvb_kdapi"> - &sub-kdapi; - </chapter> <chapter id="dvb_examples"> &sub-examples; </chapter> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/dvb/kdapi.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/dvb/kdapi.xml deleted file mode 100644 index 68bcd33a82c3..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/dvb/kdapi.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,2309 +0,0 @@ -<title>Kernel Demux API</title> -<para>The kernel demux API defines a driver-internal interface for registering low-level, -hardware specific driver to a hardware independent demux layer. It is only of interest for -DVB device driver writers. The header file for this API is named <constant>demux.h</constant> and located in -<constant>">drivers/media/dvb-core</constant>. -</para> -<para>Maintainer note: This section must be reviewed. It is probably out of date. -</para> - -<section id="kernel_demux_data_types"> -<title>Kernel Demux Data Types</title> - - -<section id="dmx_success_t"> -<title>dmx_success_t</title> - <programlisting> - typedef enum { - DMX_OK = 0, /⋆ Received Ok ⋆/ - DMX_LENGTH_ERROR, /⋆ Incorrect length ⋆/ - DMX_OVERRUN_ERROR, /⋆ Receiver ring buffer overrun ⋆/ - DMX_CRC_ERROR, /⋆ Incorrect CRC ⋆/ - DMX_FRAME_ERROR, /⋆ Frame alignment error ⋆/ - DMX_FIFO_ERROR, /⋆ Receiver FIFO overrun ⋆/ - DMX_MISSED_ERROR /⋆ Receiver missed packet ⋆/ - } dmx_success_t; -</programlisting> - -</section> -<section id="ts_filter_types"> -<title>TS filter types</title> - <programlisting> - /⋆--------------------------------------------------------------------------⋆/ - /⋆ TS packet reception ⋆/ - /⋆--------------------------------------------------------------------------⋆/ - - /⋆ TS filter type for set_type() ⋆/ - - #define TS_PACKET 1 /⋆ send TS packets (188 bytes) to callback (default) ⋆/ - #define TS_PAYLOAD_ONLY 2 /⋆ in case TS_PACKET is set, only send the TS - payload (<=184 bytes per packet) to callback ⋆/ - #define TS_DECODER 4 /⋆ send stream to built-in decoder (if present) ⋆/ -</programlisting> - -</section> -<section id="dmx_ts_pes_t"> -<title>dmx_ts_pes_t</title> -<para>The structure -</para> -<programlisting> - typedef enum - { - DMX_TS_PES_AUDIO, /⋆ also send packets to audio decoder (if it exists) ⋆/ - DMX_TS_PES_VIDEO, /⋆ ... ⋆/ - DMX_TS_PES_TELETEXT, - DMX_TS_PES_SUBTITLE, - DMX_TS_PES_PCR, - DMX_TS_PES_OTHER, - } dmx_ts_pes_t; -</programlisting> -<para>describes the PES type for filters which write to a built-in decoder. The correspond (and -should be kept identical) to the types in the demux device. -</para> -<programlisting> - struct dmx_ts_feed_s { - int is_filtering; /⋆ Set to non-zero when filtering in progress ⋆/ - struct dmx_demux_s⋆ parent; /⋆ Back-pointer ⋆/ - void⋆ priv; /⋆ Pointer to private data of the API client ⋆/ - int (⋆set) (struct dmx_ts_feed_s⋆ feed, - __u16 pid, - size_t callback_length, - size_t circular_buffer_size, - int descramble, - struct timespec timeout); - int (⋆start_filtering) (struct dmx_ts_feed_s⋆ feed); - int (⋆stop_filtering) (struct dmx_ts_feed_s⋆ feed); - int (⋆set_type) (struct dmx_ts_feed_s⋆ feed, - int type, - dmx_ts_pes_t pes_type); - }; - - typedef struct dmx_ts_feed_s dmx_ts_feed_t; -</programlisting> - <programlisting> - /⋆--------------------------------------------------------------------------⋆/ - /⋆ PES packet reception (not supported yet) ⋆/ - /⋆--------------------------------------------------------------------------⋆/ - - typedef struct dmx_pes_filter_s { - struct dmx_pes_s⋆ parent; /⋆ Back-pointer ⋆/ - void⋆ priv; /⋆ Pointer to private data of the API client ⋆/ - } dmx_pes_filter_t; -</programlisting> - <programlisting> - typedef struct dmx_pes_feed_s { - int is_filtering; /⋆ Set to non-zero when filtering in progress ⋆/ - struct dmx_demux_s⋆ parent; /⋆ Back-pointer ⋆/ - void⋆ priv; /⋆ Pointer to private data of the API client ⋆/ - int (⋆set) (struct dmx_pes_feed_s⋆ feed, - __u16 pid, - size_t circular_buffer_size, - int descramble, - struct timespec timeout); - int (⋆start_filtering) (struct dmx_pes_feed_s⋆ feed); - int (⋆stop_filtering) (struct dmx_pes_feed_s⋆ feed); - int (⋆allocate_filter) (struct dmx_pes_feed_s⋆ feed, - dmx_pes_filter_t⋆⋆ filter); - int (⋆release_filter) (struct dmx_pes_feed_s⋆ feed, - dmx_pes_filter_t⋆ filter); - } dmx_pes_feed_t; -</programlisting> - <programlisting> - typedef struct { - __u8 filter_value [DMX_MAX_FILTER_SIZE]; - __u8 filter_mask [DMX_MAX_FILTER_SIZE]; - struct dmx_section_feed_s⋆ parent; /⋆ Back-pointer ⋆/ - void⋆ priv; /⋆ Pointer to private data of the API client ⋆/ - } dmx_section_filter_t; -</programlisting> - <programlisting> - struct dmx_section_feed_s { - int is_filtering; /⋆ Set to non-zero when filtering in progress ⋆/ - struct dmx_demux_s⋆ parent; /⋆ Back-pointer ⋆/ - void⋆ priv; /⋆ Pointer to private data of the API client ⋆/ - int (⋆set) (struct dmx_section_feed_s⋆ feed, - __u16 pid, - size_t circular_buffer_size, - int descramble, - int check_crc); - int (⋆allocate_filter) (struct dmx_section_feed_s⋆ feed, - dmx_section_filter_t⋆⋆ filter); - int (⋆release_filter) (struct dmx_section_feed_s⋆ feed, - dmx_section_filter_t⋆ filter); - int (⋆start_filtering) (struct dmx_section_feed_s⋆ feed); - int (⋆stop_filtering) (struct dmx_section_feed_s⋆ feed); - }; - typedef struct dmx_section_feed_s dmx_section_feed_t; - - /⋆--------------------------------------------------------------------------⋆/ - /⋆ Callback functions ⋆/ - /⋆--------------------------------------------------------------------------⋆/ - - typedef int (⋆dmx_ts_cb) ( __u8 ⋆ buffer1, - size_t buffer1_length, - __u8 ⋆ buffer2, - size_t buffer2_length, - dmx_ts_feed_t⋆ source, - dmx_success_t success); - - typedef int (⋆dmx_section_cb) ( __u8 ⋆ buffer1, - size_t buffer1_len, - __u8 ⋆ buffer2, - size_t buffer2_len, - dmx_section_filter_t ⋆ source, - dmx_success_t success); - - typedef int (⋆dmx_pes_cb) ( __u8 ⋆ buffer1, - size_t buffer1_len, - __u8 ⋆ buffer2, - size_t buffer2_len, - dmx_pes_filter_t⋆ source, - dmx_success_t success); - - /⋆--------------------------------------------------------------------------⋆/ - /⋆ DVB Front-End ⋆/ - /⋆--------------------------------------------------------------------------⋆/ - - typedef enum { - DMX_OTHER_FE = 0, - DMX_SATELLITE_FE, - DMX_CABLE_FE, - DMX_TERRESTRIAL_FE, - DMX_LVDS_FE, - DMX_ASI_FE, /⋆ DVB-ASI interface ⋆/ - DMX_MEMORY_FE - } dmx_frontend_source_t; - - typedef struct { - /⋆ The following char⋆ fields point to NULL terminated strings ⋆/ - char⋆ id; /⋆ Unique front-end identifier ⋆/ - char⋆ vendor; /⋆ Name of the front-end vendor ⋆/ - char⋆ model; /⋆ Name of the front-end model ⋆/ - struct list_head connectivity_list; /⋆ List of front-ends that can - be connected to a particular - demux ⋆/ - void⋆ priv; /⋆ Pointer to private data of the API client ⋆/ - dmx_frontend_source_t source; - } dmx_frontend_t; - - /⋆--------------------------------------------------------------------------⋆/ - /⋆ MPEG-2 TS Demux ⋆/ - /⋆--------------------------------------------------------------------------⋆/ - - /⋆ - ⋆ Flags OR'ed in the capabilites field of struct dmx_demux_s. - ⋆/ - - #define DMX_TS_FILTERING 1 - #define DMX_PES_FILTERING 2 - #define DMX_SECTION_FILTERING 4 - #define DMX_MEMORY_BASED_FILTERING 8 /⋆ write() available ⋆/ - #define DMX_CRC_CHECKING 16 - #define DMX_TS_DESCRAMBLING 32 - #define DMX_SECTION_PAYLOAD_DESCRAMBLING 64 - #define DMX_MAC_ADDRESS_DESCRAMBLING 128 -</programlisting> - -</section> -<section id="demux_demux_t"> -<title>demux_demux_t</title> - <programlisting> - /⋆ - ⋆ DMX_FE_ENTRY(): Casts elements in the list of registered - ⋆ front-ends from the generic type struct list_head - ⋆ to the type ⋆ dmx_frontend_t - ⋆. - ⋆/ - - #define DMX_FE_ENTRY(list) list_entry(list, dmx_frontend_t, connectivity_list) - - struct dmx_demux_s { - /⋆ The following char⋆ fields point to NULL terminated strings ⋆/ - char⋆ id; /⋆ Unique demux identifier ⋆/ - char⋆ vendor; /⋆ Name of the demux vendor ⋆/ - char⋆ model; /⋆ Name of the demux model ⋆/ - __u32 capabilities; /⋆ Bitfield of capability flags ⋆/ - dmx_frontend_t⋆ frontend; /⋆ Front-end connected to the demux ⋆/ - struct list_head reg_list; /⋆ List of registered demuxes ⋆/ - void⋆ priv; /⋆ Pointer to private data of the API client ⋆/ - int users; /⋆ Number of users ⋆/ - int (⋆open) (struct dmx_demux_s⋆ demux); - int (⋆close) (struct dmx_demux_s⋆ demux); - int (⋆write) (struct dmx_demux_s⋆ demux, const char⋆ buf, size_t count); - int (⋆allocate_ts_feed) (struct dmx_demux_s⋆ demux, - dmx_ts_feed_t⋆⋆ feed, - dmx_ts_cb callback); - int (⋆release_ts_feed) (struct dmx_demux_s⋆ demux, - dmx_ts_feed_t⋆ feed); - int (⋆allocate_pes_feed) (struct dmx_demux_s⋆ demux, - dmx_pes_feed_t⋆⋆ feed, - dmx_pes_cb callback); - int (⋆release_pes_feed) (struct dmx_demux_s⋆ demux, - dmx_pes_feed_t⋆ feed); - int (⋆allocate_section_feed) (struct dmx_demux_s⋆ demux, - dmx_section_feed_t⋆⋆ feed, - dmx_section_cb callback); - int (⋆release_section_feed) (struct dmx_demux_s⋆ demux, - dmx_section_feed_t⋆ feed); - int (⋆descramble_mac_address) (struct dmx_demux_s⋆ demux, - __u8⋆ buffer1, - size_t buffer1_length, - __u8⋆ buffer2, - size_t buffer2_length, - __u16 pid); - int (⋆descramble_section_payload) (struct dmx_demux_s⋆ demux, - __u8⋆ buffer1, - size_t buffer1_length, - __u8⋆ buffer2, size_t buffer2_length, - __u16 pid); - int (⋆add_frontend) (struct dmx_demux_s⋆ demux, - dmx_frontend_t⋆ frontend); - int (⋆remove_frontend) (struct dmx_demux_s⋆ demux, - dmx_frontend_t⋆ frontend); - struct list_head⋆ (⋆get_frontends) (struct dmx_demux_s⋆ demux); - int (⋆connect_frontend) (struct dmx_demux_s⋆ demux, - dmx_frontend_t⋆ frontend); - int (⋆disconnect_frontend) (struct dmx_demux_s⋆ demux); - - - /⋆ added because js cannot keep track of these himself ⋆/ - int (⋆get_pes_pids) (struct dmx_demux_s⋆ demux, __u16 ⋆pids); - }; - typedef struct dmx_demux_s dmx_demux_t; -</programlisting> - -</section> -<section id="demux_directory"> -<title>Demux directory</title> - <programlisting> - /⋆ - ⋆ DMX_DIR_ENTRY(): Casts elements in the list of registered - ⋆ demuxes from the generic type struct list_head⋆ to the type dmx_demux_t - ⋆. - ⋆/ - - #define DMX_DIR_ENTRY(list) list_entry(list, dmx_demux_t, reg_list) - - int dmx_register_demux (dmx_demux_t⋆ demux); - int dmx_unregister_demux (dmx_demux_t⋆ demux); - struct list_head⋆ dmx_get_demuxes (void); -</programlisting> - </section></section> -<section id="demux_directory_api"> -<title>Demux Directory API</title> -<para>The demux directory is a Linux kernel-wide facility for registering and accessing the -MPEG-2 TS demuxes in the system. Run-time registering and unregistering of demux drivers -is possible using this API. -</para> -<para>All demux drivers in the directory implement the abstract interface dmx_demux_t. -</para> - -<section -role="subsection"><title>dmx_register_demux()</title> -<para>DESCRIPTION -</para> -<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>This function makes a demux driver interface available to the Linux kernel. It is - usually called by the init_module() function of the kernel module that contains - the demux driver. The caller of this function is responsible for allocating - dynamic or static memory for the demux structure and for initializing its fields - before calling this function. The memory allocated for the demux structure - must not be freed before calling dmx_unregister_demux(),</para> -</entry> - </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> -<para>SYNOPSIS -</para> -<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>int dmx_register_demux ( dmx_demux_t ⋆demux )</para> -</entry> - </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> -<para>PARAMETERS -</para> -<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><tbody><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>dmx_demux_t* - demux</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>Pointer to the demux structure.</para> -</entry> - </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> -<para>RETURNS -</para> -<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><tbody><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>0</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>The function was completed without errors.</para> -</entry> - </row><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>-EEXIST</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>A demux with the same value of the id field already stored - in the directory.</para> -</entry> - </row><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>-ENOSPC</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>No space left in the directory.</para> -</entry> - </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> - -</section><section -role="subsection"><title>dmx_unregister_demux()</title> -<para>DESCRIPTION -</para> -<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>This function is called to indicate that the given demux interface is no - longer available. The caller of this function is responsible for freeing the - memory of the demux structure, if it was dynamically allocated before calling - dmx_register_demux(). The cleanup_module() function of the kernel module - that contains the demux driver should call this function. Note that this function - fails if the demux is currently in use, i.e., release_demux() has not been called - for the interface.</para> -</entry> - </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> -<para>SYNOPSIS -</para> -<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>int dmx_unregister_demux ( dmx_demux_t ⋆demux )</para> -</entry> - </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> -<para>PARAMETERS -</para> -<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><tbody><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>dmx_demux_t* - demux</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>Pointer to the demux structure which is to be - unregistered.</para> -</entry> - </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> -<para>RETURNS -</para> -<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><tbody><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>0</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>The function was completed without errors.</para> -</entry> - </row><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>ENODEV</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>The specified demux is not registered in the demux - directory.</para> -</entry> - </row><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>EBUSY</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>The specified demux is currently in use.</para> -</entry> - </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> - -</section><section -role="subsection"><title>dmx_get_demuxes()</title> -<para>DESCRIPTION -</para> -<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>Provides the caller with the list of registered demux interfaces, using the - standard list structure defined in the include file linux/list.h. The include file - demux.h defines the macro DMX_DIR_ENTRY() for converting an element of - the generic type struct list_head* to the type dmx_demux_t*. The caller must - not free the memory of any of the elements obtained via this function call.</para> -</entry> - </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> -<para>SYNOPSIS -</para> -<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>struct list_head ⋆dmx_get_demuxes ()</para> -</entry> - </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> -<para>PARAMETERS -</para> -<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><tbody><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>none</para> -</entry> - </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> -<para>RETURNS -</para> -<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><tbody><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>struct list_head *</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>A list of demux interfaces, or NULL in the case of an - empty list.</para> -</entry> - </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> - </section></section> -<section id="demux_api"> -<title>Demux API</title> -<para>The demux API should be implemented for each demux in the system. It is used to select -the TS source of a demux and to manage the demux resources. When the demux -client allocates a resource via the demux API, it receives a pointer to the API of that -resource. -</para> -<para>Each demux receives its TS input from a DVB front-end or from memory, as set via the -demux API. In a system with more than one front-end, the API can be used to select one of -the DVB front-ends as a TS source for a demux, unless this is fixed in the HW platform. The -demux API only controls front-ends regarding their connections with demuxes; the APIs -used to set the other front-end parameters, such as tuning, are not defined in this -document. -</para> -<para>The functions that implement the abstract interface demux should be defined static or -module private and registered to the Demux Directory for external access. It is not necessary -to implement every function in the demux_t struct, however (for example, a demux interface -might support Section filtering, but not TS or PES filtering). The API client is expected to -check the value of any function pointer before calling the function: the value of NULL means -“function not available”. -</para> -<para>Whenever the functions of the demux API modify shared data, the possibilities of lost -update and race condition problems should be addressed, e.g. by protecting parts of code with -mutexes. This is especially important on multi-processor hosts. -</para> -<para>Note that functions called from a bottom half context must not sleep, at least in the 2.2.x -kernels. Even a simple memory allocation can result in a kernel thread being put to sleep if -swapping is needed. For example, the Linux kernel calls the functions of a network device -interface from a bottom half context. Thus, if a demux API function is called from network -device code, the function must not sleep. -</para> - - -<section id="kdapi_fopen"> -<title>open()</title> -<para>DESCRIPTION -</para> -<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>This function reserves the demux for use by the caller and, if necessary, - initializes the demux. When the demux is no longer needed, the function close() - should be called. It should be possible for multiple clients to access the demux - at the same time. Thus, the function implementation should increment the - demux usage count when open() is called and decrement it when close() is - called.</para> -</entry> - </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> -<para>SYNOPSIS -</para> -<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>int open ( demux_t⋆ demux );</para> -</entry> - </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> -<para>PARAMETERS -</para> -<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><tbody><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>demux_t* demux</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>Pointer to the demux API and instance data.</para> -</entry> - </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> -<para>RETURNS -</para> -<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><tbody><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>0</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>The function was completed without errors.</para> -</entry> - </row><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>-EUSERS</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>Maximum usage count reached.</para> -</entry> - </row><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>-EINVAL</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>Bad parameter.</para> -</entry> - </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> - -</section> -<section id="kdapi_fclose"> -<title>close()</title> -<para>DESCRIPTION -</para> -<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>This function reserves the demux for use by the caller and, if necessary, - initializes the demux. When the demux is no longer needed, the function close() - should be called. It should be possible for multiple clients to access the demux - at the same time. Thus, the function implementation should increment the - demux usage count when open() is called and decrement it when close() is - called.</para> -</entry> - </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> -<para>SYNOPSIS -</para> -<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>int close(demux_t⋆ demux);</para> -</entry> - </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> -<para>PARAMETERS -</para> -<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><tbody><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>demux_t* demux</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>Pointer to the demux API and instance data.</para> -</entry> - </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> -<para>RETURNS -</para> -<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><tbody><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>0</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>The function was completed without errors.</para> -</entry> - </row><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>-ENODEV</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>The demux was not in use.</para> -</entry> - </row><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>-EINVAL</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>Bad parameter.</para> -</entry> - </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> - -</section> -<section id="kdapi_fwrite"> -<title>write()</title> -<para>DESCRIPTION -</para> -<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>This function provides the demux driver with a memory buffer containing TS - packets. Instead of receiving TS packets from the DVB front-end, the demux - driver software will read packets from memory. Any clients of this demux - with active TS, PES or Section filters will receive filtered data via the Demux - callback API (see 0). The function returns when all the data in the buffer has - been consumed by the demux. Demux hardware typically cannot read TS from - memory. If this is the case, memory-based filtering has to be implemented - entirely in software.</para> -</entry> - </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> -<para>SYNOPSIS -</para> -<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>int write(demux_t⋆ demux, const char⋆ buf, size_t - count);</para> -</entry> - </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> -<para>PARAMETERS -</para> -<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><tbody><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>demux_t* demux</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>Pointer to the demux API and instance data.</para> -</entry> - </row><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>const char* buf</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>Pointer to the TS data in kernel-space memory.</para> -</entry> - </row><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>size_t length</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>Length of the TS data.</para> -</entry> - </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> -<para>RETURNS -</para> -<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><tbody><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>0</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>The function was completed without errors.</para> -</entry> - </row><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>-ENOSYS</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>The command is not implemented.</para> -</entry> - </row><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>-EINVAL</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>Bad parameter.</para> -</entry> - </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> - -</section><section -role="subsection"><title>allocate_ts_feed()</title> -<para>DESCRIPTION -</para> -<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>Allocates a new TS feed, which is used to filter the TS packets carrying a - certain PID. The TS feed normally corresponds to a hardware PID filter on the - demux chip.</para> -</entry> - </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> -<para>SYNOPSIS -</para> -<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>int allocate_ts_feed(dmx_demux_t⋆ demux, - dmx_ts_feed_t⋆⋆ feed, dmx_ts_cb callback);</para> -</entry> - </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> -<para>PARAMETERS -</para> -<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><tbody><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>demux_t* demux</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>Pointer to the demux API and instance data.</para> -</entry> - </row><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>dmx_ts_feed_t** - feed</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>Pointer to the TS feed API and instance data.</para> -</entry> - </row><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>dmx_ts_cb callback</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>Pointer to the callback function for passing received TS - packet</para> -</entry> - </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> -<para>RETURNS -</para> -<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><tbody><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>0</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>The function was completed without errors.</para> -</entry> - </row><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>-EBUSY</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>No more TS feeds available.</para> -</entry> - </row><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>-ENOSYS</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>The command is not implemented.</para> -</entry> - </row><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>-EINVAL</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>Bad parameter.</para> -</entry> - </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> - -</section><section -role="subsection"><title>release_ts_feed()</title> -<para>DESCRIPTION -</para> -<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>Releases the resources allocated with allocate_ts_feed(). Any filtering in - progress on the TS feed should be stopped before calling this function.</para> -</entry> - </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> -<para>SYNOPSIS -</para> -<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>int release_ts_feed(dmx_demux_t⋆ demux, - dmx_ts_feed_t⋆ feed);</para> -</entry> - </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> -<para>PARAMETERS -</para> -<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><tbody><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>demux_t* demux</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>Pointer to the demux API and instance data.</para> -</entry> - </row><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>dmx_ts_feed_t* feed</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>Pointer to the TS feed API and instance data.</para> -</entry> - </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> -<para>RETURNS -</para> -<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><tbody><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>0</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>The function was completed without errors.</para> -</entry> - </row><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>-EINVAL</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>Bad parameter.</para> -</entry> - </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> - -</section><section -role="subsection"><title>allocate_section_feed()</title> -<para>DESCRIPTION -</para> -<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>Allocates a new section feed, i.e. a demux resource for filtering and receiving - sections. On platforms with hardware support for section filtering, a section - feed is directly mapped to the demux HW. On other platforms, TS packets are - first PID filtered in hardware and a hardware section filter then emulated in - software. The caller obtains an API pointer of type dmx_section_feed_t as an - out parameter. Using this API the caller can set filtering parameters and start - receiving sections.</para> -</entry> - </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> -<para>SYNOPSIS -</para> -<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>int allocate_section_feed(dmx_demux_t⋆ demux, - dmx_section_feed_t ⋆⋆feed, dmx_section_cb callback);</para> -</entry> - </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> -<para>PARAMETERS -</para> -<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><tbody><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>demux_t *demux</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>Pointer to the demux API and instance data.</para> -</entry> - </row><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>dmx_section_feed_t - **feed</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>Pointer to the section feed API and instance data.</para> -</entry> - </row><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>dmx_section_cb - callback</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>Pointer to the callback function for passing received - sections.</para> -</entry> - </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> -<para>RETURNS -</para> -<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><tbody><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>0</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>The function was completed without errors.</para> -</entry> - </row><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>-EBUSY</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>No more section feeds available.</para> -</entry> - </row><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>-ENOSYS</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>The command is not implemented.</para> -</entry> - </row><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>-EINVAL</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>Bad parameter.</para> -</entry> - </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> - -</section><section -role="subsection"><title>release_section_feed()</title> -<para>DESCRIPTION -</para> -<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>Releases the resources allocated with allocate_section_feed(), including - allocated filters. Any filtering in progress on the section feed should be stopped - before calling this function.</para> -</entry> - </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> -<para>SYNOPSIS -</para> -<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>int release_section_feed(dmx_demux_t⋆ demux, - dmx_section_feed_t ⋆feed);</para> -</entry> - </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> -<para>PARAMETERS -</para> -<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><tbody><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>demux_t *demux</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>Pointer to the demux API and instance data.</para> -</entry> - </row><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>dmx_section_feed_t - *feed</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>Pointer to the section feed API and instance data.</para> -</entry> - </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> -<para>RETURNS -</para> -<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><tbody><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>0</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>The function was completed without errors.</para> -</entry> - </row><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>-EINVAL</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>Bad parameter.</para> -</entry> - </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> - -</section><section -role="subsection"><title>descramble_mac_address()</title> -<para>DESCRIPTION -</para> -<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>This function runs a descrambling algorithm on the destination MAC - address field of a DVB Datagram Section, replacing the original address - with its un-encrypted version. Otherwise, the description on the function - descramble_section_payload() applies also to this function.</para> -</entry> - </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> -<para>SYNOPSIS -</para> -<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>int descramble_mac_address(dmx_demux_t⋆ demux, __u8 - ⋆buffer1, size_t buffer1_length, __u8 ⋆buffer2, - size_t buffer2_length, __u16 pid);</para> -</entry> - </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> -<para>PARAMETERS -</para> -<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><tbody><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>dmx_demux_t - *demux</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>Pointer to the demux API and instance data.</para> -</entry> - </row><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>__u8 *buffer1</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>Pointer to the first byte of the section.</para> -</entry> - </row><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>size_t buffer1_length</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>Length of the section data, including headers and CRC, - in buffer1.</para> -</entry> - </row><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>__u8* buffer2</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>Pointer to the tail of the section data, or NULL. The - pointer has a non-NULL value if the section wraps past - the end of a circular buffer.</para> -</entry> - </row><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>size_t buffer2_length</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>Length of the section data, including headers and CRC, - in buffer2.</para> -</entry> - </row><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>__u16 pid</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>The PID on which the section was received. Useful - for obtaining the descrambling key, e.g. from a DVB - Common Access facility.</para> -</entry> - </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> -<para>RETURNS -</para> -<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><tbody><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>0</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>The function was completed without errors.</para> -</entry> - </row><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>-ENOSYS</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>No descrambling facility available.</para> -</entry> - </row><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>-EINVAL</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>Bad parameter.</para> -</entry> - </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> - -</section><section -role="subsection"><title>descramble_section_payload()</title> -<para>DESCRIPTION -</para> -<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>This function runs a descrambling algorithm on the payload of a DVB - Datagram Section, replacing the original payload with its un-encrypted - version. The function will be called from the demux API implementation; - the API client need not call this function directly. Section-level scrambling - algorithms are currently standardized only for DVB-RCC (return channel - over 2-directional cable TV network) systems. For all other DVB networks, - encryption schemes are likely to be proprietary to each data broadcaster. Thus, - it is expected that this function pointer will have the value of NULL (i.e., - function not available) in most demux API implementations. Nevertheless, it - should be possible to use the function pointer as a hook for dynamically adding - a “plug-in” descrambling facility to a demux driver.</para> -</entry> - </row><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>While this function is not needed with hardware-based section descrambling, - the descramble_section_payload function pointer can be used to override the - default hardware-based descrambling algorithm: if the function pointer has a - non-NULL value, the corresponding function should be used instead of any - descrambling hardware.</para> -</entry> - </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> -<para>SYNOPSIS -</para> -<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>int descramble_section_payload(dmx_demux_t⋆ demux, - __u8 ⋆buffer1, size_t buffer1_length, __u8 ⋆buffer2, - size_t buffer2_length, __u16 pid);</para> -</entry> - </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> -<para>PARAMETERS -</para> -<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><tbody><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>dmx_demux_t - *demux</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>Pointer to the demux API and instance data.</para> -</entry> - </row><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>__u8 *buffer1</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>Pointer to the first byte of the section.</para> -</entry> - </row><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>size_t buffer1_length</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>Length of the section data, including headers and CRC, - in buffer1.</para> -</entry> - </row><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>__u8 *buffer2</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>Pointer to the tail of the section data, or NULL. The - pointer has a non-NULL value if the section wraps past - the end of a circular buffer.</para> -</entry> - </row><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>size_t buffer2_length</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>Length of the section data, including headers and CRC, - in buffer2.</para> -</entry> - </row><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>__u16 pid</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>The PID on which the section was received. Useful - for obtaining the descrambling key, e.g. from a DVB - Common Access facility.</para> -</entry> - </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> -<para>RETURNS -</para> -<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><tbody><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>0</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>The function was completed without errors.</para> -</entry> - </row><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>-ENOSYS</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>No descrambling facility available.</para> -</entry> - </row><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>-EINVAL</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>Bad parameter.</para> -</entry> - </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> - -</section><section -role="subsection"><title>add_frontend()</title> -<para>DESCRIPTION -</para> -<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>Registers a connectivity between a demux and a front-end, i.e., indicates that - the demux can be connected via a call to connect_frontend() to use the given - front-end as a TS source. The client of this function has to allocate dynamic or - static memory for the frontend structure and initialize its fields before calling - this function. This function is normally called during the driver initialization. - The caller must not free the memory of the frontend struct before successfully - calling remove_frontend().</para> -</entry> - </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> -<para>SYNOPSIS -</para> -<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>int add_frontend(dmx_demux_t ⋆demux, dmx_frontend_t - ⋆frontend);</para> -</entry> - </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> -<para>PARAMETERS -</para> -<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><tbody><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>dmx_demux_t* - demux</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>Pointer to the demux API and instance data.</para> -</entry> - </row><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>dmx_frontend_t* - frontend</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>Pointer to the front-end instance data.</para> -</entry> - </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> -<para>RETURNS -</para> -<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><tbody><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>0</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>The function was completed without errors.</para> -</entry> - </row><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>-EEXIST</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>A front-end with the same value of the id field already - registered.</para> -</entry> - </row><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>-EINUSE</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>The demux is in use.</para> -</entry> - </row><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>-ENOMEM</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>No more front-ends can be added.</para> -</entry> - </row><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>-EINVAL</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>Bad parameter.</para> -</entry> - </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> - -</section><section -role="subsection"><title>remove_frontend()</title> -<para>DESCRIPTION -</para> -<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>Indicates that the given front-end, registered by a call to add_frontend(), can - no longer be connected as a TS source by this demux. The function should be - called when a front-end driver or a demux driver is removed from the system. - If the front-end is in use, the function fails with the return value of -EBUSY. - After successfully calling this function, the caller can free the memory of - the frontend struct if it was dynamically allocated before the add_frontend() - operation.</para> -</entry> - </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> -<para>SYNOPSIS -</para> -<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>int remove_frontend(dmx_demux_t⋆ demux, - dmx_frontend_t⋆ frontend);</para> -</entry> - </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> -<para>PARAMETERS -</para> -<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><tbody><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>dmx_demux_t* - demux</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>Pointer to the demux API and instance data.</para> -</entry> - </row><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>dmx_frontend_t* - frontend</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>Pointer to the front-end instance data.</para> -</entry> - </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> -<para>RETURNS -</para> -<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><tbody><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>0</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>The function was completed without errors.</para> -</entry> - </row><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>-EINVAL</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>Bad parameter.</para> -</entry> - </row><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>-EBUSY</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>The front-end is in use, i.e. a call to connect_frontend() - has not been followed by a call to disconnect_frontend().</para> -</entry> - </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> - -</section><section -role="subsection"><title>get_frontends()</title> -<para>DESCRIPTION -</para> -<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>Provides the APIs of the front-ends that have been registered for this demux. - Any of the front-ends obtained with this call can be used as a parameter for - connect_frontend().</para> -</entry> - </row><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>The include file demux.h contains the macro DMX_FE_ENTRY() for - converting an element of the generic type struct list_head* to the type - dmx_frontend_t*. The caller must not free the memory of any of the elements - obtained via this function call.</para> -</entry> - </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> -<para>SYNOPSIS -</para> -<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>struct list_head⋆ get_frontends(dmx_demux_t⋆ demux);</para> -</entry> - </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> -<para>PARAMETERS -</para> -<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><tbody><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>dmx_demux_t* - demux</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>Pointer to the demux API and instance data.</para> -</entry> - </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> -<para>RETURNS -</para> -<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><tbody><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>dmx_demux_t*</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>A list of front-end interfaces, or NULL in the case of an - empty list.</para> -</entry> - </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> - -</section><section -role="subsection"><title>connect_frontend()</title> -<para>DESCRIPTION -</para> -<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>Connects the TS output of the front-end to the input of the demux. A demux - can only be connected to a front-end registered to the demux with the function - add_frontend().</para> -</entry> - </row><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>It may or may not be possible to connect multiple demuxes to the same - front-end, depending on the capabilities of the HW platform. When not used, - the front-end should be released by calling disconnect_frontend().</para> -</entry> - </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> -<para>SYNOPSIS -</para> -<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>int connect_frontend(dmx_demux_t⋆ demux, - dmx_frontend_t⋆ frontend);</para> -</entry> - </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> -<para>PARAMETERS -</para> -<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><tbody><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>dmx_demux_t* - demux</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>Pointer to the demux API and instance data.</para> -</entry> - </row><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>dmx_frontend_t* - frontend</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>Pointer to the front-end instance data.</para> -</entry> - </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> -<para>RETURNS -</para> -<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><tbody><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>0</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>The function was completed without errors.</para> -</entry> - </row><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>-EINVAL</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>Bad parameter.</para> -</entry> - </row><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>-EBUSY</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>The front-end is in use.</para> -</entry> - </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> - -</section><section -role="subsection"><title>disconnect_frontend()</title> -<para>DESCRIPTION -</para> -<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>Disconnects the demux and a front-end previously connected by a - connect_frontend() call.</para> -</entry> - </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> -<para>SYNOPSIS -</para> -<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>int disconnect_frontend(dmx_demux_t⋆ demux);</para> -</entry> - </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> -<para>PARAMETERS -</para> -<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><tbody><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>dmx_demux_t* - demux</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>Pointer to the demux API and instance data.</para> -</entry> - </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> -<para>RETURNS -</para> -<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><tbody><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>0</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>The function was completed without errors.</para> -</entry> - </row><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>-EINVAL</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>Bad parameter.</para> -</entry> - </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> - </section></section> -<section id="demux_callback_api"> -<title>Demux Callback API</title> -<para>This kernel-space API comprises the callback functions that deliver filtered data to the -demux client. Unlike the other APIs, these API functions are provided by the client and called -from the demux code. -</para> -<para>The function pointers of this abstract interface are not packed into a structure as in the -other demux APIs, because the callback functions are registered and used independent -of each other. As an example, it is possible for the API client to provide several -callback functions for receiving TS packets and no callbacks for PES packets or -sections. -</para> -<para>The functions that implement the callback API need not be re-entrant: when a demux -driver calls one of these functions, the driver is not allowed to call the function again before -the original call returns. If a callback is triggered by a hardware interrupt, it is recommended -to use the Linux “bottom half” mechanism or start a tasklet instead of making the callback -function call directly from a hardware interrupt. -</para> - -<section -role="subsection"><title>dmx_ts_cb()</title> -<para>DESCRIPTION -</para> -<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>This function, provided by the client of the demux API, is called from the - demux code. The function is only called when filtering on this TS feed has - been enabled using the start_filtering() function.</para> -</entry> - </row><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>Any TS packets that match the filter settings are copied to a circular buffer. The - filtered TS packets are delivered to the client using this callback function. The - size of the circular buffer is controlled by the circular_buffer_size parameter - of the set() function in the TS Feed API. It is expected that the buffer1 and - buffer2 callback parameters point to addresses within the circular buffer, but - other implementations are also possible. Note that the called party should not - try to free the memory the buffer1 and buffer2 parameters point to.</para> -</entry> - </row><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>When this function is called, the buffer1 parameter typically points to the - start of the first undelivered TS packet within a circular buffer. The buffer2 - buffer parameter is normally NULL, except when the received TS packets have - crossed the last address of the circular buffer and ”wrapped” to the beginning - of the buffer. In the latter case the buffer1 parameter would contain an address - within the circular buffer, while the buffer2 parameter would contain the first - address of the circular buffer.</para> -</entry> - </row><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>The number of bytes delivered with this function (i.e. buffer1_length + - buffer2_length) is usually equal to the value of callback_length parameter - given in the set() function, with one exception: if a timeout occurs before - receiving callback_length bytes of TS data, any undelivered packets are - immediately delivered to the client by calling this function. The timeout - duration is controlled by the set() function in the TS Feed API.</para> -</entry> - </row><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>If a TS packet is received with errors that could not be fixed by the TS-level - forward error correction (FEC), the Transport_error_indicator flag of the TS - packet header should be set. The TS packet should not be discarded, as - the error can possibly be corrected by a higher layer protocol. If the called - party is slow in processing the callback, it is possible that the circular buffer - eventually fills up. If this happens, the demux driver should discard any TS - packets received while the buffer is full. The error should be indicated to the - client on the next callback by setting the success parameter to the value of - DMX_OVERRUN_ERROR.</para> -</entry> - </row><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>The type of data returned to the callback can be selected by the new - function int (*set_type) (struct dmx_ts_feed_s* feed, int type, dmx_ts_pes_t - pes_type) which is part of the dmx_ts_feed_s struct (also cf. to the - include file ost/demux.h) The type parameter decides if the raw TS packet - (TS_PACKET) or just the payload (TS_PACKET—TS_PAYLOAD_ONLY) - should be returned. If additionally the TS_DECODER bit is set the stream - will also be sent to the hardware MPEG decoder. In this case, the second - flag decides as what kind of data the stream should be interpreted. The - possible choices are one of DMX_TS_PES_AUDIO, DMX_TS_PES_VIDEO, - DMX_TS_PES_TELETEXT, DMX_TS_PES_SUBTITLE, - DMX_TS_PES_PCR, or DMX_TS_PES_OTHER.</para> -</entry> - </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> -<para>SYNOPSIS -</para> -<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>int dmx_ts_cb(__u8⋆ buffer1, size_t buffer1_length, - __u8⋆ buffer2, size_t buffer2_length, dmx_ts_feed_t⋆ - source, dmx_success_t success);</para> -</entry> - </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> -<para>PARAMETERS -</para> -<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><tbody><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>__u8* buffer1</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>Pointer to the start of the filtered TS packets.</para> -</entry> - </row><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>size_t buffer1_length</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>Length of the TS data in buffer1.</para> -</entry> - </row><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>__u8* buffer2</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>Pointer to the tail of the filtered TS packets, or NULL.</para> -</entry> - </row><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>size_t buffer2_length</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>Length of the TS data in buffer2.</para> -</entry> - </row><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>dmx_ts_feed_t* - source</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>Indicates which TS feed is the source of the callback.</para> -</entry> - </row><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>dmx_success_t - success</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>Indicates if there was an error in TS reception.</para> -</entry> - </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> -<para>RETURNS -</para> -<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><tbody><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>0</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>Continue filtering.</para> -</entry> - </row><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>-1</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>Stop filtering - has the same effect as a call to - stop_filtering() on the TS Feed API.</para> -</entry> - </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> - -</section><section -role="subsection"><title>dmx_section_cb()</title> -<para>DESCRIPTION -</para> -<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>This function, provided by the client of the demux API, is called from the - demux code. The function is only called when filtering of sections has been - enabled using the function start_filtering() of the section feed API. When the - demux driver has received a complete section that matches at least one section - filter, the client is notified via this callback function. Normally this function is - called for each received section; however, it is also possible to deliver multiple - sections with one callback, for example when the system load is high. If an - error occurs while receiving a section, this function should be called with - the corresponding error type set in the success field, whether or not there is - data to deliver. The Section Feed implementation should maintain a circular - buffer for received sections. However, this is not necessary if the Section Feed - API is implemented as a client of the TS Feed API, because the TS Feed - implementation then buffers the received data. The size of the circular buffer - can be configured using the set() function in the Section Feed API. If there - is no room in the circular buffer when a new section is received, the section - must be discarded. If this happens, the value of the success parameter should - be DMX_OVERRUN_ERROR on the next callback.</para> -</entry> - </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> -<para>SYNOPSIS -</para> -<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>int dmx_section_cb(__u8⋆ buffer1, size_t - buffer1_length, __u8⋆ buffer2, size_t - buffer2_length, dmx_section_filter_t⋆ source, - dmx_success_t success);</para> -</entry> - </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> -<para>PARAMETERS -</para> -<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><tbody><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>__u8* buffer1</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>Pointer to the start of the filtered section, e.g. within the - circular buffer of the demux driver.</para> -</entry> - </row><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>size_t buffer1_length</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>Length of the filtered section data in buffer1, including - headers and CRC.</para> -</entry> - </row><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>__u8* buffer2</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>Pointer to the tail of the filtered section data, or NULL. - Useful to handle the wrapping of a circular buffer.</para> -</entry> - </row><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>size_t buffer2_length</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>Length of the filtered section data in buffer2, including - headers and CRC.</para> -</entry> - </row><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>dmx_section_filter_t* - filter</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>Indicates the filter that triggered the callback.</para> -</entry> - </row><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>dmx_success_t - success</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>Indicates if there was an error in section reception.</para> -</entry> - </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> -<para>RETURNS -</para> -<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><tbody><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>0</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>Continue filtering.</para> -</entry> - </row><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>-1</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>Stop filtering - has the same effect as a call to - stop_filtering() on the Section Feed API.</para> -</entry> - </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> - </section></section> -<section id="ts_feed_api"> -<title>TS Feed API</title> -<para>A TS feed is typically mapped to a hardware PID filter on the demux chip. -Using this API, the client can set the filtering properties to start/stop filtering TS -packets on a particular TS feed. The API is defined as an abstract interface of the type -dmx_ts_feed_t. -</para> -<para>The functions that implement the interface should be defined static or module private. The -client can get the handle of a TS feed API by calling the function allocate_ts_feed() in the -demux API. -</para> - -<section -role="subsection"><title>set()</title> -<para>DESCRIPTION -</para> -<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>This function sets the parameters of a TS feed. Any filtering in progress on the - TS feed must be stopped before calling this function.</para> -</entry> - </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> -<para>SYNOPSIS -</para> -<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>int set ( dmx_ts_feed_t⋆ feed, __u16 pid, size_t - callback_length, size_t circular_buffer_size, int - descramble, struct timespec timeout);</para> -</entry> - </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> -<para>PARAMETERS -</para> -<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><tbody><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>dmx_ts_feed_t* feed</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>Pointer to the TS feed API and instance data.</para> -</entry> - </row><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>__u16 pid</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>PID value to filter. Only the TS packets carrying the - specified PID will be passed to the API client.</para> -</entry> - </row><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>size_t - callback_length</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>Number of bytes to deliver with each call to the - dmx_ts_cb() callback function. The value of this - parameter should be a multiple of 188.</para> -</entry> - </row><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>size_t - circular_buffer_size</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>Size of the circular buffer for the filtered TS packets.</para> -</entry> - </row><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>int descramble</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>If non-zero, descramble the filtered TS packets.</para> -</entry> - </row><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>struct timespec - timeout</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>Maximum time to wait before delivering received TS - packets to the client.</para> -</entry> - </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> -<para>RETURNS -</para> -<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><tbody><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>0</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>The function was completed without errors.</para> -</entry> - </row><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>-ENOMEM</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>Not enough memory for the requested buffer size.</para> -</entry> - </row><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>-ENOSYS</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>No descrambling facility available for TS.</para> -</entry> - </row><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>-EINVAL</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>Bad parameter.</para> -</entry> - </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> - -</section><section -role="subsection"><title>start_filtering()</title> -<para>DESCRIPTION -</para> -<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>Starts filtering TS packets on this TS feed, according to its settings. The PID - value to filter can be set by the API client. All matching TS packets are - delivered asynchronously to the client, using the callback function registered - with allocate_ts_feed().</para> -</entry> - </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> -<para>SYNOPSIS -</para> -<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>int start_filtering(dmx_ts_feed_t⋆ feed);</para> -</entry> - </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> -<para>PARAMETERS -</para> -<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><tbody><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>dmx_ts_feed_t* feed</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>Pointer to the TS feed API and instance data.</para> -</entry> - </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> -<para>RETURNS -</para> -<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><tbody><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>0</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>The function was completed without errors.</para> -</entry> - </row><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>-EINVAL</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>Bad parameter.</para> -</entry> - </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> - -</section><section -role="subsection"><title>stop_filtering()</title> -<para>DESCRIPTION -</para> -<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>Stops filtering TS packets on this TS feed.</para> -</entry> - </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> -<para>SYNOPSIS -</para> -<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>int stop_filtering(dmx_ts_feed_t⋆ feed);</para> -</entry> - </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> -<para>PARAMETERS -</para> -<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><tbody><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>dmx_ts_feed_t* feed</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>Pointer to the TS feed API and instance data.</para> -</entry> - </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> -<para>RETURNS -</para> -<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><tbody><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>0</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>The function was completed without errors.</para> -</entry> - </row><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>-EINVAL</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>Bad parameter.</para> -</entry> - </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> - </section></section> -<section id="section_feed_api"> -<title>Section Feed API</title> -<para>A section feed is a resource consisting of a PID filter and a set of section filters. Using this -API, the client can set the properties of a section feed and to start/stop filtering. The API is -defined as an abstract interface of the type dmx_section_feed_t. The functions that implement -the interface should be defined static or module private. The client can get the handle of -a section feed API by calling the function allocate_section_feed() in the demux -API. -</para> -<para>On demux platforms that provide section filtering in hardware, the Section Feed API -implementation provides a software wrapper for the demux hardware. Other platforms may -support only PID filtering in hardware, requiring that TS packets are converted to sections in -software. In the latter case the Section Feed API implementation can be a client of the TS -Feed API. -</para> - -</section> -<section id="kdapi_set"> -<title>set()</title> -<para>DESCRIPTION -</para> -<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>This function sets the parameters of a section feed. Any filtering in progress on - the section feed must be stopped before calling this function. If descrambling - is enabled, the payload_scrambling_control and address_scrambling_control - fields of received DVB datagram sections should be observed. If either one is - non-zero, the section should be descrambled either in hardware or using the - functions descramble_mac_address() and descramble_section_payload() of the - demux API. Note that according to the MPEG-2 Systems specification, only - the payloads of private sections can be scrambled while the rest of the section - data must be sent in the clear.</para> -</entry> - </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> -<para>SYNOPSIS -</para> -<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>int set(dmx_section_feed_t⋆ feed, __u16 pid, size_t - circular_buffer_size, int descramble, int - check_crc);</para> -</entry> - </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> -<para>PARAMETERS -</para> -<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><tbody><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>dmx_section_feed_t* - feed</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>Pointer to the section feed API and instance data.</para> -</entry> - </row><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>__u16 pid</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>PID value to filter; only the TS packets carrying the - specified PID will be accepted.</para> -</entry> - </row><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>size_t - circular_buffer_size</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>Size of the circular buffer for filtered sections.</para> -</entry> - </row><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>int descramble</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>If non-zero, descramble any sections that are scrambled.</para> -</entry> - </row><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>int check_crc</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>If non-zero, check the CRC values of filtered sections.</para> -</entry> - </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> -<para>RETURNS -</para> -<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><tbody><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>0</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>The function was completed without errors.</para> -</entry> - </row><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>-ENOMEM</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>Not enough memory for the requested buffer size.</para> -</entry> - </row><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>-ENOSYS</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>No descrambling facility available for sections.</para> -</entry> - </row><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>-EINVAL</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>Bad parameters.</para> -</entry> - </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> - -</section><section -role="subsection"><title>allocate_filter()</title> -<para>DESCRIPTION -</para> -<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>This function is used to allocate a section filter on the demux. It should only be - called when no filtering is in progress on this section feed. If a filter cannot be - allocated, the function fails with -ENOSPC. See in section ?? for the format of - the section filter.</para> -</entry> - </row><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>The bitfields filter_mask and filter_value should only be modified when no - filtering is in progress on this section feed. filter_mask controls which bits of - filter_value are compared with the section headers/payload. On a binary value - of 1 in filter_mask, the corresponding bits are compared. The filter only accepts - sections that are equal to filter_value in all the tested bit positions. Any changes - to the values of filter_mask and filter_value are guaranteed to take effect only - when the start_filtering() function is called next time. The parent pointer in - the struct is initialized by the API implementation to the value of the feed - parameter. The priv pointer is not used by the API implementation, and can - thus be freely utilized by the caller of this function. Any data pointed to by the - priv pointer is available to the recipient of the dmx_section_cb() function call.</para> -</entry> - </row><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>While the maximum section filter length (DMX_MAX_FILTER_SIZE) is - currently set at 16 bytes, hardware filters of that size are not available on all - platforms. Therefore, section filtering will often take place first in hardware, - followed by filtering in software for the header bytes that were not covered - by a hardware filter. The filter_mask field can be checked to determine how - many bytes of the section filter are actually used, and if the hardware filter will - suffice. Additionally, software-only section filters can optionally be allocated - to clients when all hardware section filters are in use. Note that on most demux - hardware it is not possible to filter on the section_length field of the section - header – thus this field is ignored, even though it is included in filter_value and - filter_mask fields.</para> -</entry> - </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> -<para>SYNOPSIS -</para> -<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>int allocate_filter(dmx_section_feed_t⋆ feed, - dmx_section_filter_t⋆⋆ filter);</para> -</entry> - </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> -<para>PARAMETERS -</para> -<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><tbody><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>dmx_section_feed_t* - feed</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>Pointer to the section feed API and instance data.</para> -</entry> - </row><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>dmx_section_filter_t** - filter</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>Pointer to the allocated filter.</para> -</entry> - </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> -<para>RETURNS -</para> -<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><tbody><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>0</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>The function was completed without errors.</para> -</entry> - </row><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>-ENOSPC</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>No filters of given type and length available.</para> -</entry> - </row><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>-EINVAL</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>Bad parameters.</para> -</entry> - </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> - -</section><section -role="subsection"><title>release_filter()</title> -<para>DESCRIPTION -</para> -<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>This function releases all the resources of a previously allocated section filter. - The function should not be called while filtering is in progress on this section - feed. After calling this function, the caller should not try to dereference the - filter pointer.</para> -</entry> - </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> -<para>SYNOPSIS -</para> -<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>int release_filter ( dmx_section_feed_t⋆ feed, - dmx_section_filter_t⋆ filter);</para> -</entry> - </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> -<para>PARAMETERS -</para> -<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><tbody><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>dmx_section_feed_t* - feed</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>Pointer to the section feed API and instance data.</para> -</entry> - </row><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>dmx_section_filter_t* - filter</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>I/O Pointer to the instance data of a section filter.</para> -</entry> - </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> -<para>RETURNS -</para> -<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><tbody><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>0</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>The function was completed without errors.</para> -</entry> - </row><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>-ENODEV</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>No such filter allocated.</para> -</entry> - </row><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>-EINVAL</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>Bad parameter.</para> -</entry> - </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> - -</section><section -role="subsection"><title>start_filtering()</title> -<para>DESCRIPTION -</para> -<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>Starts filtering sections on this section feed, according to its settings. Sections - are first filtered based on their PID and then matched with the section - filters allocated for this feed. If the section matches the PID filter and - at least one section filter, it is delivered to the API client. The section - is delivered asynchronously using the callback function registered with - allocate_section_feed().</para> -</entry> - </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> -<para>SYNOPSIS -</para> -<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>int start_filtering ( dmx_section_feed_t⋆ feed );</para> -</entry> - </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> -<para>PARAMETERS -</para> -<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><tbody><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>dmx_section_feed_t* - feed</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>Pointer to the section feed API and instance data.</para> -</entry> - </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> -<para>RETURNS -</para> -<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><tbody><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>0</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>The function was completed without errors.</para> -</entry> - </row><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>-EINVAL</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>Bad parameter.</para> -</entry> - </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> - -</section><section -role="subsection"><title>stop_filtering()</title> -<para>DESCRIPTION -</para> -<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>Stops filtering sections on this section feed. Note that any changes to the - filtering parameters (filter_value, filter_mask, etc.) should only be made when - filtering is stopped.</para> -</entry> - </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> -<para>SYNOPSIS -</para> -<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>int stop_filtering ( dmx_section_feed_t⋆ feed );</para> -</entry> - </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> -<para>PARAMETERS -</para> -<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><tbody><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>dmx_section_feed_t* - feed</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>Pointer to the section feed API and instance data.</para> -</entry> - </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> -<para>RETURNS -</para> -<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><tbody><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>0</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>The function was completed without errors.</para> -</entry> - </row><row><entry - align="char"> -<para>-EINVAL</para> -</entry><entry - align="char"> -<para>Bad parameter.</para> -</entry> - </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> - -</section> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/biblio.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/biblio.xml index fdee6b3f3eca..9beb30f0071b 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/biblio.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/biblio.xml @@ -177,6 +177,24 @@ Signal - NTSC for Studio Applications"</title> 1125-Line High-Definition Production"</title> </biblioentry> + <biblioentry id="smpte431"> + <abbrev>SMPTE RP 431-2</abbrev> + <authorgroup> + <corpauthor>Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers +(<ulink url="http://www.smpte.org">http://www.smpte.org</ulink>)</corpauthor> + </authorgroup> + <title>SMPTE RP 431-2:2011 "D-Cinema Quality - Reference Projector and Environment"</title> + </biblioentry> + + <biblioentry id="smpte2084"> + <abbrev>SMPTE ST 2084</abbrev> + <authorgroup> + <corpauthor>Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers +(<ulink url="http://www.smpte.org">http://www.smpte.org</ulink>)</corpauthor> + </authorgroup> + <title>SMPTE ST 2084:2014 "High Dynamic Range Electro-Optical Transfer Function of Master Reference Displays"</title> + </biblioentry> + <biblioentry id="srgb"> <abbrev>sRGB</abbrev> <authorgroup> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/compat.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/compat.xml index a0aef85d33c1..5701a08ed792 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/compat.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/compat.xml @@ -2591,6 +2591,26 @@ and &v4l2-mbus-framefmt;. </orderedlist> </section> + <section> + <title>V4L2 in Linux 4.4</title> + <orderedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Renamed <constant>V4L2_TUNER_ADC</constant> to +<constant>V4L2_TUNER_SDR</constant>. The use of +<constant>V4L2_TUNER_ADC</constant> is deprecated now. + </para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para>Added <constant>V4L2_CID_RF_TUNER_RF_GAIN</constant> +RF Tuner control.</para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para>Added transmitter support for Software Defined Radio (SDR) +Interface.</para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + </section> + <section id="other"> <title>Relation of V4L2 to other Linux multimedia APIs</title> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/controls.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/controls.xml index 33aece541880..f13a429093f1 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/controls.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/controls.xml @@ -5418,6 +5418,18 @@ set. Unit is in Hz. The range and step are driver-specific.</entry> <entry spanname="descr">Enables/disables IF automatic gain control (AGC)</entry> </row> <row> + <entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_RF_TUNER_RF_GAIN</constant> </entry> + <entry>integer</entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry spanname="descr">The RF amplifier is the very first +amplifier on the receiver signal path, just right after the antenna input. +The difference between the LNA gain and the RF gain in this document is that +the LNA gain is integrated in the tuner chip while the RF gain is a separate +chip. There may be both RF and LNA gain controls in the same device. +The range and step are driver-specific.</entry> + </row> + <row> <entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_RF_TUNER_LNA_GAIN</constant> </entry> <entry>integer</entry> </row> @@ -5425,6 +5437,8 @@ set. Unit is in Hz. The range and step are driver-specific.</entry> <entry spanname="descr">LNA (low noise amplifier) gain is first gain stage on the RF tuner signal path. It is located very close to tuner antenna input. Used when <constant>V4L2_CID_RF_TUNER_LNA_GAIN_AUTO</constant> is not set. +See <constant>V4L2_CID_RF_TUNER_RF_GAIN</constant> to understand how RF gain +and LNA gain differs from the each others. The range and step are driver-specific.</entry> </row> <row> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/dev-sdr.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/dev-sdr.xml index f8903568a243..a659771f7b7c 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/dev-sdr.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/dev-sdr.xml @@ -28,6 +28,16 @@ Devices supporting the SDR receiver interface set the <structfield>capabilities</structfield> field of &v4l2-capability; returned by the &VIDIOC-QUERYCAP; ioctl. That flag means the device has an Analog to Digital Converter (ADC), which is a mandatory element for the SDR receiver. + </para> + <para> +Devices supporting the SDR transmitter interface set the +<constant>V4L2_CAP_SDR_OUTPUT</constant> and +<constant>V4L2_CAP_MODULATOR</constant> flag in the +<structfield>capabilities</structfield> field of &v4l2-capability; +returned by the &VIDIOC-QUERYCAP; ioctl. That flag means the device has an +Digital to Analog Converter (DAC), which is a mandatory element for the SDR transmitter. + </para> + <para> At least one of the read/write, streaming or asynchronous I/O methods must be supported. </para> @@ -39,15 +49,16 @@ be supported. <para> SDR devices can support <link linkend="control">controls</link>, and must support the <link linkend="tuner">tuner</link> ioctls. Tuner ioctls are used -for setting the ADC sampling rate (sampling frequency) and the possible RF tuner -frequency. +for setting the ADC/DAC sampling rate (sampling frequency) and the possible +radio frequency (RF). </para> <para> -The <constant>V4L2_TUNER_ADC</constant> tuner type is used for ADC tuners, and -the <constant>V4L2_TUNER_RF</constant> tuner type is used for RF tuners. The -tuner index of the RF tuner (if any) must always follow the ADC tuner index. -Normally the ADC tuner is #0 and the RF tuner is #1. +The <constant>V4L2_TUNER_SDR</constant> tuner type is used for setting SDR +device ADC/DAC frequency, and the <constant>V4L2_TUNER_RF</constant> +tuner type is used for setting radio frequency. +The tuner index of the RF tuner (if any) must always follow the SDR tuner index. +Normally the SDR tuner is #0 and the RF tuner is #1. </para> <para> @@ -59,9 +70,9 @@ The &VIDIOC-S-HW-FREQ-SEEK; ioctl is not supported. <title>Data Format Negotiation</title> <para> -The SDR capture device uses the <link linkend="format">format</link> ioctls to -select the capture format. Both the sampling resolution and the data streaming -format are bound to that selectable format. In addition to the basic +The SDR device uses the <link linkend="format">format</link> ioctls to +select the capture and output format. Both the sampling resolution and the data +streaming format are bound to that selectable format. In addition to the basic <link linkend="format">format</link> ioctls, the &VIDIOC-ENUM-FMT; ioctl must be supported as well. </para> @@ -69,7 +80,8 @@ must be supported as well. <para> To use the <link linkend="format">format</link> ioctls applications set the <structfield>type</structfield> field of a &v4l2-format; to -<constant>V4L2_BUF_TYPE_SDR_CAPTURE</constant> and use the &v4l2-sdr-format; +<constant>V4L2_BUF_TYPE_SDR_CAPTURE</constant> or +<constant>V4L2_BUF_TYPE_SDR_OUTPUT</constant> and use the &v4l2-sdr-format; <structfield>sdr</structfield> member of the <structfield>fmt</structfield> union as needed per the desired operation. Currently there is two fields, <structfield>pixelformat</structfield> and diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/io.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/io.xml index 7bbc2a48911e..da654031ef3f 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/io.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/io.xml @@ -1006,8 +1006,14 @@ must set this to 0.</entry> <row> <entry><constant>V4L2_BUF_TYPE_SDR_CAPTURE</constant></entry> <entry>11</entry> - <entry>Buffer for Software Defined Radio (SDR), see <xref - linkend="sdr" />.</entry> + <entry>Buffer for Software Defined Radio (SDR) capture stream, see + <xref linkend="sdr" />.</entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry><constant>V4L2_BUF_TYPE_SDR_OUTPUT</constant></entry> + <entry>12</entry> + <entry>Buffer for Software Defined Radio (SDR) output stream, see + <xref linkend="sdr" />.</entry> </row> </tbody> </tgroup> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/pixfmt.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/pixfmt.xml index 965ea916784a..d871245d2973 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/pixfmt.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/pixfmt.xml @@ -540,6 +540,10 @@ colorspaces except for BT.2020 which uses limited range R'G'B' quantization.</pa <entry>See <xref linkend="col-bt2020" />.</entry> </row> <row> + <entry><constant>V4L2_COLORSPACE_DCI_P3</constant></entry> + <entry>See <xref linkend="col-dcip3" />.</entry> + </row> + <row> <entry><constant>V4L2_COLORSPACE_SMPTE240M</constant></entry> <entry>See <xref linkend="col-smpte-240m" />.</entry> </row> @@ -601,6 +605,14 @@ colorspaces except for BT.2020 which uses limited range R'G'B' quantization.</pa <entry><constant>V4L2_XFER_FUNC_NONE</constant></entry> <entry>Do not use a transfer function (i.e. use linear RGB values).</entry> </row> + <row> + <entry><constant>V4L2_XFER_FUNC_DCI_P3</constant></entry> + <entry>Use the DCI-P3 transfer function.</entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry><constant>V4L2_XFER_FUNC_SMPTE2084</constant></entry> + <entry>Use the SMPTE 2084 transfer function.</entry> + </row> </tbody> </tgroup> </table> @@ -1154,6 +1166,68 @@ clamped to the range [-0.5…0.5]. The Y'CbCr quantization is limited range clamped to the range [-0.5…0.5]. The Yc'CbcCrc quantization is limited range.</para> </section> + <section id="col-dcip3"> + <title>Colorspace DCI-P3 (<constant>V4L2_COLORSPACE_DCI_P3</constant>)</title> + <para>The <xref linkend="smpte431" /> standard defines the colorspace used by cinema +projectors that use the DCI-P3 colorspace. +The default transfer function is <constant>V4L2_XFER_FUNC_DCI_P3</constant>. +The default Y'CbCr encoding is <constant>V4L2_YCBCR_ENC_709</constant>. Note that this +colorspace does not specify a Y'CbCr encoding since it is not meant to be encoded +to Y'CbCr. So this default Y'CbCr encoding was picked because it is the HDTV +encoding. The default Y'CbCr quantization is limited range. The chromaticities of +the primary colors and the white reference are:</para> + <table frame="none"> + <title>DCI-P3 Chromaticities</title> + <tgroup cols="3" align="left"> + &cs-str; + <thead> + <row> + <entry>Color</entry> + <entry>x</entry> + <entry>y</entry> + </row> + </thead> + <tbody valign="top"> + <row> + <entry>Red</entry> + <entry>0.6800</entry> + <entry>0.3200</entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry>Green</entry> + <entry>0.2650</entry> + <entry>0.6900</entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry>Blue</entry> + <entry>0.1500</entry> + <entry>0.0600</entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry>White Reference</entry> + <entry>0.3140</entry> + <entry>0.3510</entry> + </row> + </tbody> + </tgroup> + </table> + <variablelist> + <varlistentry> + <term>Transfer function:</term> + <listitem> + <para>L' = L<superscript>1/2.6</superscript></para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + <varlistentry> + <term>Inverse Transfer function:</term> + <listitem> + <para>L = L'<superscript>2.6</superscript></para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + </variablelist> + <para>Y'CbCr encoding is not specified. V4L2 defaults to Rec. 709.</para> + </section> + <section id="col-smpte-240m"> <title>Colorspace SMPTE 240M (<constant>V4L2_COLORSPACE_SMPTE240M</constant>)</title> <para>The <xref linkend="smpte240m" /> standard was an interim standard used during @@ -1402,6 +1476,41 @@ and <constant>V4L2_QUANTIZATION_FULL_RANGE</constant>.</para> </section> + <section> + <title>Detailed Transfer Function Descriptions</title> + <section id="xf-smpte-2084"> + <title>Transfer Function SMPTE 2084 (<constant>V4L2_XFER_FUNC_SMPTE2084</constant>)</title> + <para>The <xref linkend="smpte2084" /> standard defines the transfer function used by +High Dynamic Range content.</para> + <variablelist> + <varlistentry> + <term>Constants:</term> + <listitem> + <para>m1 = (2610 / 4096) / 4</para> + <para>m2 = (2523 / 4096) * 128</para> + <para>c1 = 3424 / 4096</para> + <para>c2 = (2413 / 4096) * 32</para> + <para>c3 = (2392 / 4096) * 32</para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + <varlistentry> + <term>Transfer function:</term> + <listitem> + <para>L' = ((c1 + c2 * L<superscript>m1</superscript>) / (1 + c3 * L<superscript>m1</superscript>))<superscript>m2</superscript></para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + </variablelist> + <variablelist> + <varlistentry> + <term>Inverse Transfer function:</term> + <listitem> + <para>L = (max(L'<superscript>1/m2</superscript> - c1, 0) / (c2 - c3 * L'<superscript>1/m2</superscript>))<superscript>1/m1</superscript></para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + </variablelist> + </section> + </section> + <section id="pixfmt-indexed"> <title>Indexed Format</title> @@ -1623,7 +1732,7 @@ extended control <constant>V4L2_CID_MPEG_STREAM_TYPE</constant>, see <section id="sdr-formats"> <title>SDR Formats</title> - <para>These formats are used for <link linkend="sdr">SDR Capture</link> + <para>These formats are used for <link linkend="sdr">SDR</link> interface only.</para> &sub-sdr-cu08; diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/v4l2.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/v4l2.xml index e98caa1c39bd..7e61643358de 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/v4l2.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/v4l2.xml @@ -151,9 +151,18 @@ Rubli, Andy Walls, Muralidharan Karicheri, Mauro Carvalho Chehab, structs, ioctls) must be noted in more detail in the history chapter (compat.xml), along with the possible impact on existing drivers and applications. --> + <revision> + <revnumber>4.4</revnumber> + <date>2015-05-26</date> + <authorinitials>ap</authorinitials> + <revremark>Renamed V4L2_TUNER_ADC to V4L2_TUNER_SDR. +Added V4L2_CID_RF_TUNER_RF_GAIN control. +Added transmitter support for Software Defined Radio (SDR) Interface. + </revremark> + </revision> <revision> - <revnumber>3.21</revnumber> + <revnumber>4.1</revnumber> <date>2015-02-13</date> <authorinitials>mcc</authorinitials> <revremark>Fix documentation for media controller device nodes and add support for DVB device nodes. @@ -557,7 +566,7 @@ and discussions on the V4L mailing list.</revremark> </partinfo> <title>Video for Linux Two API Specification</title> - <subtitle>Revision 3.19</subtitle> + <subtitle>Revision 4.4</subtitle> <chapter id="common"> &sub-common; diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-encoder-cmd.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-encoder-cmd.xml index fc1d4625a78c..70a4a08e9404 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-encoder-cmd.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-encoder-cmd.xml @@ -130,7 +130,7 @@ encoding will continue until the end of the current <wordasword>Group Of Pictures</wordasword>, otherwise encoding will stop immediately. When the encoder is already stopped, this command does nothing. mem2mem encoders will send a <constant>V4L2_EVENT_EOS</constant> event -when the last frame has been decoded and all frames are ready to be dequeued and +when the last frame has been encoded and all frames are ready to be dequeued and will set the <constant>V4L2_BUF_FLAG_LAST</constant> buffer flag on the last buffer of the capture queue to indicate there will be no new buffers produced to dequeue. This buffer may be empty, indicated by the driver setting the diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-g-ext-ctrls.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-g-ext-ctrls.xml index c5bdbfcc42b3..842536aae8b4 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-g-ext-ctrls.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-g-ext-ctrls.xml @@ -200,6 +200,13 @@ Valid if this control is of type <constant>V4L2_CTRL_TYPE_U16</constant>.</entry </row> <row> <entry></entry> + <entry>__u32 *</entry> + <entry><structfield>p_u32</structfield></entry> + <entry>A pointer to a matrix control of unsigned 32-bit values. +Valid if this control is of type <constant>V4L2_CTRL_TYPE_U32</constant>.</entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry></entry> <entry>void *</entry> <entry><structfield>ptr</structfield></entry> <entry>A pointer to a compound type which can be an N-dimensional array and/or a diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-g-fmt.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-g-fmt.xml index 4fe19a7a9a31..ffcb448251f0 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-g-fmt.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-g-fmt.xml @@ -175,7 +175,7 @@ capture and output devices.</entry> <entry>&v4l2-sdr-format;</entry> <entry><structfield>sdr</structfield></entry> <entry>Definition of a data format, see -<xref linkend="pixfmt" />, used by SDR capture devices.</entry> +<xref linkend="pixfmt" />, used by SDR capture and output devices.</entry> </row> <row> <entry></entry> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-g-modulator.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-g-modulator.xml index 7068b599a00d..96e17b344c5d 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-g-modulator.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-g-modulator.xml @@ -78,6 +78,12 @@ different audio modulation if the request cannot be satisfied. However this is a write-only ioctl, it does not return the actual audio modulation selected.</para> + <para><link linkend="sdr">SDR</link> specific modulator types are +<constant>V4L2_TUNER_SDR</constant> and <constant>V4L2_TUNER_RF</constant>. +For SDR devices <structfield>txsubchans</structfield> field must be +initialized to zero. +The term 'modulator' means SDR transmitter in this context.</para> + <para>To change the radio frequency the &VIDIOC-S-FREQUENCY; ioctl is available.</para> @@ -140,7 +146,13 @@ indicator, for example a stereo pilot tone.</entry> </row> <row> <entry>__u32</entry> - <entry><structfield>reserved</structfield>[4]</entry> + <entry><structfield>type</structfield></entry> + <entry spanname="hspan">Type of the modulator, see <xref + linkend="v4l2-tuner-type" />.</entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry>__u32</entry> + <entry><structfield>reserved</structfield>[3]</entry> <entry>Reserved for future extensions. Drivers and applications must set the array to zero.</entry> </row> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-g-tuner.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-g-tuner.xml index b0d865933da6..459b7e561f3c 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-g-tuner.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-g-tuner.xml @@ -80,6 +80,12 @@ if the requested mode is invalid or unsupported. Since this is a <!-- FIXME -->write-only ioctl, it does not return the actually selected audio mode.</para> + <para><link linkend="sdr">SDR</link> specific tuner types are +<constant>V4L2_TUNER_SDR</constant> and <constant>V4L2_TUNER_RF</constant>. +For SDR devices <structfield>audmode</structfield> field must be +initialized to zero. +The term 'tuner' means SDR receiver in this context.</para> + <para>To change the radio frequency the &VIDIOC-S-FREQUENCY; ioctl is available.</para> @@ -261,6 +267,16 @@ applications must set the array to zero.</entry> <entry>2</entry> <entry></entry> </row> + <row> + <entry><constant>V4L2_TUNER_SDR</constant></entry> + <entry>4</entry> + <entry></entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry><constant>V4L2_TUNER_RF</constant></entry> + <entry>5</entry> + <entry></entry> + </row> </tbody> </tgroup> </table> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-querycap.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-querycap.xml index 20fda75a012d..cd82148dedd7 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-querycap.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-querycap.xml @@ -308,6 +308,12 @@ modulator programming see fields.</entry> </row> <row> + <entry><constant>V4L2_CAP_SDR_OUTPUT</constant></entry> + <entry>0x00400000</entry> + <entry>The device supports the +<link linkend="sdr">SDR Output</link> interface.</entry> + </row> + <row> <entry><constant>V4L2_CAP_READWRITE</constant></entry> <entry>0x01000000</entry> <entry>The device supports the <link diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-queryctrl.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-queryctrl.xml index 6ec39c698baf..55b7582cf314 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-queryctrl.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-queryctrl.xml @@ -101,8 +101,9 @@ prematurely end the enumeration).</para></footnote></para> next supported non-compound control, or <errorcode>EINVAL</errorcode> if there is none. In addition, the <constant>V4L2_CTRL_FLAG_NEXT_COMPOUND</constant> flag can be specified to enumerate all compound controls (i.e. controls -with type ≥ <constant>V4L2_CTRL_COMPOUND_TYPES</constant>). Specify both -<constant>V4L2_CTRL_FLAG_NEXT_CTRL</constant> and +with type ≥ <constant>V4L2_CTRL_COMPOUND_TYPES</constant> and/or array +control, in other words controls that contain more than one value). +Specify both <constant>V4L2_CTRL_FLAG_NEXT_CTRL</constant> and <constant>V4L2_CTRL_FLAG_NEXT_COMPOUND</constant> in order to enumerate all controls, compound or not. Drivers which do not support these flags yet always return <errorcode>EINVAL</errorcode>.</para> @@ -422,7 +423,7 @@ the array to zero.</entry> <entry>any</entry> <entry>An integer-valued control ranging from minimum to maximum inclusive. The step value indicates the increment between -values which are actually different on the hardware.</entry> +values.</entry> </row> <row> <entry><constant>V4L2_CTRL_TYPE_BOOLEAN</constant></entry> @@ -518,7 +519,7 @@ Older drivers which do not support this feature return an <entry>any</entry> <entry>An unsigned 8-bit valued control ranging from minimum to maximum inclusive. The step value indicates the increment between -values which are actually different on the hardware. +values. </entry> </row> <row> @@ -528,7 +529,17 @@ values which are actually different on the hardware. <entry>any</entry> <entry>An unsigned 16-bit valued control ranging from minimum to maximum inclusive. The step value indicates the increment between -values which are actually different on the hardware. +values. +</entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry><constant>V4L2_CTRL_TYPE_U32</constant></entry> + <entry>any</entry> + <entry>any</entry> + <entry>any</entry> + <entry>An unsigned 32-bit valued control ranging from minimum to +maximum inclusive. The step value indicates the increment between +values. </entry> </row> </tbody> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media_api.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/media_api.tmpl index f3f5fe5b64c9..92037033f5eb 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/media_api.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media_api.tmpl @@ -38,7 +38,7 @@ <title>LINUX MEDIA INFRASTRUCTURE API</title> <copyright> - <year>2009-2014</year> + <year>2009-2015</year> <holder>LinuxTV Developers</holder> </copyright> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/writing-an-alsa-driver.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/writing-an-alsa-driver.tmpl index 84ef6a90131c..a27ab9f53fb6 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/writing-an-alsa-driver.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/writing-an-alsa-driver.tmpl @@ -2181,10 +2181,6 @@ struct _snd_pcm_runtime { struct snd_pcm_hardware hw; struct snd_pcm_hw_constraints hw_constraints; - /* -- interrupt callbacks -- */ - void (*transfer_ack_begin)(struct snd_pcm_substream *substream); - void (*transfer_ack_end)(struct snd_pcm_substream *substream); - /* -- timer -- */ unsigned int timer_resolution; /* timer resolution */ @@ -2209,9 +2205,8 @@ struct _snd_pcm_runtime { For the operators (callbacks) of each sound driver, most of these records are supposed to be read-only. Only the PCM middle-layer changes / updates them. The exceptions are - the hardware description (hw), interrupt callbacks - (transfer_ack_xxx), DMA buffer information, and the private - data. Besides, if you use the standard buffer allocation + the hardware description (hw) DMA buffer information and the + private data. Besides, if you use the standard buffer allocation method via <function>snd_pcm_lib_malloc_pages()</function>, you don't need to set the DMA buffer information by yourself. </para> @@ -2538,16 +2533,6 @@ struct _snd_pcm_runtime { </para> </section> - <section id="pcm-interface-runtime-intr"> - <title>Interrupt Callbacks</title> - <para> - The field <structfield>transfer_ack_begin</structfield> and - <structfield>transfer_ack_end</structfield> are called at - the beginning and at the end of - <function>snd_pcm_period_elapsed()</function>, respectively. - </para> - </section> - </section> <section id="pcm-interface-operators"> diff --git a/Documentation/IRQ-domain.txt b/Documentation/IRQ-domain.txt index 3a8e15cba816..8d990bde8693 100644 --- a/Documentation/IRQ-domain.txt +++ b/Documentation/IRQ-domain.txt @@ -32,9 +32,9 @@ top of the irq_alloc_desc*() API. An irq_domain to manage mapping is preferred over interrupt controller drivers open coding their own reverse mapping scheme. -irq_domain also implements translation from Device Tree interrupt -specifiers to hwirq numbers, and can be easily extended to support -other IRQ topology data sources. +irq_domain also implements translation from an abstract irq_fwspec +structure to hwirq numbers (Device Tree and ACPI GSI so far), and can +be easily extended to support other IRQ topology data sources. === irq_domain usage === An interrupt controller driver creates and registers an irq_domain by @@ -184,7 +184,7 @@ There are four major interfaces to use hierarchy irq_domain: related resources associated with these interrupts. 3) irq_domain_activate_irq(): activate interrupt controller hardware to deliver the interrupt. -3) irq_domain_deactivate_irq(): deactivate interrupt controller hardware +4) irq_domain_deactivate_irq(): deactivate interrupt controller hardware to stop delivering the interrupt. Following changes are needed to support hierarchy irq_domain. diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/stallwarn.txt b/Documentation/RCU/stallwarn.txt index efb9454875ab..0f7fb4298e7e 100644 --- a/Documentation/RCU/stallwarn.txt +++ b/Documentation/RCU/stallwarn.txt @@ -205,6 +205,13 @@ o For !CONFIG_PREEMPT kernels, a CPU looping anywhere in the behavior, you might need to replace some of the cond_resched() calls with calls to cond_resched_rcu_qs(). +o Booting Linux using a console connection that is too slow to + keep up with the boot-time console-message rate. For example, + a 115Kbaud serial console can be -way- too slow to keep up + with boot-time message rates, and will frequently result in + RCU CPU stall warning messages. Especially if you have added + debug printk()s. + o Anything that prevents RCU's grace-period kthreads from running. This can result in the "All QSes seen" console-log message. This message will include information on when the kthread last diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/torture.txt b/Documentation/RCU/torture.txt index dac02a6219b1..118e7c176ce7 100644 --- a/Documentation/RCU/torture.txt +++ b/Documentation/RCU/torture.txt @@ -166,40 +166,27 @@ test_no_idle_hz Whether or not to test the ability of RCU to operate in torture_type The type of RCU to test, with string values as follows: - "rcu": rcu_read_lock(), rcu_read_unlock() and call_rcu(). - - "rcu_sync": rcu_read_lock(), rcu_read_unlock(), and - synchronize_rcu(). - - "rcu_expedited": rcu_read_lock(), rcu_read_unlock(), and - synchronize_rcu_expedited(). + "rcu": rcu_read_lock(), rcu_read_unlock() and call_rcu(), + along with expedited, synchronous, and polling + variants. "rcu_bh": rcu_read_lock_bh(), rcu_read_unlock_bh(), and - call_rcu_bh(). - - "rcu_bh_sync": rcu_read_lock_bh(), rcu_read_unlock_bh(), - and synchronize_rcu_bh(). + call_rcu_bh(), along with expedited and synchronous + variants. - "rcu_bh_expedited": rcu_read_lock_bh(), rcu_read_unlock_bh(), - and synchronize_rcu_bh_expedited(). + "rcu_busted": This tests an intentionally incorrect version + of RCU in order to help test rcutorture itself. "srcu": srcu_read_lock(), srcu_read_unlock() and - call_srcu(). - - "srcu_sync": srcu_read_lock(), srcu_read_unlock() and - synchronize_srcu(). - - "srcu_expedited": srcu_read_lock(), srcu_read_unlock() and - synchronize_srcu_expedited(). + call_srcu(), along with expedited and + synchronous variants. "sched": preempt_disable(), preempt_enable(), and - call_rcu_sched(). - - "sched_sync": preempt_disable(), preempt_enable(), and - synchronize_sched(). + call_rcu_sched(), along with expedited, + synchronous, and polling variants. - "sched_expedited": preempt_disable(), preempt_enable(), and - synchronize_sched_expedited(). + "tasks": voluntary context switch and call_rcu_tasks(), + along with expedited and synchronous variants. Defaults to "rcu". diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/trace.txt b/Documentation/RCU/trace.txt index 97f17e9decda..ec6998b1b6d0 100644 --- a/Documentation/RCU/trace.txt +++ b/Documentation/RCU/trace.txt @@ -56,14 +56,14 @@ rcuboost: The output of "cat rcu/rcu_preempt/rcudata" looks as follows: - 0!c=30455 g=30456 pq=1/0 qp=1 dt=126535/140000000000000/0 df=2002 of=4 ql=0/0 qs=N... b=10 ci=74572 nci=0 co=1131 ca=716 - 1!c=30719 g=30720 pq=1/0 qp=0 dt=132007/140000000000000/0 df=1874 of=10 ql=0/0 qs=N... b=10 ci=123209 nci=0 co=685 ca=982 - 2!c=30150 g=30151 pq=1/1 qp=1 dt=138537/140000000000000/0 df=1707 of=8 ql=0/0 qs=N... b=10 ci=80132 nci=0 co=1328 ca=1458 - 3 c=31249 g=31250 pq=1/1 qp=0 dt=107255/140000000000000/0 df=1749 of=6 ql=0/450 qs=NRW. b=10 ci=151700 nci=0 co=509 ca=622 - 4!c=29502 g=29503 pq=1/0 qp=1 dt=83647/140000000000000/0 df=965 of=5 ql=0/0 qs=N... b=10 ci=65643 nci=0 co=1373 ca=1521 - 5 c=31201 g=31202 pq=1/0 qp=1 dt=70422/0/0 df=535 of=7 ql=0/0 qs=.... b=10 ci=58500 nci=0 co=764 ca=698 - 6!c=30253 g=30254 pq=1/0 qp=1 dt=95363/140000000000000/0 df=780 of=5 ql=0/0 qs=N... b=10 ci=100607 nci=0 co=1414 ca=1353 - 7 c=31178 g=31178 pq=1/0 qp=0 dt=91536/0/0 df=547 of=4 ql=0/0 qs=.... b=10 ci=109819 nci=0 co=1115 ca=969 + 0!c=30455 g=30456 cnq=1/0:1 dt=126535/140000000000000/0 df=2002 of=4 ql=0/0 qs=N... b=10 ci=74572 nci=0 co=1131 ca=716 + 1!c=30719 g=30720 cnq=1/0:0 dt=132007/140000000000000/0 df=1874 of=10 ql=0/0 qs=N... b=10 ci=123209 nci=0 co=685 ca=982 + 2!c=30150 g=30151 cnq=1/1:1 dt=138537/140000000000000/0 df=1707 of=8 ql=0/0 qs=N... b=10 ci=80132 nci=0 co=1328 ca=1458 + 3 c=31249 g=31250 cnq=1/1:0 dt=107255/140000000000000/0 df=1749 of=6 ql=0/450 qs=NRW. b=10 ci=151700 nci=0 co=509 ca=622 + 4!c=29502 g=29503 cnq=1/0:1 dt=83647/140000000000000/0 df=965 of=5 ql=0/0 qs=N... b=10 ci=65643 nci=0 co=1373 ca=1521 + 5 c=31201 g=31202 cnq=1/0:1 dt=70422/0/0 df=535 of=7 ql=0/0 qs=.... b=10 ci=58500 nci=0 co=764 ca=698 + 6!c=30253 g=30254 cnq=1/0:1 dt=95363/140000000000000/0 df=780 of=5 ql=0/0 qs=N... b=10 ci=100607 nci=0 co=1414 ca=1353 + 7 c=31178 g=31178 cnq=1/0:0 dt=91536/0/0 df=547 of=4 ql=0/0 qs=.... b=10 ci=109819 nci=0 co=1115 ca=969 This file has one line per CPU, or eight for this 8-CPU system. The fields are as follows: @@ -188,14 +188,14 @@ o "ca" is the number of RCU callbacks that have been adopted by this Kernels compiled with CONFIG_RCU_BOOST=y display the following from /debug/rcu/rcu_preempt/rcudata: - 0!c=12865 g=12866 pq=1/0 qp=1 dt=83113/140000000000000/0 df=288 of=11 ql=0/0 qs=N... kt=0/O ktl=944 b=10 ci=60709 nci=0 co=748 ca=871 - 1 c=14407 g=14408 pq=1/0 qp=0 dt=100679/140000000000000/0 df=378 of=7 ql=0/119 qs=NRW. kt=0/W ktl=9b6 b=10 ci=109740 nci=0 co=589 ca=485 - 2 c=14407 g=14408 pq=1/0 qp=0 dt=105486/0/0 df=90 of=9 ql=0/89 qs=NRW. kt=0/W ktl=c0c b=10 ci=83113 nci=0 co=533 ca=490 - 3 c=14407 g=14408 pq=1/0 qp=0 dt=107138/0/0 df=142 of=8 ql=0/188 qs=NRW. kt=0/W ktl=b96 b=10 ci=121114 nci=0 co=426 ca=290 - 4 c=14405 g=14406 pq=1/0 qp=1 dt=50238/0/0 df=706 of=7 ql=0/0 qs=.... kt=0/W ktl=812 b=10 ci=34929 nci=0 co=643 ca=114 - 5!c=14168 g=14169 pq=1/0 qp=0 dt=45465/140000000000000/0 df=161 of=11 ql=0/0 qs=N... kt=0/O ktl=b4d b=10 ci=47712 nci=0 co=677 ca=722 - 6 c=14404 g=14405 pq=1/0 qp=0 dt=59454/0/0 df=94 of=6 ql=0/0 qs=.... kt=0/W ktl=e57 b=10 ci=55597 nci=0 co=701 ca=811 - 7 c=14407 g=14408 pq=1/0 qp=1 dt=68850/0/0 df=31 of=8 ql=0/0 qs=.... kt=0/W ktl=14bd b=10 ci=77475 nci=0 co=508 ca=1042 + 0!c=12865 g=12866 cnq=1/0:1 dt=83113/140000000000000/0 df=288 of=11 ql=0/0 qs=N... kt=0/O ktl=944 b=10 ci=60709 nci=0 co=748 ca=871 + 1 c=14407 g=14408 cnq=1/0:0 dt=100679/140000000000000/0 df=378 of=7 ql=0/119 qs=NRW. kt=0/W ktl=9b6 b=10 ci=109740 nci=0 co=589 ca=485 + 2 c=14407 g=14408 cnq=1/0:0 dt=105486/0/0 df=90 of=9 ql=0/89 qs=NRW. kt=0/W ktl=c0c b=10 ci=83113 nci=0 co=533 ca=490 + 3 c=14407 g=14408 cnq=1/0:0 dt=107138/0/0 df=142 of=8 ql=0/188 qs=NRW. kt=0/W ktl=b96 b=10 ci=121114 nci=0 co=426 ca=290 + 4 c=14405 g=14406 cnq=1/0:1 dt=50238/0/0 df=706 of=7 ql=0/0 qs=.... kt=0/W ktl=812 b=10 ci=34929 nci=0 co=643 ca=114 + 5!c=14168 g=14169 cnq=1/0:0 dt=45465/140000000000000/0 df=161 of=11 ql=0/0 qs=N... kt=0/O ktl=b4d b=10 ci=47712 nci=0 co=677 ca=722 + 6 c=14404 g=14405 cnq=1/0:0 dt=59454/0/0 df=94 of=6 ql=0/0 qs=.... kt=0/W ktl=e57 b=10 ci=55597 nci=0 co=701 ca=811 + 7 c=14407 g=14408 cnq=1/0:1 dt=68850/0/0 df=31 of=8 ql=0/0 qs=.... kt=0/W ktl=14bd b=10 ci=77475 nci=0 co=508 ca=1042 This is similar to the output discussed above, but contains the following additional fields: diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/whatisRCU.txt b/Documentation/RCU/whatisRCU.txt index adc2184009c5..dc49c6712b17 100644 --- a/Documentation/RCU/whatisRCU.txt +++ b/Documentation/RCU/whatisRCU.txt @@ -364,7 +364,7 @@ uses of RCU may be found in listRCU.txt, arrayRCU.txt, and NMI-RCU.txt. }; DEFINE_SPINLOCK(foo_mutex); - struct foo *gbl_foo; + struct foo __rcu *gbl_foo; /* * Create a new struct foo that is the same as the one currently @@ -386,7 +386,7 @@ uses of RCU may be found in listRCU.txt, arrayRCU.txt, and NMI-RCU.txt. new_fp = kmalloc(sizeof(*new_fp), GFP_KERNEL); spin_lock(&foo_mutex); - old_fp = gbl_foo; + old_fp = rcu_dereference_protected(gbl_foo, lockdep_is_held(&foo_mutex)); *new_fp = *old_fp; new_fp->a = new_a; rcu_assign_pointer(gbl_foo, new_fp); @@ -487,7 +487,7 @@ The foo_update_a() function might then be written as follows: new_fp = kmalloc(sizeof(*new_fp), GFP_KERNEL); spin_lock(&foo_mutex); - old_fp = gbl_foo; + old_fp = rcu_dereference_protected(gbl_foo, lockdep_is_held(&foo_mutex)); *new_fp = *old_fp; new_fp->a = new_a; rcu_assign_pointer(gbl_foo, new_fp); diff --git a/Documentation/SubmittingPatches b/Documentation/SubmittingPatches index fd89b04d34f0..4710e4afef19 100644 --- a/Documentation/SubmittingPatches +++ b/Documentation/SubmittingPatches @@ -659,8 +659,8 @@ succinct and descriptive, but that is what a well-written summary should do. The "summary phrase" may be prefixed by tags enclosed in square -brackets: "Subject: [PATCH tag] <summary phrase>". The tags are not -considered part of the summary phrase, but describe how the patch +brackets: "Subject: [PATCH <tag>...] <summary phrase>". The tags are +not considered part of the summary phrase, but describe how the patch should be treated. Common tags might include a version descriptor if the multiple versions of the patch have been sent out in response to comments (i.e., "v1, v2, v3"), or "RFC" to indicate a request for @@ -672,8 +672,8 @@ the patch series. A couple of example Subjects: - Subject: [patch 2/5] ext2: improve scalability of bitmap searching - Subject: [PATCHv2 001/207] x86: fix eflags tracking + Subject: [PATCH 2/5] ext2: improve scalability of bitmap searching + Subject: [PATCH v2 01/27] x86: fix eflags tracking The "from" line must be the very first line in the message body, and has the form: diff --git a/Documentation/acpi/enumeration.txt b/Documentation/acpi/enumeration.txt index b731b292e812..a91ec5af52df 100644 --- a/Documentation/acpi/enumeration.txt +++ b/Documentation/acpi/enumeration.txt @@ -347,13 +347,18 @@ For the first case, the MFD drivers do not need to do anything. The resulting child platform device will have its ACPI_COMPANION() set to point to the parent device. -If the ACPI namespace has a device that we can match using an ACPI id, -the id should be set like: +If the ACPI namespace has a device that we can match using an ACPI id or ACPI +adr, the cell should be set like: + + static struct mfd_cell_acpi_match my_subdevice_cell_acpi_match = { + .pnpid = "XYZ0001", + .adr = 0, + }; static struct mfd_cell my_subdevice_cell = { .name = "my_subdevice", /* set the resources relative to the parent */ - .acpi_pnpid = "XYZ0001", + .acpi_match = &my_subdevice_cell_acpi_match, }; The ACPI id "XYZ0001" is then used to lookup an ACPI device directly under diff --git a/Documentation/arm/OMAP/README b/Documentation/arm/OMAP/README new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..75645c45d14a --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/arm/OMAP/README @@ -0,0 +1,7 @@ +This file contains documentation for running mainline +kernel on omaps. + +KERNEL NEW DEPENDENCIES +v4.3+ Update is needed for custom .config files to make sure + CONFIG_REGULATOR_PBIAS is enabled for MMC1 to work + properly. diff --git a/Documentation/arm/SA1100/Victor b/Documentation/arm/SA1100/Victor deleted file mode 100644 index 9cff415da5a7..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/arm/SA1100/Victor +++ /dev/null @@ -1,16 +0,0 @@ -Victor is known as a "digital talking book player" manufactured by -VisuAide, Inc. to be used by blind people. - -For more information related to Victor, see: - - http://www.humanware.com/en-usa/products - -Of course Victor is using Linux as its main operating system. -The Victor implementation for Linux is maintained by Nicolas Pitre: - - nico@visuaide.com - nico@fluxnic.net - -For any comments, please feel free to contact me through the above -addresses. - diff --git a/Documentation/arm/memory.txt b/Documentation/arm/memory.txt index 4178ebda6e66..546a39048eb0 100644 --- a/Documentation/arm/memory.txt +++ b/Documentation/arm/memory.txt @@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ VMALLOC_START VMALLOC_END-1 vmalloc() / ioremap() space. located here through iotable_init(). VMALLOC_START is based upon the value of the high_memory variable, and VMALLOC_END - is equal to 0xff000000. + is equal to 0xff800000. PAGE_OFFSET high_memory-1 Kernel direct-mapped RAM region. This maps the platforms RAM, and typically diff --git a/Documentation/arm/uefi.txt b/Documentation/arm/uefi.txt index d60030a1b909..6543a0adea8a 100644 --- a/Documentation/arm/uefi.txt +++ b/Documentation/arm/uefi.txt @@ -58,7 +58,3 @@ linux,uefi-mmap-desc-size | 32-bit | Size in bytes of each entry in the UEFI -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- linux,uefi-mmap-desc-ver | 32-bit | Version of the mmap descriptor format. -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -linux,uefi-stub-kern-ver | string | Copy of linux_banner from build. --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- - -For verbose debug messages, specify 'uefi_debug' on the kernel command line. diff --git a/Documentation/arm64/booting.txt b/Documentation/arm64/booting.txt index 7d9d3c2286b2..701d39d3171a 100644 --- a/Documentation/arm64/booting.txt +++ b/Documentation/arm64/booting.txt @@ -104,7 +104,12 @@ Header notes: - The flags field (introduced in v3.17) is a little-endian 64-bit field composed as follows: Bit 0: Kernel endianness. 1 if BE, 0 if LE. - Bits 1-63: Reserved. + Bit 1-2: Kernel Page size. + 0 - Unspecified. + 1 - 4K + 2 - 16K + 3 - 64K + Bits 3-63: Reserved. - When image_size is zero, a bootloader should attempt to keep as much memory as possible free for use by the kernel immediately after the @@ -173,13 +178,22 @@ Before jumping into the kernel, the following conditions must be met: the kernel image will be entered must be initialised by software at a higher exception level to prevent execution in an UNKNOWN state. - For systems with a GICv3 interrupt controller: + For systems with a GICv3 interrupt controller to be used in v3 mode: - If EL3 is present: ICC_SRE_EL3.Enable (bit 3) must be initialiased to 0b1. ICC_SRE_EL3.SRE (bit 0) must be initialised to 0b1. - If the kernel is entered at EL1: ICC.SRE_EL2.Enable (bit 3) must be initialised to 0b1 ICC_SRE_EL2.SRE (bit 0) must be initialised to 0b1. + - The DT or ACPI tables must describe a GICv3 interrupt controller. + + For systems with a GICv3 interrupt controller to be used in + compatibility (v2) mode: + - If EL3 is present: + ICC_SRE_EL3.SRE (bit 0) must be initialised to 0b0. + - If the kernel is entered at EL1: + ICC_SRE_EL2.SRE (bit 0) must be initialised to 0b0. + - The DT or ACPI tables must describe a GICv2 interrupt controller. The requirements described above for CPU mode, caches, MMUs, architected timers, coherency and system registers apply to all CPUs. All CPUs must diff --git a/Documentation/atomic_ops.txt b/Documentation/atomic_ops.txt index b19fc34efdb1..c9d1cacb4395 100644 --- a/Documentation/atomic_ops.txt +++ b/Documentation/atomic_ops.txt @@ -542,6 +542,10 @@ The routines xchg() and cmpxchg() must provide the same exact memory-barrier semantics as the atomic and bit operations returning values. +Note: If someone wants to use xchg(), cmpxchg() and their variants, +linux/atomic.h should be included rather than asm/cmpxchg.h, unless +the code is in arch/* and can take care of itself. + Spinlocks and rwlocks have memory barrier expectations as well. The rule to follow is simple: diff --git a/Documentation/block/pr.txt b/Documentation/block/pr.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..d3eb1ca65051 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/block/pr.txt @@ -0,0 +1,119 @@ + +Block layer support for Persistent Reservations +=============================================== + +The Linux kernel supports a user space interface for simplified +Persistent Reservations which map to block devices that support +these (like SCSI). Persistent Reservations allow restricting +access to block devices to specific initiators in a shared storage +setup. + +This document gives a general overview of the support ioctl commands. +For a more detailed reference please refer the the SCSI Primary +Commands standard, specifically the section on Reservations and the +"PERSISTENT RESERVE IN" and "PERSISTENT RESERVE OUT" commands. + +All implementations are expected to ensure the reservations survive +a power loss and cover all connections in a multi path environment. +These behaviors are optional in SPC but will be automatically applied +by Linux. + + +The following types of reservations are supported: +-------------------------------------------------- + + - PR_WRITE_EXCLUSIVE + + Only the initiator that owns the reservation can write to the + device. Any initiator can read from the device. + + - PR_EXCLUSIVE_ACCESS + + Only the initiator that owns the reservation can access the + device. + + - PR_WRITE_EXCLUSIVE_REG_ONLY + + Only initiators with a registered key can write to the device, + Any initiator can read from the device. + + - PR_EXCLUSIVE_ACCESS_REG_ONLY + + Only initiators with a registered key can access the device. + + - PR_WRITE_EXCLUSIVE_ALL_REGS + + Only initiators with a registered key can write to the device, + Any initiator can read from the device. + All initiators with a registered key are considered reservation + holders. + Please reference the SPC spec on the meaning of a reservation + holder if you want to use this type. + + - PR_EXCLUSIVE_ACCESS_ALL_REGS + + Only initiators with a registered key can access the device. + All initiators with a registered key are considered reservation + holders. + Please reference the SPC spec on the meaning of a reservation + holder if you want to use this type. + + +The following ioctl are supported: +---------------------------------- + +1. IOC_PR_REGISTER + +This ioctl command registers a new reservation if the new_key argument +is non-null. If no existing reservation exists old_key must be zero, +if an existing reservation should be replaced old_key must contain +the old reservation key. + +If the new_key argument is 0 it unregisters the existing reservation passed +in old_key. + + +2. IOC_PR_RESERVE + +This ioctl command reserves the device and thus restricts access for other +devices based on the type argument. The key argument must be the existing +reservation key for the device as acquired by the IOC_PR_REGISTER, +IOC_PR_REGISTER_IGNORE, IOC_PR_PREEMPT or IOC_PR_PREEMPT_ABORT commands. + + +3. IOC_PR_RELEASE + +This ioctl command releases the reservation specified by key and flags +and thus removes any access restriction implied by it. + + +4. IOC_PR_PREEMPT + +This ioctl command releases the existing reservation referred to by +old_key and replaces it with a a new reservation of type for the +reservation key new_key. + + +5. IOC_PR_PREEMPT_ABORT + +This ioctl command works like IOC_PR_PREEMPT except that it also aborts +any outstanding command sent over a connection identified by old_key. + +6. IOC_PR_CLEAR + +This ioctl command unregisters both key and any other reservation key +registered with the device and drops any existing reservation. + + +Flags +----- + +All the ioctls have a flag field. Currently only one flag is supported: + + - PR_FL_IGNORE_KEY + + Ignore the existing reservation key. This is commonly supported for + IOC_PR_REGISTER, and some implementation may support the flag for + IOC_PR_RESERVE. + +For all unknown flags the kernel will return -EOPNOTSUPP. diff --git a/Documentation/blockdev/zram.txt b/Documentation/blockdev/zram.txt index 62435bb25266..5bda5031c83d 100644 --- a/Documentation/blockdev/zram.txt +++ b/Documentation/blockdev/zram.txt @@ -14,8 +14,43 @@ Statistics for individual zram devices are exported through sysfs nodes at * Usage +There are several ways to configure and manage zram device(-s): +a) using zram and zram_control sysfs attributes +b) using zramctl utility, provided by util-linux (util-linux@vger.kernel.org). + +In this document we will describe only 'manual' zram configuration steps, +IOW, zram and zram_control sysfs attributes. + +In order to get a better idea about zramctl please consult util-linux +documentation, zramctl man-page or `zramctl --help'. Please be informed +that zram maintainers do not develop/maintain util-linux or zramctl, should +you have any questions please contact util-linux@vger.kernel.org + Following shows a typical sequence of steps for using zram. +WARNING +======= +For the sake of simplicity we skip error checking parts in most of the +examples below. However, it is your sole responsibility to handle errors. + +zram sysfs attributes always return negative values in case of errors. +The list of possible return codes: +-EBUSY -- an attempt to modify an attribute that cannot be changed once +the device has been initialised. Please reset device first; +-ENOMEM -- zram was not able to allocate enough memory to fulfil your +needs; +-EINVAL -- invalid input has been provided. + +If you use 'echo', the returned value that is changed by 'echo' utility, +and, in general case, something like: + + echo 3 > /sys/block/zram0/max_comp_streams + if [ $? -ne 0 ]; + handle_error + fi + +should suffice. + 1) Load Module: modprobe zram num_devices=4 This creates 4 devices: /dev/zram{0,1,2,3} @@ -47,7 +82,7 @@ max_comp_streams adjustment. 3) Select compression algorithm Using comp_algorithm device attribute one can see available and - currently selected (shown in square brackets) compression algortithms, + currently selected (shown in square brackets) compression algorithms, change selected compression algorithm (once the device is initialised there is no way to change compression algorithm). @@ -119,7 +154,7 @@ execute 8) Stats: Per-device statistics are exported as various nodes under /sys/block/zram<id>/ -A brief description of exported device attritbutes. For more details please +A brief description of exported device attributes. For more details please read Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-block-zram. Name access description @@ -140,8 +175,9 @@ zero_pages RO the number of zero filled pages written to this disk orig_data_size RO uncompressed size of data stored in this disk compr_data_size RO compressed size of data stored in this disk mem_used_total RO the amount of memory allocated for this disk -mem_used_max RW the maximum amount memory zram have consumed to - store compressed data +mem_used_max RW the maximum amount of memory zram have consumed to + store the data (to reset this counter to the actual + current value, write 1 to this attribute) mem_limit RW the maximum amount of memory ZRAM can use to store the compressed data pages_compacted RO the number of pages freed during compaction diff --git a/Documentation/cgroups/blkio-controller.txt b/Documentation/cgroups/blkio-controller.txt index 12686bec37b9..52fa9f353342 100644 --- a/Documentation/cgroups/blkio-controller.txt +++ b/Documentation/cgroups/blkio-controller.txt @@ -59,7 +59,7 @@ cgroups. Here is what you can do. - At macro level, first dd should finish first. To get more precise data, keep on looking at (with the help of script), at blkio.disk_time and blkio.disk_sectors files of both test1 and test2 groups. This will tell how - much disk time (in milli seconds), each group got and how many secotors each + much disk time (in milliseconds), each group got and how many sectors each group dispatched to the disk. We provide fairness in terms of disk time, so ideally io.disk_time of cgroups should be in proportion to the weight. diff --git a/Documentation/cgroups/cgroups.txt b/Documentation/cgroups/cgroups.txt index f935fac1e73b..c6256ae9885b 100644 --- a/Documentation/cgroups/cgroups.txt +++ b/Documentation/cgroups/cgroups.txt @@ -637,6 +637,10 @@ void exit(struct task_struct *task) Called during task exit. +void free(struct task_struct *task) + +Called when the task_struct is freed. + void bind(struct cgroup *root) (cgroup_mutex held by caller) diff --git a/Documentation/cgroups/freezer-subsystem.txt b/Documentation/cgroups/freezer-subsystem.txt index c96a72cbb30a..e831cb2b8394 100644 --- a/Documentation/cgroups/freezer-subsystem.txt +++ b/Documentation/cgroups/freezer-subsystem.txt @@ -50,7 +50,7 @@ being frozen. This allows the bash example above and gdb to run as expected. The cgroup freezer is hierarchical. Freezing a cgroup freezes all -tasks beloning to the cgroup and all its descendant cgroups. Each +tasks belonging to the cgroup and all its descendant cgroups. Each cgroup has its own state (self-state) and the state inherited from the parent (parent-state). Iff both states are THAWED, the cgroup is THAWED. diff --git a/Documentation/cgroups/unified-hierarchy.txt b/Documentation/cgroups/unified-hierarchy.txt index e0975c2cf03d..781b1d475bcf 100644 --- a/Documentation/cgroups/unified-hierarchy.txt +++ b/Documentation/cgroups/unified-hierarchy.txt @@ -107,12 +107,6 @@ root of unified hierarchy can be bound to other hierarchies. This allows mixing unified hierarchy with the traditional multiple hierarchies in a fully backward compatible way. -For development purposes, the following boot parameter makes all -controllers to appear on the unified hierarchy whether supported or -not. - - cgroup__DEVEL__legacy_files_on_dfl - A controller can be moved across hierarchies only after the controller is no longer referenced in its current hierarchy. Because per-cgroup controller states are destroyed asynchronously and controllers may @@ -341,11 +335,11 @@ is riddled with issues. unnecessarily complicated and probably done this way because event delivery itself was expensive. -Unified hierarchy implements an interface file "cgroup.populated" -which can be used to monitor whether the cgroup's subhierarchy has -tasks in it or not. Its value is 0 if there is no task in the cgroup -and its descendants; otherwise, 1. poll and [id]notify events are -triggered when the value changes. +Unified hierarchy implements "populated" field in "cgroup.events" +interface file which can be used to monitor whether the cgroup's +subhierarchy has tasks in it or not. Its value is 0 if there is no +task in the cgroup and its descendants; otherwise, 1. poll and +[id]notify events are triggered when the value changes. This is significantly lighter and simpler and trivially allows delegating management of subhierarchy - subhierarchy monitoring can @@ -374,6 +368,10 @@ supported and the interface files "release_agent" and - The "cgroup.clone_children" file is removed. +- /proc/PID/cgroup keeps reporting the cgroup that a zombie belonged + to before exiting. If the cgroup is removed before the zombie is + reaped, " (deleted)" is appeneded to the path. + 5-3. Controller File Conventions @@ -435,6 +433,11 @@ may be specified in any order and not all pairs have to be specified. the first entry in the file. Specific entries can use "default" as its value to indicate inheritance of the default value. +- For events which are not very high frequency, an interface file + "events" should be created which lists event key value pairs. + Whenever a notifiable event happens, file modified event should be + generated on the file. + 5-4. Per-Controller Changes @@ -491,7 +494,7 @@ may be specified in any order and not all pairs have to be specified. ${R|W}BPS are read/write bytes per second and ${R|W}IOPS are read/write IOs per second. "max" indicates no limit. Writing to the file follows the same format but the individual - settings may be ommitted or specified in any order. + settings may be omitted or specified in any order. This file is available only on non-root cgroups. diff --git a/Documentation/crypto/asymmetric-keys.txt b/Documentation/crypto/asymmetric-keys.txt index b7675904a747..8c07e0ea6bc0 100644 --- a/Documentation/crypto/asymmetric-keys.txt +++ b/Documentation/crypto/asymmetric-keys.txt @@ -186,7 +186,7 @@ and looks like the following: const struct public_key_signature *sig); }; -Asymmetric keys point to this with their type_data[0] member. +Asymmetric keys point to this with their payload[asym_subtype] member. The owner and name fields should be set to the owning module and the name of the subtype. Currently, the name is only used for print statements. @@ -269,8 +269,7 @@ mandatory: struct key_preparsed_payload { char *description; - void *type_data[2]; - void *payload; + void *payload[4]; const void *data; size_t datalen; size_t quotalen; @@ -283,16 +282,18 @@ mandatory: not theirs. If the parser is happy with the blob, it should propose a description for - the key and attach it to ->description, ->type_data[0] should be set to - point to the subtype to be used, ->payload should be set to point to the - initialised data for that subtype, ->type_data[1] should point to a hex - fingerprint and quotalen should be updated to indicate how much quota this - key should account for. - - When clearing up, the data attached to ->type_data[1] and ->description - will be kfree()'d and the data attached to ->payload will be passed to the - subtype's ->destroy() method to be disposed of. A module reference for - the subtype pointed to by ->type_data[0] will be put. + the key and attach it to ->description, ->payload[asym_subtype] should be + set to point to the subtype to be used, ->payload[asym_crypto] should be + set to point to the initialised data for that subtype, + ->payload[asym_key_ids] should point to one or more hex fingerprints and + quotalen should be updated to indicate how much quota this key should + account for. + + When clearing up, the data attached to ->payload[asym_key_ids] and + ->description will be kfree()'d and the data attached to + ->payload[asm_crypto] will be passed to the subtype's ->destroy() method + to be disposed of. A module reference for the subtype pointed to by + ->payload[asym_subtype] will be put. If the data format is not recognised, -EBADMSG should be returned. If it diff --git a/Documentation/device-mapper/delay.txt b/Documentation/device-mapper/delay.txt index 15adc55359e5..a07b5927f4a8 100644 --- a/Documentation/device-mapper/delay.txt +++ b/Documentation/device-mapper/delay.txt @@ -8,6 +8,7 @@ Parameters: <device> <offset> <delay> [<write_device> <write_offset> <write_delay>] With separate write parameters, the first set is only used for reads. +Offsets are specified in sectors. Delays are specified in milliseconds. Example scripts diff --git a/Documentation/device-mapper/snapshot.txt b/Documentation/device-mapper/snapshot.txt index 0d5bc46dc167..ad6949bff2e3 100644 --- a/Documentation/device-mapper/snapshot.txt +++ b/Documentation/device-mapper/snapshot.txt @@ -41,9 +41,13 @@ useless and be disabled, returning errors. So it is important to monitor the amount of free space and expand the <COW device> before it fills up. <persistent?> is P (Persistent) or N (Not persistent - will not survive -after reboot). -The difference is that for transient snapshots less metadata must be -saved on disk - they can be kept in memory by the kernel. +after reboot). O (Overflow) can be added as a persistent store option +to allow userspace to advertise its support for seeing "Overflow" in the +snapshot status. So supported store types are "P", "PO" and "N". + +The difference between persistent and transient is with transient +snapshots less metadata must be saved on disk - they can be kept in +memory by the kernel. * snapshot-merge <origin> <COW device> <persistent> <chunksize> diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/gic-v3.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/gic-v3.txt index ddfade40ac59..7803e77d85cb 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/gic-v3.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/gic-v3.txt @@ -57,6 +57,8 @@ used to route Message Signalled Interrupts (MSI) to the CPUs. These nodes must have the following properties: - compatible : Should at least contain "arm,gic-v3-its". - msi-controller : Boolean property. Identifies the node as an MSI controller +- #msi-cells: Must be <1>. The single msi-cell is the DeviceID of the device + which will generate the MSI. - reg: Specifies the base physical address and size of the ITS registers. @@ -83,6 +85,7 @@ Examples: gic-its@2c200000 { compatible = "arm,gic-v3-its"; msi-controller; + #msi-cells = <1>; reg = <0x0 0x2c200000 0 0x200000>; }; }; @@ -107,12 +110,14 @@ Examples: gic-its@2c200000 { compatible = "arm,gic-v3-its"; msi-controller; + #msi-cells = <1>; reg = <0x0 0x2c200000 0 0x200000>; }; gic-its@2c400000 { compatible = "arm,gic-v3-its"; msi-controller; + #msi-cells = <1>; reg = <0x0 0x2c400000 0 0x200000>; }; }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/gic.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/gic.txt index 2da059a4790c..cc56021eb60b 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/gic.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/gic.txt @@ -11,13 +11,14 @@ have PPIs or SGIs. Main node required properties: - compatible : should be one of: - "arm,gic-400" + "arm,arm1176jzf-devchip-gic" + "arm,arm11mp-gic" "arm,cortex-a15-gic" - "arm,cortex-a9-gic" "arm,cortex-a7-gic" - "arm,arm11mp-gic" + "arm,cortex-a9-gic" + "arm,gic-400" + "arm,pl390" "brcm,brahma-b15-gic" - "arm,arm1176jzf-devchip-gic" "qcom,msm-8660-qgic" "qcom,msm-qgic2" - interrupt-controller : Identifies the node as an interrupt controller @@ -58,6 +59,21 @@ Optional regions, used when the GIC doesn't have banked registers. The offset is cpu-offset * cpu-nr. +- clocks : List of phandle and clock-specific pairs, one for each entry + in clock-names. +- clock-names : List of names for the GIC clock input(s). Valid clock names + depend on the GIC variant: + "ic_clk" (for "arm,arm11mp-gic") + "PERIPHCLKEN" (for "arm,cortex-a15-gic") + "PERIPHCLK", "PERIPHCLKEN" (for "arm,cortex-a9-gic") + "clk" (for "arm,gic-400") + "gclk" (for "arm,pl390") + +- power-domains : A phandle and PM domain specifier as defined by bindings of + the power controller specified by phandle, used when the GIC + is part of a Power or Clock Domain. + + Example: intc: interrupt-controller@fff11000 { diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/hisilicon/hisilicon.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/hisilicon/hisilicon.txt index c733e28e18e5..764c738bb3ba 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/hisilicon/hisilicon.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/hisilicon/hisilicon.txt @@ -167,6 +167,23 @@ Example: }; ----------------------------------------------------------------------- +Hisilicon HiP05 PCIe-SAS system controller + +Required properties: +- compatible : "hisilicon,pcie-sas-subctrl", "syscon"; +- reg : Register address and size + +The HiP05 PCIe-SAS system controller is shared by PCIe and SAS controllers in +HiP05 Soc to implement some basic configurations. + +Example: + /* for HiP05 PCIe-SAS system */ + pcie_sas: system_controller@0xb0000000 { + compatible = "hisilicon,pcie-sas-subctrl", "syscon"; + reg = <0xb0000000 0x10000>; + }; + +----------------------------------------------------------------------- Hisilicon CPU controller Required properties: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/idle-states.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/idle-states.txt index a8274eabae2e..b8e41c148a3c 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/idle-states.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/idle-states.txt @@ -497,7 +497,7 @@ cpus { }; idle-states { - entry-method = "arm,psci"; + entry-method = "psci"; CPU_RETENTION_0_0: cpu-retention-0-0 { compatible = "arm,idle-state"; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/mediatek/mediatek,imgsys.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/mediatek/mediatek,imgsys.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..b1f2ce17dff8 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/mediatek/mediatek,imgsys.txt @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +Mediatek imgsys controller +============================ + +The Mediatek imgsys controller provides various clocks to the system. + +Required Properties: + +- compatible: Should be: + - "mediatek,mt8173-imgsys", "syscon" +- #clock-cells: Must be 1 + +The imgsys controller uses the common clk binding from +Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/clock-bindings.txt +The available clocks are defined in dt-bindings/clock/mt*-clk.h. + +Example: + +imgsys: clock-controller@15000000 { + compatible = "mediatek,mt8173-imgsys", "syscon"; + reg = <0 0x15000000 0 0x1000>; + #clock-cells = <1>; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/mediatek/mediatek,mmsys.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/mediatek/mediatek,mmsys.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..4385946eadef --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/mediatek/mediatek,mmsys.txt @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +Mediatek mmsys controller +============================ + +The Mediatek mmsys controller provides various clocks to the system. + +Required Properties: + +- compatible: Should be: + - "mediatek,mt8173-mmsys", "syscon" +- #clock-cells: Must be 1 + +The mmsys controller uses the common clk binding from +Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/clock-bindings.txt +The available clocks are defined in dt-bindings/clock/mt*-clk.h. + +Example: + +mmsys: clock-controller@14000000 { + compatible = "mediatek,mt8173-mmsys", "syscon"; + reg = <0 0x14000000 0 0x1000>; + #clock-cells = <1>; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/mediatek/mediatek,vdecsys.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/mediatek/mediatek,vdecsys.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..1faacf1c1b25 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/mediatek/mediatek,vdecsys.txt @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +Mediatek vdecsys controller +============================ + +The Mediatek vdecsys controller provides various clocks to the system. + +Required Properties: + +- compatible: Should be: + - "mediatek,mt8173-vdecsys", "syscon" +- #clock-cells: Must be 1 + +The vdecsys controller uses the common clk binding from +Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/clock-bindings.txt +The available clocks are defined in dt-bindings/clock/mt*-clk.h. + +Example: + +vdecsys: clock-controller@16000000 { + compatible = "mediatek,mt8173-vdecsys", "syscon"; + reg = <0 0x16000000 0 0x1000>; + #clock-cells = <1>; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/mediatek/mediatek,vencltsys.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/mediatek/mediatek,vencltsys.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..3cc299fd7857 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/mediatek/mediatek,vencltsys.txt @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +Mediatek vencltsys controller +============================ + +The Mediatek vencltsys controller provides various clocks to the system. + +Required Properties: + +- compatible: Should be: + - "mediatek,mt8173-vencltsys", "syscon" +- #clock-cells: Must be 1 + +The vencltsys controller uses the common clk binding from +Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/clock-bindings.txt +The available clocks are defined in dt-bindings/clock/mt*-clk.h. + +Example: + +vencltsys: clock-controller@19000000 { + compatible = "mediatek,mt8173-vencltsys", "syscon"; + reg = <0 0x19000000 0 0x1000>; + #clock-cells = <1>; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/mediatek/mediatek,vencsys.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/mediatek/mediatek,vencsys.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..5bb2866a2b50 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/mediatek/mediatek,vencsys.txt @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +Mediatek vencsys controller +============================ + +The Mediatek vencsys controller provides various clocks to the system. + +Required Properties: + +- compatible: Should be: + - "mediatek,mt8173-vencsys", "syscon" +- #clock-cells: Must be 1 + +The vencsys controller uses the common clk binding from +Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/clock-bindings.txt +The available clocks are defined in dt-bindings/clock/mt*-clk.h. + +Example: + +vencsys: clock-controller@18000000 { + compatible = "mediatek,mt8173-vencsys", "syscon"; + reg = <0 0x18000000 0 0x1000>; + #clock-cells = <1>; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/pmu.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/pmu.txt index 435251fa9ce0..4b7c3d9b29bb 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/pmu.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/pmu.txt @@ -8,6 +8,8 @@ Required properties: - compatible : should be one of "arm,armv8-pmuv3" + "arm.cortex-a57-pmu" + "arm.cortex-a53-pmu" "arm,cortex-a17-pmu" "arm,cortex-a15-pmu" "arm,cortex-a12-pmu" diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/twd.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/twd.txt index 75b8610939fa..383ea19c2bf0 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/twd.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/twd.txt @@ -19,6 +19,11 @@ interrupts. - reg : Specify the base address and the size of the TWD timer register window. +Optional + +- always-on : a boolean property. If present, the timer is powered through + an always-on power domain, therefore it never loses context. + Example: twd-timer@2c000600 { diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ata/ahci-fsl-qoriq.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ata/ahci-fsl-qoriq.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..032a7606b862 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ata/ahci-fsl-qoriq.txt @@ -0,0 +1,21 @@ +Binding for Freescale QorIQ AHCI SATA Controller + +Required properties: + - reg: Physical base address and size of the controller's register area. + - compatible: Compatibility string. Must be 'fsl,<chip>-ahci', where + chip could be ls1021a, ls2080a, ls1043a etc. + - clocks: Input clock specifier. Refer to common clock bindings. + - interrupts: Interrupt specifier. Refer to interrupt binding. + +Optional properties: + - dma-coherent: Enable AHCI coherent DMA operation. + - reg-names: register area names when there are more than 1 register area. + +Examples: + sata@3200000 { + compatible = "fsl,ls1021a-ahci"; + reg = <0x0 0x3200000 0x0 0x10000>; + interrupts = <GIC_SPI 101 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>; + clocks = <&platform_clk 1>; + dma-coherent; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ata/ahci-platform.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ata/ahci-platform.txt index a2321819e7f5..c2340eeeb97f 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ata/ahci-platform.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ata/ahci-platform.txt @@ -16,8 +16,6 @@ Required properties: - "snps,dwc-ahci" - "snps,exynos5440-ahci" - "snps,spear-ahci" - - "fsl,qoriq-ahci" : for qoriq series socs which include ls1021, ls2085, etc. - - "fsl,<chip>-ahci" : chip could be ls1021, ls2085 etc. - "generic-ahci" - interrupts : <interrupt mapping for SATA IRQ> - reg : <registers mapping> diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/chosen.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/chosen.txt index ed838f453f7a..6ae9d82d4c37 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/chosen.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/chosen.txt @@ -44,3 +44,11 @@ Implementation note: Linux will look for the property "linux,stdout-path" or on PowerPC "stdout" if "stdout-path" is not found. However, the "linux,stdout-path" and "stdout" properties are deprecated. New platforms should only use the "stdout-path" property. + +linux,booted-from-kexec +----------------------- + +This property is set (currently only on PowerPC, and only needed on +book3e) by some versions of kexec-tools to tell the new kernel that it +is being booted by kexec, as the booting environment may differ (e.g. +a different secondary CPU release mechanism) diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/at91-clock.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/at91-clock.txt index 5ba6450693b9..181bc8ac4e3a 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/at91-clock.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/at91-clock.txt @@ -77,6 +77,9 @@ Required properties: "atmel,sama5d4-clk-h32mx": at91 h32mx clock + "atmel,sama5d2-clk-generated": + at91 generated clock + Required properties for SCKC node: - reg : defines the IO memory reserved for the SCKC. - #size-cells : shall be 0 (reg is used to encode clk id). @@ -461,3 +464,35 @@ For example: compatible = "atmel,sama5d4-clk-h32mx"; clocks = <&mck>; }; + +Required properties for generated clocks: +- #size-cells : shall be 0 (reg is used to encode clk id). +- #address-cells : shall be 1 (reg is used to encode clk id). +- clocks : shall be the generated clock source phandles. + e.g. clocks = <&clk32k>, <&main>, <&plladiv>, <&utmi>, <&mck>, <&audio_pll_pmc>; +- name: device tree node describing a specific generated clock. + * #clock-cells : from common clock binding; shall be set to 0. + * reg: peripheral id. See Atmel's datasheets to get a full + list of peripheral ids. + * atmel,clk-output-range : minimum and maximum clock frequency + (two u32 fields). + +For example: + gck { + compatible = "atmel,sama5d2-clk-generated"; + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <0>; + clocks = <&clk32k>, <&main>, <&plladiv>, <&utmi>, <&mck>, <&audio_pll_pmc>; + + tcb0_gclk: tcb0_gclk { + #clock-cells = <0>; + reg = <35>; + atmel,clk-output-range = <0 83000000>; + }; + + pwm_gclk: pwm_gclk { + #clock-cells = <0>; + reg = <38>; + atmel,clk-output-range = <0 83000000>; + }; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/brcm,bcm2835-cprman.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/brcm,bcm2835-cprman.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..e56a1df3a9d3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/brcm,bcm2835-cprman.txt @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ +Broadcom BCM2835 CPRMAN clocks + +This binding uses the common clock binding: + Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/clock-bindings.txt + +The CPRMAN clock controller generates clocks in the audio power domain +of the BCM2835. There is a level of PLLs deriving from an external +oscillator, a level of PLL dividers that produce channels off of the +few PLLs, and a level of mostly-generic clock generators sourcing from +the PLL channels. Most other hardware components source from the +clock generators, but a few (like the ARM or HDMI) will source from +the PLL dividers directly. + +Required properties: +- compatible: Should be "brcm,bcm2835-cprman" +- #clock-cells: Should be <1>. The permitted clock-specifier values can be + found in include/dt-bindings/clock/bcm2835.h +- reg: Specifies base physical address and size of the registers +- clocks: The external oscillator clock phandle + +Example: + + clk_osc: clock@3 { + compatible = "fixed-clock"; + reg = <3>; + #clock-cells = <0>; + clock-output-names = "osc"; + clock-frequency = <19200000>; + }; + + clocks: cprman@7e101000 { + compatible = "brcm,bcm2835-cprman"; + #clock-cells = <1>; + reg = <0x7e101000 0x2000>; + clocks = <&clk_osc>; + }; + + i2c0: i2c@7e205000 { + compatible = "brcm,bcm2835-i2c"; + reg = <0x7e205000 0x1000>; + interrupts = <2 21>; + clocks = <&clocks BCM2835_CLOCK_VPU>; + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <0>; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/brcm,iproc-clocks.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/brcm,iproc-clocks.txt index da8d9bb5751c..ede65a55e21b 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/brcm,iproc-clocks.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/brcm,iproc-clocks.txt @@ -130,3 +130,81 @@ These clock IDs are defined in: ch3_unused mipipll 4 BCM_CYGNUS_MIPIPLL_CH3_UNUSED ch4_unused mipipll 5 BCM_CYGNUS_MIPIPLL_CH4_UNUSED ch5_unused mipipll 6 BCM_CYGNUS_MIPIPLL_CH5_UNUSED + +Northstar and Northstar Plus +------ +PLL and leaf clock compatible strings for Northstar and Northstar Plus are: + "brcm,nsp-armpll" + "brcm,nsp-genpll" + "brcm,nsp-lcpll0" + +The following table defines the set of PLL/clock index and ID for Northstar and +Northstar Plus. These clock IDs are defined in: + "include/dt-bindings/clock/bcm-nsp.h" + + Clock Source Index ID + --- ----- ----- --------- + crystal N/A N/A N/A + + armpll crystal N/A N/A + + genpll crystal 0 BCM_NSP_GENPLL + phy genpll 1 BCM_NSP_GENPLL_PHY_CLK + ethernetclk genpll 2 BCM_NSP_GENPLL_ENET_SW_CLK + usbclk genpll 3 BCM_NSP_GENPLL_USB_PHY_REF_CLK + iprocfast genpll 4 BCM_NSP_GENPLL_IPROCFAST_CLK + sata1 genpll 5 BCM_NSP_GENPLL_SATA1_CLK + sata2 genpll 6 BCM_NSP_GENPLL_SATA2_CLK + + lcpll0 crystal 0 BCM_NSP_LCPLL0 + pcie_phy lcpll0 1 BCM_NSP_LCPLL0_PCIE_PHY_REF_CLK + sdio lcpll0 2 BCM_NSP_LCPLL0_SDIO_CLK + ddr_phy lcpll0 3 BCM_NSP_LCPLL0_DDR_PHY_CLK + +Northstar 2 +----------- +PLL and leaf clock compatible strings for Northstar 2 are: + "brcm,ns2-genpll-scr" + "brcm,ns2-genpll-sw" + "brcm,ns2-lcpll-ddr" + "brcm,ns2-lcpll-ports" + +The following table defines the set of PLL/clock index and ID for Northstar 2. +These clock IDs are defined in: + "include/dt-bindings/clock/bcm-ns2.h" + + Clock Source Index ID + --- ----- ----- --------- + crystal N/A N/A N/A + + genpll_scr crystal 0 BCM_NS2_GENPLL_SCR + scr genpll_scr 1 BCM_NS2_GENPLL_SCR_SCR_CLK + fs genpll_scr 2 BCM_NS2_GENPLL_SCR_FS_CLK + audio_ref genpll_scr 3 BCM_NS2_GENPLL_SCR_AUDIO_CLK + ch3_unused genpll_scr 4 BCM_NS2_GENPLL_SCR_CH3_UNUSED + ch4_unused genpll_scr 5 BCM_NS2_GENPLL_SCR_CH4_UNUSED + ch5_unused genpll_scr 6 BCM_NS2_GENPLL_SCR_CH5_UNUSED + + genpll_sw crystal 0 BCM_NS2_GENPLL_SW + rpe genpll_sw 1 BCM_NS2_GENPLL_SW_RPE_CLK + 250 genpll_sw 2 BCM_NS2_GENPLL_SW_250_CLK + nic genpll_sw 3 BCM_NS2_GENPLL_SW_NIC_CLK + chimp genpll_sw 4 BCM_NS2_GENPLL_SW_CHIMP_CLK + port genpll_sw 5 BCM_NS2_GENPLL_SW_PORT_CLK + sdio genpll_sw 6 BCM_NS2_GENPLL_SW_SDIO_CLK + + lcpll_ddr crystal 0 BCM_NS2_LCPLL_DDR + pcie_sata_usb lcpll_ddr 1 BCM_NS2_LCPLL_DDR_PCIE_SATA_USB_CLK + ddr lcpll_ddr 2 BCM_NS2_LCPLL_DDR_DDR_CLK + ch2_unused lcpll_ddr 3 BCM_NS2_LCPLL_DDR_CH2_UNUSED + ch3_unused lcpll_ddr 4 BCM_NS2_LCPLL_DDR_CH3_UNUSED + ch4_unused lcpll_ddr 5 BCM_NS2_LCPLL_DDR_CH4_UNUSED + ch5_unused lcpll_ddr 6 BCM_NS2_LCPLL_DDR_CH5_UNUSED + + lcpll_ports crystal 0 BCM_NS2_LCPLL_PORTS + wan lcpll_ports 1 BCM_NS2_LCPLL_PORTS_WAN_CLK + rgmii lcpll_ports 2 BCM_NS2_LCPLL_PORTS_RGMII_CLK + ch2_unused lcpll_ports 3 BCM_NS2_LCPLL_PORTS_CH2_UNUSED + ch3_unused lcpll_ports 4 BCM_NS2_LCPLL_PORTS_CH3_UNUSED + ch4_unused lcpll_ports 5 BCM_NS2_LCPLL_PORTS_CH4_UNUSED + ch5_unused lcpll_ports 6 BCM_NS2_LCPLL_PORTS_CH5_UNUSED diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/qoriq-clock.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/qoriq-clock.txt index df4a259a6898..16a3ec433119 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/qoriq-clock.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/qoriq-clock.txt @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ * Clock Block on Freescale QorIQ Platforms -Freescale qoriq chips take primary clocking input from the external +Freescale QorIQ chips take primary clocking input from the external SYSCLK signal. The SYSCLK input (frequency) is multiplied using multiple phase locked loops (PLL) to create a variety of frequencies which can then be passed to a variety of internal logic, including @@ -13,14 +13,16 @@ which the chip complies. Chassis Version Example Chips --------------- ------------- 1.0 p4080, p5020, p5040 -2.0 t4240, b4860, t1040 +2.0 t4240, b4860 1. Clock Block Binding Required properties: -- compatible: Should contain a specific clock block compatible string - and a single chassis clock compatible string. - Clock block strings include, but not limited to, one of the: +- compatible: Should contain a chip-specific clock block compatible + string and (if applicable) may contain a chassis-version clock + compatible string. + + Chip-specific strings are of the form "fsl,<chip>-clockgen", such as: * "fsl,p2041-clockgen" * "fsl,p3041-clockgen" * "fsl,p4080-clockgen" @@ -30,15 +32,14 @@ Required properties: * "fsl,b4420-clockgen" * "fsl,b4860-clockgen" * "fsl,ls1021a-clockgen" - Chassis clock strings include: + Chassis-version clock strings include: * "fsl,qoriq-clockgen-1.0": for chassis 1.0 clocks * "fsl,qoriq-clockgen-2.0": for chassis 2.0 clocks - reg: Describes the address of the device's resources within the address space defined by its parent bus, and resource zero represents the clock register set -- clock-frequency: Input system clock frequency -Recommended properties: +Optional properties: - ranges: Allows valid translation between child's address space and parent's. Must be present if the device has sub-nodes. - #address-cells: Specifies the number of cells used to represent @@ -47,8 +48,46 @@ Recommended properties: - #size-cells: Specifies the number of cells used to represent the size of an address. Must be present if the device has sub-nodes and set to 1 if present +- clock-frequency: Input system clock frequency (SYSCLK) +- clocks: If clock-frequency is not specified, sysclk may be provided + as an input clock. Either clock-frequency or clocks must be + provided. + +2. Clock Provider + +The clockgen node should act as a clock provider, though in older device +trees the children of the clockgen node are the clock providers. + +When the clockgen node is a clock provider, #clock-cells = <2>. +The first cell of the clock specifier is the clock type, and the +second cell is the clock index for the specified type. + + Type# Name Index Cell + 0 sysclk must be 0 + 1 cmux index (n in CLKCnCSR) + 2 hwaccel index (n in CLKCGnHWACSR) + 3 fman 0 for fm1, 1 for fm2 + 4 platform pll 0=pll, 1=pll/2, 2=pll/3, 3=pll/4 + +3. Example + + clockgen: global-utilities@e1000 { + compatible = "fsl,p5020-clockgen", "fsl,qoriq-clockgen-1.0"; + clock-frequency = <133333333>; + reg = <0xe1000 0x1000>; + #clock-cells = <2>; + }; + + fman@400000 { + ... + clocks = <&clockgen 3 0>; + ... + }; +} +4. Legacy Child Nodes -2. Clock Provider/Consumer Binding +NOTE: These nodes are deprecated. Kernels should continue to support +device trees with these nodes, but new device trees should not use them. Most of the bindings are from the common clock binding[1]. [1] Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/clock-bindings.txt @@ -82,7 +121,7 @@ Recommended properties: - reg: Should be the offset and length of clock block base address. The length should be 4. -Example for clock block and clock provider: +Legacy Example: / { clockgen: global-utilities@e1000 { compatible = "fsl,p5020-clockgen", "fsl,qoriq-clockgen-1.0"; @@ -142,7 +181,7 @@ Example for clock block and clock provider: }; }; -Example for clock consumer: +Example for legacy clock consumer: / { cpu0: PowerPC,e5500@0 { diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/renesas,cpg-div6-clocks.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/renesas,cpg-div6-clocks.txt index 5ddb68418655..38dcf0370143 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/renesas,cpg-div6-clocks.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/renesas,cpg-div6-clocks.txt @@ -1,7 +1,7 @@ * Renesas CPG DIV6 Clock The CPG DIV6 clocks are variable factor clocks provided by the Clock Pulse -Generator (CPG). They clock input is divided by a configurable factor from 1 +Generator (CPG). Their clock input is divided by a configurable factor from 1 to 64. Required Properties: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/renesas,cpg-mssr.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/renesas,cpg-mssr.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..59297d34b208 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/renesas,cpg-mssr.txt @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ +* Renesas Clock Pulse Generator / Module Standby and Software Reset + +On Renesas ARM SoCs (SH/R-Mobile, R-Car, RZ), the CPG (Clock Pulse Generator) +and MSSR (Module Standby and Software Reset) blocks are intimately connected, +and share the same register block. + +They provide the following functionalities: + - The CPG block generates various core clocks, + - The MSSR block provides two functions: + 1. Module Standby, providing a Clock Domain to control the clock supply + to individual SoC devices, + 2. Reset Control, to perform a software reset of individual SoC devices. + +Required Properties: + - compatible: Must be one of: + - "renesas,r8a7795-cpg-mssr" for the r8a7795 SoC + + - reg: Base address and length of the memory resource used by the CPG/MSSR + block + + - clocks: References to external parent clocks, one entry for each entry in + clock-names + - clock-names: List of external parent clock names. Valid names are: + - "extal" (r8a7795) + - "extalr" (r8a7795) + + - #clock-cells: Must be 2 + - For CPG core clocks, the two clock specifier cells must be "CPG_CORE" + and a core clock reference, as defined in + <dt-bindings/clock/*-cpg-mssr.h>. + - For module clocks, the two clock specifier cells must be "CPG_MOD" and + a module number, as defined in the datasheet. + + - #power-domain-cells: Must be 0 + - SoC devices that are part of the CPG/MSSR Clock Domain and can be + power-managed through Module Standby should refer to the CPG device + node in their "power-domains" property, as documented by the generic PM + Domain bindings in + Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/power_domain.txt. + + +Examples +-------- + + - CPG device node: + + cpg: clock-controller@e6150000 { + compatible = "renesas,r8a7795-cpg-mssr"; + reg = <0 0xe6150000 0 0x1000>; + clocks = <&extal_clk>, <&extalr_clk>; + clock-names = "extal", "extalr"; + #clock-cells = <2>; + #power-domain-cells = <0>; + }; + + + - CPG/MSSR Clock Domain member device node: + + scif2: serial@e6e88000 { + compatible = "renesas,scif-r8a7795", "renesas,scif"; + reg = <0 0xe6e88000 0 64>; + interrupts = <GIC_SPI 164 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>; + clocks = <&cpg CPG_MOD 310>; + clock-names = "sci_ick"; + dmas = <&dmac1 0x13>, <&dmac1 0x12>; + dma-names = "tx", "rx"; + power-domains = <&cpg>; + status = "disabled"; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/silabs,si514.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/silabs,si514.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..ea1a9dbc63b6 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/silabs,si514.txt @@ -0,0 +1,24 @@ +Binding for Silicon Labs 514 programmable I2C clock generator. + +Reference +This binding uses the common clock binding[1]. Details about the device can be +found in the datasheet[2]. + +[1] Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/clock-bindings.txt +[2] Si514 datasheet + http://www.silabs.com/Support%20Documents/TechnicalDocs/si514.pdf + +Required properties: + - compatible: Shall be "silabs,si514" + - reg: I2C device address. + - #clock-cells: From common clock bindings: Shall be 0. + +Optional properties: + - clock-output-names: From common clock bindings. Recommended to be "si514". + +Example: + si514: clock-generator@55 { + reg = <0x55>; + #clock-cells = <0>; + compatible = "silabs,si514"; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/st/st,clkgen-pll.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/st/st,clkgen-pll.txt index d8b168ebd5f1..844b3a0976bf 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/st/st,clkgen-pll.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/st/st,clkgen-pll.txt @@ -23,6 +23,7 @@ Required properties: "st,stih407-plls-c32-a9", "st,clkgen-plls-c32" "sst,plls-c32-cx_0", "st,clkgen-plls-c32" "sst,plls-c32-cx_1", "st,clkgen-plls-c32" + "st,stih418-plls-c28-a9", "st,clkgen-plls-c32" "st,stih415-gpu-pll-c32", "st,clkgengpu-pll-c32" "st,stih416-gpu-pll-c32", "st,clkgengpu-pll-c32" diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/edac/apm-xgene-edac.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/edac/apm-xgene-edac.txt index 78edb80002c8..78e2a31c58d0 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/edac/apm-xgene-edac.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/edac/apm-xgene-edac.txt @@ -5,6 +5,8 @@ The follow error types are supported: memory controller - Memory controller PMD (L1/L2) - Processor module unit (PMD) L1/L2 cache + L3 - L3 cache controller + SoC - SoC IP's such as Ethernet, SATA, and etc The following section describes the EDAC DT node binding. @@ -30,6 +32,17 @@ Required properties for PMD subnode: - reg : First resource shall be the PMD resource. - pmd-controller : Instance number of the PMD controller. +Required properties for L3 subnode: +- compatible : Shall be "apm,xgene-edac-l3" or + "apm,xgene-edac-l3-v2". +- reg : First resource shall be the L3 EDAC resource. + +Required properties for SoC subnode: +- compatible : Shall be "apm,xgene-edac-soc-v1" for revision 1 or + "apm,xgene-edac-l3-soc" for general value reporting + only. +- reg : First resource shall be the SoC EDAC resource. + Example: csw: csw@7e200000 { compatible = "apm,xgene-csw", "syscon"; @@ -76,4 +89,14 @@ Example: reg = <0x0 0x7c000000 0x0 0x200000>; pmd-controller = <0>; }; + + edacl3@7e600000 { + compatible = "apm,xgene-edac-l3"; + reg = <0x0 0x7e600000 0x0 0x1000>; + }; + + edacsoc@7e930000 { + compatible = "apm,xgene-edac-soc-v1"; + reg = <0x0 0x7e930000 0x0 0x1000>; + }; }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/extcon/extcon-arizona.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/extcon/extcon-arizona.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..e1705fae63a8 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/extcon/extcon-arizona.txt @@ -0,0 +1,15 @@ +Cirrus Logic Arizona class audio SoCs + +These devices are audio SoCs with extensive digital capabilities and a range +of analogue I/O. + +This document lists Extcon specific bindings, see the primary binding document: + ../mfd/arizona.txt + +Optional properties: + + - wlf,hpdet-channel : Headphone detection channel. + ARIZONA_ACCDET_MODE_HPL or 1 - Headphone detect mode is set to HPDETL + ARIZONA_ACCDET_MODE_HPR or 2 - Headphone detect mode is set to HPDETR + If this node is not mentioned or if the value is unknown, then + headphone detection mode is set to HPDETL. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/fpga/xilinx-zynq-fpga-mgr.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/fpga/xilinx-zynq-fpga-mgr.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..7018aa896835 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/fpga/xilinx-zynq-fpga-mgr.txt @@ -0,0 +1,19 @@ +Xilinx Zynq FPGA Manager + +Required properties: +- compatible: should contain "xlnx,zynq-devcfg-1.0" +- reg: base address and size for memory mapped io +- interrupts: interrupt for the FPGA manager device +- clocks: phandle for clocks required operation +- clock-names: name for the clock, should be "ref_clk" +- syscon: phandle for access to SLCR registers + +Example: + devcfg: devcfg@f8007000 { + compatible = "xlnx,zynq-devcfg-1.0"; + reg = <0xf8007000 0x100>; + interrupts = <0 8 4>; + clocks = <&clkc 12>; + clock-names = "ref_clk"; + syscon = <&slcr>; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-msm.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-msm.txt deleted file mode 100644 index ac20e68a004e..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-msm.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,26 +0,0 @@ -MSM GPIO controller bindings - -Required properties: -- compatible: - - "qcom,msm-gpio" for MSM controllers -- #gpio-cells : Should be two. - - first cell is the pin number - - second cell is used to specify optional parameters (unused) -- gpio-controller : Marks the device node as a GPIO controller. -- #interrupt-cells : Should be 2. -- interrupt-controller: Mark the device node as an interrupt controller -- interrupts : Specify the TLMM summary interrupt number -- ngpio : Specify the number of MSM GPIOs - -Example: - - msmgpio: gpio@fd510000 { - compatible = "qcom,msm-gpio"; - gpio-controller; - #gpio-cells = <2>; - interrupt-controller; - #interrupt-cells = <2>; - reg = <0xfd510000 0x4000>; - interrupts = <0 208 0>; - ngpio = <150>; - }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-pca953x.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-pca953x.txt index b9a42f294dd0..13df9933f4cd 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-pca953x.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-pca953x.txt @@ -24,6 +24,7 @@ Required properties: ti,tca6408 ti,tca6416 ti,tca6424 + ti,tca9539 exar,xra1202 Example: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-zynq.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-zynq.txt index db4c6a663c03..7b542657f259 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-zynq.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-zynq.txt @@ -12,6 +12,13 @@ Required properties: - interrupts : Interrupt specifier (see interrupt bindings for details) - interrupt-parent : Must be core interrupt controller +- interrupt-controller : Marks the device node as an interrupt controller. +- #interrupt-cells : Should be 2. The first cell is the GPIO number. + The second cell bits[3:0] is used to specify trigger type and level flags: + 1 = low-to-high edge triggered. + 2 = high-to-low edge triggered. + 4 = active high level-sensitive. + 8 = active low level-sensitive. - reg : Address and length of the register set for the device Example: @@ -22,5 +29,7 @@ Example: gpio-controller; interrupt-parent = <&intc>; interrupts = <0 20 4>; + interrupt-controller; + #interrupt-cells = <2>; reg = <0xe000a000 0x1000>; }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio.txt index 5788d5cf1252..069cdf6f9dac 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio.txt @@ -16,7 +16,9 @@ properties, each containing a 'gpio-list': GPIO properties should be named "[<name>-]gpios", with <name> being the purpose of this GPIO for the device. While a non-existent <name> is considered valid for compatibility reasons (resolving to the "gpios" property), it is not allowed -for new bindings. +for new bindings. Also, GPIO properties named "[<name>-]gpio" are valid and old +bindings use it, but are only supported for compatibility reasons and should not +be used for newer bindings since it has been deprecated. GPIO properties can contain one or more GPIO phandles, but only in exceptional cases should they contain more than one. If your device uses several GPIOs with @@ -52,9 +54,13 @@ only uses one. gpio-specifier may encode: bank, pin position inside the bank, whether pin is open-drain and whether pin is logically inverted. + Exact meaning of each specifier cell is controller specific, and must -be documented in the device tree binding for the device. Use the macros -defined in include/dt-bindings/gpio/gpio.h whenever possible: +be documented in the device tree binding for the device. + +Most controllers are however specifying a generic flag bitfield +in the last cell, so for these, use the macros defined in +include/dt-bindings/gpio/gpio.h whenever possible: Example of a node using GPIOs: @@ -65,6 +71,15 @@ Example of a node using GPIOs: GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH is 0, so in this example gpio-specifier is "18 0" and encodes GPIO pin number, and GPIO flags as accepted by the "qe_pio_e" gpio-controller. +Optional standard bitfield specifiers for the last cell: + +- Bit 0: 0 means active high, 1 means active low +- Bit 1: 1 means single-ended wiring, see: + https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Single-ended_triode + When used with active-low, this means open drain/collector, see: + https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Open_collector + When used with active-high, this means open source/emitter + 1.1) GPIO specifier best practices ---------------------------------- @@ -116,6 +131,30 @@ Every GPIO controller node must contain both an empty "gpio-controller" property, and a #gpio-cells integer property, which indicates the number of cells in a gpio-specifier. +Optionally, a GPIO controller may have a "ngpios" property. This property +indicates the number of in-use slots of available slots for GPIOs. The +typical example is something like this: the hardware register is 32 bits +wide, but only 18 of the bits have a physical counterpart. The driver is +generally written so that all 32 bits can be used, but the IP block is reused +in a lot of designs, some using all 32 bits, some using 18 and some using +12. In this case, setting "ngpios = <18>;" informs the driver that only the +first 18 GPIOs, at local offset 0 .. 17, are in use. + +If these GPIOs do not happen to be the first N GPIOs at offset 0...N-1, an +additional bitmask is needed to specify which GPIOs are actually in use, +and which are dummies. The bindings for this case has not yet been +specified, but should be specified if/when such hardware appears. + +Example: + +gpio-controller@00000000 { + compatible = "foo"; + reg = <0x00000000 0x1000>; + gpio-controller; + #gpio-cells = <2>; + ngpios = <18>; +} + The GPIO chip may contain GPIO hog definitions. GPIO hogging is a mechanism providing automatic GPIO request and configuration as part of the gpio-controller's driver probe function. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/netxbig-gpio-ext.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/netxbig-gpio-ext.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..50ec2e690701 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/netxbig-gpio-ext.txt @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +Binding for the GPIO extension bus found on some LaCie/Seagate boards +(Example: 2Big/5Big Network v2, 2Big NAS). + +Required properties: +- compatible: "lacie,netxbig-gpio-ext". +- addr-gpios: GPIOs representing the address register (LSB -> MSB). +- data-gpios: GPIOs representing the data register (LSB -> MSB). +- enable-gpio: latches the new configuration (address, data) on raising edge. + +Example: + +netxbig_gpio_ext: netxbig-gpio-ext { + compatible = "lacie,netxbig-gpio-ext"; + + addr-gpios = <&gpio1 15 GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH + &gpio1 16 GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH + &gpio1 17 GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH>; + data-gpios = <&gpio1 12 GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH + &gpio1 13 GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH + &gpio1 14 GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH>; + enable-gpio = <&gpio0 29 GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH>; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/trivial-devices.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/trivial-devices.txt index d77d412cbc68..c50cf13c852e 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/trivial-devices.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/trivial-devices.txt @@ -54,7 +54,6 @@ epson,rx8581 I2C-BUS INTERFACE REAL TIME CLOCK MODULE fsl,mag3110 MAG3110: Xtrinsic High Accuracy, 3D Magnetometer fsl,mc13892 MC13892: Power Management Integrated Circuit (PMIC) for i.MX35/51 fsl,mma8450 MMA8450Q: Xtrinsic Low-power, 3-axis Xtrinsic Accelerometer -fsl,mma8452 MMA8452Q: 3-axis 12-bit / 8-bit Digital Accelerometer fsl,mpr121 MPR121: Proximity Capacitive Touch Sensor Controller fsl,sgtl5000 SGTL5000: Ultra Low-Power Audio Codec gmt,g751 G751: Digital Temperature Sensor and Thermal Watchdog with Two-Wire Interface @@ -80,6 +79,7 @@ oki,ml86v7667 OKI ML86V7667 video decoder ovti,ov5642 OV5642: Color CMOS QSXGA (5-megapixel) Image Sensor with OmniBSI and Embedded TrueFocus pericom,pt7c4338 Real-time Clock Module plx,pex8648 48-Lane, 12-Port PCI Express Gen 2 (5.0 GT/s) Switch +pulsedlight,lidar-lite-v2 Pulsedlight LIDAR range-finding sensor ramtron,24c64 i2c serial eeprom (24cxx) ricoh,r2025sd I2C bus SERIAL INTERFACE REAL-TIME CLOCK IC ricoh,r2221tl I2C bus SERIAL INTERFACE REAL-TIME CLOCK IC @@ -88,6 +88,7 @@ ricoh,rs5c372b I2C bus SERIAL INTERFACE REAL-TIME CLOCK IC ricoh,rv5c386 I2C bus SERIAL INTERFACE REAL-TIME CLOCK IC ricoh,rv5c387a I2C bus SERIAL INTERFACE REAL-TIME CLOCK IC samsung,24ad0xd1 S524AD0XF1 (128K/256K-bit Serial EEPROM for Low Power) +sgx,vz89x SGX Sensortech VZ89X Sensors sii,s35390a 2-wire CMOS real-time clock skyworks,sky81452 Skyworks SKY81452: Six-Channel White LED Driver with Touch Panel Bias Supply st-micro,24c256 i2c serial eeprom (24cxx) diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/accel/bma180.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/accel/bma180.txt index c5933573e0f6..4a3679d54457 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/accel/bma180.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/accel/bma180.txt @@ -1,10 +1,11 @@ -* Bosch BMA180 triaxial acceleration sensor +* Bosch BMA180 / BMA250 triaxial acceleration sensor http://omapworld.com/BMA180_111_1002839.pdf +http://ae-bst.resource.bosch.com/media/products/dokumente/bma250/bst-bma250-ds002-05.pdf Required properties: - - compatible : should be "bosch,bma180" + - compatible : should be "bosch,bma180" or "bosch,bma250" - reg : the I2C address of the sensor Optional properties: @@ -13,6 +14,9 @@ Optional properties: - interrupts : interrupt mapping for GPIO IRQ, it should by configured with flags IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH | IRQ_TYPE_EDGE_RISING + For the bma250 the first interrupt listed must be the one + connected to the INT1 pin, the second (optional) interrupt + listed must be the one connected to the INT2 pin. Example: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/accel/mma8452.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/accel/mma8452.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..e3c37467d7da --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/accel/mma8452.txt @@ -0,0 +1,24 @@ +Freescale MMA8452Q, MMA8453Q, MMA8652FC or MMA8653FC triaxial accelerometer + +Required properties: + + - compatible: should contain one of + * "fsl,mma8452" + * "fsl,mma8453" + * "fsl,mma8652" + * "fsl,mma8653" + - reg: the I2C address of the chip + +Optional properties: + + - interrupt-parent: should be the phandle for the interrupt controller + - interrupts: interrupt mapping for GPIO IRQ + +Example: + + mma8453fc@1d { + compatible = "fsl,mma8453"; + reg = <0x1d>; + interrupt-parent = <&gpio1>; + interrupts = <5 0>; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/hi8435.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/hi8435.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..3b0348c5e516 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/hi8435.txt @@ -0,0 +1,21 @@ +Holt Integrated Circuits HI-8435 threshold detector bindings + +Required properties: + - compatible: should be "holt,hi8435" + - reg: spi chip select number for the device + +Recommended properties: + - spi-max-frequency: definition as per + Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-bus.txt + +Optional properties: + - gpios: GPIO used for controlling the reset pin + +Example: +sensor@0 { + compatible = "holt,hi8435"; + reg = <0>; + gpios = <&gpio6 1 0>; + + spi-max-frequency = <1000000>; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/light/apds9960.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/light/apds9960.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..174b709f16db --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/light/apds9960.txt @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +* Avago APDS9960 gesture/RGB/ALS/proximity sensor + +http://www.avagotech.com/docs/AV02-4191EN + +Required properties: + + - compatible: must be "avago,apds9960" + - reg: the I2c address of the sensor + - interrupt-parent: should be the phandle for the interrupt controller + - interrupts : the sole interrupt generated by the device + + Refer to interrupt-controller/interrupts.txt for generic interrupt client + node bindings. + +Example: + +apds9960@39 { + compatible = "avago,apds9960"; + reg = <0x39>; + interrupt-parent = <&gpio1>; + interrupts = <16 1>; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/light/us5182d.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/light/us5182d.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..6f0a530144fd --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/light/us5182d.txt @@ -0,0 +1,34 @@ +* UPISEMI us5182d I2C ALS and Proximity sensor + +Required properties: +- compatible: must be "upisemi,usd5182" +- reg: the I2C address of the device + +Optional properties: +- upisemi,glass-coef: glass attenuation factor - compensation factor of + resolution 1000 for material transmittance. +- upisemi,dark-ths: array of 8 elements containing 16-bit thresholds (adc + counts) corresponding to every scale. +- upisemi,upper-dark-gain: 8-bit dark gain compensation factor(4 int and 4 + fractional bits - Q4.4) applied when light > threshold +- upisemi,lower-dark-gain: 8-bit dark gain compensation factor(4 int and 4 + fractional bits - Q4.4) applied when light < threshold + +If the optional properties are not specified these factors will default to the +values in the below example. +The glass-coef defaults to no compensation for the covering material. +The threshold array defaults to experimental values that work with US5182D +sensor on evaluation board - roughly between 12-32 lux. +There will be no dark-gain compensation by default when ALS > thresh +(0 * dark-gain), and a 1.35 compensation factor when ALS < thresh. + +Example: + + usd5182@39 { + compatible = "upisemi,usd5182"; + reg = <0x39>; + upisemi,glass-coef = < 1000 >; + upisemi,dark-ths = /bits/ 16 <170 200 512 512 800 2000 4000 8000>; + upisemi,upper-dark-gain = /bits/ 8 <0x00>; + upisemi,lower-dark-gain = /bits/ 8 <0x16>; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/cypress,cyapa.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/cypress,cyapa.txt index 635a3b036630..8d91ba9ff2fd 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/cypress,cyapa.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/cypress,cyapa.txt @@ -25,7 +25,7 @@ Example: /* Cypress Gen3 touchpad */ touchpad@67 { compatible = "cypress,cyapa"; - reg = <0x24>; + reg = <0x67>; interrupt-parent = <&gpio>; interrupts = <2 IRQ_TYPE_EDGE_FALLING>; /* GPIO 2 */ wakeup-source; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/qca,ath79-misc-intc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/qca,ath79-misc-intc.txt index 391717a68f3b..ec96b1f01478 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/qca,ath79-misc-intc.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/qca,ath79-misc-intc.txt @@ -4,8 +4,8 @@ The MISC interrupt controller is a secondary controller for lower priority interrupt. Required Properties: -- compatible: has to be "qca,<soctype>-cpu-intc", "qca,ar7100-misc-intc" - as fallback +- compatible: has to be "qca,<soctype>-cpu-intc", "qca,ar7100-misc-intc" or + "qca,<soctype>-cpu-intc", "qca,ar7240-misc-intc" - reg: Base address and size of the controllers memory area - interrupt-parent: phandle of the parent interrupt controller. - interrupts: Interrupt specifier for the controllers interrupt. @@ -13,6 +13,9 @@ Required Properties: - #interrupt-cells : Specifies the number of cells needed to encode interrupt source, should be 1 +Compatible fallback depends on the SoC. Use ar7100 for ar71xx and ar913x, +use ar7240 for all other SoCs. + Please refer to interrupts.txt in this directory for details of the common Interrupt Controllers bindings used by client devices. @@ -28,3 +31,16 @@ Example: interrupt-controller; #interrupt-cells = <1>; }; + +Another example: + + interrupt-controller@18060010 { + compatible = "qca,ar9331-misc-intc", qca,ar7240-misc-intc"; + reg = <0x18060010 0x4>; + + interrupt-parent = <&cpuintc>; + interrupts = <6>; + + interrupt-controller; + #interrupt-cells = <1>; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/renesas,irqc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/renesas,irqc.txt index 63633bdea7e4..ae5054c27c99 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/renesas,irqc.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/renesas,irqc.txt @@ -10,6 +10,7 @@ Required properties: - "renesas,irqc-r8a7792" (R-Car V2H) - "renesas,irqc-r8a7793" (R-Car M2-N) - "renesas,irqc-r8a7794" (R-Car E2) + - "renesas,intc-ex-r8a7795" (R-Car H3) - #interrupt-cells: has to be <2>: an interrupt index and flags, as defined in interrupts.txt in this directory - clocks: Must contain a reference to the functional clock. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iommu/arm,smmu-v3.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iommu/arm,smmu-v3.txt index 3443e0f838df..947863acc2d4 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iommu/arm,smmu-v3.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iommu/arm,smmu-v3.txt @@ -36,5 +36,24 @@ the PCIe specification. NOTE: this only applies to the SMMU itself, not masters connected upstream of the SMMU. +- msi-parent : See the generic MSI binding described in + devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/msi.txt + for a description of the msi-parent property. + - hisilicon,broken-prefetch-cmd : Avoid sending CMD_PREFETCH_* commands to the SMMU. + +** Example + + smmu@2b400000 { + compatible = "arm,smmu-v3"; + reg = <0x0 0x2b400000 0x0 0x20000>; + interrupts = <GIC_SPI 74 IRQ_TYPE_EDGE_RISING>, + <GIC_SPI 75 IRQ_TYPE_EDGE_RISING>, + <GIC_SPI 77 IRQ_TYPE_EDGE_RISING>, + <GIC_SPI 79 IRQ_TYPE_EDGE_RISING>; + interrupt-names = "eventq", "priq", "cmdq-sync", "gerror"; + dma-coherent; + #iommu-cells = <0>; + msi-parent = <&its 0xff0000>; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iommu/ti,omap-iommu.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iommu/ti,omap-iommu.txt index 869699925fd5..4bd10dd881b8 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iommu/ti,omap-iommu.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iommu/ti,omap-iommu.txt @@ -4,6 +4,7 @@ Required properties: - compatible : Should be one of, "ti,omap2-iommu" for OMAP2/OMAP3 IOMMU instances "ti,omap4-iommu" for OMAP4/OMAP5 IOMMU instances + "ti,dra7-dsp-iommu" for DRA7xx DSP IOMMU instances "ti,dra7-iommu" for DRA7xx IOMMU instances - ti,hwmods : Name of the hwmod associated with the IOMMU instance - reg : Address space for the configuration registers @@ -19,6 +20,13 @@ Optional properties: Should be either 8 or 32 (default: 32) - ti,iommu-bus-err-back : Indicates the IOMMU instance supports throwing back a bus error response on MMU faults. +- ti,syscon-mmuconfig : Should be a pair of the phandle to the DSP_SYSTEM + syscon node that contains the additional control + register for enabling the MMU, and the MMU instance + number (0-indexed) within the sub-system. This property + is required for DSP IOMMU instances on DRA7xx SoCs. The + instance number should be 0 for DSP MDMA MMUs and 1 for + DSP EDMA MMUs. Example: /* OMAP3 ISP MMU */ @@ -30,3 +38,22 @@ Example: ti,hwmods = "mmu_isp"; ti,#tlb-entries = <8>; }; + + /* DRA74x DSP2 MMUs */ + mmu0_dsp2: mmu@41501000 { + compatible = "ti,dra7-dsp-iommu"; + reg = <0x41501000 0x100>; + interrupts = <GIC_SPI 146 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>; + ti,hwmods = "mmu0_dsp2"; + #iommu-cells = <0>; + ti,syscon-mmuconfig = <&dsp2_system 0x0>; + }; + + mmu1_dsp2: mmu@41502000 { + compatible = "ti,dra7-dsp-iommu"; + reg = <0x41502000 0x100>; + interrupts = <GIC_SPI 147 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>; + ti,hwmods = "mmu1_dsp2"; + #iommu-cells = <0>; + ti,syscon-mmuconfig = <&dsp2_system 0x1>; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/leds/leds-aat1290.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/leds/leds-aat1290.txt index c05ed91a4e42..85c0c58617f6 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/leds/leds-aat1290.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/leds/leds-aat1290.txt @@ -27,9 +27,9 @@ Required properties of the LED child node: - flash-max-microamp : see Documentation/devicetree/bindings/leds/common.txt Maximum flash LED supply current can be calculated using following formula: I = 1A * 162kohm / Rset. -- flash-timeout-us : see Documentation/devicetree/bindings/leds/common.txt - Maximum flash timeout can be calculated using following - formula: T = 8.82 * 10^9 * Ct. +- flash-max-timeout-us : see Documentation/devicetree/bindings/leds/common.txt + Maximum flash timeout can be calculated using following + formula: T = 8.82 * 10^9 * Ct. Optional properties of the LED child node: - label : see Documentation/devicetree/bindings/leds/common.txt @@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ aat1290 { label = "aat1290-flash"; led-max-microamp = <520833>; flash-max-microamp = <1012500>; - flash-timeout-us = <1940000>; + flash-max-timeout-us = <1940000>; }; }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/leds/leds-bcm6328.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/leds/leds-bcm6328.txt index f9e36adc0ebf..3f48c1eaf085 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/leds/leds-bcm6328.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/leds/leds-bcm6328.txt @@ -29,6 +29,14 @@ Required properties: Optional properties: - brcm,serial-leds : Boolean, enables Serial LEDs. Default : false + - brcm,serial-mux : Boolean, enables Serial LEDs multiplexing. + Default : false + - brcm,serial-clk-low : Boolean, makes clock signal active low. + Default : false + - brcm,serial-dat-low : Boolean, makes data signal active low. + Default : false + - brcm,serial-shift-inv : Boolean, inverts Serial LEDs shift direction. + Default : false Each LED is represented as a sub-node of the brcm,bcm6328-leds device. @@ -110,6 +118,8 @@ Scenario 2 : BCM63268 with Serial/GPHY0 LEDs #size-cells = <0>; reg = <0x10001900 0x24>; brcm,serial-leds; + brcm,serial-dat-low; + brcm,serial-shift-inv; gphy0_spd0@0 { reg = <0>; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/leds/leds-netxbig.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/leds/leds-netxbig.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..5ef92a26d768 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/leds/leds-netxbig.txt @@ -0,0 +1,92 @@ +Binding for the CPLD LEDs (GPIO extension bus) found on some LaCie/Seagate +boards (Example: 2Big/5Big Network v2, 2Big NAS). + +Required properties: +- compatible: "lacie,netxbig-leds". +- gpio-ext: Phandle for the gpio-ext bus. + +Optional properties: +- timers: Timer array. Each timer entry is represented by three integers: + Mode (gpio-ext bus), delay_on and delay_off. + +Each LED is represented as a sub-node of the netxbig-leds device. + +Required sub-node properties: +- mode-addr: Mode register address on gpio-ext bus. +- mode-val: Mode to value mapping. Each entry is represented by two integers: + A mode and the corresponding value on the gpio-ext bus. +- bright-addr: Brightness register address on gpio-ext bus. +- max-brightness: Maximum brightness value. + +Optional sub-node properties: +- label: Name for this LED. If omitted, the label is taken from the node name. +- linux,default-trigger: Trigger assigned to the LED. + +Example: + +netxbig-leds { + compatible = "lacie,netxbig-leds"; + + gpio-ext = &gpio_ext; + + timers = <NETXBIG_LED_TIMER1 500 500 + NETXBIG_LED_TIMER2 500 1000>; + + blue-power { + label = "netxbig:blue:power"; + mode-addr = <0>; + mode-val = <NETXBIG_LED_OFF 0 + NETXBIG_LED_ON 1 + NETXBIG_LED_TIMER1 3 + NETXBIG_LED_TIMER2 7>; + bright-addr = <1>; + max-brightness = <7>; + }; + red-power { + label = "netxbig:red:power"; + mode-addr = <0>; + mode-val = <NETXBIG_LED_OFF 0 + NETXBIG_LED_ON 2 + NETXBIG_LED_TIMER1 4>; + bright-addr = <1>; + max-brightness = <7>; + }; + blue-sata0 { + label = "netxbig:blue:sata0"; + mode-addr = <3>; + mode-val = <NETXBIG_LED_OFF 0 + NETXBIG_LED_ON 7 + NETXBIG_LED_SATA 1 + NETXBIG_LED_TIMER1 3>; + bright-addr = <2>; + max-brightness = <7>; + }; + red-sata0 { + label = "netxbig:red:sata0"; + mode-addr = <3>; + mode-val = <NETXBIG_LED_OFF 0 + NETXBIG_LED_ON 2 + NETXBIG_LED_TIMER1 4>; + bright-addr = <2>; + max-brightness = <7>; + }; + blue-sata1 { + label = "netxbig:blue:sata1"; + mode-addr = <4>; + mode-val = <NETXBIG_LED_OFF 0 + NETXBIG_LED_ON 7 + NETXBIG_LED_SATA 1 + NETXBIG_LED_TIMER1 3>; + bright-addr = <2>; + max-brightness = <7>; + }; + red-sata1 { + label = "netxbig:red:sata1"; + mode-addr = <4>; + mode-val = <NETXBIG_LED_OFF 0 + NETXBIG_LED_ON 2 + NETXBIG_LED_TIMER1 4>; + bright-addr = <2>; + max-brightness = <7>; + }; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mailbox/omap-mailbox.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mailbox/omap-mailbox.txt index d1a043339c11..9b40c4925aa9 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mailbox/omap-mailbox.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mailbox/omap-mailbox.txt @@ -75,6 +75,14 @@ data that represent the following: Cell #3 (usr_id) - mailbox user id for identifying the interrupt line associated with generating a tx/rx fifo interrupt. +Optional Properties: +-------------------- +- ti,mbox-send-noirq: Quirk flag to allow the client user of this sub-mailbox + to send messages without triggering a Tx ready interrupt, + and to control the Tx ticker. Should be used only on + sub-mailboxes used to communicate with WkupM3 remote + processor on AM33xx/AM43xx SoCs. + Mailbox Users: ============== A device needing to communicate with a target processor device should specify diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mailbox/sti-mailbox.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mailbox/sti-mailbox.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..b61eec920359 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mailbox/sti-mailbox.txt @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ +ST Microelectronics Mailbox Driver + +Each ST Mailbox IP currently consists of 4 instances of 32 channels. Messages +are passed between Application and Remote processors using shared memory. + +Controller +---------- + +Required properties: +- compatible : Should be "st,stih407-mailbox" +- reg : Offset and length of the device's register set +- mbox-name : Name of the mailbox +- #mbox-cells: : Must be 2 + <&phandle instance channel direction> + phandle : Label name of controller + instance : Instance number + channel : Channel number + +Optional properties +- interrupts : Contains the IRQ line for a Rx mailbox + +Example: + +mailbox0: mailbox@0 { + compatible = "st,stih407-mailbox"; + reg = <0x08f00000 0x1000>; + interrupts = <GIC_SPI 1 IRQ_TYPE_NONE>; + #mbox-cells = <2>; + mbox-name = "a9"; +}; + +Client +------ + +Required properties: +- compatible : Many (See the client docs) +- reg : Shared (between Application and Remote) memory address +- mboxes : Standard property to specify a Mailbox (See ./mailbox.txt) + Cells must match 'mbox-cells' (See Controller docs above) + +Optional properties +- mbox-names : Name given to channels seen in the 'mboxes' property. + +Example: + +mailbox_test { + compatible = "mailbox_test"; + reg = <0x[shared_memory_address], [shared_memory_size]>; + mboxes = <&mailbox2 0 1>, <&mailbox0 2 1>; + mbox-names = "tx", "rx"; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/exynos-jpeg-codec.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/exynos-jpeg-codec.txt index 4ef45636ebde..38941db23dd2 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/exynos-jpeg-codec.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/exynos-jpeg-codec.txt @@ -4,7 +4,8 @@ Required properties: - compatible : should be one of: "samsung,s5pv210-jpeg", "samsung,exynos4210-jpeg", - "samsung,exynos3250-jpeg", "samsung,exynos5420-jpeg"; + "samsung,exynos3250-jpeg", "samsung,exynos5420-jpeg", + "samsung,exynos5433-jpeg"; - reg : address and length of the JPEG codec IP register set; - interrupts : specifies the JPEG codec IP interrupt; - clock-names : should contain: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/arizona.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/arizona.txt index a8fee60dc20d..18be0cbfb456 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/arizona.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/arizona.txt @@ -44,7 +44,6 @@ Required properties: Optional properties: - wlf,reset : GPIO specifier for the GPIO controlling /RESET - - wlf,ldoena : GPIO specifier for the GPIO controlling LDOENA - wlf,gpio-defaults : A list of GPIO configuration register values. Defines for the appropriate values can found in <dt-bindings/mfd/arizona.txt>. If @@ -67,21 +66,13 @@ Optional properties: present, the number of values should be less than or equal to the number of inputs, unspecified inputs will use the chip default. - - wlf,hpdet-channel : Headphone detection channel. - ARIZONA_ACCDET_MODE_HPL or 1 - Headphone detect mode is set to HPDETL - ARIZONA_ACCDET_MODE_HPR or 2 - Headphone detect mode is set to HPDETR - If this node is not mentioned or if the value is unknown, then - headphone detection mode is set to HPDETL. - - DCVDD-supply, MICVDD-supply : Power supplies, only need to be specified if they are being externally supplied. As covered in Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/regulator.txt -Optional subnodes: - - ldo1 : Initial data for the LDO1 regulator, as covered in - Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/regulator.txt - - micvdd : Initial data for the MICVDD regulator, as covered in - Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/regulator.txt +Also see child specific device properties: + Regulator - ../regulator/arizona-regulator.txt + Extcon - ../extcon/extcon-arizona.txt Example: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/atmel-flexcom.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/atmel-flexcom.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..692300117c64 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/atmel-flexcom.txt @@ -0,0 +1,63 @@ +* Device tree bindings for Atmel Flexcom (Flexible Serial Communication Unit) + +The Atmel Flexcom is just a wrapper which embeds a SPI controller, an I2C +controller and an USART. Only one function can be used at a time and is chosen +at boot time according to the device tree. + +Required properties: +- compatible: Should be "atmel,sama5d2-flexcom" +- reg: Should be the offset/length value for Flexcom dedicated + I/O registers (without USART, TWI or SPI registers). +- clocks: Should be the Flexcom peripheral clock from PMC. +- #address-cells: Should be <1> +- #size-cells: Should be <1> +- ranges: Should be one range for the full I/O register region + (including USART, TWI and SPI registers). +- atmel,flexcom-mode: Should be one of the following values: + - <1> for USART + - <2> for SPI + - <3> for I2C + +Required child: +A single available child device of type matching the "atmel,flexcom-mode" +property. + +The phandle provided by the clocks property of the child is the same as one for +the Flexcom parent. + +For other properties, please refer to the documentations of the respective +device: +- ../serial/atmel-usart.txt +- ../spi/spi_atmel.txt +- ../i2c/i2c-at91.txt + +Example: + +flexcom@f8034000 { + compatible = "atmel,sama5d2-flexcom"; + reg = <0xf8034000 0x200>; + clocks = <&flx0_clk>; + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <1>; + ranges = <0x0 0xf8034000 0x800>; + atmel,flexcom-mode = <2>; + + spi@400 { + compatible = "atmel,at91rm9200-spi"; + reg = <0x400 0x200>; + interrupts = <19 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH 7>; + pinctrl-names = "default"; + pinctrl-0 = <&pinctrl_flx0_default>; + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <0>; + clocks = <&flx0_clk>; + clock-names = "spi_clk"; + atmel,fifo-size = <32>; + + mtd_dataflash@0 { + compatible = "atmel,at25f512b"; + reg = <0>; + spi-max-frequency = <20000000>; + }; + }; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/axp20x.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/axp20x.txt index 41811223e5be..a474359dd206 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/axp20x.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/axp20x.txt @@ -60,8 +60,8 @@ DCDC2 : DC-DC buck : vin2-supply DCDC3 : DC-DC buck : vin3-supply DCDC4 : DC-DC buck : vin4-supply DCDC5 : DC-DC buck : vin5-supply -DC1SW : On/Off Switch : dcdc1-supply : DCDC1 secondary output -DC5LDO : LDO : dcdc5-supply : input from DCDC5 +DC1SW : On/Off Switch : : DCDC1 secondary output +DC5LDO : LDO : : input from DCDC5 ALDO1 : LDO : aldoin-supply : shared supply ALDO2 : LDO : aldoin-supply : shared supply ALDO3 : LDO : aldoin-supply : shared supply diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/cros-ec.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/cros-ec.txt index 1777916e9e28..136e0c2da44d 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/cros-ec.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/cros-ec.txt @@ -34,6 +34,10 @@ Required properties (LPC): - compatible: "google,cros-ec-lpc" - reg: List of (IO address, size) pairs defining the interface uses +Optional properties (all): +- google,has-vbc-nvram: Some implementations of the EC include a small + nvram space used to store verified boot context data. This boolean flag + is used to specify whether this nvram is present or not. Example for I2C: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/da9150.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/da9150.txt index d0588eaa0d71..fd4dca7f4aba 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/da9150.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/da9150.txt @@ -6,6 +6,7 @@ Device Description ------ ----------- da9150-gpadc : General Purpose ADC da9150-charger : Battery Charger +da9150-fg : Battery Fuel-Gauge ====== @@ -16,13 +17,13 @@ Required properties: the IRQs from da9150 are delivered to. - interrupts: IRQ line info for da9150 chip. - interrupt-controller: da9150 has internal IRQs (own IRQ domain). - (See Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/interrupts.txt for + (See ../interrupt-controller/interrupts.txt for further information relating to interrupt properties) Sub-devices: -- da9150-gpadc: See Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/da9150-gpadc.txt -- da9150-charger: See Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/da9150-charger.txt - +- da9150-gpadc: See ../iio/adc/da9150-gpadc.txt +- da9150-charger: See ../power/da9150-charger.txt +- da9150-fg: See ../power/da9150-fg.txt Example: @@ -34,10 +35,28 @@ Example: interrupt-controller; gpadc: da9150-gpadc { - ... + compatible = "dlg,da9150-gpadc"; + #io-channel-cells = <1>; + }; + + charger { + compatible = "dlg,da9150-charger"; + + io-channels = <&gpadc 0>, + <&gpadc 2>, + <&gpadc 8>, + <&gpadc 5>; + io-channel-names = "CHAN_IBUS", + "CHAN_VBUS", + "CHAN_TJUNC", + "CHAN_VBAT"; }; - da9150-charger { - ... + fuel-gauge { + compatible = "dlg,da9150-fuel-gauge"; + + dlg,update-interval = <10000>; + dlg,warn-soc-level = /bits/ 8 <15>; + dlg,crit-soc-level = /bits/ 8 <5> }; }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/s2mps11.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/s2mps11.txt index 57a045016fca..a42adda944bf 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/s2mps11.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/s2mps11.txt @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ -* Samsung S2MPS11, S2MPS13, S2MPS14 and S2MPU02 Voltage and Current Regulator +* Samsung S2MPS11/13/14/15 and S2MPU02 Voltage and Current Regulator The Samsung S2MPS11 is a multi-function device which includes voltage and current regulators, RTC, charger controller and other sub-blocks. It is @@ -7,17 +7,24 @@ interfaced to the host controller using an I2C interface. Each sub-block is addressed by the host system using different I2C slave addresses. Required properties: -- compatible: Should be "samsung,s2mps11-pmic" or "samsung,s2mps13-pmic" - or "samsung,s2mps14-pmic" or "samsung,s2mpu02-pmic". +- compatible: Should be one of the following + - "samsung,s2mps11-pmic" + - "samsung,s2mps13-pmic" + - "samsung,s2mps14-pmic" + - "samsung,s2mps15-pmic" + - "samsung,s2mpu02-pmic". - reg: Specifies the I2C slave address of the pmic block. It should be 0x66. Optional properties: - interrupt-parent: Specifies the phandle of the interrupt controller to which the interrupts from s2mps11 are delivered to. - interrupts: Interrupt specifiers for interrupt sources. +- samsung,s2mps11-wrstbi-ground: Indicates that WRSTBI pin of PMIC is pulled + down. When the system is suspended it will always go down thus triggerring + unwanted buck warm reset (setting buck voltages to default values). Optional nodes: -- clocks: s2mps11, s2mps13 and s5m8767 provide three(AP/CP/BT) buffered 32.768 +- clocks: s2mps11, s2mps13, s2mps15 and s5m8767 provide three(AP/CP/BT) buffered 32.768 KHz outputs, so to register these as clocks with common clock framework instantiate a sub-node named "clocks". It uses the common clock binding documented in : @@ -30,12 +37,13 @@ Optional nodes: the clock which they consume. Clock ID Devices ---------------------------------------------------------- - 32KhzAP 0 S2MPS11, S2MPS13, S2MPS14, S5M8767 - 32KhzCP 1 S2MPS11, S2MPS13, S5M8767 - 32KhzBT 2 S2MPS11, S2MPS13, S2MPS14, S5M8767 + 32KhzAP 0 S2MPS11, S2MPS13, S2MPS14, S2MPS15, S5M8767 + 32KhzCP 1 S2MPS11, S2MPS13, S2MPS15, S5M8767 + 32KhzBT 2 S2MPS11, S2MPS13, S2MPS14, S2MPS15, S5M8767 - compatible: Should be one of: "samsung,s2mps11-clk", "samsung,s2mps13-clk", "samsung,s2mps14-clk", "samsung,s5m8767-clk" + The s2msp15 uses the same compatible as s2mps13, as both provides similar clocks. - regulators: The regulators of s2mps11 that have to be instantiated should be included in a sub-node named 'regulators'. Regulator nodes included in this @@ -83,6 +91,7 @@ as per the datasheet of s2mps11. - S2MPS11: 1 to 38 - S2MPS13: 1 to 40 - S2MPS14: 1 to 25 + - S2MPS15: 1 to 27 - S2MPU02: 1 to 28 - Example: LDO1, LDO2, LDO28 - BUCKn @@ -90,6 +99,7 @@ as per the datasheet of s2mps11. - S2MPS11: 1 to 10 - S2MPS13: 1 to 10 - S2MPS14: 1 to 5 + - S2MPS15: 1 to 10 - S2MPU02: 1 to 7 - Example: BUCK1, BUCK2, BUCK9 diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/misc/sram.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/misc/sram.txt index 36cbe5aea990..42ee9438b771 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/misc/sram.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/misc/sram.txt @@ -33,6 +33,12 @@ Optional properties in the area nodes: - compatible : standard definition, should contain a vendor specific string in the form <vendor>,[<device>-]<usage> +- pool : indicates that the particular reserved SRAM area is addressable + and in use by another device or devices +- export : indicates that the reserved SRAM area may be accessed outside + of the kernel, e.g. by bootloader or userspace +- label : the name for the reserved partition, if omitted, the label + is taken from the node name excluding the unit address. Example: @@ -48,4 +54,14 @@ sram: sram@5c000000 { compatible = "socvendor,smp-sram"; reg = <0x100 0x50>; }; + + device-sram@1000 { + reg = <0x1000 0x1000>; + pool; + }; + + exported@20000 { + reg = <0x20000 0x20000>; + export; + }; }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/fsl-esdhc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/fsl-esdhc.txt index b7943f3f9995..dedfb02c744a 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/fsl-esdhc.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/fsl-esdhc.txt @@ -22,6 +22,8 @@ Optional properties: - voltage-ranges : two cells are required, first cell specifies minimum slot voltage (mV), second cell specifies maximum slot voltage (mV). Several ranges could be specified. + - little-endian : If the host controller is little-endian mode, specify + this property. The default endian mode is big-endian. Example: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/mmc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/mmc.txt index 0384fc3f64e8..f693baf87264 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/mmc.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/mmc.txt @@ -37,6 +37,7 @@ Optional properties: - sd-uhs-sdr104: SD UHS SDR104 speed is supported - sd-uhs-ddr50: SD UHS DDR50 speed is supported - cap-power-off-card: powering off the card is safe +- cap-mmc-hw-reset: eMMC hardware reset is supported - cap-sdio-irq: enable SDIO IRQ signalling on this interface - full-pwr-cycle: full power cycle of the card is supported - mmc-ddr-1_8v: eMMC high-speed DDR mode(1.8V I/O) is supported diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/mtk-sd.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/mtk-sd.txt index a1adfa495ad3..0120c7f1109c 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/mtk-sd.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/mtk-sd.txt @@ -17,6 +17,11 @@ Required properties: - vmmc-supply: power to the Core - vqmmc-supply: power to the IO +Optional properties: +- assigned-clocks: PLL of the source clock +- assigned-clock-parents: parent of source clock, used for HS400 mode to get 400Mhz source clock +- hs400-ds-delay: HS400 DS delay setting + Examples: mmc0: mmc@11230000 { compatible = "mediatek,mt8173-mmc", "mediatek,mt8135-mmc"; @@ -24,9 +29,13 @@ mmc0: mmc@11230000 { interrupts = <GIC_SPI 39 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_LOW>; vmmc-supply = <&mt6397_vemc_3v3_reg>; vqmmc-supply = <&mt6397_vio18_reg>; - clocks = <&pericfg CLK_PERI_MSDC30_0>, <&topckgen CLK_TOP_MSDC50_0_H_SEL>; + clocks = <&pericfg CLK_PERI_MSDC30_0>, + <&topckgen CLK_TOP_MSDC50_0_H_SEL>; clock-names = "source", "hclk"; pinctrl-names = "default", "state_uhs"; pinctrl-0 = <&mmc0_pins_default>; pinctrl-1 = <&mmc0_pins_uhs>; + assigned-clocks = <&topckgen CLK_TOP_MSDC50_0_SEL>; + assigned-clock-parents = <&topckgen CLK_TOP_MSDCPLL_D2>; + hs400-ds-delay = <0x14015>; }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/renesas,mmcif.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/renesas,mmcif.txt index d38942f6c5ae..cae29eb5733d 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/renesas,mmcif.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/renesas,mmcif.txt @@ -6,11 +6,12 @@ and the properties used by the MMCIF device. Required properties: -- compatible: must contain one of the following +- compatible: should be "renesas,mmcif-<soctype>", "renesas,sh-mmcif" as a + fallback. Examples with <soctype> are: - "renesas,mmcif-r8a7740" for the MMCIF found in r8a7740 SoCs - "renesas,mmcif-r8a7790" for the MMCIF found in r8a7790 SoCs - "renesas,mmcif-r8a7791" for the MMCIF found in r8a7791 SoCs - - "renesas,sh-mmcif" for the generic MMCIF + - "renesas,mmcif-r8a7794" for the MMCIF found in r8a7794 SoCs - clocks: reference to the functional clock diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/rockchip-dw-mshc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/rockchip-dw-mshc.txt index c327c2d6f23d..3dc13b68fc3f 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/rockchip-dw-mshc.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/rockchip-dw-mshc.txt @@ -14,6 +14,19 @@ Required Properties: before RK3288 - "rockchip,rk3288-dw-mshc": for Rockchip RK3288 +Optional Properties: +* clocks: from common clock binding: if ciu_drive and ciu_sample are + specified in clock-names, should contain handles to these clocks. + +* clock-names: Apart from the clock-names described in synopsys-dw-mshc.txt + two more clocks "ciu-drive" and "ciu-sample" are supported. They are used + to control the clock phases, "ciu-sample" is required for tuning high- + speed modes. + +* rockchip,default-sample-phase: The default phase to set ciu_sample at + probing, low speeds or in case where all phases work at tuning time. + If not specified 0 deg will be used. + Example: rkdwmmc0@12200000 { diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/synopsys-dw-mshc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/synopsys-dw-mshc.txt index 346c6095a615..8636f5ae97e5 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/synopsys-dw-mshc.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/synopsys-dw-mshc.txt @@ -75,6 +75,12 @@ Optional properties: * vmmc-supply: The phandle to the regulator to use for vmmc. If this is specified we'll defer probe until we can find this regulator. +* dmas: List of DMA specifiers with the controller specific format as described + in the generic DMA client binding. Refer to dma.txt for details. + +* dma-names: request names for generic DMA client binding. Must be "rx-tx". + Refer to dma.txt for details. + Aliases: - All the MSHC controller nodes should be represented in the aliases node using @@ -95,6 +101,23 @@ board specific portions as listed below. #size-cells = <0>; }; +[board specific internal DMA resources] + + dwmmc0@12200000 { + clock-frequency = <400000000>; + clock-freq-min-max = <400000 200000000>; + num-slots = <1>; + broken-cd; + fifo-depth = <0x80>; + card-detect-delay = <200>; + vmmc-supply = <&buck8>; + bus-width = <8>; + cap-mmc-highspeed; + cap-sd-highspeed; + }; + +[board specific generic DMA request binding] + dwmmc0@12200000 { clock-frequency = <400000000>; clock-freq-min-max = <400000 200000000>; @@ -106,4 +129,6 @@ board specific portions as listed below. bus-width = <8>; cap-mmc-highspeed; cap-sd-highspeed; + dmas = <&pdma 12>; + dma-names = "rx-tx"; }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/apm-xgene-enet.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/apm-xgene-enet.txt index f55aa280d34f..078060a97f95 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/apm-xgene-enet.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/apm-xgene-enet.txt @@ -37,6 +37,14 @@ Required properties for ethernet interfaces that have external PHY: Optional properties: - status: Should be "ok" or "disabled" for enabled/disabled. Default is "ok". +- tx-delay: Delay value for RGMII bridge TX clock. + Valid values are between 0 to 7, that maps to + 417, 717, 1020, 1321, 1611, 1913, 2215, 2514 ps + Default value is 4, which corresponds to 1611 ps +- rx-delay: Delay value for RGMII bridge RX clock. + Valid values are between 0 to 7, that maps to + 273, 589, 899, 1222, 1480, 1806, 2147, 2464 ps + Default value is 2, which corresponds to 899 ps Example: menetclk: menetclk { @@ -72,5 +80,7 @@ Example: /* Board-specific peripheral configurations */ &menet { + tx-delay = <4>; + rx-delay = <2>; status = "ok"; }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/brcm,iproc-mdio.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/brcm,iproc-mdio.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..8ba9ed11d716 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/brcm,iproc-mdio.txt @@ -0,0 +1,23 @@ +* Broadcom iProc MDIO bus controller + +Required properties: +- compatible: should be "brcm,iproc-mdio" +- reg: address and length of the register set for the MDIO interface +- #size-cells: must be 1 +- #address-cells: must be 0 + +Child nodes of this MDIO bus controller node are standard Ethernet PHY device +nodes as described in Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/phy.txt + +Example: + +mdio@18002000 { + compatible = "brcm,iproc-mdio"; + reg = <0x18002000 0x8>; + #size-cells = <1>; + #address-cells = <0>; + + enet-gphy@0 { + reg = <0>; + }; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/can/sun4i_can.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/can/sun4i_can.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..84ed1909df76 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/can/sun4i_can.txt @@ -0,0 +1,36 @@ +Allwinner A10/A20 CAN controller Device Tree Bindings +----------------------------------------------------- + +Required properties: +- compatible: "allwinner,sun4i-a10-can" +- reg: physical base address and size of the Allwinner A10/A20 CAN register map. +- interrupts: interrupt specifier for the sole interrupt. +- clock: phandle and clock specifier. + +Example +------- + +SoC common .dtsi file: + + can0_pins_a: can0@0 { + allwinner,pins = "PH20","PH21"; + allwinner,function = "can"; + allwinner,drive = <0>; + allwinner,pull = <0>; + }; +... + can0: can@01c2bc00 { + compatible = "allwinner,sun4i-a10-can"; + reg = <0x01c2bc00 0x400>; + interrupts = <0 26 4>; + clocks = <&apb1_gates 4>; + status = "disabled"; + }; + +Board specific .dts file: + + can0: can@01c2bc00 { + pinctrl-names = "default"; + pinctrl-0 = <&can0_pins_a>; + status = "okay"; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/cpsw.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/cpsw.txt index a9df21aaa154..4efca560adda 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/cpsw.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/cpsw.txt @@ -30,6 +30,13 @@ Optional properties: - dual_emac : Specifies Switch to act as Dual EMAC - syscon : Phandle to the system control device node, which is the control module device of the am33x +- mode-gpios : Should be added if one/multiple gpio lines are + required to be driven so that cpsw data lines + can be connected to the phy via selective mux. + For example in dra72x-evm, pcf gpio has to be + driven low so that cpsw slave 0 and phy data + lines are connected via mux. + Slave Properties: Required properties: @@ -39,6 +46,7 @@ Required properties: Optional properties: - dual_emac_res_vlan : Specifies VID to be used to segregate the ports - mac-address : See ethernet.txt file in the same directory +- phy-handle : See ethernet.txt file in the same directory Note: "ti,hwmods" field is used to fetch the base address and irq resources from TI, omap hwmod data base during device registration. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/fsl-tsec-phy.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/fsl-tsec-phy.txt index 1e97532a0b79..db74f0dc290c 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/fsl-tsec-phy.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/fsl-tsec-phy.txt @@ -57,6 +57,10 @@ Properties: "rgmii-id", as all other connection types are detected by hardware. - fsl,magic-packet : If present, indicates that the hardware supports waking up via magic packet. + - fsl,wake-on-filer : If present, indicates that the hardware supports + waking up by Filer General Purpose Interrupt (FGPI) asserted on the + Rx int line. This is an advanced power management capability allowing + certain packet types (user) defined by filer rules to wake up the system. - bd-stash : If present, indicates that the hardware supports stashing buffer descriptors in the L2. - rx-stash-len : Denotes the number of bytes of a received buffer to stash diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/hisilicon-hip04-net.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/hisilicon-hip04-net.txt index 988fc694b663..d1df8a00e1f3 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/hisilicon-hip04-net.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/hisilicon-hip04-net.txt @@ -32,13 +32,13 @@ Required properties: Required properties: -- compatible: should be "hisilicon,hip04-mdio". +- compatible: should be "hisilicon,mdio". - Inherits from MDIO bus node binding [2] [2] Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/phy.txt Example: mdio { - compatible = "hisilicon,hip04-mdio"; + compatible = "hisilicon,mdio"; reg = <0x28f1000 0x1000>; #address-cells = <1>; #size-cells = <0>; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/hisilicon-hns-dsaf.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/hisilicon-hns-dsaf.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..80411b2f0490 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/hisilicon-hns-dsaf.txt @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ +Hisilicon DSA Fabric device controller + +Required properties: +- compatible: should be "hisilicon,hns-dsaf-v1" or "hisilicon,hns-dsaf-v2". + "hisilicon,hns-dsaf-v1" is for hip05. + "hisilicon,hns-dsaf-v2" is for Hi1610 and Hi1612. +- dsa-name: dsa fabric name who provide this interface. + should be "dsafX", X is the dsaf id. +- mode: dsa fabric mode string. only support one of dsaf modes like these: + "2port-64vf", + "6port-16rss", + "6port-16vf". +- interrupt-parent: the interrupt parent of this device. +- interrupts: should contain the DSA Fabric and rcb interrupt. +- reg: specifies base physical address(es) and size of the device registers. + The first region is external interface control register base and size. + The second region is SerDes base register and size. + The third region is the PPE register base and size. + The fourth region is dsa fabric base register and size. + The fifth region is cpld base register and size, it is not required if do not use cpld. +- phy-handle: phy handle of physicl port, 0 if not any phy device. see ethernet.txt [1]. +- buf-size: rx buffer size, should be 16-1024. +- desc-num: number of description in TX and RX queue, should be 512, 1024, 2048 or 4096. + +[1] Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/phy.txt + +Example: + +dsa: dsa@c7000000 { + compatible = "hisilicon,hns-dsaf-v1"; + dsa_name = "dsaf0"; + mode = "6port-16rss"; + interrupt-parent = <&mbigen_dsa>; + reg = <0x0 0xC0000000 0x0 0x420000 + 0x0 0xC2000000 0x0 0x300000 + 0x0 0xc5000000 0x0 0x890000 + 0x0 0xc7000000 0x0 0x60000>; + phy-handle = <0 0 0 0 &soc0_phy4 &soc0_phy5 0 0>; + interrupts = <131 4>,<132 4>, <133 4>,<134 4>, + <135 4>,<136 4>, <137 4>,<138 4>, + <139 4>,<140 4>, <141 4>,<142 4>, + <143 4>,<144 4>, <145 4>,<146 4>, + <147 4>,<148 4>, <384 1>,<385 1>, + <386 1>,<387 1>, <388 1>,<389 1>, + <390 1>,<391 1>, + buf-size = <4096>; + desc-num = <1024>; + dma-coherent; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/hisilicon-hns-mdio.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/hisilicon-hns-mdio.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..9c23fdf25018 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/hisilicon-hns-mdio.txt @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +Hisilicon MDIO bus controller + +Properties: +- compatible: "hisilicon,mdio","hisilicon,hns-mdio". +- reg: The base address of the MDIO bus controller register bank. +- #address-cells: Must be <1>. +- #size-cells: Must be <0>. MDIO addresses have no size component. + +Typically an MDIO bus might have several children. + +Example: + mdio@803c0000 { + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <0>; + compatible = "hisilicon,hns-mdio","hisilicon,mdio"; + reg = <0x0 0x803c0000 0x0 0x10000>; + + ethernet-phy@0 { + ... + reg = <0>; + }; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/hisilicon-hns-nic.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/hisilicon-hns-nic.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..41d19be7011e --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/hisilicon-hns-nic.txt @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ +Hisilicon Network Subsystem NIC controller + +Required properties: +- compatible: "hisilicon,hns-nic-v1" or "hisilicon,hns-nic-v2". + "hisilicon,hns-nic-v1" is for hip05. + "hisilicon,hns-nic-v2" is for Hi1610 and Hi1612. +- ae-name: accelerator name who provides this interface, + is simply a name referring to the name of name in the accelerator node. +- port-id: is the index of port provided by DSAF (the accelerator). DSAF can + connect to 8 PHYs. Port 0 to 1 are both used for adminstration purpose. They + are called debug ports. + + The remaining 6 PHYs are taken according to the mode of DSAF. + + In NIC mode of DSAF, all 6 PHYs are taken as ethernet ports to the CPU. The + port-id can be 2 to 7. Here is the diagram: + +-----+---------------+ + | CPU | + +-+-+-+---+-+-+-+-+-+-+ + | | | | | | | | + debug service + port port + (0,1) (2-7) + + In Switch mode of DSAF, all 6 PHYs are taken as physical ports connect to a + LAN Switch while the CPU side assume itself have one single NIC connect to + this switch. In this case, the port-id will be 2 only. + +-----+---------------+ + | CPU | + +-+-+-+---+-+-+-+-+-+-+ + | | service| port(2) + debug +------------+ + port | switch | + (0,1) +-+-+-+-+-+-++ + | | | | | | + external port + +- local-mac-address: mac addr of the ethernet interface + +Example: + + ethernet@0{ + compatible = "hisilicon,hns-nic-v1"; + ae-name = "dsaf0"; + port-id = <0>; + local-mac-address = [a2 14 e4 4b 56 76]; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/ieee802154/mrf24j40.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/ieee802154/mrf24j40.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..a4ed2efb5b73 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/ieee802154/mrf24j40.txt @@ -0,0 +1,20 @@ +* MRF24J40 IEEE 802.15.4 * + +Required properties: + - compatible: should be "microchip,mrf24j40", "microchip,mrf24j40ma", + or "microchip,mrf24j40mc" depends on your transceiver + board + - spi-max-frequency: maximal bus speed, should be set something under or equal + 10000000 + - reg: the chipselect index + - interrupts: the interrupt generated by the device. + +Example: + + mrf24j40ma@0 { + compatible = "microchip,mrf24j40ma"; + spi-max-frequency = <8500000>; + reg = <0>; + interrupts = <19 8>; + interrupt-parent = <&gpio3>; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/maxim,ds26522.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/maxim,ds26522.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..ee8bb725f245 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/maxim,ds26522.txt @@ -0,0 +1,13 @@ +* Maxim (Dallas) DS26522 Dual T1/E1/J1 Transceiver + +Required properties: +- compatible: Should contain "maxim,ds26522". +- reg: SPI CS. +- spi-max-frequency: SPI clock. + +Example: + slic@1 { + compatible = "maxim,ds26522"; + reg = <1>; + spi-max-frequency = <2000000>; /* input clock */ + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/nfc/nfcmrvl.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/nfc/nfcmrvl.txt index 7c4a0cc370cf..76df9173825a 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/nfc/nfcmrvl.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/nfc/nfcmrvl.txt @@ -1,7 +1,10 @@ * Marvell International Ltd. NCI NFC Controller Required properties: -- compatible: Should be "mrvl,nfc-uart". +- compatible: Should be: + - "marvell,nfc-uart" or "mrvl,nfc-uart" for UART devices + - "marvell,nfc-i2c" for I2C devices + - "marvell,nfc-spi" for SPI devices Optional SoC specific properties: - pinctrl-names: Contains only one value - "default". @@ -13,13 +16,19 @@ Optional UART-based chip specific properties: - flow-control: Specifies that the chip is using RTS/CTS. - break-control: Specifies that the chip needs specific break management. +Optional I2C-based chip specific properties: +- i2c-int-falling: Specifies that the chip read event shall be trigged on + falling edge. +- i2c-int-rising: Specifies that the chip read event shall be trigged on + rising edge. + Example (for ARM-based BeagleBoard Black with 88W8887 on UART5): &uart5 { status = "okay"; nfcmrvluart: nfcmrvluart@5 { - compatible = "mrvl,nfc-uart"; + compatible = "marvell,nfc-uart"; reset-n-io = <&gpio3 16 0>; @@ -27,3 +36,51 @@ Example (for ARM-based BeagleBoard Black with 88W8887 on UART5): flow-control; } }; + + +Example (for ARM-based BeagleBoard Black with 88W8887 on I2C1): + +&i2c1 { + status = "okay"; + clock-frequency = <400000>; + + nfcmrvli2c0: i2c@1 { + compatible = "marvell,nfc-i2c"; + + reg = <0x8>; + + /* I2C INT configuration */ + interrupt-parent = <&gpio3>; + interrupts = <21 0>; + + /* I2C INT trigger configuration */ + i2c-int-rising; + + /* Reset IO */ + reset-n-io = <&gpio3 19 0>; + }; +}; + + +Example (for ARM-based BeagleBoard Black on SPI0): + +&spi0 { + + mrvlnfcspi0: spi@0 { + compatible = "marvell,nfc-spi"; + + reg = <0>; + + /* SPI Bus configuration */ + spi-max-frequency = <3000000>; + spi-cpha; + spi-cpol; + + /* SPI INT configuration */ + interrupt-parent = <&gpio1>; + interrupts = <17 0>; + + /* Reset IO */ + reset-n-io = <&gpio3 19 0>; + }; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/nfc/st-nci-i2c.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/nfc/st-nci-i2c.txt index d707588ed734..263732e8879f 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/nfc/st-nci-i2c.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/nfc/st-nci-i2c.txt @@ -11,6 +11,10 @@ Required properties: Optional SoC Specific Properties: - pinctrl-names: Contains only one value - "default". - pintctrl-0: Specifies the pin control groups used for this controller. +- ese-present: Specifies that an ese is physically connected to the nfc +controller. +- uicc-present: Specifies that the uicc swp signal can be physically +connected to the nfc controller. Example (for ARM-based BeagleBoard xM with ST21NFCB on I2C2): @@ -29,5 +33,8 @@ Example (for ARM-based BeagleBoard xM with ST21NFCB on I2C2): interrupts = <2 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>; reset-gpios = <&gpio5 29 GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH>; + + ese-present; + uicc-present; }; }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/nfc/st-nci-spi.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/nfc/st-nci-spi.txt index 525681b6dc39..711ca85a363d 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/nfc/st-nci-spi.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/nfc/st-nci-spi.txt @@ -2,7 +2,7 @@ Required properties: - compatible: Should be "st,st21nfcb-spi" -- spi-max-frequency: Maximum SPI frequency (<= 10000000). +- spi-max-frequency: Maximum SPI frequency (<= 4000000). - interrupt-parent: phandle for the interrupt gpio controller - interrupts: GPIO interrupt to which the chip is connected - reset-gpios: Output GPIO pin used to reset the ST21NFCB @@ -10,6 +10,10 @@ Required properties: Optional SoC Specific Properties: - pinctrl-names: Contains only one value - "default". - pintctrl-0: Specifies the pin control groups used for this controller. +- ese-present: Specifies that an ese is physically connected to the nfc +controller. +- uicc-present: Specifies that the uicc swp signal can be physically +connected to the nfc controller. Example (for ARM-based BeagleBoard xM with ST21NFCB on SPI4): @@ -27,5 +31,8 @@ Example (for ARM-based BeagleBoard xM with ST21NFCB on SPI4): interrupts = <2 IRQ_TYPE_EDGE_RISING>; reset-gpios = <&gpio5 29 GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH>; + + ese-present; + uicc-present; }; }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/renesas,ravb.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/renesas,ravb.txt index 1fd8831437bf..b486f3f5f6a3 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/renesas,ravb.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/renesas,ravb.txt @@ -6,8 +6,12 @@ interface contains. Required properties: - compatible: "renesas,etheravb-r8a7790" if the device is a part of R8A7790 SoC. "renesas,etheravb-r8a7794" if the device is a part of R8A7794 SoC. + "renesas,etheravb-r8a7795" if the device is a part of R8A7795 SoC. - reg: offset and length of (1) the register block and (2) the stream buffer. -- interrupts: interrupt specifier for the sole interrupt. +- interrupts: A list of interrupt-specifiers, one for each entry in + interrupt-names. + If interrupt-names is not present, an interrupt specifier + for a single muxed interrupt. - phy-mode: see ethernet.txt file in the same directory. - phy-handle: see ethernet.txt file in the same directory. - #address-cells: number of address cells for the MDIO bus, must be equal to 1. @@ -18,6 +22,12 @@ Required properties: Optional properties: - interrupt-parent: the phandle for the interrupt controller that services interrupts for this device. +- interrupt-names: A list of interrupt names. + For the R8A7795 SoC this property is mandatory; + it should include one entry per channel, named "ch%u", + where %u is the channel number ranging from 0 to 24. + For other SoCs this property is optional; if present + it should contain "mux" for a single muxed interrupt. - pinctrl-names: pin configuration state name ("default"). - renesas,no-ether-link: boolean, specify when a board does not provide a proper AVB_LINK signal. @@ -27,13 +37,46 @@ Optional properties: Example: ethernet@e6800000 { - compatible = "renesas,etheravb-r8a7790"; - reg = <0 0xe6800000 0 0x800>, <0 0xee0e8000 0 0x4000>; + compatible = "renesas,etheravb-r8a7795"; + reg = <0 0xe6800000 0 0x800>, <0 0xe6a00000 0 0x10000>; interrupt-parent = <&gic>; - interrupts = <0 163 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>; - clocks = <&mstp8_clks R8A7790_CLK_ETHERAVB>; - phy-mode = "rmii"; + interrupts = <GIC_SPI 39 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>, + <GIC_SPI 40 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>, + <GIC_SPI 41 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>, + <GIC_SPI 42 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>, + <GIC_SPI 43 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>, + <GIC_SPI 44 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>, + <GIC_SPI 45 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>, + <GIC_SPI 46 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>, + <GIC_SPI 47 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>, + <GIC_SPI 48 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>, + <GIC_SPI 49 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>, + <GIC_SPI 50 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>, + <GIC_SPI 51 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>, + <GIC_SPI 52 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>, + <GIC_SPI 53 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>, + <GIC_SPI 54 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>, + <GIC_SPI 55 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>, + <GIC_SPI 56 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>, + <GIC_SPI 57 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>, + <GIC_SPI 58 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>, + <GIC_SPI 59 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>, + <GIC_SPI 60 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>, + <GIC_SPI 61 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>, + <GIC_SPI 62 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>, + <GIC_SPI 63 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>; + interrupt-names = "ch0", "ch1", "ch2", "ch3", + "ch4", "ch5", "ch6", "ch7", + "ch8", "ch9", "ch10", "ch11", + "ch12", "ch13", "ch14", "ch15", + "ch16", "ch17", "ch18", "ch19", + "ch20", "ch21", "ch22", "ch23", + "ch24"; + clocks = <&mstp8_clks R8A7795_CLK_ETHERAVB>; + power-domains = <&cpg_clocks>; + phy-mode = "rgmii-id"; phy-handle = <&phy0>; + pinctrl-0 = <ðer_pins>; pinctrl-names = "default"; renesas,no-ether-link; @@ -41,8 +84,20 @@ Example: #size-cells = <0>; phy0: ethernet-phy@0 { + rxc-skew-ps = <900>; + rxdv-skew-ps = <0>; + rxd0-skew-ps = <0>; + rxd1-skew-ps = <0>; + rxd2-skew-ps = <0>; + rxd3-skew-ps = <0>; + txc-skew-ps = <900>; + txen-skew-ps = <0>; + txd0-skew-ps = <0>; + txd1-skew-ps = <0>; + txd2-skew-ps = <0>; + txd3-skew-ps = <0>; reg = <0>; interrupt-parent = <&gpio2>; - interrupts = <15 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_LOW>; + interrupts = <11 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_LOW>; }; }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/smsc-lan87xx.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/smsc-lan87xx.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..974edd5c85cc --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/smsc-lan87xx.txt @@ -0,0 +1,24 @@ +SMSC LAN87xx Ethernet PHY + +Some boards require special tuning values. Configure them +through an Ethernet OF device node. + +Optional properties: + +- smsc,disable-energy-detect: + If set, do not enable energy detect mode for the SMSC phy. + default: enable energy detect mode + +Examples: +smsc phy with disabled energy detect mode on an am335x based board. +&davinci_mdio { + pinctrl-names = "default", "sleep"; + pinctrl-0 = <&davinci_mdio_default>; + pinctrl-1 = <&davinci_mdio_sleep>; + status = "okay"; + + ethernetphy0: ethernet-phy@0 { + reg = <0>; + smsc,disable-energy-detect; + }; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/nvmem/imx-ocotp.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/nvmem/imx-ocotp.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..383d5889e95a --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/nvmem/imx-ocotp.txt @@ -0,0 +1,20 @@ +Freescale i.MX6 On-Chip OTP Controller (OCOTP) device tree bindings + +This binding represents the on-chip eFuse OTP controller found on +i.MX6Q/D, i.MX6DL/S, i.MX6SL, and i.MX6SX SoCs. + +Required properties: +- compatible: should be one of + "fsl,imx6q-ocotp" (i.MX6Q/D/DL/S), + "fsl,imx6sl-ocotp" (i.MX6SL), or + "fsl,imx6sx-ocotp" (i.MX6SX), followed by "syscon". +- reg: Should contain the register base and length. +- clocks: Should contain a phandle pointing to the gated peripheral clock. + +Example: + + ocotp: ocotp@021bc000 { + compatible = "fsl,imx6q-ocotp", "syscon"; + reg = <0x021bc000 0x4000>; + clocks = <&clks IMX6QDL_CLK_IIM>; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/nvmem/mxs-ocotp.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/nvmem/mxs-ocotp.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..daebce9e6b07 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/nvmem/mxs-ocotp.txt @@ -0,0 +1,25 @@ +On-Chip OTP Memory for Freescale i.MX23/i.MX28 + +Required properties : +- compatible : + - "fsl,imx23-ocotp" for i.MX23 + - "fsl,imx28-ocotp" for i.MX28 +- #address-cells : Should be 1 +- #size-cells : Should be 1 +- reg : Address and length of OTP controller registers +- clocks : Should contain a reference to the hbus clock + += Data cells = +Are child nodes of mxs-ocotp, bindings of which as described in +bindings/nvmem/nvmem.txt + +Example for i.MX28: + + ocotp: ocotp@8002c000 { + compatible = "fsl,imx28-ocotp", "fsl,ocotp"; + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <1>; + reg = <0x8002c000 0x2000>; + clocks = <&clks 25>; + status = "okay"; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/nvmem/rockchip-efuse.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/nvmem/rockchip-efuse.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..8f86ab3b1046 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/nvmem/rockchip-efuse.txt @@ -0,0 +1,38 @@ += Rockchip eFuse device tree bindings = + +Required properties: +- compatible: Should be "rockchip,rockchip-efuse" +- reg: Should contain the registers location and exact eFuse size +- clocks: Should be the clock id of eFuse +- clock-names: Should be "pclk_efuse" + += Data cells = +Are child nodes of eFuse, bindings of which as described in +bindings/nvmem/nvmem.txt + +Example: + + efuse: efuse@ffb40000 { + compatible = "rockchip,rockchip-efuse"; + reg = <0xffb40000 0x20>; + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <1>; + clocks = <&cru PCLK_EFUSE256>; + clock-names = "pclk_efuse"; + + /* Data cells */ + cpu_leakage: cpu_leakage { + reg = <0x17 0x1>; + }; + }; + += Data consumers = +Are device nodes which consume nvmem data cells. + +Example: + + cpu_leakage { + ... + nvmem-cells = <&cpu_leakage>; + nvmem-cell-names = "cpu_leakage"; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/nvmem/vf610-ocotp.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/nvmem/vf610-ocotp.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..56ed481c3e26 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/nvmem/vf610-ocotp.txt @@ -0,0 +1,19 @@ +On-Chip OTP Memory for Freescale Vybrid + +Required Properties: + compatible: + - "fsl,vf610-ocotp" for VF5xx/VF6xx + #address-cells : Should be 1 + #size-cells : Should be 1 + reg : Address and length of OTP controller and fuse map registers + clocks : ipg clock we associate with the OCOTP peripheral + +Example for Vybrid VF5xx/VF6xx: + + ocotp: ocotp@400a5000 { + compatible = "fsl,vf610-ocotp"; + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <1>; + reg = <0x400a5000 0xCF0>; + clocks = <&clks VF610_CLK_OCOTP>; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/altera-pcie-msi.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/altera-pcie-msi.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..09cd3bc4d038 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/altera-pcie-msi.txt @@ -0,0 +1,28 @@ +* Altera PCIe MSI controller + +Required properties: +- compatible: should contain "altr,msi-1.0" +- reg: specifies the physical base address of the controller and + the length of the memory mapped region. +- reg-names: must include the following entries: + "csr": CSR registers + "vector_slave": vectors slave port region +- interrupt-parent: interrupt source phandle. +- interrupts: specifies the interrupt source of the parent interrupt + controller. The format of the interrupt specifier depends on the + parent interrupt controller. +- num-vectors: number of vectors, range 1 to 32. +- msi-controller: indicates that this is MSI controller node + + +Example +msi0: msi@0xFF200000 { + compatible = "altr,msi-1.0"; + reg = <0xFF200000 0x00000010 + 0xFF200010 0x00000080>; + reg-names = "csr", "vector_slave"; + interrupt-parent = <&hps_0_arm_gic_0>; + interrupts = <0 42 4>; + msi-controller; + num-vectors = <32>; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/altera-pcie.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/altera-pcie.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..2951a6a50704 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/altera-pcie.txt @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ +* Altera PCIe controller + +Required properties: +- compatible : should contain "altr,pcie-root-port-1.0" +- reg: a list of physical base address and length for TXS and CRA. +- reg-names: must include the following entries: + "Txs": TX slave port region + "Cra": Control register access region +- interrupt-parent: interrupt source phandle. +- interrupts: specifies the interrupt source of the parent interrupt controller. + The format of the interrupt specifier depends on the parent interrupt + controller. +- device_type: must be "pci" +- #address-cells: set to <3> +- #size-cells: set to <2> +- #interrupt-cells: set to <1> +- ranges: describes the translation of addresses for root ports and standard + PCI regions. +- interrupt-map-mask and interrupt-map: standard PCI properties to define the + mapping of the PCIe interface to interrupt numbers. + +Optional properties: +- msi-parent: Link to the hardware entity that serves as the MSI controller for this PCIe + controller. +- bus-range: PCI bus numbers covered + +Example + pcie_0: pcie@0xc00000000 { + compatible = "altr,pcie-root-port-1.0"; + reg = <0xc0000000 0x20000000>, + <0xff220000 0x00004000>; + reg-names = "Txs", "Cra"; + interrupt-parent = <&hps_0_arm_gic_0>; + interrupts = <0 40 4>; + interrupt-controller; + #interrupt-cells = <1>; + bus-range = <0x0 0xFF>; + device_type = "pci"; + msi-parent = <&msi_to_gic_gen_0>; + #address-cells = <3>; + #size-cells = <2>; + interrupt-map-mask = <0 0 0 7>; + interrupt-map = <0 0 0 1 &pcie_0 1>, + <0 0 0 2 &pcie_0 2>, + <0 0 0 3 &pcie_0 3>, + <0 0 0 4 &pcie_0 4>; + ranges = <0x82000000 0x00000000 0x00000000 0xc0000000 0x00000000 0x10000000 + 0x82000000 0x00000000 0x10000000 0xd0000000 0x00000000 0x10000000>; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/brcm,iproc-pcie.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/brcm,iproc-pcie.txt index f7ce50e38ed4..45c2a8094a9f 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/brcm,iproc-pcie.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/brcm,iproc-pcie.txt @@ -17,6 +17,21 @@ Optional properties: - phys: phandle of the PCIe PHY device - phy-names: must be "pcie-phy" +- brcm,pcie-ob: Some iProc SoCs do not have the outbound address mapping done +by the ASIC after power on reset. In this case, SW needs to configure it + +If the brcm,pcie-ob property is present, the following properties become +effective: + +Required: +- brcm,pcie-ob-axi-offset: The offset from the AXI address to the internal +address used by the iProc PCIe core (not the PCIe address) +- brcm,pcie-ob-window-size: The outbound address mapping window size (in MB) + +Optional: +- brcm,pcie-ob-oarr-size: Some iProc SoCs need the OARR size bit to be set to +increase the outbound window size + Example: pcie0: pcie@18012000 { compatible = "brcm,iproc-pcie"; @@ -38,6 +53,11 @@ Example: phys = <&phy 0 5>; phy-names = "pcie-phy"; + + brcm,pcie-ob; + brcm,pcie-ob-oarr-size; + brcm,pcie-ob-axi-offset = <0x00000000>; + brcm,pcie-ob-window-size = <256>; }; pcie1: pcie@18013000 { diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/designware-pcie.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/designware-pcie.txt index 9f4faa8e8d00..5b0853df9d5a 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/designware-pcie.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/designware-pcie.txt @@ -15,14 +15,16 @@ Required properties: to define the mapping of the PCIe interface to interrupt numbers. - num-lanes: number of lanes to use -- clocks: Must contain an entry for each entry in clock-names. - See ../clocks/clock-bindings.txt for details. -- clock-names: Must include the following entries: - - "pcie" - - "pcie_bus" Optional properties: +- num-lanes: number of lanes to use (this property should be specified unless + the link is brought already up in BIOS) - reset-gpio: gpio pin number of power good signal - bus-range: PCI bus numbers covered (it is recommended for new devicetrees to specify this property, to keep backwards compatibility a range of 0x00-0xff is assumed if not present) +- clocks: Must contain an entry for each entry in clock-names. + See ../clocks/clock-bindings.txt for details. +- clock-names: Must include the following entries: + - "pcie" + - "pcie_bus" diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/hisilicon-pcie.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/hisilicon-pcie.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..17c6ed9c6059 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/hisilicon-pcie.txt @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ +HiSilicon PCIe host bridge DT description + +HiSilicon PCIe host controller is based on Designware PCI core. +It shares common functions with PCIe Designware core driver and inherits +common properties defined in +Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/designware-pci.txt. + +Additional properties are described here: + +Required properties: +- compatible: Should contain "hisilicon,hip05-pcie". +- reg: Should contain rc_dbi, config registers location and length. +- reg-names: Must include the following entries: + "rc_dbi": controller configuration registers; + "config": PCIe configuration space registers. +- msi-parent: Should be its_pcie which is an ITS receiving MSI interrupts. +- port-id: Should be 0, 1, 2 or 3. + +Optional properties: +- status: Either "ok" or "disabled". +- dma-coherent: Present if DMA operations are coherent. + +Example: + pcie@0xb0080000 { + compatible = "hisilicon,hip05-pcie", "snps,dw-pcie"; + reg = <0 0xb0080000 0 0x10000>, <0x220 0x00000000 0 0x2000>; + reg-names = "rc_dbi", "config"; + bus-range = <0 15>; + msi-parent = <&its_pcie>; + #address-cells = <3>; + #size-cells = <2>; + device_type = "pci"; + dma-coherent; + ranges = <0x82000000 0 0x00000000 0x220 0x00000000 0 0x10000000>; + num-lanes = <8>; + port-id = <1>; + #interrupts-cells = <1>; + interrupts-map-mask = <0xf800 0 0 7>; + interrupts-map = <0x0 0 0 1 &mbigen_pcie 1 10 + 0x0 0 0 2 &mbigen_pcie 2 11 + 0x0 0 0 3 &mbigen_pcie 3 12 + 0x0 0 0 4 &mbigen_pcie 4 13>; + status = "ok"; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/host-generic-pci.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/host-generic-pci.txt index cf3e205e0b7e..3f1d3fca62bb 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/host-generic-pci.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/host-generic-pci.txt @@ -34,8 +34,9 @@ Properties of the host controller node: - #size-cells : Must be 2. - reg : The Configuration Space base address and size, as accessed - from the parent bus. - + from the parent bus. The base address corresponds to + the first bus in the "bus-range" property. If no + "bus-range" is specified, this will be bus 0 (the default). Properties of the /chosen node: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/layerscape-pci.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/layerscape-pci.txt index 6286f049bf18..e3767857d30d 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/layerscape-pci.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/layerscape-pci.txt @@ -1,10 +1,20 @@ Freescale Layerscape PCIe controller -This PCIe host controller is based on the Synopsis Designware PCIe IP +This PCIe host controller is based on the Synopsys DesignWare PCIe IP and thus inherits all the common properties defined in designware-pcie.txt. +This controller derives its clocks from the Reset Configuration Word (RCW) +which is used to describe the PLL settings at the time of chip-reset. + +Also as per the available Reference Manuals, there is no specific 'version' +register available in the Freescale PCIe controller register set, +which can allow determining the underlying DesignWare PCIe controller version +information. + Required properties: -- compatible: should contain the platform identifier such as "fsl,ls1021a-pcie" +- compatible: should contain the platform identifier such as: + "fsl,ls1021a-pcie", "snps,dw-pcie" + "fsl,ls2080a-pcie", "snps,dw-pcie" - reg: base addresses and lengths of the PCIe controller - interrupts: A list of interrupt outputs of the controller. Must contain an entry for each entry in the interrupt-names property. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/pci-msi.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/pci-msi.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..9b3cc817d181 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/pci-msi.txt @@ -0,0 +1,220 @@ +This document describes the generic device tree binding for describing the +relationship between PCI devices and MSI controllers. + +Each PCI device under a root complex is uniquely identified by its Requester ID +(AKA RID). A Requester ID is a triplet of a Bus number, Device number, and +Function number. + +For the purpose of this document, when treated as a numeric value, a RID is +formatted such that: + +* Bits [15:8] are the Bus number. +* Bits [7:3] are the Device number. +* Bits [2:0] are the Function number. +* Any other bits required for padding must be zero. + +MSIs may be distinguished in part through the use of sideband data accompanying +writes. In the case of PCI devices, this sideband data may be derived from the +Requester ID. A mechanism is required to associate a device with both the MSI +controllers it can address, and the sideband data that will be associated with +its writes to those controllers. + +For generic MSI bindings, see +Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/msi.txt. + + +PCI root complex +================ + +Optional properties +------------------- + +- msi-map: Maps a Requester ID to an MSI controller and associated + msi-specifier data. The property is an arbitrary number of tuples of + (rid-base,msi-controller,msi-base,length), where: + + * rid-base is a single cell describing the first RID matched by the entry. + + * msi-controller is a single phandle to an MSI controller + + * msi-base is an msi-specifier describing the msi-specifier produced for the + first RID matched by the entry. + + * length is a single cell describing how many consecutive RIDs are matched + following the rid-base. + + Any RID r in the interval [rid-base, rid-base + length) is associated with + the listed msi-controller, with the msi-specifier (r - rid-base + msi-base). + +- msi-map-mask: A mask to be applied to each Requester ID prior to being mapped + to an msi-specifier per the msi-map property. + +- msi-parent: Describes the MSI parent of the root complex itself. Where + the root complex and MSI controller do not pass sideband data with MSI + writes, this property may be used to describe the MSI controller(s) + used by PCI devices under the root complex, if defined as such in the + binding for the root complex. + + +Example (1) +=========== + +/ { + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <1>; + + msi: msi-controller@a { + reg = <0xa 0x1>; + compatible = "vendor,some-controller"; + msi-controller; + #msi-cells = <1>; + }; + + pci: pci@f { + reg = <0xf 0x1>; + compatible = "vendor,pcie-root-complex"; + device_type = "pci"; + + /* + * The sideband data provided to the MSI controller is + * the RID, identity-mapped. + */ + msi-map = <0x0 &msi_a 0x0 0x10000>, + }; +}; + + +Example (2) +=========== + +/ { + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <1>; + + msi: msi-controller@a { + reg = <0xa 0x1>; + compatible = "vendor,some-controller"; + msi-controller; + #msi-cells = <1>; + }; + + pci: pci@f { + reg = <0xf 0x1>; + compatible = "vendor,pcie-root-complex"; + device_type = "pci"; + + /* + * The sideband data provided to the MSI controller is + * the RID, masked to only the device and function bits. + */ + msi-map = <0x0 &msi_a 0x0 0x100>, + msi-map-mask = <0xff> + }; +}; + + +Example (3) +=========== + +/ { + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <1>; + + msi: msi-controller@a { + reg = <0xa 0x1>; + compatible = "vendor,some-controller"; + msi-controller; + #msi-cells = <1>; + }; + + pci: pci@f { + reg = <0xf 0x1>; + compatible = "vendor,pcie-root-complex"; + device_type = "pci"; + + /* + * The sideband data provided to the MSI controller is + * the RID, but the high bit of the bus number is + * ignored. + */ + msi-map = <0x0000 &msi 0x0000 0x8000>, + <0x8000 &msi 0x0000 0x8000>; + }; +}; + + +Example (4) +=========== + +/ { + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <1>; + + msi: msi-controller@a { + reg = <0xa 0x1>; + compatible = "vendor,some-controller"; + msi-controller; + #msi-cells = <1>; + }; + + pci: pci@f { + reg = <0xf 0x1>; + compatible = "vendor,pcie-root-complex"; + device_type = "pci"; + + /* + * The sideband data provided to the MSI controller is + * the RID, but the high bit of the bus number is + * negated. + */ + msi-map = <0x0000 &msi 0x8000 0x8000>, + <0x8000 &msi 0x0000 0x8000>; + }; +}; + + +Example (5) +=========== + +/ { + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <1>; + + msi_a: msi-controller@a { + reg = <0xa 0x1>; + compatible = "vendor,some-controller"; + msi-controller; + #msi-cells = <1>; + }; + + msi_b: msi-controller@b { + reg = <0xb 0x1>; + compatible = "vendor,some-controller"; + msi-controller; + #msi-cells = <1>; + }; + + msi_c: msi-controller@c { + reg = <0xc 0x1>; + compatible = "vendor,some-controller"; + msi-controller; + #msi-cells = <1>; + }; + + pci: pci@c { + reg = <0xf 0x1>; + compatible = "vendor,pcie-root-complex"; + device_type = "pci"; + + /* + * The sideband data provided to MSI controller a is the + * RID, but the high bit of the bus number is negated. + * The sideband data provided to MSI controller b is the + * RID, identity-mapped. + * MSI controller c is not addressable. + */ + msi-map = <0x0000 &msi_a 0x8000 0x08000>, + <0x8000 &msi_a 0x0000 0x08000>, + <0x0000 &msi_b 0x0000 0x10000>; + }; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/pci-rcar-gen2.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/pci-rcar-gen2.txt index d8ef5bf50f11..7fab84b33531 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/pci-rcar-gen2.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/pci-rcar-gen2.txt @@ -7,7 +7,8 @@ OHCI and EHCI controllers. Required properties: - compatible: "renesas,pci-r8a7790" for the R8A7790 SoC; - "renesas,pci-r8a7791" for the R8A7791 SoC. + "renesas,pci-r8a7791" for the R8A7791 SoC; + "renesas,pci-r8a7794" for the R8A7794 SoC. - reg: A list of physical regions to access the device: the first is the operational registers for the OHCI/EHCI controllers and the second is for the bridge configuration and control registers. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/brcm,cygnus-pcie-phy.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/brcm,cygnus-pcie-phy.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..761c4bc24a9b --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/brcm,cygnus-pcie-phy.txt @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ +Broadcom Cygnus PCIe PHY + +Required properties: +- compatible: must be "brcm,cygnus-pcie-phy" +- reg: base address and length of the PCIe PHY block +- #address-cells: must be 1 +- #size-cells: must be 0 + +Each PCIe PHY should be represented by a child node + +Required properties For the child node: +- reg: the PHY ID +0 - PCIe RC 0 +1 - PCIe RC 1 +- #phy-cells: must be 0 + +Example: + pcie_phy: phy@0301d0a0 { + compatible = "brcm,cygnus-pcie-phy"; + reg = <0x0301d0a0 0x14>; + + pcie0_phy: phy@0 { + reg = <0>; + #phy-cells = <0>; + }; + + pcie1_phy: phy@1 { + reg = <1>; + #phy-cells = <0>; + }; + }; + + /* users of the PCIe phy */ + + pcie0: pcie@18012000 { + ... + ... + phys = <&pcie0_phy>; + phy-names = "pcie-phy"; + }; + + pcie1: pcie@18013000 { + ... + ... + phys = <pcie1_phy>; + phy-names = "pcie-phy"; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/phy-mt65xx-usb.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/phy-mt65xx-usb.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..00100cf3e037 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/phy-mt65xx-usb.txt @@ -0,0 +1,68 @@ +mt65xx USB3.0 PHY binding +-------------------------- + +This binding describes a usb3.0 phy for mt65xx platforms of Medaitek SoC. + +Required properties (controller (parent) node): + - compatible : should be "mediatek,mt8173-u3phy" + - reg : offset and length of register for phy, exclude port's + register. + - clocks : a list of phandle + clock-specifier pairs, one for each + entry in clock-names + - clock-names : must contain + "u3phya_ref": for reference clock of usb3.0 analog phy. + +Required nodes : a sub-node is required for each port the controller + provides. Address range information including the usual + 'reg' property is used inside these nodes to describe + the controller's topology. + +Required properties (port (child) node): +- reg : address and length of the register set for the port. +- #phy-cells : should be 1 (See second example) + cell after port phandle is phy type from: + - PHY_TYPE_USB2 + - PHY_TYPE_USB3 + +Example: + +u3phy: usb-phy@11290000 { + compatible = "mediatek,mt8173-u3phy"; + reg = <0 0x11290000 0 0x800>; + clocks = <&apmixedsys CLK_APMIXED_REF2USB_TX>; + clock-names = "u3phya_ref"; + #address-cells = <2>; + #size-cells = <2>; + ranges; + status = "okay"; + + phy_port0: port@11290800 { + reg = <0 0x11290800 0 0x800>; + #phy-cells = <1>; + status = "okay"; + }; + + phy_port1: port@11291000 { + reg = <0 0x11291000 0 0x800>; + #phy-cells = <1>; + status = "okay"; + }; +}; + +Specifying phy control of devices +--------------------------------- + +Device nodes should specify the configuration required in their "phys" +property, containing a phandle to the phy port node and a device type; +phy-names for each port are optional. + +Example: + +#include <dt-bindings/phy/phy.h> + +usb30: usb@11270000 { + ... + phys = <&phy_port0 PHY_TYPE_USB3>; + phy-names = "usb3-0"; + ... +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/samsung-phy.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/samsung-phy.txt index 60c6f2a633e0..0289d3b07853 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/samsung-phy.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/samsung-phy.txt @@ -44,6 +44,9 @@ Required properties: - the "ref" clock is used to get the rate of the clock provided to the PHY module +Optional properties: +- vbus-supply: power-supply phandle for vbus power source + The first phandle argument in the PHY specifier identifies the PHY, its meaning is compatible dependent. For the currently supported SoCs (Exynos 4210 and Exynos 4212) it is as follows: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/allwinner,sunxi-pinctrl.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/allwinner,sunxi-pinctrl.txt index 3c821cda1ad0..b321b26780dc 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/allwinner,sunxi-pinctrl.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/allwinner,sunxi-pinctrl.txt @@ -17,6 +17,7 @@ Required properties: "allwinner,sun8i-a23-pinctrl" "allwinner,sun8i-a23-r-pinctrl" "allwinner,sun8i-a33-pinctrl" + "allwinner,sun8i-a83t-pinctrl" - reg: Should contain the register physical address and length for the pin controller. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/atmel,at91-pio4-pinctrl.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/atmel,at91-pio4-pinctrl.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..61ac75706cc9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/atmel,at91-pio4-pinctrl.txt @@ -0,0 +1,90 @@ +* Atmel PIO4 Controller + +The Atmel PIO4 controller is used to select the function of a pin and to +configure it. + +Required properties: +- compatible: "atmel,sama5d2-pinctrl". +- reg: base address and length of the PIO controller. +- interrupts: interrupt outputs from the controller, one for each bank. +- interrupt-controller: mark the device node as an interrupt controller. +- #interrupt-cells: should be two. +- gpio-controller: mark the device node as a gpio controller. +- #gpio-cells: should be two. + +Please refer to ../gpio/gpio.txt and ../interrupt-controller/interrupts.txt for +a general description of GPIO and interrupt bindings. + +Please refer to pinctrl-bindings.txt in this directory for details of the +common pinctrl bindings used by client devices. + +Subnode format +Each node (or subnode) will list the pins it needs and how to configured these +pins. + + node { + pinmux = <PIN_NUMBER_PINMUX>; + GENERIC_PINCONFIG; + }; + +Required properties: +- pinmux: integer array. Each integer represents a pin number plus mux and +ioset settings. Use the macros from boot/dts/<soc>-pinfunc.h file to get the +right representation of the pin. + +Optional properties: +- GENERIC_PINCONFIG: generic pinconfig options to use, bias-disable, +bias-pull-down, bias-pull-up, drive-open-drain, input-schmitt-enable, +input-debounce, output-low, output-high. + +Example: + +#include <sama5d2-pinfunc.h> + +... +{ + pioA: pinctrl@fc038000 { + compatible = "atmel,sama5d2-pinctrl"; + reg = <0xfc038000 0x600>; + interrupts = <18 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH 7>, + <68 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH 7>, + <69 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH 7>, + <70 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH 7>; + interrupt-controller; + #interrupt-cells = <2>; + gpio-controller; + #gpio-cells = <2>; + clocks = <&pioA_clk>; + + pinctrl_i2c0_default: i2c0_default { + pinmux = <PIN_PD21__TWD0>, + <PIN_PD22__TWCK0>; + bias-disable; + }; + + pinctrl_led_gpio_default: led_gpio_default { + pinmux = <PIN_PB0>, + <PIN_PB5>; + bias-pull-up; + }; + + pinctrl_sdmmc1_default: sdmmc1_default { + cmd_data { + pinmux = <PIN_PA28__SDMMC1_CMD>, + <PIN_PA18__SDMMC1_DAT0>, + <PIN_PA19__SDMMC1_DAT1>, + <PIN_PA20__SDMMC1_DAT2>, + <PIN_PA21__SDMMC1_DAT3>; + bias-pull-up; + }; + + ck_cd { + pinmux = <PIN_PA22__SDMMC1_CK>, + <PIN_PA30__SDMMC1_CD>; + bias-disable; + }; + }; + ... + }; +}; +... diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/berlin,pinctrl.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/berlin,pinctrl.txt index a8bb5e26019c..f8fa28ce163e 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/berlin,pinctrl.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/berlin,pinctrl.txt @@ -20,7 +20,10 @@ Required properties: "marvell,berlin2cd-soc-pinctrl", "marvell,berlin2cd-system-pinctrl", "marvell,berlin2q-soc-pinctrl", - "marvell,berlin2q-system-pinctrl" + "marvell,berlin2q-system-pinctrl", + "marvell,berlin4ct-avio-pinctrl", + "marvell,berlin4ct-soc-pinctrl", + "marvell,berlin4ct-system-pinctrl" Required subnode-properties: - groups: a list of strings describing the group names. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/brcm,cygnus-gpio.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/brcm,cygnus-gpio.txt index 6540ca56be5e..16589fb6f420 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/brcm,cygnus-gpio.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/brcm,cygnus-gpio.txt @@ -3,8 +3,8 @@ Broadcom Cygnus GPIO/PINCONF Controller Required properties: - compatible: - Must be "brcm,cygnus-ccm-gpio", "brcm,cygnus-asiu-gpio", or - "brcm,cygnus-crmu-gpio" + Must be "brcm,cygnus-ccm-gpio", "brcm,cygnus-asiu-gpio", + "brcm,cygnus-crmu-gpio" or "brcm,iproc-gpio" - reg: Define the base and range of the I/O address space that contains the Cygnus @@ -26,9 +26,13 @@ Optional properties: - interrupt-controller: Specifies that the node is an interrupt controller -- pinmux: - Specifies the phandle to the IOMUX device, where pins can be individually -muxed to GPIO +- gpio-ranges: + Specifies the mapping between gpio controller and pin-controllers pins. + This requires 4 fields in cells defined as - + 1. Phandle of pin-controller. + 2. GPIO base pin offset. + 3 Pin-control base pin offset. + 4. number of gpio pins which are linearly mapped from pin base. Supported generic PINCONF properties in child nodes: @@ -78,6 +82,8 @@ Example: gpio-controller; interrupts = <GIC_SPI 174 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>; interrupt-controller; + gpio-ranges = <&pinctrl 0 42 1>, + <&pinctrl 1 44 3>; }; /* diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/fsl,imx7d-pinctrl.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/fsl,imx7d-pinctrl.txt index 8bbf25d58656..457b2c68d47b 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/fsl,imx7d-pinctrl.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/fsl,imx7d-pinctrl.txt @@ -1,16 +1,42 @@ * Freescale i.MX7 Dual IOMUX Controller +iMX7D supports two iomuxc controllers, fsl,imx7d-iomuxc controller is similar +as previous iMX SoC generation and fsl,imx7d-iomuxc-lpsr which provides low +power state retention capabilities on gpios that are part of iomuxc-lpsr +(GPIO1_IO7..GPIO1_IO0). While iomuxc-lpsr provides its own set of registers for +mux and pad control settings, it shares the input select register from main +iomuxc controller for daisy chain settings, the fsl,input-sel property extends +fsl,imx-pinctrl driver to support iomuxc-lpsr controller. + +iomuxc_lpsr: iomuxc-lpsr@302c0000 { + compatible = "fsl,imx7d-iomuxc-lpsr"; + reg = <0x302c0000 0x10000>; + fsl,input-sel = <&iomuxc>; +}; + +iomuxc: iomuxc@30330000 { + compatible = "fsl,imx7d-iomuxc"; + reg = <0x30330000 0x10000>; +}; + +Pheriparials using pads from iomuxc-lpsr support low state retention power +state, under LPSR mode GPIO's state of pads are retain. + Please refer to fsl,imx-pinctrl.txt in this directory for common binding part and usage. Required properties: -- compatible: "fsl,imx7d-iomuxc" +- compatible: "fsl,imx7d-iomuxc" for main IOMUXC controller, or + "fsl,imx7d-iomuxc-lpsr" for Low Power State Retention IOMUXC controller. - fsl,pins: each entry consists of 6 integers and represents the mux and config setting for one pin. The first 5 integers <mux_reg conf_reg input_reg mux_val input_val> are specified using a PIN_FUNC_ID macro, which can be found in imx7d-pinfunc.h under device tree source folder. The last integer CONFIG is the pad setting value like pull-up on this pin. Please refer to i.MX7 Dual Reference Manual for detailed CONFIG settings. +- fsl,input-sel: required property for iomuxc-lpsr controller, this property is + a phandle for main iomuxc controller which shares the input select register for + daisy chain settings. CONFIG bits definition: PAD_CTL_PUS_100K_DOWN (0 << 5) @@ -25,3 +51,38 @@ PAD_CTL_DSE_X1 (0 << 0) PAD_CTL_DSE_X2 (1 << 0) PAD_CTL_DSE_X3 (2 << 0) PAD_CTL_DSE_X4 (3 << 0) + +Examples: +While iomuxc-lpsr is intended to be used by dedicated peripherals to take +advantages of LPSR power mode, is also possible that an IP to use pads from +any of the iomux controllers. For example the I2C1 IP can use SCL pad from +iomuxc-lpsr controller and SDA pad from iomuxc controller as: + +i2c1: i2c@30a20000 { + pinctrl-names = "default"; + pinctrl-0 = <&pinctrl_i2c1_1 &pinctrl_i2c1_2>; + status = "okay"; +}; + +iomuxc-lpsr@302c0000 { + compatible = "fsl,imx7d-iomuxc-lpsr"; + reg = <0x302c0000 0x10000>; + fsl,input-sel = <&iomuxc>; + + pinctrl_i2c1_1: i2c1grp-1 { + fsl,pins = < + MX7D_PAD_GPIO1_IO04__I2C1_SCL 0x4000007f + >; + }; +}; + +iomuxc@30330000 { + compatible = "fsl,imx7d-iomuxc"; + reg = <0x30330000 0x10000>; + + pinctrl_i2c1_2: i2c1grp-2 { + fsl,pins = < + MX7D_PAD_I2C1_SDA__I2C1_SDA 0x4000007f + >; + }; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/renesas,pfc-pinctrl.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/renesas,pfc-pinctrl.txt index 9496934528bd..ffadb7a371f6 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/renesas,pfc-pinctrl.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/renesas,pfc-pinctrl.txt @@ -19,6 +19,7 @@ Required Properties: - "renesas,pfc-r8a7791": for R8A7791 (R-Car M2-W) compatible pin-controller. - "renesas,pfc-r8a7793": for R8A7793 (R-Car M2-N) compatible pin-controller. - "renesas,pfc-r8a7794": for R8A7794 (R-Car E2) compatible pin-controller. + - "renesas,pfc-r8a7795": for R8A7795 (R-Car H3) compatible pin-controller. - "renesas,pfc-sh73a0": for SH73A0 (SH-Mobile AG5) compatible pin-controller. - reg: Base address and length of each memory resource used by the pin diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/bq24257.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/bq24257.txt index 5c9d3940d07c..d693702c9c1e 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/bq24257.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/bq24257.txt @@ -1,21 +1,64 @@ -Binding for TI bq24257 Li-Ion Charger +Binding for TI bq24250/bq24251/bq24257 Li-Ion Charger Required properties: - compatible: Should contain one of the following: + * "ti,bq24250" + * "ti,bq24251" * "ti,bq24257" -- reg: integer, i2c address of the device. +- reg: integer, i2c address of the device. +- interrupt-parent: Should be the phandle for the interrupt controller. Use in + conjunction with "interrupts". +- interrupts: Interrupt mapping for GPIO IRQ (configure for both edges). Use in + conjunction with "interrupt-parent". - ti,battery-regulation-voltage: integer, maximum charging voltage in uV. -- ti,charge-current: integer, maximum charging current in uA. -- ti,termination-current: integer, charge will be terminated when current in - constant-voltage phase drops below this value (in uA). +- ti,charge-current: integer, maximum charging current in uA. +- ti,termination-current: integer, charge will be terminated when current in + constant-voltage phase drops below this value (in uA). + +Optional properties: +- pg-gpios: GPIO used for connecting the bq2425x device PG (Power Good) pin. + This pin is not available on all devices however it should be used if + possible as this is the recommended way to obtain the charger's input PG + state. If this pin is not specified a software-based approach for PG + detection is used. +- ti,current-limit: The maximum current to be drawn from the charger's input + (in uA). If this property is not specified, the input limit current is + set automatically using USB D+/D- signal based charger type detection. + If the hardware does not support the D+/D- based detection, a default + of 500,000 is used (=500mA) instead. +- ti,ovp-voltage: Configures the over voltage protection voltage (in uV). If + not specified a default of 6,5000,000 (=6.5V) is used. +- ti,in-dpm-voltage: Configures the threshold input voltage for the dynamic + power path management (in uV). If not specified a default of 4,360,000 + (=4.36V) is used. Example: bq24257 { compatible = "ti,bq24257"; reg = <0x6a>; + interrupt-parent = <&gpio1>; + interrupts = <16 IRQ_TYPE_EDGE_BOTH>; + + pg-gpios = <&gpio1 28 GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH>; ti,battery-regulation-voltage = <4200000>; ti,charge-current = <1000000>; ti,termination-current = <50000>; }; + +Example: + +bq24250 { + compatible = "ti,bq24250"; + reg = <0x6a>; + interrupt-parent = <&gpio1>; + interrupts = <16 IRQ_TYPE_EDGE_BOTH>; + + ti,battery-regulation-voltage = <4200000>; + ti,charge-current = <500000>; + ti,termination-current = <50000>; + ti,current-limit = <900000>; + ti,ovp-voltage = <9500000>; + ti,in-dpm-voltage = <4440000>; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/da9150-fg.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/da9150-fg.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..00236fe3ea31 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/da9150-fg.txt @@ -0,0 +1,23 @@ +Dialog Semiconductor DA9150 Fuel-Gauge Power Supply bindings + +Required properties: +- compatible: "dlg,da9150-fuel-gauge" for DA9150 Fuel-Gauge Power Supply + +Optional properties: +- dlg,update-interval: Interval time (milliseconds) between battery level checks. +- dlg,warn-soc-level: Battery discharge level (%) where warning event raised. + [1 - 100] +- dlg,crit-soc-level: Battery discharge level (%) where critical event raised. + This value should be lower than the warning level. + [1 - 100] + + +Example: + + fuel-gauge { + compatible = "dlg,da9150-fuel-gauge"; + + dlg,update-interval = <10000>; + dlg,warn-soc-level = /bits/ 8 <15>; + dlg,crit-soc-level = /bits/ 8 <5>; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power_supply/axp20x_usb_power.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power_supply/axp20x_usb_power.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..862f4a49dc49 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power_supply/axp20x_usb_power.txt @@ -0,0 +1,34 @@ +AXP20x USB power supply + +Required Properties: +-compatible: "x-powers,axp202-usb-power-supply" + +This node is a subnode of the axp20x PMIC. + +Example: + +axp209: pmic@34 { + compatible = "x-powers,axp209"; + reg = <0x34>; + interrupt-parent = <&nmi_intc>; + interrupts = <0 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_LOW>; + interrupt-controller; + #interrupt-cells = <1>; + + regulators { + x-powers,dcdc-freq = <1500>; + + vdd_cpu: dcdc2 { + regulator-always-on; + regulator-min-microvolt = <1000000>; + regulator-max-microvolt = <1450000>; + regulator-name = "vdd-cpu"; + }; + + ... + }; + + usb-power-supply: usb-power-supply { + compatible = "x-powers,axp202-usb-power-supply"; + }; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power_supply/qcom_smbb.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power_supply/qcom_smbb.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..65b88fac854b --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power_supply/qcom_smbb.txt @@ -0,0 +1,131 @@ +Qualcomm Switch-Mode Battery Charger and Boost + +PROPERTIES +- compatible: + Usage: required + Value type: <stringlist> + Description: Must be one of: + - "qcom,pm8941-charger" + +- reg: + Usage: required + Value type: <prop-encoded-array> + Description: Base address of registers for SMBB block + +- interrupts: + Usage: required + Value type: <prop-encoded-array> + Description: The format of the specifier is defined by the binding document + describing the node's interrupt parent. Must contain one + specifier for each of the following interrupts, in order: + - charge done + - charge fast mode + - charge trickle mode + - battery temperature ok + - battery present + - charger disconnected + - USB-in valid + - DC-in valid + +- interrupt-names: + Usage: required + Value type: <stringlist> + Description: Must contain the following list, strictly ordered: + "chg-done", + "chg-fast", + "chg-trkl", + "bat-temp-ok", + "bat-present", + "chg-gone", + "usb-valid", + "dc-valid" + +- qcom,fast-charge-current-limit: + Usage: optional (default: 1A, or pre-configured value) + Value type: <u32>; uA; range [100mA : 3A] + Description: Maximum charge current; May be clamped to safety limits. + +- qcom,fast-charge-low-threshold-voltage: + Usage: optional (default: 3.2V, or pre-configured value) + Value type: <u32>; uV; range [2.1V : 3.6V] + Description: Battery voltage limit above which fast charging may operate; + Below this value linear or switch-mode auto-trickle-charging + will operate. + +- qcom,fast-charge-high-threshold-voltage: + Usage: optional (default: 4.2V, or pre-configured value) + Value type: <u32>; uV; range [3.24V : 5V] + Description: Battery voltage limit below which fast charging may operate; + The fast charger will attempt to charge the battery to this + voltage. May be clamped to safety limits. + +- qcom,fast-charge-safe-voltage: + Usage: optional (default: 4.2V, or pre-configured value) + Value type: <u32>; uV; range [3.24V : 5V] + Description: Maximum safe battery voltage; May be pre-set by bootloader, in + which case, setting this will harmlessly fail. The property + 'fast-charge-high-watermark' will be clamped by this value. + +- qcom,fast-charge-safe-current: + Usage: optional (default: 1A, or pre-configured value) + Value type: <u32>; uA; range [100mA : 3A] + Description: Maximum safe battery charge current; May pre-set by bootloader, + in which case, setting this will harmlessly fail. The property + 'qcom,fast-charge-current-limit' will be clamped by this value. + +- qcom,auto-recharge-threshold-voltage: + Usage: optional (default: 4.1V, or pre-configured value) + Value type: <u32>; uV; range [3.24V : 5V] + Description: Battery voltage limit below which auto-recharge functionality + will restart charging after end-of-charge; The high cutoff + limit for auto-recharge is 5% above this value. + +- qcom,minimum-input-voltage: + Usage: optional (default: 4.3V, or pre-configured value) + Value type: <u32>; uV; range [4.2V : 9.6V] + Description: Input voltage level above which charging may operate + +- qcom,dc-current-limit: + Usage: optional (default: 100mA, or pre-configured value) + Value type: <u32>; uA; range [100mA : 2.5A] + Description: Default DC charge current limit + +- qcom,disable-dc: + Usage: optional (default: false) + Value type: boolean: <u32> or <empty> + Description: Disable DC charger + +- qcom,jeita-extended-temp-range: + Usage: optional (default: false) + Value type: boolean: <u32> or <empty> + Description: Enable JEITA extended temperature range; This does *not* + adjust the maximum charge voltage or current in the extended + temperature range. It only allows charging when the battery + is in the extended temperature range. Voltage/current + regulation must be done externally to fully comply with + the JEITA safety guidelines if this flag is set. + +EXAMPLE +charger@1000 { + compatible = "qcom,pm8941-charger"; + reg = <0x1000 0x700>; + interrupts = <0x0 0x10 7 IRQ_TYPE_EDGE_BOTH>, + <0x0 0x10 5 IRQ_TYPE_EDGE_BOTH>, + <0x0 0x10 4 IRQ_TYPE_EDGE_BOTH>, + <0x0 0x12 1 IRQ_TYPE_EDGE_BOTH>, + <0x0 0x12 0 IRQ_TYPE_EDGE_BOTH>, + <0x0 0x13 2 IRQ_TYPE_EDGE_BOTH>, + <0x0 0x13 1 IRQ_TYPE_EDGE_BOTH>, + <0x0 0x14 1 IRQ_TYPE_EDGE_BOTH>; + interrupt-names = "chg-done", + "chg-fast", + "chg-trkl", + "bat-temp-ok", + "bat-present", + "chg-gone", + "usb-valid", + "dc-valid"; + + qcom,fast-charge-current-limit = <1000000>; + qcom,dc-charge-current-limit = <1000000>; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power_supply/tps65217_charger.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power_supply/tps65217_charger.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..98d131acee95 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power_supply/tps65217_charger.txt @@ -0,0 +1,12 @@ +TPS65217 Charger + +Required Properties: +-compatible: "ti,tps65217-charger" + +This node is a subnode of the tps65217 PMIC. + +Example: + + tps65217-charger { + compatible = "ti,tps65090-charger"; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/mpc512x_lpbfifo.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/mpc512x_lpbfifo.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..b3b392fe1f61 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/mpc512x_lpbfifo.txt @@ -0,0 +1,21 @@ +Freescale MPC512x LocalPlus Bus FIFO (called SCLPC in the Reference Manual) + +Required properties: +- compatible: should be "fsl,mpc512x-lpbfifo"; +- reg: should contain the offset and length of SCLPC register set; +- interrupts: should contain the interrupt specifier for SCLPC; syntax of an + interrupt client node is described in interrupt-controller/interrupts.txt; +- dmas: should contain the DMA specifier for SCLPC as described at + dma/dma.txt and dma/mpc512x-dma.txt; +- dma-names: should be "rx-tx"; + +Example: + + sclpc@10100 { + compatible = "fsl,mpc512x-lpbfifo"; + reg = <0x10100 0x50>; + interrupts = <7 0x8>; + dmas = <&dma0 26>; + dma-names = "rx-tx"; + }; + diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/act8865-regulator.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/act8865-regulator.txt index e91485d11241..6067d9830d07 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/act8865-regulator.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/act8865-regulator.txt @@ -8,6 +8,8 @@ Required properties: Optional properties: - system-power-controller: Telling whether or not this pmic is controlling the system power. See Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/power-controller.txt . +- active-semi,vsel-high: Indicates the VSEL pin is high. + If this property is missing, assume the VSEL pin is low(0). Optional input supply properties: - for act8600: @@ -49,6 +51,7 @@ Example: pmic: act8865@5b { compatible = "active-semi,act8865"; reg = <0x5b>; + active-semi,vsel-high; status = "disabled"; regulators { diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/anatop-regulator.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/anatop-regulator.txt index 758eae24082a..37c4ea076f88 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/anatop-regulator.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/anatop-regulator.txt @@ -13,6 +13,7 @@ Optional properties: - anatop-delay-reg-offset: Anatop MFD step time register offset - anatop-delay-bit-shift: Bit shift for the step time register - anatop-delay-bit-width: Number of bits used in the step time register +- vin-supply: The supply for this regulator Any property defined as part of the core regulator binding, defined in regulator.txt, can also be used. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/arizona-regulator.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/arizona-regulator.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..443564d7784f --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/arizona-regulator.txt @@ -0,0 +1,17 @@ +Cirrus Logic Arizona class audio SoCs + +These devices are audio SoCs with extensive digital capabilities and a range +of analogue I/O. + +This document lists regulator specific bindings, see the primary binding +document: + ../mfd/arizona.txt + +Optional properties: + - wlf,ldoena : GPIO specifier for the GPIO controlling LDOENA + +Optional subnodes: + - ldo1 : Initial data for the LDO1 regulator, as covered in + Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/regulator.txt + - micvdd : Initial data for the MICVDD regulator, as covered in + Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/regulator.txt diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/max77802.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/max77802.txt index 79e5476444f7..09d796ed48be 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/max77802.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/max77802.txt @@ -8,7 +8,28 @@ regulators that can be controlled over I2C. Following properties should be present in main device node of the MFD chip. -Optional node: +Optional properties: +- inb1-supply: The input supply for BUCK1 +- inb2-supply: The input supply for BUCK2 +- inb3-supply: The input supply for BUCK3 +- inb4-supply: The input supply for BUCK4 +- inb5-supply: The input supply for BUCK5 +- inb6-supply: The input supply for BUCK6 +- inb7-supply: The input supply for BUCK7 +- inb8-supply: The input supply for BUCK8 +- inb9-supply: The input supply for BUCK9 +- inb10-supply: The input supply for BUCK10 +- inl1-supply: The input supply for LDO8 and LDO15 +- inl2-supply: The input supply for LDO17, LDO27, LDO30 and LDO35 +- inl3-supply: The input supply for LDO3, LDO5, LDO6 and LDO7 +- inl4-supply: The input supply for LDO10, LDO11, LDO13 and LDO14 +- inl5-supply: The input supply for LDO9 and LDO19 +- inl6-supply: The input supply for LDO4, LDO21, LDO24 and LDO33 +- inl7-supply: The input supply for LDO18, LDO20, LDO28 and LDO29 +- inl9-supply: The input supply for LDO12, LDO23, LDO25, LDO26, LDO32 and LDO34 +- inl10-supply: The input supply for LDO1 and LDO2 + +Optional nodes: - regulators : The regulators of max77802 have to be instantiated under subnode named "regulators" using the following format. @@ -58,6 +79,8 @@ Example: #address-cells = <1>; #size-cells = <0>; + inb1-supply = <&parent_reg>; + regulators { ldo1_reg: LDO1 { regulator-name = "vdd_1v0"; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/pbias-regulator.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/pbias-regulator.txt index 32aa26f1e434..acbcb452a69a 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/pbias-regulator.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/pbias-regulator.txt @@ -2,7 +2,12 @@ PBIAS internal regulator for SD card dual voltage i/o pads on OMAP SoCs. Required properties: - compatible: - - "ti,pbias-omap" for OMAP2, OMAP3, OMAP4, OMAP5, DRA7. + - should be "ti,pbias-dra7" for DRA7 + - should be "ti,pbias-omap2" for OMAP2 + - should be "ti,pbias-omap3" for OMAP3 + - should be "ti,pbias-omap4" for OMAP4 + - should be "ti,pbias-omap5" for OMAP5 + - "ti,pbias-omap" is deprecated - reg: pbias register offset from syscon base and size of pbias register. - syscon : phandle of the system control module - regulator-name : should be diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/regulator.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/regulator.txt index 24bd422cecd5..1d112fc456aa 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/regulator.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/regulator.txt @@ -11,6 +11,7 @@ Optional properties: - regulator-always-on: boolean, regulator should never be disabled - regulator-boot-on: bootloader/firmware enabled regulator - regulator-allow-bypass: allow the regulator to go into bypass mode +- regulator-allow-set-load: allow the regulator performance level to be configured - <name>-supply: phandle to the parent supply/regulator node - regulator-ramp-delay: ramp delay for regulator(in uV/uS) For hardware which supports disabling ramp rate, it should be explicitly diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/tps65023.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/tps65023.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..a4714e4da370 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/tps65023.txt @@ -0,0 +1,60 @@ +TPS65023 family of regulators + +Required properties: +- compatible: Must be one of the following. + "ti,tps65020", + "ti,tps65021", + "ti,tps65023", +- reg: I2C slave address +- regulators: list of regulators provided by this controller, must be named + after their hardware counterparts: VDCDC[1-3] and LDO[1-2] +- regulators: This is the list of child nodes that specify the regulator + initialization data for defined regulators. The definition for each of + these nodes is defined using the standard binding for regulators found at + Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/regulator.txt. + +Each regulator is defined using the standard binding for regulators. + +Example: + + tps65023@48 { + compatible = "ti,tps65023"; + reg = <0x48>; + + regulators { + VDCDC1 { + regulator-name = "vdd_mpu"; + regulator-always-on; + regulator-min-microvolt = <1200000>; + regulator-max-microvolt = <1200000>; + }; + + VDCDC2 { + regulator-name = "vdd_core"; + regulator-always-on; + regulator-min-microvolt = <3300000>; + regulator-max-microvolt = <3300000>; + }; + + VDCDC3 { + regulator-name = "vdd_io"; + regulator-always-on; + regulator-min-microvolt = <1800000>; + regulator-max-microvolt = <1800000>; + }; + + LDO1 { + regulator-name = "vdd_usb18"; + regulator-always-on; + regulator-min-microvolt = <1800000>; + regulator-max-microvolt = <1800000>; + }; + + LDO2 { + regulator-name = "vdd_usb33"; + regulator-always-on; + regulator-min-microvolt = <3300000>; + regulator-max-microvolt = <3300000>; + }; + }; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rng/samsung,exynos-rng4.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rng/samsung,exynos-rng4.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..4ca8dd4d7e66 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rng/samsung,exynos-rng4.txt @@ -0,0 +1,17 @@ +Exynos Pseudo Random Number Generator + +Required properties: + +- compatible : Should be "samsung,exynos4-rng". +- reg : Specifies base physical address and size of the registers map. +- clocks : Phandle to clock-controller plus clock-specifier pair. +- clock-names : "secss" as a clock name. + +Example: + + rng@10830400 { + compatible = "samsung,exynos4-rng"; + reg = <0x10830400 0x200>; + clocks = <&clock CLK_SSS>; + clock-names = "secss"; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rng/st,rng.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rng/st,rng.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..35734bc282e9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rng/st,rng.txt @@ -0,0 +1,15 @@ +STMicroelectronics HW Random Number Generator +---------------------------------------------- + +Required parameters: +compatible : Should be "st,rng" +reg : Base address and size of IP's register map. +clocks : Phandle to device's clock (See: ../clocks/clock-bindings.txt) + +Example: + +rng@fee80000 { + compatible = "st,rng"; + reg = <0xfee80000 0x1000>; + clocks = <&clk_sysin>; +} diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rng/st,stm32-rng.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rng/st,stm32-rng.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..47f04176f93b --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rng/st,stm32-rng.txt @@ -0,0 +1,21 @@ +STMicroelectronics STM32 HW RNG +=============================== + +The STM32 hardware random number generator is a simple fixed purpose IP and +is fully separated from other crypto functions. + +Required properties: + +- compatible : Should be "st,stm32-rng" +- reg : Should be register base and length as documented in the datasheet +- interrupts : The designated IRQ line for the RNG +- clocks : The clock needed to enable the RNG + +Example: + + rng: rng@50060800 { + compatible = "st,stm32-rng"; + reg = <0x50060800 0x400>; + interrupts = <80>; + clocks = <&rcc 0 38>; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/ingenic,uart.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/ingenic,uart.txt index c2d3b3abe7d9..02cb7fe59cb7 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/ingenic,uart.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/ingenic,uart.txt @@ -1,7 +1,8 @@ * Ingenic SoC UART Required properties: -- compatible : "ingenic,jz4740-uart" or "ingenic,jz4780-uart" +- compatible : "ingenic,jz4740-uart", "ingenic,jz4760-uart", + "ingenic,jz4775-uart" or "ingenic,jz4780-uart" - reg : offset and length of the register set for the device. - interrupts : should contain uart interrupt. - clocks : phandles to the module & baud clocks. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/pl011.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/pl011.txt index cbae3d9a0278..77863aefe9ef 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/pl011.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/pl011.txt @@ -19,7 +19,7 @@ Optional properties: must correspond to the PCLK clocking the internal logic of the block. Just listing one clock (the first one) is deprecated. -- clocks-names: +- clock-names: When present, the first clock listed must be named "uartclk" and the second clock listed must be named "apb_pclk" diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/qcom,msm-uartdm.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/qcom,msm-uartdm.txt index a2114c217376..182777fac9a2 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/qcom,msm-uartdm.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/qcom,msm-uartdm.txt @@ -26,6 +26,12 @@ Required properties: Optional properties: - dmas: Should contain dma specifiers for transmit and receive channels - dma-names: Should contain "tx" for transmit and "rx" for receive channels +- qcom,tx-crci: Identificator <u32> for Client Rate Control Interface to be + used with TX DMA channel. Required when using DMA for transmission + with UARTDM v1.3 and bellow. +- qcom,rx-crci: Identificator <u32> for Client Rate Control Interface to be + used with RX DMA channel. Required when using DMA for reception + with UARTDM v1.3 and bellow. Note: Aliases may be defined to ensure the correct ordering of the UARTs. The alias serialN will result in the UART being assigned port N. If any diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/renesas,sci-serial.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/renesas,sci-serial.txt index e84b13a8eda3..73f825e5e644 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/renesas,sci-serial.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/renesas,sci-serial.txt @@ -23,6 +23,8 @@ Required properties: - "renesas,scifa-r8a7794" for R8A7794 (R-Car E2) SCIFA compatible UART. - "renesas,scifb-r8a7794" for R8A7794 (R-Car E2) SCIFB compatible UART. - "renesas,hscif-r8a7794" for R8A7794 (R-Car E2) HSCIF compatible UART. + - "renesas,scif-r8a7795" for R8A7795 (R-Car H3) SCIF compatible UART. + - "renesas,hscif-r8a7795" for R8A7795 (R-Car H3) HSCIF compatible UART. - "renesas,scifa-sh73a0" for SH73A0 (SH-Mobile AG5) SCIFA compatible UART. - "renesas,scifb-sh73a0" for SH73A0 (SH-Mobile AG5) SCIFB compatible UART. - "renesas,scif" for generic SCIF compatible UART. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/snps-dw-apb-uart.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/snps-dw-apb-uart.txt index 289c40ed7470..12bbe9f22560 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/snps-dw-apb-uart.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/snps-dw-apb-uart.txt @@ -15,6 +15,9 @@ The supplying peripheral clock can also be handled, needing a second property Required elements: "baudclk", "apb_pclk" Optional properties: +- snps,uart-16550-compatible : reflects the value of UART_16550_COMPATIBLE + configuration parameter. Define this if your UART does not implement the busy + functionality. - resets : phandle to the parent reset controller. - reg-shift : quantity to shift the register offsets by. If this property is not present then the register offsets are not shifted. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/ak4613.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/ak4613.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..15a919522b42 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/ak4613.txt @@ -0,0 +1,17 @@ +AK4613 I2C transmitter + +This device supports I2C mode only. + +Required properties: + +- compatible : "asahi-kasei,ak4613" +- reg : The chip select number on the I2C bus + +Example: + +&i2c { + ak4613: ak4613@0x10 { + compatible = "asahi-kasei,ak4613"; + reg = <0x10>; + }; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/ak4642.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/ak4642.txt index 623d4e70ae11..340784db6808 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/ak4642.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/ak4642.txt @@ -7,7 +7,14 @@ Required properties: - compatible : "asahi-kasei,ak4642" or "asahi-kasei,ak4643" or "asahi-kasei,ak4648" - reg : The chip select number on the I2C bus -Example: +Optional properties: + + - #clock-cells : common clock binding; shall be set to 0 + - clocks : common clock binding; MCKI clock + - clock-frequency : common clock binding; frequency of MCKO + - clock-output-names : common clock binding; MCKO clock name + +Example 1: &i2c { ak4648: ak4648@0x12 { @@ -15,3 +22,16 @@ Example: reg = <0x12>; }; }; + +Example 2: + +&i2c { + ak4643: codec@12 { + compatible = "asahi-kasei,ak4643"; + reg = <0x12>; + #clock-cells = <0>; + clocks = <&audio_clock>; + clock-frequency = <12288000>; + clock-output-names = "ak4643_mcko"; + }; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/atmel-classd.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/atmel-classd.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..0018451c4351 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/atmel-classd.txt @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ +* Atmel ClassD driver under ALSA SoC architecture + +Required properties: +- compatible + Should be "atmel,sama5d2-classd". +- reg + Should contain ClassD registers location and length. +- interrupts + Should contain the IRQ line for the ClassD. +- dmas + One DMA specifiers as described in atmel-dma.txt and dma.txt files. +- dma-names + Must be "tx". +- clock-names + Tuple listing input clock names. + Required elements: "pclk", "gclk" and "aclk". +- clocks + Please refer to clock-bindings.txt. + +Optional properties: +- pinctrl-names, pinctrl-0 + Please refer to pinctrl-bindings.txt. +- atmel,model + The user-visible name of this sound complex. + The default value is "CLASSD". +- atmel,pwm-type + PWM modulation type, "single" or "diff". + The default value is "single". +- atmel,non-overlap-time + Set non-overlapping time, the unit is nanosecond(ns). + There are four values, + <5>, <10>, <15>, <20>, the default value is <10>. + Non-overlapping will be disabled if not specified. + +Example: +classd: classd@fc048000 { + compatible = "atmel,sama5d2-classd"; + reg = <0xfc048000 0x100>; + interrupts = <59 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH 7>; + dmas = <&dma0 + (AT91_XDMAC_DT_MEM_IF(0) | AT91_XDMAC_DT_PER_IF(1) + | AT91_XDMAC_DT_PERID(47))>; + dma-names = "tx"; + clocks = <&classd_clk>, <&classd_gclk>, <&audio_pll_pmc>; + clock-names = "pclk", "gclk", "aclk"; + + pinctrl-names = "default"; + pinctrl-0 = <&pinctrl_classd_default>; + atmel,model = "classd @ SAMA5D2-Xplained"; + atmel,pwm-type = "diff"; + atmel,non-overlap-time = <10>; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/da7213.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/da7213.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..58902802d56c --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/da7213.txt @@ -0,0 +1,41 @@ +Dialog Semiconductor DA7213 Audio Codec bindings + +====== + +Required properties: +- compatible : Should be "dlg,da7213" +- reg: Specifies the I2C slave address + +Optional properties: +- clocks : phandle and clock specifier for codec MCLK. +- clock-names : Clock name string for 'clocks' attribute, should be "mclk". + +- dlg,micbias1-lvl : Voltage (mV) for Mic Bias 1 + [<1600>, <2200>, <2500>, <3000>] +- dlg,micbias2-lvl : Voltage (mV) for Mic Bias 2 + [<1600>, <2200>, <2500>, <3000>] +- dlg,dmic-data-sel : DMIC channel select based on clock edge. + ["lrise_rfall", "lfall_rrise"] +- dlg,dmic-samplephase : When to sample audio from DMIC. + ["on_clkedge", "between_clkedge"] +- dlg,dmic-clkrate : DMIC clock frequency (Hz). + [<1500000>, <3000000>] + +====== + +Example: + + codec_i2c: da7213@1a { + compatible = "dlg,da7213"; + reg = <0x1a>; + + clocks = <&clks 201>; + clock-names = "mclk"; + + dlg,micbias1-lvl = <2500>; + dlg,micbias2-lvl = <2500>; + + dlg,dmic-data-sel = "lrise_rfall"; + dlg,dmic-samplephase = "between_clkedge"; + dlg,dmic-clkrate = <3000000>; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/da7219.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/da7219.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..1b7030911a3b --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/da7219.txt @@ -0,0 +1,106 @@ +Dialog Semiconductor DA7219 Audio Codec bindings + +DA7219 is an audio codec with advanced accessory detect features. + +====== + +Required properties: +- compatible : Should be "dlg,da7219" +- reg: Specifies the I2C slave address + +- interrupt-parent : Specifies the phandle of the interrupt controller to which + the IRQs from DA7219 are delivered to. +- interrupts : IRQ line info for DA7219. + (See Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/interrupts.txt for + further information relating to interrupt properties) + +- VDD-supply: VDD power supply for the device +- VDDMIC-supply: VDDMIC power supply for the device +- VDDIO-supply: VDDIO power supply for the device + (See Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/regulator.txt for further + information relating to regulators) + +Optional properties: +- interrupt-names : Name associated with interrupt line. Should be "wakeup" if + interrupt is to be used to wake system, otherwise "irq" should be used. +- wakeup-source: Flag to indicate this device can wake system (suspend/resume). + +- clocks : phandle and clock specifier for codec MCLK. +- clock-names : Clock name string for 'clocks' attribute, should be "mclk". + +- dlg,ldo-lvl : Required internal LDO voltage (mV) level for digital engine + [<1050>, <1100>, <1200>, <1400>] +- dlg,micbias-lvl : Voltage (mV) for Mic Bias + [<1800>, <2000>, <2200>, <2400>, <2600>] +- dlg,mic-amp-in-sel : Mic input source type + ["diff", "se_p", "se_n"] + +====== + +Child node - 'da7219_aad': + +Optional properties: +- dlg,micbias-pulse-lvl : Mic bias higher voltage pulse level (mV). + [<2800>, <2900>] +- dlg,micbias-pulse-time : Mic bias higher voltage pulse duration (ms) +- dlg,btn-cfg : Periodic button press measurements for 4-pole jack (ms) + [<2>, <5>, <10>, <50>, <100>, <200>, <500>] +- dlg,mic-det-thr : Impedance threshold for mic detection measurement (Ohms) + [<200>, <500>, <750>, <1000>] +- dlg,jack-ins-deb : Debounce time for jack insertion (ms) + [<5>, <10>, <20>, <50>, <100>, <200>, <500>, <1000>] +- dlg,jack-det-rate: Jack type detection latency (3/4 pole) + ["32ms_64ms", "64ms_128ms", "128ms_256ms", "256ms_512ms"] +- dlg,jack-rem-deb : Debounce time for jack removal (ms) + [<1>, <5>, <10>, <20>] +- dlg,a-d-btn-thr : Impedance threshold between buttons A and D + [0x0 - 0xFF] +- dlg,d-b-btn-thr : Impedance threshold between buttons D and B + [0x0 - 0xFF] +- dlg,b-c-btn-thr : Impedance threshold between buttons B and C + [0x0 - 0xFF] +- dlg,c-mic-btn-thr : Impedance threshold between button C and Mic + [0x0 - 0xFF] +- dlg,btn-avg : Number of 8-bit readings for averaged button measurement + [<1>, <2>, <4>, <8>] +- dlg,adc-1bit-rpt : Repeat count for 1-bit button measurement + [<1>, <2>, <4>, <8>] + +====== + +Example: + + codec: da7219@1a { + compatible = "dlg,da7219"; + reg = <0x1a>; + + interrupt-parent = <&gpio6>; + interrupts = <11 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>; + + VDD-supply = <®_audio>; + VDDMIC-supply = <®_audio>; + VDDIO-supply = <®_audio>; + + clocks = <&clks 201>; + clock-names = "mclk"; + + dlg,ldo-lvl = <1200>; + dlg,micbias-lvl = <2600>; + dlg,mic-amp-in-sel = "diff"; + + da7219_aad { + dlg,btn-cfg = <50>; + dlg,mic-det-thr = <500>; + dlg,jack-ins-deb = <20>; + dlg,jack-det-rate = "32ms_64ms"; + dlg,jack-rem-deb = <1>; + + dlg,a-d-btn-thr = <0xa>; + dlg,d-b-btn-thr = <0x16>; + dlg,b-c-btn-thr = <0x21>; + dlg,c-mic-btn-thr = <0x3E>; + + dlg,btn-avg = <4>; + dlg,adc-1bit-rpt = <1>; + }; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/fsl-asoc-card.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/fsl-asoc-card.txt index a96774c194c8..ce55c0a6f757 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/fsl-asoc-card.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/fsl-asoc-card.txt @@ -13,13 +13,15 @@ So having this generic sound card allows all Freescale SoC users to benefit from the simplification of a new card support and the capability of the wide sample rates support through ASRC. -Note: The card is initially designed for those sound cards who use I2S and - PCM DAI formats. However, it'll be also possible to support those non - I2S/PCM type sound cards, such as S/PDIF audio and HDMI audio, as long - as the driver has been properly upgraded. +Note: The card is initially designed for those sound cards who use AC'97, I2S + and PCM DAI formats. However, it'll be also possible to support those non + AC'97/I2S/PCM type sound cards, such as S/PDIF audio and HDMI audio, as + long as the driver has been properly upgraded. The compatible list for this generic sound card currently: + "fsl,imx-audio-ac97" + "fsl,imx-audio-cs42888" "fsl,imx-audio-wm8962" diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/nau8825.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/nau8825.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..d3374231c871 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/nau8825.txt @@ -0,0 +1,102 @@ +Nuvoton NAU8825 audio codec + +This device supports I2C only. + +Required properties: + - compatible : Must be "nuvoton,nau8825" + + - reg : the I2C address of the device. This is either 0x1a (CSB=0) or 0x1b (CSB=1). + +Optional properties: + - nuvoton,jkdet-enable: Enable jack detection via JKDET pin. + - nuvoton,jkdet-pull-enable: Enable JKDET pin pull. If set - pin pull enabled, + otherwise pin in high impedance state. + - nuvoton,jkdet-pull-up: Pull-up JKDET pin. If set then JKDET pin is pull up, otherwise pull down. + - nuvoton,jkdet-polarity: JKDET pin polarity. 0 - active high, 1 - active low. + + - nuvoton,vref-impedance: VREF Impedance selection + 0 - Open + 1 - 25 kOhm + 2 - 125 kOhm + 3 - 2.5 kOhm + + - nuvoton,micbias-voltage: Micbias voltage level. + 0 - VDDA + 1 - VDDA + 2 - VDDA * 1.1 + 3 - VDDA * 1.2 + 4 - VDDA * 1.3 + 5 - VDDA * 1.4 + 6 - VDDA * 1.53 + 7 - VDDA * 1.53 + + - nuvoton,sar-threshold-num: Number of buttons supported + - nuvoton,sar-threshold: Impedance threshold for each button. Array that contains up to 8 buttons configuration. SAR value is calculated as + SAR = 255 * MICBIAS / SAR_VOLTAGE * R / (2000 + R) + where MICBIAS is configured by 'nuvoton,micbias-voltage', SAR_VOLTAGE is configured by 'nuvoton,sar-voltage', R - button impedance. + Refer datasheet section 10.2 for more information about threshold calculation. + + - nuvoton,sar-hysteresis: Button impedance measurement hysteresis. + + - nuvoton,sar-voltage: Reference voltage for button impedance measurement. + 0 - VDDA + 1 - VDDA + 2 - VDDA * 1.1 + 3 - VDDA * 1.2 + 4 - VDDA * 1.3 + 5 - VDDA * 1.4 + 6 - VDDA * 1.53 + 7 - VDDA * 1.53 + + - nuvoton,sar-compare-time: SAR compare time + 0 - 500 ns + 1 - 1 us + 2 - 2 us + 3 - 4 us + + - nuvoton,sar-sampling-time: SAR sampling time + 0 - 2 us + 1 - 4 us + 2 - 8 us + 3 - 16 us + + - nuvoton,short-key-debounce: Button short key press debounce time. + 0 - 30 ms + 1 - 50 ms + 2 - 100 ms + 3 - 30 ms + + - nuvoton,jack-insert-debounce: number from 0 to 7 that sets debounce time to 2^(n+2) ms + - nuvoton,jack-eject-debounce: number from 0 to 7 that sets debounce time to 2^(n+2) ms + + - clocks: list of phandle and clock specifier pairs according to common clock bindings for the + clocks described in clock-names + - clock-names: should include "mclk" for the MCLK master clock + +Example: + + headset: nau8825@1a { + compatible = "nuvoton,nau8825"; + reg = <0x1a>; + interrupt-parent = <&gpio>; + interrupts = <TEGRA_GPIO(E, 6) IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_LOW>; + nuvoton,jkdet-enable; + nuvoton,jkdet-pull-enable; + nuvoton,jkdet-pull-up; + nuvoton,jkdet-polarity = <GPIO_ACTIVE_LOW>; + nuvoton,vref-impedance = <2>; + nuvoton,micbias-voltage = <6>; + // Setup 4 buttons impedance according to Android specification + nuvoton,sar-threshold-num = <4>; + nuvoton,sar-threshold = <0xc 0x1e 0x38 0x60>; + nuvoton,sar-hysteresis = <1>; + nuvoton,sar-voltage = <0>; + nuvoton,sar-compare-time = <0>; + nuvoton,sar-sampling-time = <0>; + nuvoton,short-key-debounce = <2>; + nuvoton,jack-insert-debounce = <7>; + nuvoton,jack-eject-debounce = <7>; + + clock-names = "mclk"; + clocks = <&tegra_car TEGRA210_CLK_CLK_OUT_2>; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/renesas,rsnd.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/renesas,rsnd.txt index 1173395b5e5c..c57cbd65736c 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/renesas,rsnd.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/renesas,rsnd.txt @@ -4,10 +4,12 @@ Required properties: - compatible : "renesas,rcar_sound-<soctype>", fallbacks "renesas,rcar_sound-gen1" if generation1, and "renesas,rcar_sound-gen2" if generation2 + "renesas,rcar_sound-gen3" if generation3 Examples with soctypes are: - "renesas,rcar_sound-r8a7778" (R-Car M1A) - "renesas,rcar_sound-r8a7790" (R-Car H2) - "renesas,rcar_sound-r8a7791" (R-Car M2-W) + - "renesas,rcar_sound-r8a7795" (R-Car H3) - reg : Should contain the register physical address. required register is SRU/ADG/SSI if generation1 @@ -30,6 +32,11 @@ Required properties: - rcar_sound,dai : DAI contents. The number of DAI subnode should be same as HW. see below for detail. +- #sound-dai-cells : it must be 0 if your system is using single DAI + it must be 1 if your system is using multi DAI +- #clock-cells : it must be 0 if your system has audio_clkout + it must be 1 if your system has audio_clkout0/1/2/3 +- clock-frequency : for all audio_clkout0/1/2/3 SSI subnode properties: - interrupts : Should contain SSI interrupt for PIO transfer diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/rockchip-i2s.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/rockchip-i2s.txt index 9b82c20b306b..2267d249ca0e 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/rockchip-i2s.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/rockchip-i2s.txt @@ -12,8 +12,6 @@ Required properties: - reg: physical base address of the controller and length of memory mapped region. - interrupts: should contain the I2S interrupt. -- #address-cells: should be 1. -- #size-cells: should be 0. - dmas: DMA specifiers for tx and rx dma. See the DMA client binding, Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/dma.txt - dma-names: should include "tx" and "rx". @@ -21,6 +19,7 @@ Required properties: - clock-names: should contain followings: - "i2s_hclk": clock for I2S BUS - "i2s_clk" : clock for I2S controller +- rockchip,capture-channels: max capture channels, if not set, 2 channels default. Example for rk3288 I2S controller: @@ -28,10 +27,9 @@ i2s@ff890000 { compatible = "rockchip,rk3288-i2s", "rockchip,rk3066-i2s"; reg = <0xff890000 0x10000>; interrupts = <GIC_SPI 85 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>; - #address-cells = <1>; - #size-cells = <0>; dmas = <&pdma1 0>, <&pdma1 1>; dma-names = "tx", "rx"; clock-names = "i2s_hclk", "i2s_clk"; clocks = <&cru HCLK_I2S0>, <&cru SCLK_I2S0>; + rockchip,capture-channels = <2>; }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/rockchip-spdif.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/rockchip-spdif.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..e64dbdea7db9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/rockchip-spdif.txt @@ -0,0 +1,40 @@ +* Rockchip SPDIF transceiver + +The S/PDIF audio block is a stereo transceiver that allows the +processor to receive and transmit digital audio via an coaxial cable or +a fibre cable. + +Required properties: + +- compatible: should be one of the following: + - "rockchip,rk3288-spdif", "rockchip,rk3188-spdif" or + "rockchip,rk3066-spdif" +- reg: physical base address of the controller and length of memory mapped + region. +- interrupts: should contain the SPDIF interrupt. +- dmas: DMA specifiers for tx dma. See the DMA client binding, + Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/dma.txt +- dma-names: should be "tx" +- clocks: a list of phandle + clock-specifier pairs, one for each entry + in clock-names. +- clock-names: should contain following: + - "hclk": clock for SPDIF controller + - "mclk" : clock for SPDIF bus + +Required properties on RK3288: + - rockchip,grf: the phandle of the syscon node for the general register + file (GRF) + +Example for the rk3188 SPDIF controller: + +spdif: spdif@0x1011e000 { + compatible = "rockchip,rk3188-spdif", "rockchip,rk3066-spdif"; + reg = <0x1011e000 0x2000>; + interrupts = <GIC_SPI 32 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>; + dmas = <&dmac1_s 8>; + dma-names = "tx"; + clock-names = "hclk", "mclk"; + clocks = <&cru HCLK_SPDIF>, <&cru SCLK_SPDIF>; + status = "disabled"; + #sound-dai-cells = <0>; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/rt5640.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/rt5640.txt index bac4d9ac1edc..9e62f6eb348f 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/rt5640.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/rt5640.txt @@ -14,7 +14,8 @@ Optional properties: - realtek,in1-differential - realtek,in2-differential - Boolean. Indicate MIC1/2 input are differential, rather than single-ended. +- realtek,in3-differential + Boolean. Indicate MIC1/2/3 input are differential, rather than single-ended. - realtek,ldo1-en-gpios : The GPIO that controls the CODEC's LDO1_EN pin. @@ -24,9 +25,11 @@ Pins on the device (for linking into audio routes) for RT5639/RT5640: * DMIC2 * MICBIAS1 * IN1P - * IN1R + * IN1N * IN2P - * IN2R + * IN2N + * IN3P + * IN3N * HPOL * HPOR * LOUTL diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/sun4i-codec.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/sun4i-codec.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..c92966bd5488 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/sun4i-codec.txt @@ -0,0 +1,27 @@ +* Allwinner A10 Codec + +Required properties: +- compatible: must be either "allwinner,sun4i-a10-codec" or + "allwinner,sun7i-a20-codec" +- reg: must contain the registers location and length +- interrupts: must contain the codec interrupt +- dmas: DMA channels for tx and rx dma. See the DMA client binding, + Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/dma.txt +- dma-names: should include "tx" and "rx". +- clocks: a list of phandle + clock-specifer pairs, one for each entry + in clock-names. +- clock-names: should contain followings: + - "apb": the parent APB clock for this controller + - "codec": the parent module clock + +Example: +codec: codec@01c22c00 { + #sound-dai-cells = <0>; + compatible = "allwinner,sun7i-a20-codec"; + reg = <0x01c22c00 0x40>; + interrupts = <0 30 4>; + clocks = <&apb0_gates 0>, <&codec_clk>; + clock-names = "apb", "codec"; + dmas = <&dma 0 19>, <&dma 0 19>; + dma-names = "rx", "tx"; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/tdm-slot.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/tdm-slot.txt index 6a2c84247f91..34cf70e2cbc4 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/tdm-slot.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/tdm-slot.txt @@ -4,11 +4,15 @@ This specifies audio DAI's TDM slot. TDM slot properties: dai-tdm-slot-num : Number of slots in use. -dai-tdm-slot-width : Width in bits for each slot. +dai-tdm-slot-width : Width in bits for each slot. +dai-tdm-slot-tx-mask : Transmit direction slot mask, optional +dai-tdm-slot-rx-mask : Receive direction slot mask, optional For instance: dai-tdm-slot-num = <2>; dai-tdm-slot-width = <8>; + dai-tdm-slot-tx-mask = <0 1>; + dai-tdm-slot-rx-mask = <1 0>; And for each spcified driver, there could be one .of_xlate_tdm_slot_mask() to specify a explicit mapping of the channels and the slots. If it's absent @@ -18,3 +22,8 @@ tx and rx masks. For snd_soc_of_xlate_tdm_slot_mask(), the tx and rx masks will use a 1 bit for an active slot as default, and the default active bits are at the LSB of the masks. + +The explicit masks are given as array of integers, where the first +number presents bit-0 (LSB), second presents bit-1, etc. Any non zero +number is considered 1 and 0 is 0. snd_soc_of_xlate_tdm_slot_mask() +does not do anything, if either mask is set non zero value. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/brcm,bcm2835-aux-spi.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/brcm,bcm2835-aux-spi.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..9887b0724759 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/brcm,bcm2835-aux-spi.txt @@ -0,0 +1,38 @@ +Broadcom BCM2835 auxiliar SPI1/2 controller + +The BCM2835 contains two forms of SPI master controller, one known simply as +SPI0, and the other known as the "Universal SPI Master"; part of the +auxiliary block. This binding applies to the SPI1/2 controller. + +Required properties: +- compatible: Should be "brcm,bcm2835-aux-spi". +- reg: Should contain register location and length for the spi block +- interrupts: Should contain shared interrupt of the aux block +- clocks: The clock feeding the SPI controller - needs to + point to the auxiliar clock driver of the bcm2835, + as this clock will enable the output gate for the specific + clock. +- cs-gpios: the cs-gpios (native cs is NOT supported) + see also spi-bus.txt + +Example: + +spi1@7e215080 { + compatible = "brcm,bcm2835-aux-spi"; + reg = <0x7e215080 0x40>; + interrupts = <1 29>; + clocks = <&aux_clocks BCM2835_AUX_CLOCK_SPI1>; + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <0>; + cs-gpios = <&gpio 18>, <&gpio 17>, <&gpio 16>; +}; + +spi2@7e2150c0 { + compatible = "brcm,bcm2835-aux-spi"; + reg = <0x7e2150c0 0x40>; + interrupts = <1 29>; + clocks = <&aux_clocks BCM2835_AUX_CLOCK_SPI2>; + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <0>; + cs-gpios = <&gpio 43>, <&gpio 44>, <&gpio 45>; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/sh-msiof.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/sh-msiof.txt index 8f771441be60..705075da2f10 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/sh-msiof.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/sh-msiof.txt @@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ Optional properties, deprecated for soctype-specific bindings: - renesas,tx-fifo-size : Overrides the default tx fifo size given in words (default is 64) - renesas,rx-fifo-size : Overrides the default rx fifo size given in words - (default is 64, or 256 on R-Car Gen2) + (default is 64) Pinctrl properties might be needed, too. See Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/renesas,*. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-mt65xx.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-mt65xx.txt index dcefc438272f..ce363c923f44 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-mt65xx.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-mt65xx.txt @@ -15,21 +15,25 @@ Required properties: - interrupts: Should contain spi interrupt - clocks: phandles to input clocks. - The first should be <&topckgen CLK_TOP_SPI_SEL>. - The second should be one of the following. + The first should be one of the following. It's PLL. - <&clk26m>: specify parent clock 26MHZ. - <&topckgen CLK_TOP_SYSPLL3_D2>: specify parent clock 109MHZ. It's the default one. - <&topckgen CLK_TOP_SYSPLL4_D2>: specify parent clock 78MHZ. - <&topckgen CLK_TOP_UNIVPLL2_D4>: specify parent clock 104MHZ. - <&topckgen CLK_TOP_UNIVPLL1_D8>: specify parent clock 78MHZ. + The second should be <&topckgen CLK_TOP_SPI_SEL>. It's clock mux. + The third is <&pericfg CLK_PERI_SPI0>. It's clock gate. -- clock-names: shall be "spi-clk" for the controller clock, and - "parent-clk" for the parent clock. +- clock-names: shall be "parent-clk" for the parent clock, "sel-clk" for the + muxes clock, and "spi-clk" for the clock gate. Optional properties: +-cs-gpios: see spi-bus.txt, only required for MT8173. + - mediatek,pad-select: specify which pins group(ck/mi/mo/cs) spi - controller used, this value should be 0~3, only required for MT8173. + controller used. This is a array, the element value should be 0~3, + only required for MT8173. 0: specify GPIO69,70,71,72 for spi pins. 1: specify GPIO102,103,104,105 for spi pins. 2: specify GPIO128,129,130,131 for spi pins. @@ -44,8 +48,11 @@ spi: spi@1100a000 { #size-cells = <0>; reg = <0 0x1100a000 0 0x1000>; interrupts = <GIC_SPI 110 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_LOW>; - clocks = <&topckgen CLK_TOP_SPI_SEL>, <&topckgen CLK_TOP_SYSPLL3_D2>; - clock-names = "spi-clk", "parent-clk"; - mediatek,pad-select = <0>; + clocks = <&topckgen CLK_TOP_SYSPLL3_D2>, + <&topckgen CLK_TOP_SPI_SEL>, + <&pericfg CLK_PERI_SPI0>; + clock-names = "parent-clk", "sel-clk", "spi-clk"; + cs-gpios = <&pio 105 GPIO_ACTIVE_LOW>, <&pio 72 GPIO_ACTIVE_LOW>; + mediatek,pad-select = <1>, <0>; status = "disabled"; }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/thermal/thermal.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/thermal/thermal.txt index 8a49362dea6e..41b817f7b670 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/thermal/thermal.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/thermal/thermal.txt @@ -55,19 +55,11 @@ of heat dissipation). For example a fan's cooling states correspond to the different fan speeds possible. Cooling states are referred to by single unsigned integers, where larger numbers mean greater heat dissipation. The precise set of cooling states associated with a device -(as referred to be the cooling-min-state and cooling-max-state +(as referred to by the cooling-min-level and cooling-max-level properties) should be defined in a particular device's binding. For more examples of cooling devices, refer to the example sections below. Required properties: -- cooling-min-state: An integer indicating the smallest - Type: unsigned cooling state accepted. Typically 0. - Size: one cell - -- cooling-max-state: An integer indicating the largest - Type: unsigned cooling state accepted. - Size: one cell - - #cooling-cells: Used to provide cooling device specific information Type: unsigned while referring to it. Must be at least 2, in order Size: one cell to specify minimum and maximum cooling state used @@ -77,6 +69,15 @@ Required properties: See Cooling device maps section below for more details on how consumers refer to cooling devices. +Optional properties: +- cooling-min-level: An integer indicating the smallest + Type: unsigned cooling state accepted. Typically 0. + Size: one cell + +- cooling-max-level: An integer indicating the largest + Type: unsigned cooling state accepted. + Size: one cell + * Trip points The trip node is a node to describe a point in the temperature domain @@ -225,8 +226,8 @@ cpus { 396000 950000 198000 850000 >; - cooling-min-state = <0>; - cooling-max-state = <3>; + cooling-min-level = <0>; + cooling-max-level = <3>; #cooling-cells = <2>; /* min followed by max */ }; ... @@ -240,8 +241,8 @@ cpus { */ fan0: fan@0x48 { ... - cooling-min-state = <0>; - cooling-max-state = <9>; + cooling-min-level = <0>; + cooling-max-level = <9>; #cooling-cells = <2>; /* min followed by max */ }; }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/ci-hdrc-usb2.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/ci-hdrc-usb2.txt index d71ef07bca5d..781296bfbe4f 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/ci-hdrc-usb2.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/ci-hdrc-usb2.txt @@ -6,6 +6,7 @@ Required properties: "lsi,zevio-usb" "qcom,ci-hdrc" "chipidea,usb2" + "xlnx,zynq-usb-2.20a" - reg: base address and length of the registers - interrupts: interrupt for the USB controller @@ -26,10 +27,6 @@ Optional properties: - vbus-supply: reference to the VBUS regulator - maximum-speed: limit the maximum connection speed to "full-speed". - tpl-support: TPL (Targeted Peripheral List) feature for targeted hosts -- fsl,usbmisc: (FSL only) phandler of non-core register device, with one - argument that indicate usb controller index -- disable-over-current: (FSL only) disable over current detect -- external-vbus-divider: (FSL only) enables off-chip resistor divider for Vbus - itc-setting: interrupt threshold control register control, the setting should be aligned with ITC bits at register USBCMD. - ahb-burst-config: it is vendor dependent, the required value should be @@ -40,11 +37,28 @@ Optional properties: - tx-burst-size-dword: it is vendor dependent, the tx burst size in dword (4 bytes), This register represents the maximum length of a the burst in 32-bit words while moving data from system memory to the USB - bus, changing this value takes effect only the SBUSCFG.AHBBRST is 0. + bus, the value of this property will only take effect if property + "ahb-burst-config" is set to 0, if this property is missing the reset + default of the hardware implementation will be used. - rx-burst-size-dword: it is vendor dependent, the rx burst size in dword (4 bytes), This register represents the maximum length of a the burst in 32-bit words while moving data from the USB bus to system memory, - changing this value takes effect only the SBUSCFG.AHBBRST is 0. + the value of this property will only take effect if property + "ahb-burst-config" is set to 0, if this property is missing the reset + default of the hardware implementation will be used. +- extcon: phandles to external connector devices. First phandle should point to + external connector, which provide "USB" cable events, the second should point + to external connector device, which provide "USB-HOST" cable events. If one + of the external connector devices is not required, empty <0> phandle should + be specified. +- phy-clkgate-delay-us: the delay time (us) between putting the PHY into + low power mode and gating the PHY clock. + +i.mx specific properties +- fsl,usbmisc: phandler of non-core register device, with one + argument that indicate usb controller index +- disable-over-current: disable over current detect +- external-vbus-divider: enables off-chip resistor divider for Vbus Example: @@ -61,4 +75,6 @@ Example: ahb-burst-config = <0x0>; tx-burst-size-dword = <0x10>; /* 64 bytes */ rx-burst-size-dword = <0x10>; + extcon = <0>, <&usb_id>; + phy-clkgate-delay-us = <400>; }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/dwc3.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/dwc3.txt index 0815eac5b185..9ff48e0defb4 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/dwc3.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/dwc3.txt @@ -35,11 +35,16 @@ Optional properties: LTSSM during USB3 Compliance mode. - snps,dis_u3_susphy_quirk: when set core will disable USB3 suspend phy. - snps,dis_u2_susphy_quirk: when set core will disable USB2 suspend phy. + - snps,dis_enblslpm_quirk: when set clears the enblslpm in GUSB2PHYCFG, + disabling the suspend signal to the PHY. - snps,is-utmi-l1-suspend: true when DWC3 asserts output signal utmi_l1_suspend_n, false when asserts utmi_sleep_n - snps,hird-threshold: HIRD threshold - snps,hsphy_interface: High-Speed PHY interface selection between "utmi" for UTMI+ and "ulpi" for ULPI when the DWC_USB3_HSPHY_INTERFACE has value 3. + - snps,quirk-frame-length-adjustment: Value for GFLADJ_30MHZ field of GFLADJ + register for post-silicon frame length adjustment when the + fladj_30mhz_sdbnd signal is invalid or incorrect. This is usually a subnode to DWC3 glue to which it is connected. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/renesas_usbhs.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/renesas_usbhs.txt index 64a4ca6cf96f..7d48f63db44e 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/renesas_usbhs.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/renesas_usbhs.txt @@ -5,6 +5,7 @@ Required properties: - "renesas,usbhs-r8a7790" - "renesas,usbhs-r8a7791" - "renesas,usbhs-r8a7794" + - "renesas,usbhs-r8a7795" - reg: Base address and length of the register for the USBHS - interrupts: Interrupt specifier for the USBHS - clocks: A list of phandle + clock specifier pairs diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/vendor-prefixes.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/vendor-prefixes.txt index ac5f0c34ae00..13e54a0e78b9 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/vendor-prefixes.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/vendor-prefixes.txt @@ -101,6 +101,7 @@ himax Himax Technologies, Inc. hisilicon Hisilicon Limited. hit Hitachi Ltd. hitex Hitex Development Tools +holt Holt Integrated Circuits, Inc. honeywell Honeywell hp Hewlett Packard i2se I2SE GmbH @@ -169,6 +170,7 @@ phytec PHYTEC Messtechnik GmbH picochip Picochip Ltd plathome Plat'Home Co., Ltd. pixcir PIXCIR MICROELECTRONICS Co., Ltd +pulsedlight PulsedLight, Inc powervr PowerVR (deprecated, use img) qca Qualcomm Atheros, Inc. qcom Qualcomm Technologies, Inc @@ -191,6 +193,7 @@ sbs Smart Battery System schindler Schindler seagate Seagate Technology PLC semtech Semtech Corporation +sgx SGX Sensortech sharp Sharp Corporation sil Silicon Image silabs Silicon Laboratories @@ -203,6 +206,7 @@ sitronix Sitronix Technology Corporation skyworks Skyworks Solutions, Inc. smsc Standard Microsystems Corporation snps Synopsys, Inc. +socionext Socionext Inc. solidrun SolidRun solomon Solomon Systech Limited sony Sony Corporation @@ -222,6 +226,7 @@ toshiba Toshiba Corporation toumaz Toumaz tplink TP-LINK Technologies Co., Ltd. truly Truly Semiconductors Limited +upisemi uPI Semiconductor Corp. usi Universal Scientific Industrial Co., Ltd. v3 V3 Semiconductor variscite Variscite Ltd. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/backlight/pm8941-wled.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/backlight/pm8941-wled.txt index 424f8444a6cd..e5b294dafc58 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/backlight/pm8941-wled.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/backlight/pm8941-wled.txt @@ -5,6 +5,8 @@ Required properties: - reg: slave address Optional properties: +- default-brightness: brightness value on boot, value from: 0-4095 + default: 2048 - label: The name of the backlight device - qcom,cs-out: bool; enable current sink output - qcom,cabc: bool; enable content adaptive backlight control diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/w1/omap-hdq.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/w1/omap-hdq.txt index fef794741bd1..913c5f91a0f9 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/w1/omap-hdq.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/w1/omap-hdq.txt @@ -1,11 +1,15 @@ * OMAP HDQ One wire bus master controller Required properties: -- compatible : should be "ti,omap3-1w" +- compatible : should be "ti,omap3-1w" or "ti,am4372-hdq" - reg : Address and length of the register set for the device - interrupts : interrupt line. - ti,hwmods : "hdq1w" +Optional properties: +- ti,mode: should be "hdq": HDQ mode "1w": one-wire mode. + If not specified HDQ mode is implied. + Example: - From omap3.dtsi @@ -14,4 +18,5 @@ Example: reg = <0x480b2000 0x1000>; interrupts = <58>; ti,hwmods = "hdq1w"; + ti,mode = "hdq"; }; diff --git a/Documentation/driver-model/platform.txt b/Documentation/driver-model/platform.txt index 07795ec51cde..e456696cfef2 100644 --- a/Documentation/driver-model/platform.txt +++ b/Documentation/driver-model/platform.txt @@ -63,6 +63,20 @@ runtime memory footprint: int platform_driver_probe(struct platform_driver *drv, int (*probe)(struct platform_device *)) +Kernel modules can be composed of several platform drivers. The platform core +provides helpers to register and unregister an array of drivers: + + int __platform_register_drivers(struct platform_driver * const *drivers, + unsigned int count, struct module *owner); + void platform_unregister_drivers(struct platform_driver * const *drivers, + unsigned int count); + +If one of the drivers fails to register, all drivers registered up to that +point will be unregistered in reverse order. Note that there is a convenience +macro that passes THIS_MODULE as owner parameter: + + #define platform_register_driver(drivers, count) + Device Enumeration ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ diff --git a/Documentation/edac.txt b/Documentation/edac.txt index 0cf27a3544a5..80841a2d640c 100644 --- a/Documentation/edac.txt +++ b/Documentation/edac.txt @@ -744,6 +744,52 @@ exports one possible that some errors could be lost. With rdimm's, they display the contents of the registers +AMD64_EDAC REFERENCE DOCUMENTS USED +----------------------------------- +amd64_edac module is based on the following documents +(available from http://support.amd.com/en-us/search/tech-docs): + +1. Title: BIOS and Kernel Developer's Guide for AMD Athlon 64 and AMD + Opteron Processors + AMD publication #: 26094 + Revision: 3.26 + Link: http://support.amd.com/TechDocs/26094.PDF + +2. Title: BIOS and Kernel Developer's Guide for AMD NPT Family 0Fh + Processors + AMD publication #: 32559 + Revision: 3.00 + Issue Date: May 2006 + Link: http://support.amd.com/TechDocs/32559.pdf + +3. Title: BIOS and Kernel Developer's Guide (BKDG) For AMD Family 10h + Processors + AMD publication #: 31116 + Revision: 3.00 + Issue Date: September 07, 2007 + Link: http://support.amd.com/TechDocs/31116.pdf + +4. Title: BIOS and Kernel Developer's Guide (BKDG) for AMD Family 15h + Models 30h-3Fh Processors + AMD publication #: 49125 + Revision: 3.06 + Issue Date: 2/12/2015 (latest release) + Link: http://support.amd.com/TechDocs/49125_15h_Models_30h-3Fh_BKDG.pdf + +5. Title: BIOS and Kernel Developer's Guide (BKDG) for AMD Family 15h + Models 60h-6Fh Processors + AMD publication #: 50742 + Revision: 3.01 + Issue Date: 7/23/2015 (latest release) + Link: http://support.amd.com/TechDocs/50742_15h_Models_60h-6Fh_BKDG.pdf + +6. Title: BIOS and Kernel Developer's Guide (BKDG) for AMD Family 16h + Models 00h-0Fh Processors + AMD publication #: 48751 + Revision: 3.03 + Issue Date: 2/23/2015 (latest release) + Link: http://support.amd.com/TechDocs/48751_16h_bkdg.pdf + CREDITS: ======== diff --git a/Documentation/email-clients.txt b/Documentation/email-clients.txt index 3fa450881ecb..aba85b39a400 100644 --- a/Documentation/email-clients.txt +++ b/Documentation/email-clients.txt @@ -220,7 +220,7 @@ to coerce it into behaving. Compose dialog. Please note that "external editor" requires that your editor must not - fork, or in other words, the editor must not return before closing. + fork, or in other words, the editor must not return before closing. You may have to pass additional flags or change the settings of your editor. Most notably if you are using gvim then you must pass the -f option to gvim by putting "/usr/bin/gvim -f" (if the binary is in diff --git a/Documentation/features/debug/KASAN/arch-support.txt b/Documentation/features/debug/KASAN/arch-support.txt index 14531da2fb54..703f5784bc90 100644 --- a/Documentation/features/debug/KASAN/arch-support.txt +++ b/Documentation/features/debug/KASAN/arch-support.txt @@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ | alpha: | TODO | | arc: | TODO | | arm: | TODO | - | arm64: | TODO | + | arm64: | ok | | avr32: | TODO | | blackfin: | TODO | | c6x: | TODO | diff --git a/Documentation/features/vm/THP/arch-support.txt b/Documentation/features/vm/THP/arch-support.txt index df384e3e845f..523f8307b9cd 100644 --- a/Documentation/features/vm/THP/arch-support.txt +++ b/Documentation/features/vm/THP/arch-support.txt @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ | arch |status| ----------------------- | alpha: | TODO | - | arc: | .. | + | arc: | ok | | arm: | ok | | arm64: | ok | | avr32: | .. | diff --git a/Documentation/features/vm/pte_special/arch-support.txt b/Documentation/features/vm/pte_special/arch-support.txt index aaaa21db6226..3de5434c857c 100644 --- a/Documentation/features/vm/pte_special/arch-support.txt +++ b/Documentation/features/vm/pte_special/arch-support.txt @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ | arch |status| ----------------------- | alpha: | TODO | - | arc: | TODO | + | arc: | ok | | arm: | ok | | arm64: | ok | | avr32: | TODO | diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/debugfs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/debugfs.txt index 463f595733e8..4f45f71149cb 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/debugfs.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/debugfs.txt @@ -105,7 +105,7 @@ a variable of type size_t. Boolean values can be placed in debugfs with: struct dentry *debugfs_create_bool(const char *name, umode_t mode, - struct dentry *parent, u32 *value); + struct dentry *parent, bool *value); A read on the resulting file will yield either Y (for non-zero values) or N, followed by a newline. If written to, it will accept either upper- or diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/f2fs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/f2fs.txt index e2d5105b7214..b102b436563e 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/f2fs.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/f2fs.txt @@ -102,7 +102,8 @@ background_gc=%s Turn on/off cleaning operations, namely garbage collection, triggered in background when I/O subsystem is idle. If background_gc=on, it will turn on the garbage collection and if background_gc=off, garbage collection - will be truned off. + will be truned off. If background_gc=sync, it will turn + on synchronous garbage collection running in background. Default value for this option is on. So garbage collection is on by default. disable_roll_forward Disable the roll-forward recovery routine diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/nfsroot.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/nfsroot.txt index 2d66ed688125..bb5ab6de5924 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/nfsroot.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/nfsroot.txt @@ -157,6 +157,9 @@ ip=<client-ip>:<server-ip>:<gw-ip>:<netmask>:<hostname>:<device>:<autoconf>: both: use both BOOTP and RARP but not DHCP (old option kept for backwards compatibility) + if dhcp is used, the client identifier can be used by following + format "ip=dhcp,client-id-type,client-id-value" + Default: any <dns0-ip> IP address of first nameserver. diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/path-lookup.md b/Documentation/filesystems/path-lookup.md new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..1b39e084a2b2 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/path-lookup.md @@ -0,0 +1,1297 @@ +<head> +<style> p { max-width:50em} ol, ul {max-width: 40em}</style> +</head> + +Pathname lookup in Linux. +========================= + +This write-up is based on three articles published at lwn.net: + +- <https://lwn.net/Articles/649115/> Pathname lookup in Linux +- <https://lwn.net/Articles/649729/> RCU-walk: faster pathname lookup in Linux +- <https://lwn.net/Articles/650786/> A walk among the symlinks + +Written by Neil Brown with help from Al Viro and Jon Corbet. + +Introduction +------------ + +The most obvious aspect of pathname lookup, which very little +exploration is needed to discover, is that it is complex. There are +many rules, special cases, and implementation alternatives that all +combine to confuse the unwary reader. Computer science has long been +acquainted with such complexity and has tools to help manage it. One +tool that we will make extensive use of is "divide and conquer". For +the early parts of the analysis we will divide off symlinks - leaving +them until the final part. Well before we get to symlinks we have +another major division based on the VFS's approach to locking which +will allow us to review "REF-walk" and "RCU-walk" separately. But we +are getting ahead of ourselves. There are some important low level +distinctions we need to clarify first. + +There are two sorts of ... +-------------------------- + +[`openat()`]: http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man2/openat.2.html + +Pathnames (sometimes "file names"), used to identify objects in the +filesystem, will be familiar to most readers. They contain two sorts +of elements: "slashes" that are sequences of one or more "`/`" +characters, and "components" that are sequences of one or more +non-"`/`" characters. These form two kinds of paths. Those that +start with slashes are "absolute" and start from the filesystem root. +The others are "relative" and start from the current directory, or +from some other location specified by a file descriptor given to a +"xxx`at`" system call such as "[`openat()`]". + +[`execveat()`]: http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man2/execveat.2.html + +It is tempting to describe the second kind as starting with a +component, but that isn't always accurate: a pathname can lack both +slashes and components, it can be empty, in other words. This is +generally forbidden in POSIX, but some of those "xxx`at`" system calls +in Linux permit it when the `AT_EMPTY_PATH` flag is given. For +example, if you have an open file descriptor on an executable file you +can execute it by calling [`execveat()`] passing the file descriptor, +an empty path, and the `AT_EMPTY_PATH` flag. + +These paths can be divided into two sections: the final component and +everything else. The "everything else" is the easy bit. In all cases +it must identify a directory that already exists, otherwise an error +such as `ENOENT` or `ENOTDIR` will be reported. + +The final component is not so simple. Not only do different system +calls interpret it quite differently (e.g. some create it, some do +not), but it might not even exist: neither the empty pathname nor the +pathname that is just slashes have a final component. If it does +exist, it could be "`.`" or "`..`" which are handled quite differently +from other components. + +[POSIX]: http://pubs.opengroup.org/onlinepubs/9699919799/basedefs/V1_chap04.html#tag_04_12 + +If a pathname ends with a slash, such as "`/tmp/foo/`" it might be +tempting to consider that to have an empty final component. In many +ways that would lead to correct results, but not always. In +particular, `mkdir()` and `rmdir()` each create or remove a directory named +by the final component, and they are required to work with pathnames +ending in "`/`". According to [POSIX] + +> A pathname that contains at least one non- <slash> character and +> that ends with one or more trailing <slash> characters shall not +> be resolved successfully unless the last pathname component before +> the trailing <slash> characters names an existing directory or a +> directory entry that is to be created for a directory immediately +> after the pathname is resolved. + +The Linux pathname walking code (mostly in `fs/namei.c`) deals with +all of these issues: breaking the path into components, handling the +"everything else" quite separately from the final component, and +checking that the trailing slash is not used where it isn't +permitted. It also addresses the important issue of concurrent +access. + +While one process is looking up a pathname, another might be making +changes that affect that lookup. One fairly extreme case is that if +"a/b" were renamed to "a/c/b" while another process were looking up +"a/b/..", that process might successfully resolve on "a/c". +Most races are much more subtle, and a big part of the task of +pathname lookup is to prevent them from having damaging effects. Many +of the possible races are seen most clearly in the context of the +"dcache" and an understanding of that is central to understanding +pathname lookup. + +More than just a cache. +----------------------- + +The "dcache" caches information about names in each filesystem to +make them quickly available for lookup. Each entry (known as a +"dentry") contains three significant fields: a component name, a +pointer to a parent dentry, and a pointer to the "inode" which +contains further information about the object in that parent with +the given name. The inode pointer can be `NULL` indicating that the +name doesn't exist in the parent. While there can be linkage in the +dentry of a directory to the dentries of the children, that linkage is +not used for pathname lookup, and so will not be considered here. + +The dcache has a number of uses apart from accelerating lookup. One +that will be particularly relevant is that it is closely integrated +with the mount table that records which filesystem is mounted where. +What the mount table actually stores is which dentry is mounted on top +of which other dentry. + +When considering the dcache, we have another of our "two types" +distinctions: there are two types of filesystems. + +Some filesystems ensure that the information in the dcache is always +completely accurate (though not necessarily complete). This can allow +the VFS to determine if a particular file does or doesn't exist +without checking with the filesystem, and means that the VFS can +protect the filesystem against certain races and other problems. +These are typically "local" filesystems such as ext3, XFS, and Btrfs. + +Other filesystems don't provide that guarantee because they cannot. +These are typically filesystems that are shared across a network, +whether remote filesystems like NFS and 9P, or cluster filesystems +like ocfs2 or cephfs. These filesystems allow the VFS to revalidate +cached information, and must provide their own protection against +awkward races. The VFS can detect these filesystems by the +`DCACHE_OP_REVALIDATE` flag being set in the dentry. + +REF-walk: simple concurrency management with refcounts and spinlocks +-------------------------------------------------------------------- + +With all of those divisions carefully classified, we can now start +looking at the actual process of walking along a path. In particular +we will start with the handling of the "everything else" part of a +pathname, and focus on the "REF-walk" approach to concurrency +management. This code is found in the `link_path_walk()` function, if +you ignore all the places that only run when "`LOOKUP_RCU`" +(indicating the use of RCU-walk) is set. + +[Meet the Lockers]: https://lwn.net/Articles/453685/ + +REF-walk is fairly heavy-handed with locks and reference counts. Not +as heavy-handed as in the old "big kernel lock" days, but certainly not +afraid of taking a lock when one is needed. It uses a variety of +different concurrency controls. A background understanding of the +various primitives is assumed, or can be gleaned from elsewhere such +as in [Meet the Lockers]. + +The locking mechanisms used by REF-walk include: + +### dentry->d_lockref ### + +This uses the lockref primitive to provide both a spinlock and a +reference count. The special-sauce of this primitive is that the +conceptual sequence "lock; inc_ref; unlock;" can often be performed +with a single atomic memory operation. + +Holding a reference on a dentry ensures that the dentry won't suddenly +be freed and used for something else, so the values in various fields +will behave as expected. It also protects the `->d_inode` reference +to the inode to some extent. + +The association between a dentry and its inode is fairly permanent. +For example, when a file is renamed, the dentry and inode move +together to the new location. When a file is created the dentry will +initially be negative (i.e. `d_inode` is `NULL`), and will be assigned +to the new inode as part of the act of creation. + +When a file is deleted, this can be reflected in the cache either by +setting `d_inode` to `NULL`, or by removing it from the hash table +(described shortly) used to look up the name in the parent directory. +If the dentry is still in use the second option is used as it is +perfectly legal to keep using an open file after it has been deleted +and having the dentry around helps. If the dentry is not otherwise in +use (i.e. if the refcount in `d_lockref` is one), only then will +`d_inode` be set to `NULL`. Doing it this way is more efficient for a +very common case. + +So as long as a counted reference is held to a dentry, a non-`NULL` `->d_inode` +value will never be changed. + +### dentry->d_lock ### + +`d_lock` is a synonym for the spinlock that is part of `d_lockref` above. +For our purposes, holding this lock protects against the dentry being +renamed or unlinked. In particular, its parent (`d_parent`), and its +name (`d_name`) cannot be changed, and it cannot be removed from the +dentry hash table. + +When looking for a name in a directory, REF-walk takes `d_lock` on +each candidate dentry that it finds in the hash table and then checks +that the parent and name are correct. So it doesn't lock the parent +while searching in the cache; it only locks children. + +When looking for the parent for a given name (to handle "`..`"), +REF-walk can take `d_lock` to get a stable reference to `d_parent`, +but it first tries a more lightweight approach. As seen in +`dget_parent()`, if a reference can be claimed on the parent, and if +subsequently `d_parent` can be seen to have not changed, then there is +no need to actually take the lock on the child. + +### rename_lock ### + +Looking up a given name in a given directory involves computing a hash +from the two values (the name and the dentry of the directory), +accessing that slot in a hash table, and searching the linked list +that is found there. + +When a dentry is renamed, the name and the parent dentry can both +change so the hash will almost certainly change too. This would move the +dentry to a different chain in the hash table. If a filename search +happened to be looking at a dentry that was moved in this way, +it might end up continuing the search down the wrong chain, +and so miss out on part of the correct chain. + +The name-lookup process (`d_lookup()`) does _not_ try to prevent this +from happening, but only to detect when it happens. +`rename_lock` is a seqlock that is updated whenever any dentry is +renamed. If `d_lookup` finds that a rename happened while it +unsuccessfully scanned a chain in the hash table, it simply tries +again. + +### inode->i_mutex ### + +`i_mutex` is a mutex that serializes all changes to a particular +directory. This ensures that, for example, an `unlink()` and a `rename()` +cannot both happen at the same time. It also keeps the directory +stable while the filesystem is asked to look up a name that is not +currently in the dcache. + +This has a complementary role to that of `d_lock`: `i_mutex` on a +directory protects all of the names in that directory, while `d_lock` +on a name protects just one name in a directory. Most changes to the +dcache hold `i_mutex` on the relevant directory inode and briefly take +`d_lock` on one or more the dentries while the change happens. One +exception is when idle dentries are removed from the dcache due to +memory pressure. This uses `d_lock`, but `i_mutex` plays no role. + +The mutex affects pathname lookup in two distinct ways. Firstly it +serializes lookup of a name in a directory. `walk_component()` uses +`lookup_fast()` first which, in turn, checks to see if the name is in the cache, +using only `d_lock` locking. If the name isn't found, then `walk_component()` +falls back to `lookup_slow()` which takes `i_mutex`, checks again that +the name isn't in the cache, and then calls in to the filesystem to get a +definitive answer. A new dentry will be added to the cache regardless of +the result. + +Secondly, when pathname lookup reaches the final component, it will +sometimes need to take `i_mutex` before performing the last lookup so +that the required exclusion can be achieved. How path lookup chooses +to take, or not take, `i_mutex` is one of the +issues addressed in a subsequent section. + +### mnt->mnt_count ### + +`mnt_count` is a per-CPU reference counter on "`mount`" structures. +Per-CPU here means that incrementing the count is cheap as it only +uses CPU-local memory, but checking if the count is zero is expensive as +it needs to check with every CPU. Taking a `mnt_count` reference +prevents the mount structure from disappearing as the result of regular +unmount operations, but does not prevent a "lazy" unmount. So holding +`mnt_count` doesn't ensure that the mount remains in the namespace and, +in particular, doesn't stabilize the link to the mounted-on dentry. It +does, however, ensure that the `mount` data structure remains coherent, +and it provides a reference to the root dentry of the mounted +filesystem. So a reference through `->mnt_count` provides a stable +reference to the mounted dentry, but not the mounted-on dentry. + +### mount_lock ### + +`mount_lock` is a global seqlock, a bit like `rename_lock`. It can be used to +check if any change has been made to any mount points. + +While walking down the tree (away from the root) this lock is used when +crossing a mount point to check that the crossing was safe. That is, +the value in the seqlock is read, then the code finds the mount that +is mounted on the current directory, if there is one, and increments +the `mnt_count`. Finally the value in `mount_lock` is checked against +the old value. If there is no change, then the crossing was safe. If there +was a change, the `mnt_count` is decremented and the whole process is +retried. + +When walking up the tree (towards the root) by following a ".." link, +a little more care is needed. In this case the seqlock (which +contains both a counter and a spinlock) is fully locked to prevent +any changes to any mount points while stepping up. This locking is +needed to stabilize the link to the mounted-on dentry, which the +refcount on the mount itself doesn't ensure. + +### RCU ### + +Finally the global (but extremely lightweight) RCU read lock is held +from time to time to ensure certain data structures don't get freed +unexpectedly. + +In particular it is held while scanning chains in the dcache hash +table, and the mount point hash table. + +Bringing it together with `struct nameidata` +-------------------------------------------- + +[First edition Unix]: http://minnie.tuhs.org/cgi-bin/utree.pl?file=V1/u2.s + +Throughout the process of walking a path, the current status is stored +in a `struct nameidata`, "namei" being the traditional name - dating +all the way back to [First Edition Unix] - of the function that +converts a "name" to an "inode". `struct nameidata` contains (among +other fields): + +### `struct path path` ### + +A `path` contains a `struct vfsmount` (which is +embedded in a `struct mount`) and a `struct dentry`. Together these +record the current status of the walk. They start out referring to the +starting point (the current working directory, the root directory, or some other +directory identified by a file descriptor), and are updated on each +step. A reference through `d_lockref` and `mnt_count` is always +held. + +### `struct qstr last` ### + +This is a string together with a length (i.e. _not_ `nul` terminated) +that is the "next" component in the pathname. + +### `int last_type` ### + +This is one of `LAST_NORM`, `LAST_ROOT`, `LAST_DOT`, `LAST_DOTDOT`, or +`LAST_BIND`. The `last` field is only valid if the type is +`LAST_NORM`. `LAST_BIND` is used when following a symlink and no +components of the symlink have been processed yet. Others should be +fairly self-explanatory. + +### `struct path root` ### + +This is used to hold a reference to the effective root of the +filesystem. Often that reference won't be needed, so this field is +only assigned the first time it is used, or when a non-standard root +is requested. Keeping a reference in the `nameidata` ensures that +only one root is in effect for the entire path walk, even if it races +with a `chroot()` system call. + +The root is needed when either of two conditions holds: (1) either the +pathname or a symbolic link starts with a "'/'", or (2) a "`..`" +component is being handled, since "`..`" from the root must always stay +at the root. The value used is usually the current root directory of +the calling process. An alternate root can be provided as when +`sysctl()` calls `file_open_root()`, and when NFSv4 or Btrfs call +`mount_subtree()`. In each case a pathname is being looked up in a very +specific part of the filesystem, and the lookup must not be allowed to +escape that subtree. It works a bit like a local `chroot()`. + +Ignoring the handling of symbolic links, we can now describe the +"`link_path_walk()`" function, which handles the lookup of everything +except the final component as: + +> Given a path (`name`) and a nameidata structure (`nd`), check that the +> current directory has execute permission and then advance `name` +> over one component while updating `last_type` and `last`. If that +> was the final component, then return, otherwise call +> `walk_component()` and repeat from the top. + +`walk_component()` is even easier. If the component is `LAST_DOTS`, +it calls `handle_dots()` which does the necessary locking as already +described. If it finds a `LAST_NORM` component it first calls +"`lookup_fast()`" which only looks in the dcache, but will ask the +filesystem to revalidate the result if it is that sort of filesystem. +If that doesn't get a good result, it calls "`lookup_slow()`" which +takes the `i_mutex`, rechecks the cache, and then asks the filesystem +to find a definitive answer. Each of these will call +`follow_managed()` (as described below) to handle any mount points. + +In the absence of symbolic links, `walk_component()` creates a new +`struct path` containing a counted reference to the new dentry and a +reference to the new `vfsmount` which is only counted if it is +different from the previous `vfsmount`. It then calls +`path_to_nameidata()` to install the new `struct path` in the +`struct nameidata` and drop the unneeded references. + +This "hand-over-hand" sequencing of getting a reference to the new +dentry before dropping the reference to the previous dentry may +seem obvious, but is worth pointing out so that we will recognize its +analogue in the "RCU-walk" version. + +Handling the final component. +----------------------------- + +`link_path_walk()` only walks as far as setting `nd->last` and +`nd->last_type` to refer to the final component of the path. It does +not call `walk_component()` that last time. Handling that final +component remains for the caller to sort out. Those callers are +`path_lookupat()`, `path_parentat()`, `path_mountpoint()` and +`path_openat()` each of which handles the differing requirements of +different system calls. + +`path_parentat()` is clearly the simplest - it just wraps a little bit +of housekeeping around `link_path_walk()` and returns the parent +directory and final component to the caller. The caller will be either +aiming to create a name (via `filename_create()`) or remove or rename +a name (in which case `user_path_parent()` is used). They will use +`i_mutex` to exclude other changes while they validate and then +perform their operation. + +`path_lookupat()` is nearly as simple - it is used when an existing +object is wanted such as by `stat()` or `chmod()`. It essentially just +calls `walk_component()` on the final component through a call to +`lookup_last()`. `path_lookupat()` returns just the final dentry. + +`path_mountpoint()` handles the special case of unmounting which must +not try to revalidate the mounted filesystem. It effectively +contains, through a call to `mountpoint_last()`, an alternate +implementation of `lookup_slow()` which skips that step. This is +important when unmounting a filesystem that is inaccessible, such as +one provided by a dead NFS server. + +Finally `path_openat()` is used for the `open()` system call; it +contains, in support functions starting with "`do_last()`", all the +complexity needed to handle the different subtleties of O_CREAT (with +or without O_EXCL), final "`/`" characters, and trailing symbolic +links. We will revisit this in the final part of this series, which +focuses on those symbolic links. "`do_last()`" will sometimes, but +not always, take `i_mutex`, depending on what it finds. + +Each of these, or the functions which call them, need to be alert to +the possibility that the final component is not `LAST_NORM`. If the +goal of the lookup is to create something, then any value for +`last_type` other than `LAST_NORM` will result in an error. For +example if `path_parentat()` reports `LAST_DOTDOT`, then the caller +won't try to create that name. They also check for trailing slashes +by testing `last.name[last.len]`. If there is any character beyond +the final component, it must be a trailing slash. + +Revalidation and automounts +--------------------------- + +Apart from symbolic links, there are only two parts of the "REF-walk" +process not yet covered. One is the handling of stale cache entries +and the other is automounts. + +On filesystems that require it, the lookup routines will call the +`->d_revalidate()` dentry method to ensure that the cached information +is current. This will often confirm validity or update a few details +from a server. In some cases it may find that there has been change +further up the path and that something that was thought to be valid +previously isn't really. When this happens the lookup of the whole +path is aborted and retried with the "`LOOKUP_REVAL`" flag set. This +forces revalidation to be more thorough. We will see more details of +this retry process in the next article. + +Automount points are locations in the filesystem where an attempt to +lookup a name can trigger changes to how that lookup should be +handled, in particular by mounting a filesystem there. These are +covered in greater detail in autofs4.txt in the Linux documentation +tree, but a few notes specifically related to path lookup are in order +here. + +The Linux VFS has a concept of "managed" dentries which is reflected +in function names such as "`follow_managed()`". There are three +potentially interesting things about these dentries corresponding +to three different flags that might be set in `dentry->d_flags`: + +### `DCACHE_MANAGE_TRANSIT` ### + +If this flag has been set, then the filesystem has requested that the +`d_manage()` dentry operation be called before handling any possible +mount point. This can perform two particular services: + +It can block to avoid races. If an automount point is being +unmounted, the `d_manage()` function will usually wait for that +process to complete before letting the new lookup proceed and possibly +trigger a new automount. + +It can selectively allow only some processes to transit through a +mount point. When a server process is managing automounts, it may +need to access a directory without triggering normal automount +processing. That server process can identify itself to the `autofs` +filesystem, which will then give it a special pass through +`d_manage()` by returning `-EISDIR`. + +### `DCACHE_MOUNTED` ### + +This flag is set on every dentry that is mounted on. As Linux +supports multiple filesystem namespaces, it is possible that the +dentry may not be mounted on in *this* namespace, just in some +other. So this flag is seen as a hint, not a promise. + +If this flag is set, and `d_manage()` didn't return `-EISDIR`, +`lookup_mnt()` is called to examine the mount hash table (honoring the +`mount_lock` described earlier) and possibly return a new `vfsmount` +and a new `dentry` (both with counted references). + +### `DCACHE_NEED_AUTOMOUNT` ### + +If `d_manage()` allowed us to get this far, and `lookup_mnt()` didn't +find a mount point, then this flag causes the `d_automount()` dentry +operation to be called. + +The `d_automount()` operation can be arbitrarily complex and may +communicate with server processes etc. but it should ultimately either +report that there was an error, that there was nothing to mount, or +should provide an updated `struct path` with new `dentry` and `vfsmount`. + +In the latter case, `finish_automount()` will be called to safely +install the new mount point into the mount table. + +There is no new locking of import here and it is important that no +locks (only counted references) are held over this processing due to +the very real possibility of extended delays. +This will become more important next time when we examine RCU-walk +which is particularly sensitive to delays. + +RCU-walk - faster pathname lookup in Linux +========================================== + +RCU-walk is another algorithm for performing pathname lookup in Linux. +It is in many ways similar to REF-walk and the two share quite a bit +of code. The significant difference in RCU-walk is how it allows for +the possibility of concurrent access. + +We noted that REF-walk is complex because there are numerous details +and special cases. RCU-walk reduces this complexity by simply +refusing to handle a number of cases -- it instead falls back to +REF-walk. The difficulty with RCU-walk comes from a different +direction: unfamiliarity. The locking rules when depending on RCU are +quite different from traditional locking, so we will spend a little extra +time when we come to those. + +Clear demarcation of roles +-------------------------- + +The easiest way to manage concurrency is to forcibly stop any other +thread from changing the data structures that a given thread is +looking at. In cases where no other thread would even think of +changing the data and lots of different threads want to read at the +same time, this can be very costly. Even when using locks that permit +multiple concurrent readers, the simple act of updating the count of +the number of current readers can impose an unwanted cost. So the +goal when reading a shared data structure that no other process is +changing is to avoid writing anything to memory at all. Take no +locks, increment no counts, leave no footprints. + +The REF-walk mechanism already described certainly doesn't follow this +principle, but then it is really designed to work when there may well +be other threads modifying the data. RCU-walk, in contrast, is +designed for the common situation where there are lots of frequent +readers and only occasional writers. This may not be common in all +parts of the filesystem tree, but in many parts it will be. For the +other parts it is important that RCU-walk can quickly fall back to +using REF-walk. + +Pathname lookup always starts in RCU-walk mode but only remains there +as long as what it is looking for is in the cache and is stable. It +dances lightly down the cached filesystem image, leaving no footprints +and carefully watching where it is, to be sure it doesn't trip. If it +notices that something has changed or is changing, or if something +isn't in the cache, then it tries to stop gracefully and switch to +REF-walk. + +This stopping requires getting a counted reference on the current +`vfsmount` and `dentry`, and ensuring that these are still valid - +that a path walk with REF-walk would have found the same entries. +This is an invariant that RCU-walk must guarantee. It can only make +decisions, such as selecting the next step, that are decisions which +REF-walk could also have made if it were walking down the tree at the +same time. If the graceful stop succeeds, the rest of the path is +processed with the reliable, if slightly sluggish, REF-walk. If +RCU-walk finds it cannot stop gracefully, it simply gives up and +restarts from the top with REF-walk. + +This pattern of "try RCU-walk, if that fails try REF-walk" can be +clearly seen in functions like `filename_lookup()`, +`filename_parentat()`, `filename_mountpoint()`, +`do_filp_open()`, and `do_file_open_root()`. These five +correspond roughly to the four `path_`* functions we met earlier, +each of which calls `link_path_walk()`. The `path_*` functions are +called using different mode flags until a mode is found which works. +They are first called with `LOOKUP_RCU` set to request "RCU-walk". If +that fails with the error `ECHILD` they are called again with no +special flag to request "REF-walk". If either of those report the +error `ESTALE` a final attempt is made with `LOOKUP_REVAL` set (and no +`LOOKUP_RCU`) to ensure that entries found in the cache are forcibly +revalidated - normally entries are only revalidated if the filesystem +determines that they are too old to trust. + +The `LOOKUP_RCU` attempt may drop that flag internally and switch to +REF-walk, but will never then try to switch back to RCU-walk. Places +that trip up RCU-walk are much more likely to be near the leaves and +so it is very unlikely that there will be much, if any, benefit from +switching back. + +RCU and seqlocks: fast and light +-------------------------------- + +RCU is, unsurprisingly, critical to RCU-walk mode. The +`rcu_read_lock()` is held for the entire time that RCU-walk is walking +down a path. The particular guarantee it provides is that the key +data structures - dentries, inodes, super_blocks, and mounts - will +not be freed while the lock is held. They might be unlinked or +invalidated in one way or another, but the memory will not be +repurposed so values in various fields will still be meaningful. This +is the only guarantee that RCU provides; everything else is done using +seqlocks. + +As we saw above, REF-walk holds a counted reference to the current +dentry and the current vfsmount, and does not release those references +before taking references to the "next" dentry or vfsmount. It also +sometimes takes the `d_lock` spinlock. These references and locks are +taken to prevent certain changes from happening. RCU-walk must not +take those references or locks and so cannot prevent such changes. +Instead, it checks to see if a change has been made, and aborts or +retries if it has. + +To preserve the invariant mentioned above (that RCU-walk may only make +decisions that REF-walk could have made), it must make the checks at +or near the same places that REF-walk holds the references. So, when +REF-walk increments a reference count or takes a spinlock, RCU-walk +samples the status of a seqlock using `read_seqcount_begin()` or a +similar function. When REF-walk decrements the count or drops the +lock, RCU-walk checks if the sampled status is still valid using +`read_seqcount_retry()` or similar. + +However, there is a little bit more to seqlocks than that. If +RCU-walk accesses two different fields in a seqlock-protected +structure, or accesses the same field twice, there is no a priori +guarantee of any consistency between those accesses. When consistency +is needed - which it usually is - RCU-walk must take a copy and then +use `read_seqcount_retry()` to validate that copy. + +`read_seqcount_retry()` not only checks the sequence number, but also +imposes a memory barrier so that no memory-read instruction from +*before* the call can be delayed until *after* the call, either by the +CPU or by the compiler. A simple example of this can be seen in +`slow_dentry_cmp()` which, for filesystems which do not use simple +byte-wise name equality, calls into the filesystem to compare a name +against a dentry. The length and name pointer are copied into local +variables, then `read_seqcount_retry()` is called to confirm the two +are consistent, and only then is `->d_compare()` called. When +standard filename comparison is used, `dentry_cmp()` is called +instead. Notably it does _not_ use `read_seqcount_retry()`, but +instead has a large comment explaining why the consistency guarantee +isn't necessary. A subsequent `read_seqcount_retry()` will be +sufficient to catch any problem that could occur at this point. + +With that little refresher on seqlocks out of the way we can look at +the bigger picture of how RCU-walk uses seqlocks. + +### `mount_lock` and `nd->m_seq` ### + +We already met the `mount_lock` seqlock when REF-walk used it to +ensure that crossing a mount point is performed safely. RCU-walk uses +it for that too, but for quite a bit more. + +Instead of taking a counted reference to each `vfsmount` as it +descends the tree, RCU-walk samples the state of `mount_lock` at the +start of the walk and stores this initial sequence number in the +`struct nameidata` in the `m_seq` field. This one lock and one +sequence number are used to validate all accesses to all `vfsmounts`, +and all mount point crossings. As changes to the mount table are +relatively rare, it is reasonable to fall back on REF-walk any time +that any "mount" or "unmount" happens. + +`m_seq` is checked (using `read_seqretry()`) at the end of an RCU-walk +sequence, whether switching to REF-walk for the rest of the path or +when the end of the path is reached. It is also checked when stepping +down over a mount point (in `__follow_mount_rcu()`) or up (in +`follow_dotdot_rcu()`). If it is ever found to have changed, the +whole RCU-walk sequence is aborted and the path is processed again by +REF-walk. + +If RCU-walk finds that `mount_lock` hasn't changed then it can be sure +that, had REF-walk taken counted references on each vfsmount, the +results would have been the same. This ensures the invariant holds, +at least for vfsmount structures. + +### `dentry->d_seq` and `nd->seq`. ### + +In place of taking a count or lock on `d_reflock`, RCU-walk samples +the per-dentry `d_seq` seqlock, and stores the sequence number in the +`seq` field of the nameidata structure, so `nd->seq` should always be +the current sequence number of `nd->dentry`. This number needs to be +revalidated after copying, and before using, the name, parent, or +inode of the dentry. + +The handling of the name we have already looked at, and the parent is +only accessed in `follow_dotdot_rcu()` which fairly trivially follows +the required pattern, though it does so for three different cases. + +When not at a mount point, `d_parent` is followed and its `d_seq` is +collected. When we are at a mount point, we instead follow the +`mnt->mnt_mountpoint` link to get a new dentry and collect its +`d_seq`. Then, after finally finding a `d_parent` to follow, we must +check if we have landed on a mount point and, if so, must find that +mount point and follow the `mnt->mnt_root` link. This would imply a +somewhat unusual, but certainly possible, circumstance where the +starting point of the path lookup was in part of the filesystem that +was mounted on, and so not visible from the root. + +The inode pointer, stored in `->d_inode`, is a little more +interesting. The inode will always need to be accessed at least +twice, once to determine if it is NULL and once to verify access +permissions. Symlink handling requires a validated inode pointer too. +Rather than revalidating on each access, a copy is made on the first +access and it is stored in the `inode` field of `nameidata` from where +it can be safely accessed without further validation. + +`lookup_fast()` is the only lookup routine that is used in RCU-mode, +`lookup_slow()` being too slow and requiring locks. It is in +`lookup_fast()` that we find the important "hand over hand" tracking +of the current dentry. + +The current `dentry` and current `seq` number are passed to +`__d_lookup_rcu()` which, on success, returns a new `dentry` and a +new `seq` number. `lookup_fast()` then copies the inode pointer and +revalidates the new `seq` number. It then validates the old `dentry` +with the old `seq` number one last time and only then continues. This +process of getting the `seq` number of the new dentry and then +checking the `seq` number of the old exactly mirrors the process of +getting a counted reference to the new dentry before dropping that for +the old dentry which we saw in REF-walk. + +### No `inode->i_mutex` or even `rename_lock` ### + +A mutex is a fairly heavyweight lock that can only be taken when it is +permissible to sleep. As `rcu_read_lock()` forbids sleeping, +`inode->i_mutex` plays no role in RCU-walk. If some other thread does +take `i_mutex` and modifies the directory in a way that RCU-walk needs +to notice, the result will be either that RCU-walk fails to find the +dentry that it is looking for, or it will find a dentry which +`read_seqretry()` won't validate. In either case it will drop down to +REF-walk mode which can take whatever locks are needed. + +Though `rename_lock` could be used by RCU-walk as it doesn't require +any sleeping, RCU-walk doesn't bother. REF-walk uses `rename_lock` to +protect against the possibility of hash chains in the dcache changing +while they are being searched. This can result in failing to find +something that actually is there. When RCU-walk fails to find +something in the dentry cache, whether it is really there or not, it +already drops down to REF-walk and tries again with appropriate +locking. This neatly handles all cases, so adding extra checks on +rename_lock would bring no significant value. + +`unlazy walk()` and `complete_walk()` +------------------------------------- + +That "dropping down to REF-walk" typically involves a call to +`unlazy_walk()`, so named because "RCU-walk" is also sometimes +referred to as "lazy walk". `unlazy_walk()` is called when +following the path down to the current vfsmount/dentry pair seems to +have proceeded successfully, but the next step is problematic. This +can happen if the next name cannot be found in the dcache, if +permission checking or name revalidation couldn't be achieved while +the `rcu_read_lock()` is held (which forbids sleeping), if an +automount point is found, or in a couple of cases involving symlinks. +It is also called from `complete_walk()` when the lookup has reached +the final component, or the very end of the path, depending on which +particular flavor of lookup is used. + +Other reasons for dropping out of RCU-walk that do not trigger a call +to `unlazy_walk()` are when some inconsistency is found that cannot be +handled immediately, such as `mount_lock` or one of the `d_seq` +seqlocks reporting a change. In these cases the relevant function +will return `-ECHILD` which will percolate up until it triggers a new +attempt from the top using REF-walk. + +For those cases where `unlazy_walk()` is an option, it essentially +takes a reference on each of the pointers that it holds (vfsmount, +dentry, and possibly some symbolic links) and then verifies that the +relevant seqlocks have not been changed. If there have been changes, +it, too, aborts with `-ECHILD`, otherwise the transition to REF-walk +has been a success and the lookup process continues. + +Taking a reference on those pointers is not quite as simple as just +incrementing a counter. That works to take a second reference if you +already have one (often indirectly through another object), but it +isn't sufficient if you don't actually have a counted reference at +all. For `dentry->d_lockref`, it is safe to increment the reference +counter to get a reference unless it has been explicitly marked as +"dead" which involves setting the counter to `-128`. +`lockref_get_not_dead()` achieves this. + +For `mnt->mnt_count` it is safe to take a reference as long as +`mount_lock` is then used to validate the reference. If that +validation fails, it may *not* be safe to just drop that reference in +the standard way of calling `mnt_put()` - an unmount may have +progressed too far. So the code in `legitimize_mnt()`, when it +finds that the reference it got might not be safe, checks the +`MNT_SYNC_UMOUNT` flag to determine if a simple `mnt_put()` is +correct, or if it should just decrement the count and pretend none of +this ever happened. + +Taking care in filesystems +--------------------------- + +RCU-walk depends almost entirely on cached information and often will +not call into the filesystem at all. However there are two places, +besides the already-mentioned component-name comparison, where the +file system might be included in RCU-walk, and it must know to be +careful. + +If the filesystem has non-standard permission-checking requirements - +such as a networked filesystem which may need to check with the server +- the `i_op->permission` interface might be called during RCU-walk. +In this case an extra "`MAY_NOT_BLOCK`" flag is passed so that it +knows not to sleep, but to return `-ECHILD` if it cannot complete +promptly. `i_op->permission` is given the inode pointer, not the +dentry, so it doesn't need to worry about further consistency checks. +However if it accesses any other filesystem data structures, it must +ensure they are safe to be accessed with only the `rcu_read_lock()` +held. This typically means they must be freed using `kfree_rcu()` or +similar. + +[`READ_ONCE()`]: https://lwn.net/Articles/624126/ + +If the filesystem may need to revalidate dcache entries, then +`d_op->d_revalidate` may be called in RCU-walk too. This interface +*is* passed the dentry but does not have access to the `inode` or the +`seq` number from the `nameidata`, so it needs to be extra careful +when accessing fields in the dentry. This "extra care" typically +involves using `ACCESS_ONCE()` or the newer [`READ_ONCE()`] to access +fields, and verifying the result is not NULL before using it. This +pattern can be see in `nfs_lookup_revalidate()`. + +A pair of patterns +------------------ + +In various places in the details of REF-walk and RCU-walk, and also in +the big picture, there are a couple of related patterns that are worth +being aware of. + +The first is "try quickly and check, if that fails try slowly". We +can see that in the high-level approach of first trying RCU-walk and +then trying REF-walk, and in places where `unlazy_walk()` is used to +switch to REF-walk for the rest of the path. We also saw it earlier +in `dget_parent()` when following a "`..`" link. It tries a quick way +to get a reference, then falls back to taking locks if needed. + +The second pattern is "try quickly and check, if that fails try +again - repeatedly". This is seen with the use of `rename_lock` and +`mount_lock` in REF-walk. RCU-walk doesn't make use of this pattern - +if anything goes wrong it is much safer to just abort and try a more +sedate approach. + +The emphasis here is "try quickly and check". It should probably be +"try quickly _and carefully,_ then check". The fact that checking is +needed is a reminder that the system is dynamic and only a limited +number of things are safe at all. The most likely cause of errors in +this whole process is assuming something is safe when in reality it +isn't. Careful consideration of what exactly guarantees the safety of +each access is sometimes necessary. + +A walk among the symlinks +========================= + +There are several basic issues that we will examine to understand the +handling of symbolic links: the symlink stack, together with cache +lifetimes, will help us understand the overall recursive handling of +symlinks and lead to the special care needed for the final component. +Then a consideration of access-time updates and summary of the various +flags controlling lookup will finish the story. + +The symlink stack +----------------- + +There are only two sorts of filesystem objects that can usefully +appear in a path prior to the final component: directories and symlinks. +Handling directories is quite straightforward: the new directory +simply becomes the starting point at which to interpret the next +component on the path. Handling symbolic links requires a bit more +work. + +Conceptually, symbolic links could be handled by editing the path. If +a component name refers to a symbolic link, then that component is +replaced by the body of the link and, if that body starts with a '/', +then all preceding parts of the path are discarded. This is what the +"`readlink -f`" command does, though it also edits out "`.`" and +"`..`" components. + +Directly editing the path string is not really necessary when looking +up a path, and discarding early components is pointless as they aren't +looked at anyway. Keeping track of all remaining components is +important, but they can of course be kept separately; there is no need +to concatenate them. As one symlink may easily refer to another, +which in turn can refer to a third, we may need to keep the remaining +components of several paths, each to be processed when the preceding +ones are completed. These path remnants are kept on a stack of +limited size. + +There are two reasons for placing limits on how many symlinks can +occur in a single path lookup. The most obvious is to avoid loops. +If a symlink referred to itself either directly or through +intermediaries, then following the symlink can never complete +successfully - the error `ELOOP` must be returned. Loops can be +detected without imposing limits, but limits are the simplest solution +and, given the second reason for restriction, quite sufficient. + +[outlined recently]: http://thread.gmane.org/gmane.linux.kernel/1934390/focus=1934550 + +The second reason was [outlined recently] by Linus: + +> Because it's a latency and DoS issue too. We need to react well to +> true loops, but also to "very deep" non-loops. It's not about memory +> use, it's about users triggering unreasonable CPU resources. + +Linux imposes a limit on the length of any pathname: `PATH_MAX`, which +is 4096. There are a number of reasons for this limit; not letting the +kernel spend too much time on just one path is one of them. With +symbolic links you can effectively generate much longer paths so some +sort of limit is needed for the same reason. Linux imposes a limit of +at most 40 symlinks in any one path lookup. It previously imposed a +further limit of eight on the maximum depth of recursion, but that was +raised to 40 when a separate stack was implemented, so there is now +just the one limit. + +The `nameidata` structure that we met in an earlier article contains a +small stack that can be used to store the remaining part of up to two +symlinks. In many cases this will be sufficient. If it isn't, a +separate stack is allocated with room for 40 symlinks. Pathname +lookup will never exceed that stack as, once the 40th symlink is +detected, an error is returned. + +It might seem that the name remnants are all that needs to be stored on +this stack, but we need a bit more. To see that, we need to move on to +cache lifetimes. + +Storage and lifetime of cached symlinks +--------------------------------------- + +Like other filesystem resources, such as inodes and directory +entries, symlinks are cached by Linux to avoid repeated costly access +to external storage. It is particularly important for RCU-walk to be +able to find and temporarily hold onto these cached entries, so that +it doesn't need to drop down into REF-walk. + +[object-oriented design pattern]: https://lwn.net/Articles/446317/ + +While each filesystem is free to make its own choice, symlinks are +typically stored in one of two places. Short symlinks are often +stored directly in the inode. When a filesystem allocates a `struct +inode` it typically allocates extra space to store private data (a +common [object-oriented design pattern] in the kernel). This will +sometimes include space for a symlink. The other common location is +in the page cache, which normally stores the content of files. The +pathname in a symlink can be seen as the content of that symlink and +can easily be stored in the page cache just like file content. + +When neither of these is suitable, the next most likely scenario is +that the filesystem will allocate some temporary memory and copy or +construct the symlink content into that memory whenever it is needed. + +When the symlink is stored in the inode, it has the same lifetime as +the inode which, itself, is protected by RCU or by a counted reference +on the dentry. This means that the mechanisms that pathname lookup +uses to access the dcache and icache (inode cache) safely are quite +sufficient for accessing some cached symlinks safely. In these cases, +the `i_link` pointer in the inode is set to point to wherever the +symlink is stored and it can be accessed directly whenever needed. + +When the symlink is stored in the page cache or elsewhere, the +situation is not so straightforward. A reference on a dentry or even +on an inode does not imply any reference on cached pages of that +inode, and even an `rcu_read_lock()` is not sufficient to ensure that +a page will not disappear. So for these symlinks the pathname lookup +code needs to ask the filesystem to provide a stable reference and, +significantly, needs to release that reference when it is finished +with it. + +Taking a reference to a cache page is often possible even in RCU-walk +mode. It does require making changes to memory, which is best avoided, +but that isn't necessarily a big cost and it is better than dropping +out of RCU-walk mode completely. Even filesystems that allocate +space to copy the symlink into can use `GFP_ATOMIC` to often successfully +allocate memory without the need to drop out of RCU-walk. If a +filesystem cannot successfully get a reference in RCU-walk mode, it +must return `-ECHILD` and `unlazy_walk()` will be called to return to +REF-walk mode in which the filesystem is allowed to sleep. + +The place for all this to happen is the `i_op->follow_link()` inode +method. In the present mainline code this is never actually called in +RCU-walk mode as the rewrite is not quite complete. It is likely that +in a future release this method will be passed an `inode` pointer when +called in RCU-walk mode so it both (1) knows to be careful, and (2) has the +validated pointer. Much like the `i_op->permission()` method we +looked at previously, `->follow_link()` would need to be careful that +all the data structures it references are safe to be accessed while +holding no counted reference, only the RCU lock. Though getting a +reference with `->follow_link()` is not yet done in RCU-walk mode, the +code is ready to release the reference when that does happen. + +This need to drop the reference to a symlink adds significant +complexity. It requires a reference to the inode so that the +`i_op->put_link()` inode operation can be called. In REF-walk, that +reference is kept implicitly through a reference to the dentry, so +keeping the `struct path` of the symlink is easiest. For RCU-walk, +the pointer to the inode is kept separately. To allow switching from +RCU-walk back to REF-walk in the middle of processing nested symlinks +we also need the seq number for the dentry so we can confirm that +switching back was safe. + +Finally, when providing a reference to a symlink, the filesystem also +provides an opaque "cookie" that must be passed to `->put_link()` so that it +knows what to free. This might be the allocated memory area, or a +pointer to the `struct page` in the page cache, or something else +completely. Only the filesystem knows what it is. + +In order for the reference to each symlink to be dropped when the walk completes, +whether in RCU-walk or REF-walk, the symlink stack needs to contain, +along with the path remnants: + +- the `struct path` to provide a reference to the inode in REF-walk +- the `struct inode *` to provide a reference to the inode in RCU-walk +- the `seq` to allow the path to be safely switched from RCU-walk to REF-walk +- the `cookie` that tells `->put_path()` what to put. + +This means that each entry in the symlink stack needs to hold five +pointers and an integer instead of just one pointer (the path +remnant). On a 64-bit system, this is about 40 bytes per entry; +with 40 entries it adds up to 1600 bytes total, which is less than +half a page. So it might seem like a lot, but is by no means +excessive. + +Note that, in a given stack frame, the path remnant (`name`) is not +part of the symlink that the other fields refer to. It is the remnant +to be followed once that symlink has been fully parsed. + +Following the symlink +--------------------- + +The main loop in `link_path_walk()` iterates seamlessly over all +components in the path and all of the non-final symlinks. As symlinks +are processed, the `name` pointer is adjusted to point to a new +symlink, or is restored from the stack, so that much of the loop +doesn't need to notice. Getting this `name` variable on and off the +stack is very straightforward; pushing and popping the references is +a little more complex. + +When a symlink is found, `walk_component()` returns the value `1` +(`0` is returned for any other sort of success, and a negative number +is, as usual, an error indicator). This causes `get_link()` to be +called; it then gets the link from the filesystem. Providing that +operation is successful, the old path `name` is placed on the stack, +and the new value is used as the `name` for a while. When the end of +the path is found (i.e. `*name` is `'\0'`) the old `name` is restored +off the stack and path walking continues. + +Pushing and popping the reference pointers (inode, cookie, etc.) is more +complex in part because of the desire to handle tail recursion. When +the last component of a symlink itself points to a symlink, we +want to pop the symlink-just-completed off the stack before pushing +the symlink-just-found to avoid leaving empty path remnants that would +just get in the way. + +It is most convenient to push the new symlink references onto the +stack in `walk_component()` immediately when the symlink is found; +`walk_component()` is also the last piece of code that needs to look at the +old symlink as it walks that last component. So it is quite +convenient for `walk_component()` to release the old symlink and pop +the references just before pushing the reference information for the +new symlink. It is guided in this by two flags; `WALK_GET`, which +gives it permission to follow a symlink if it finds one, and +`WALK_PUT`, which tells it to release the current symlink after it has been +followed. `WALK_PUT` is tested first, leading to a call to +`put_link()`. `WALK_GET` is tested subsequently (by +`should_follow_link()`) leading to a call to `pick_link()` which sets +up the stack frame. + +### Symlinks with no final component ### + +A pair of special-case symlinks deserve a little further explanation. +Both result in a new `struct path` (with mount and dentry) being set +up in the `nameidata`, and result in `get_link()` returning `NULL`. + +The more obvious case is a symlink to "`/`". All symlinks starting +with "`/`" are detected in `get_link()` which resets the `nameidata` +to point to the effective filesystem root. If the symlink only +contains "`/`" then there is nothing more to do, no components at all, +so `NULL` is returned to indicate that the symlink can be released and +the stack frame discarded. + +The other case involves things in `/proc` that look like symlinks but +aren't really. + +> $ ls -l /proc/self/fd/1 +> lrwx------ 1 neilb neilb 64 Jun 13 10:19 /proc/self/fd/1 -> /dev/pts/4 + +Every open file descriptor in any process is represented in `/proc` by +something that looks like a symlink. It is really a reference to the +target file, not just the name of it. When you `readlink` these +objects you get a name that might refer to the same file - unless it +has been unlinked or mounted over. When `walk_component()` follows +one of these, the `->follow_link()` method in "procfs" doesn't return +a string name, but instead calls `nd_jump_link()` which updates the +`nameidata` in place to point to that target. `->follow_link()` then +returns `NULL`. Again there is no final component and `get_link()` +reports this by leaving the `last_type` field of `nameidata` as +`LAST_BIND`. + +Following the symlink in the final component +-------------------------------------------- + +All this leads to `link_path_walk()` walking down every component, and +following all symbolic links it finds, until it reaches the final +component. This is just returned in the `last` field of `nameidata`. +For some callers, this is all they need; they want to create that +`last` name if it doesn't exist or give an error if it does. Other +callers will want to follow a symlink if one is found, and possibly +apply special handling to the last component of that symlink, rather +than just the last component of the original file name. These callers +potentially need to call `link_path_walk()` again and again on +successive symlinks until one is found that doesn't point to another +symlink. + +This case is handled by the relevant caller of `link_path_walk()`, such as +`path_lookupat()` using a loop that calls `link_path_walk()`, and then +handles the final component. If the final component is a symlink +that needs to be followed, then `trailing_symlink()` is called to set +things up properly and the loop repeats, calling `link_path_walk()` +again. This could loop as many as 40 times if the last component of +each symlink is another symlink. + +The various functions that examine the final component and possibly +report that it is a symlink are `lookup_last()`, `mountpoint_last()` +and `do_last()`, each of which use the same convention as +`walk_component()` of returning `1` if a symlink was found that needs +to be followed. + +Of these, `do_last()` is the most interesting as it is used for +opening a file. Part of `do_last()` runs with `i_mutex` held and this +part is in a separate function: `lookup_open()`. + +Explaining `do_last()` completely is beyond the scope of this article, +but a few highlights should help those interested in exploring the +code. + +1. Rather than just finding the target file, `do_last()` needs to open + it. If the file was found in the dcache, then `vfs_open()` is used for + this. If not, then `lookup_open()` will either call `atomic_open()` (if + the filesystem provides it) to combine the final lookup with the open, or + will perform the separate `lookup_real()` and `vfs_create()` steps + directly. In the later case the actual "open" of this newly found or + created file will be performed by `vfs_open()`, just as if the name + were found in the dcache. + +2. `vfs_open()` can fail with `-EOPENSTALE` if the cached information + wasn't quite current enough. Rather than restarting the lookup from + the top with `LOOKUP_REVAL` set, `lookup_open()` is called instead, + giving the filesystem a chance to resolve small inconsistencies. + If that doesn't work, only then is the lookup restarted from the top. + +3. An open with O_CREAT **does** follow a symlink in the final component, + unlike other creation system calls (like `mkdir`). So the sequence: + + > ln -s bar /tmp/foo + > echo hello > /tmp/foo + + will create a file called `/tmp/bar`. This is not permitted if + `O_EXCL` is set but otherwise is handled for an O_CREAT open much + like for a non-creating open: `should_follow_link()` returns `1`, and + so does `do_last()` so that `trailing_symlink()` gets called and the + open process continues on the symlink that was found. + +Updating the access time +------------------------ + +We previously said of RCU-walk that it would "take no locks, increment +no counts, leave no footprints." We have since seen that some +"footprints" can be needed when handling symlinks as a counted +reference (or even a memory allocation) may be needed. But these +footprints are best kept to a minimum. + +One other place where walking down a symlink can involve leaving +footprints in a way that doesn't affect directories is in updating access times. +In Unix (and Linux) every filesystem object has a "last accessed +time", or "`atime`". Passing through a directory to access a file +within is not considered to be an access for the purposes of +`atime`; only listing the contents of a directory can update its `atime`. +Symlinks are different it seems. Both reading a symlink (with `readlink()`) +and looking up a symlink on the way to some other destination can +update the atime on that symlink. + +[clearest statement]: http://pubs.opengroup.org/onlinepubs/9699919799/basedefs/V1_chap04.html#tag_04_08 + +It is not clear why this is the case; POSIX has little to say on the +subject. The [clearest statement] is that, if a particular implementation +updates a timestamp in a place not specified by POSIX, this must be +documented "except that any changes caused by pathname resolution need +not be documented". This seems to imply that POSIX doesn't really +care about access-time updates during pathname lookup. + +[Linux 1.3.87]: https://git.kernel.org/cgit/linux/kernel/git/history/history.git/diff/fs/ext2/symlink.c?id=f806c6db77b8eaa6e00dcfb6b567706feae8dbb8 + +An examination of history shows that prior to [Linux 1.3.87], the ext2 +filesystem, at least, didn't update atime when following a link. +Unfortunately we have no record of why that behavior was changed. + +In any case, access time must now be updated and that operation can be +quite complex. Trying to stay in RCU-walk while doing it is best +avoided. Fortunately it is often permitted to skip the `atime` +update. Because `atime` updates cause performance problems in various +areas, Linux supports the `relatime` mount option, which generally +limits the updates of `atime` to once per day on files that aren't +being changed (and symlinks never change once created). Even without +`relatime`, many filesystems record `atime` with a one-second +granularity, so only one update per second is required. + +It is easy to test if an `atime` update is needed while in RCU-walk +mode and, if it isn't, the update can be skipped and RCU-walk mode +continues. Only when an `atime` update is actually required does the +path walk drop down to REF-walk. All of this is handled in the +`get_link()` function. + +A few flags +----------- + +A suitable way to wrap up this tour of pathname walking is to list +the various flags that can be stored in the `nameidata` to guide the +lookup process. Many of these are only meaningful on the final +component, others reflect the current state of the pathname lookup. +And then there is `LOOKUP_EMPTY`, which doesn't fit conceptually with +the others. If this is not set, an empty pathname causes an error +very early on. If it is set, empty pathnames are not considered to be +an error. + +### Global state flags ### + +We have already met two global state flags: `LOOKUP_RCU` and +`LOOKUP_REVAL`. These select between one of three overall approaches +to lookup: RCU-walk, REF-walk, and REF-walk with forced revalidation. + +`LOOKUP_PARENT` indicates that the final component hasn't been reached +yet. This is primarily used to tell the audit subsystem the full +context of a particular access being audited. + +`LOOKUP_ROOT` indicates that the `root` field in the `nameidata` was +provided by the caller, so it shouldn't be released when it is no +longer needed. + +`LOOKUP_JUMPED` means that the current dentry was chosen not because +it had the right name but for some other reason. This happens when +following "`..`", following a symlink to `/`, crossing a mount point +or accessing a "`/proc/$PID/fd/$FD`" symlink. In this case the +filesystem has not been asked to revalidate the name (with +`d_revalidate()`). In such cases the inode may still need to be +revalidated, so `d_op->d_weak_revalidate()` is called if +`LOOKUP_JUMPED` is set when the look completes - which may be at the +final component or, when creating, unlinking, or renaming, at the penultimate component. + +### Final-component flags ### + +Some of these flags are only set when the final component is being +considered. Others are only checked for when considering that final +component. + +`LOOKUP_AUTOMOUNT` ensures that, if the final component is an automount +point, then the mount is triggered. Some operations would trigger it +anyway, but operations like `stat()` deliberately don't. `statfs()` +needs to trigger the mount but otherwise behaves a lot like `stat()`, so +it sets `LOOKUP_AUTOMOUNT`, as does "`quotactl()`" and the handling of +"`mount --bind`". + +`LOOKUP_FOLLOW` has a similar function to `LOOKUP_AUTOMOUNT` but for +symlinks. Some system calls set or clear it implicitly, while +others have API flags such as `AT_SYMLINK_FOLLOW` and +`UMOUNT_NOFOLLOW` to control it. Its effect is similar to +`WALK_GET` that we already met, but it is used in a different way. + +`LOOKUP_DIRECTORY` insists that the final component is a directory. +Various callers set this and it is also set when the final component +is found to be followed by a slash. + +Finally `LOOKUP_OPEN`, `LOOKUP_CREATE`, `LOOKUP_EXCL`, and +`LOOKUP_RENAME_TARGET` are not used directly by the VFS but are made +available to the filesystem and particularly the `->d_revalidate()` +method. A filesystem can choose not to bother revalidating too hard +if it knows that it will be asked to open or create the file soon. +These flags were previously useful for `->lookup()` too but with the +introduction of `->atomic_open()` they are less relevant there. + +End of the road +--------------- + +Despite its complexity, all this pathname lookup code appears to be +in good shape - various parts are certainly easier to understand now +than even a couple of releases ago. But that doesn't mean it is +"finished". As already mentioned, RCU-walk currently only follows +symlinks that are stored in the inode so, while it handles many ext4 +symlinks, it doesn't help with NFS, XFS, or Btrfs. That support +is not likely to be long delayed. diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/path-lookup.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/path-lookup.txt index 3571667c7105..9b8930f589d9 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/path-lookup.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/path-lookup.txt @@ -379,4 +379,4 @@ Papers and other documentation on dcache locking 2. http://lse.sourceforge.net/locking/dcache/dcache.html - +3. path-lookup.md in this directory. diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt index d411ca63c8b6..1e4a6cc1b6ea 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt @@ -140,7 +140,8 @@ Table 1-1: Process specific entries in /proc stat Process status statm Process memory status information status Process status in human readable form - wchan If CONFIG_KALLSYMS is set, a pre-decoded wchan + wchan Present with CONFIG_KALLSYMS=y: it shows the kernel function + symbol the task is blocked in - or "0" if not blocked. pagemap Page table stack Report full stack trace, enable via CONFIG_STACKTRACE smaps a extension based on maps, showing the memory consumption of @@ -174,6 +175,7 @@ read the file /proc/PID/status: VmLib: 1412 kB VmPTE: 20 kb VmSwap: 0 kB + HugetlbPages: 0 kB Threads: 1 SigQ: 0/28578 SigPnd: 0000000000000000 @@ -237,6 +239,7 @@ Table 1-2: Contents of the status files (as of 4.1) VmPTE size of page table entries VmPMD size of second level page tables VmSwap size of swap usage (the number of referred swapents) + HugetlbPages size of hugetlb memory portions Threads number of threads SigQ number of signals queued/max. number for queue SigPnd bitmap of pending signals for the thread @@ -310,7 +313,7 @@ Table 1-4: Contents of the stat files (as of 2.6.30-rc7) blocked bitmap of blocked signals sigign bitmap of ignored signals sigcatch bitmap of caught signals - wchan address where process went to sleep + 0 (place holder, used to be the wchan address, use /proc/PID/wchan instead) 0 (place holder) 0 (place holder) exit_signal signal to send to parent thread on exit @@ -423,12 +426,15 @@ Private_Clean: 0 kB Private_Dirty: 0 kB Referenced: 892 kB Anonymous: 0 kB +AnonHugePages: 0 kB +Shared_Hugetlb: 0 kB +Private_Hugetlb: 0 kB Swap: 0 kB SwapPss: 0 kB KernelPageSize: 4 kB MMUPageSize: 4 kB -Locked: 374 kB -VmFlags: rd ex mr mw me de +Locked: 0 kB +VmFlags: rd ex mr mw me dw the first of these lines shows the same information as is displayed for the mapping in /proc/PID/maps. The remaining lines show the size of the mapping @@ -448,9 +454,14 @@ accessed. "Anonymous" shows the amount of memory that does not belong to any file. Even a mapping associated with a file may contain anonymous pages: when MAP_PRIVATE and a page is modified, the file page is replaced by a private anonymous copy. -"Swap" shows how much would-be-anonymous memory is also used, but out on -swap. +"AnonHugePages" shows the ammount of memory backed by transparent hugepage. +"Shared_Hugetlb" and "Private_Hugetlb" show the ammounts of memory backed by +hugetlbfs page which is *not* counted in "RSS" or "PSS" field for historical +reasons. And these are not included in {Shared,Private}_{Clean,Dirty} field. +"Swap" shows how much would-be-anonymous memory is also used, but out on swap. "SwapPss" shows proportional swap share of this mapping. +"Locked" indicates whether the mapping is locked in memory or not. + "VmFlags" field deserves a separate description. This member represents the kernel flags associated with the particular virtual memory area in two letter encoded manner. The codes are the following: @@ -474,7 +485,6 @@ manner. The codes are the following: ac - area is accountable nr - swap space is not reserved for the area ht - area uses huge tlb pages - nl - non-linear mapping ar - architecture specific flag dd - do not include area into core dump sd - soft-dirty flag @@ -814,9 +824,6 @@ varies by architecture and compile options. The following is from a > cat /proc/meminfo -The "Locked" indicates whether the mapping is locked in memory or not. - - MemTotal: 16344972 kB MemFree: 13634064 kB MemAvailable: 14836172 kB diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/sysfs-tagging.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/sysfs-tagging.txt index eb843e49c5a3..c7c8e6438958 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/sysfs-tagging.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/sysfs-tagging.txt @@ -17,13 +17,13 @@ the sysfs directory entries we ensure that we don't have conflicts in the directories and applications only see a limited set of the network devices. -Each sysfs directory entry may be tagged with zero or one -namespaces. A sysfs_dirent is augmented with a void *s_ns. If a -directory entry is tagged, then sysfs_dirent->s_flags will have a -flag between KOBJ_NS_TYPE_NONE and KOBJ_NS_TYPES, and s_ns will -point to the namespace to which it belongs. +Each sysfs directory entry may be tagged with a namespace via the +void *ns member of its kernfs_node. If a directory entry is tagged, +then kernfs_node->flags will have a flag between KOBJ_NS_TYPE_NONE +and KOBJ_NS_TYPES, and ns will point to the namespace to which it +belongs. -Each sysfs superblock's sysfs_super_info contains an array void +Each sysfs superblock's kernfs_super_info contains an array void *ns[KOBJ_NS_TYPES]. When a task in a tagging namespace kobj_nstype first mounts sysfs, a new superblock is created. It will be differentiated from other sysfs mounts by having its @@ -31,7 +31,7 @@ s_fs_info->ns[kobj_nstype] set to the new namespace. Note that through bind mounting and mounts propagation, a task can easily view the contents of other namespaces' sysfs mounts. Therefore, when a namespace exits, it will call kobj_ns_exit() to invalidate any -sysfs_dirent->s_ns pointers pointing to it. +kernfs_node->ns pointers pointing to it. Users of this interface: - define a type in the kobj_ns_type enumeration. diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/sysfs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/sysfs.txt index 9494afb9476a..24da7b32c489 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/sysfs.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/sysfs.txt @@ -40,7 +40,7 @@ ancestors of object hierarchies; i.e. the subsystems the objects belong to. Sysfs internally stores a pointer to the kobject that implements a -directory in the sysfs_dirent object associated with the directory. In +directory in the kernfs_node object associated with the directory. In the past this kobject pointer has been used by sysfs to do reference counting directly on the kobject whenever the file is opened or closed. With the current sysfs implementation the kobject reference count is @@ -191,9 +191,10 @@ implementations: be called again, rearmed, to fill the buffer. - On write(2), sysfs expects the entire buffer to be passed during the - first write. Sysfs then passes the entire buffer to the store() - method. - + first write. Sysfs then passes the entire buffer to the store() method. + A terminating null is added after the data on stores. This makes + functions like sysfs_streq() safe to use. + When writing sysfs files, userspace processes should first read the entire file, modify the values it wishes to change, then write the entire buffer back. diff --git a/Documentation/fpga/fpga-mgr.txt b/Documentation/fpga/fpga-mgr.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..ce3e84fa9023 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/fpga/fpga-mgr.txt @@ -0,0 +1,171 @@ +FPGA Manager Core + +Alan Tull 2015 + +Overview +======== + +The FPGA manager core exports a set of functions for programming an FPGA with +an image. The API is manufacturer agnostic. All manufacturer specifics are +hidden away in a low level driver which registers a set of ops with the core. +The FPGA image data itself is very manufacturer specific, but for our purposes +it's just binary data. The FPGA manager core won't parse it. + + +API Functions: +============== + +To program the FPGA from a file or from a buffer: +------------------------------------------------- + + int fpga_mgr_buf_load(struct fpga_manager *mgr, u32 flags, + const char *buf, size_t count); + +Load the FPGA from an image which exists as a buffer in memory. + + int fpga_mgr_firmware_load(struct fpga_manager *mgr, u32 flags, + const char *image_name); + +Load the FPGA from an image which exists as a file. The image file must be on +the firmware search path (see the firmware class documentation). + +For both these functions, flags == 0 for normal full reconfiguration or +FPGA_MGR_PARTIAL_RECONFIG for partial reconfiguration. If successful, the FPGA +ends up in operating mode. Return 0 on success or a negative error code. + + +To get/put a reference to a FPGA manager: +----------------------------------------- + + struct fpga_manager *of_fpga_mgr_get(struct device_node *node); + + void fpga_mgr_put(struct fpga_manager *mgr); + +Given a DT node, get an exclusive reference to a FPGA manager or release +the reference. + + +To register or unregister the low level FPGA-specific driver: +------------------------------------------------------------- + + int fpga_mgr_register(struct device *dev, const char *name, + const struct fpga_manager_ops *mops, + void *priv); + + void fpga_mgr_unregister(struct device *dev); + +Use of these two functions is described below in "How To Support a new FPGA +device." + + +How to write an image buffer to a supported FPGA +================================================ +/* Include to get the API */ +#include <linux/fpga/fpga-mgr.h> + +/* device node that specifies the FPGA manager to use */ +struct device_node *mgr_node = ... + +/* FPGA image is in this buffer. count is size of the buffer. */ +char *buf = ... +int count = ... + +/* flags indicates whether to do full or partial reconfiguration */ +int flags = 0; + +int ret; + +/* Get exclusive control of FPGA manager */ +struct fpga_manager *mgr = of_fpga_mgr_get(mgr_node); + +/* Load the buffer to the FPGA */ +ret = fpga_mgr_buf_load(mgr, flags, buf, count); + +/* Release the FPGA manager */ +fpga_mgr_put(mgr); + + +How to write an image file to a supported FPGA +============================================== +/* Include to get the API */ +#include <linux/fpga/fpga-mgr.h> + +/* device node that specifies the FPGA manager to use */ +struct device_node *mgr_node = ... + +/* FPGA image is in this file which is in the firmware search path */ +const char *path = "fpga-image-9.rbf" + +/* flags indicates whether to do full or partial reconfiguration */ +int flags = 0; + +int ret; + +/* Get exclusive control of FPGA manager */ +struct fpga_manager *mgr = of_fpga_mgr_get(mgr_node); + +/* Get the firmware image (path) and load it to the FPGA */ +ret = fpga_mgr_firmware_load(mgr, flags, path); + +/* Release the FPGA manager */ +fpga_mgr_put(mgr); + + +How to support a new FPGA device +================================ +To add another FPGA manager, write a driver that implements a set of ops. The +probe function calls fpga_mgr_register(), such as: + +static const struct fpga_manager_ops socfpga_fpga_ops = { + .write_init = socfpga_fpga_ops_configure_init, + .write = socfpga_fpga_ops_configure_write, + .write_complete = socfpga_fpga_ops_configure_complete, + .state = socfpga_fpga_ops_state, +}; + +static int socfpga_fpga_probe(struct platform_device *pdev) +{ + struct device *dev = &pdev->dev; + struct socfpga_fpga_priv *priv; + int ret; + + priv = devm_kzalloc(dev, sizeof(*priv), GFP_KERNEL); + if (!priv) + return -ENOMEM; + + /* ... do ioremaps, get interrupts, etc. and save + them in priv... */ + + return fpga_mgr_register(dev, "Altera SOCFPGA FPGA Manager", + &socfpga_fpga_ops, priv); +} + +static int socfpga_fpga_remove(struct platform_device *pdev) +{ + fpga_mgr_unregister(&pdev->dev); + + return 0; +} + + +The ops will implement whatever device specific register writes are needed to +do the programming sequence for this particular FPGA. These ops return 0 for +success or negative error codes otherwise. + +The programming sequence is: + 1. .write_init + 2. .write (may be called once or multiple times) + 3. .write_complete + +The .write_init function will prepare the FPGA to receive the image data. + +The .write function writes a buffer to the FPGA. The buffer may be contain the +whole FPGA image or may be a smaller chunk of an FPGA image. In the latter +case, this function is called multiple times for successive chunks. + +The .write_complete function is called after all the image has been written +to put the FPGA into operating mode. + +The ops include a .state function which will read the hardware FPGA manager and +return a code of type enum fpga_mgr_states. It doesn't result in a change in +hardware state. diff --git a/Documentation/gpio/board.txt b/Documentation/gpio/board.txt index b80606de545a..3092178628c4 100644 --- a/Documentation/gpio/board.txt +++ b/Documentation/gpio/board.txt @@ -34,20 +34,33 @@ through gpiod_get(). For example: power-gpios = <&gpio 1 GPIO_ACTIVE_LOW>; }; +Properties named <function>-gpio are also considered valid and old bindings use +it but are only supported for compatibility reasons and should not be used for +newer bindings since it has been deprecated. + This property will make GPIOs 15, 16 and 17 available to the driver under the "led" function, and GPIO 1 as the "power" GPIO: struct gpio_desc *red, *green, *blue, *power; - red = gpiod_get_index(dev, "led", 0); - green = gpiod_get_index(dev, "led", 1); - blue = gpiod_get_index(dev, "led", 2); + red = gpiod_get_index(dev, "led", 0, GPIOD_OUT_HIGH); + green = gpiod_get_index(dev, "led", 1, GPIOD_OUT_HIGH); + blue = gpiod_get_index(dev, "led", 2, GPIOD_OUT_HIGH); - power = gpiod_get(dev, "power"); + power = gpiod_get(dev, "power", GPIOD_OUT_HIGH); The led GPIOs will be active-high, while the power GPIO will be active-low (i.e. gpiod_is_active_low(power) will be true). +The second parameter of the gpiod_get() functions, the con_id string, has to be +the <function>-prefix of the GPIO suffixes ("gpios" or "gpio", automatically +looked up by the gpiod functions internally) used in the device tree. With above +"led-gpios" example, use the prefix without the "-" as con_id parameter: "led". + +Internally, the GPIO subsystem prefixes the GPIO suffix ("gpios" or "gpio") +with the string passed in con_id to get the resulting string +(snprintf(... "%s-%s", con_id, gpio_suffixes[]). + ACPI ---- ACPI also supports function names for GPIOs in a similar fashion to DT. @@ -142,13 +155,14 @@ The driver controlling "foo.0" will then be able to obtain its GPIOs as follows: struct gpio_desc *red, *green, *blue, *power; - red = gpiod_get_index(dev, "led", 0); - green = gpiod_get_index(dev, "led", 1); - blue = gpiod_get_index(dev, "led", 2); + red = gpiod_get_index(dev, "led", 0, GPIOD_OUT_HIGH); + green = gpiod_get_index(dev, "led", 1, GPIOD_OUT_HIGH); + blue = gpiod_get_index(dev, "led", 2, GPIOD_OUT_HIGH); - power = gpiod_get(dev, "power"); - gpiod_direction_output(power, 1); + power = gpiod_get(dev, "power", GPIOD_OUT_HIGH); -Since the "power" GPIO is mapped as active-low, its actual signal will be 0 -after this code. Contrary to the legacy integer GPIO interface, the active-low -property is handled during mapping and is thus transparent to GPIO consumers. +Since the "led" GPIOs are mapped as active-high, this example will switch their +signals to 1, i.e. enabling the LEDs. And for the "power" GPIO, which is mapped +as active-low, its actual signal will be 0 after this code. Contrary to the legacy +integer GPIO interface, the active-low property is handled during mapping and is +thus transparent to GPIO consumers. diff --git a/Documentation/gpio/consumer.txt b/Documentation/gpio/consumer.txt index a206639454ab..e000502fde20 100644 --- a/Documentation/gpio/consumer.txt +++ b/Documentation/gpio/consumer.txt @@ -39,6 +39,9 @@ device that displays digits), an additional index argument can be specified: const char *con_id, unsigned int idx, enum gpiod_flags flags) +For a more detailed description of the con_id parameter in the DeviceTree case +see Documentation/gpio/board.txt + The flags parameter is used to optionally specify a direction and initial value for the GPIO. Values can be: diff --git a/Documentation/gpio/driver.txt b/Documentation/gpio/driver.txt index 90d0f6aba7a6..12a61948ec91 100644 --- a/Documentation/gpio/driver.txt +++ b/Documentation/gpio/driver.txt @@ -62,6 +62,11 @@ Any debugfs dump method should normally ignore signals which haven't been requested as GPIOs. They can use gpiochip_is_requested(), which returns either NULL or the label associated with that GPIO when it was requested. +RT_FULL: GPIO driver should not use spinlock_t or any sleepable APIs +(like PM runtime) in its gpio_chip implementation (.get/.set and direction +control callbacks) if it is expected to call GPIO APIs from atomic context +on -RT (inside hard IRQ handlers and similar contexts). Normally this should +not be required. GPIO drivers providing IRQs --------------------------- @@ -73,6 +78,13 @@ The IRQ portions of the GPIO block are implemented using an irqchip, using the header <linux/irq.h>. So basically such a driver is utilizing two sub- systems simultaneously: gpio and irq. +RT_FULL: GPIO driver should not use spinlock_t or any sleepable APIs +(like PM runtime) as part of its irq_chip implementation on -RT. +- spinlock_t should be replaced with raw_spinlock_t [1]. +- If sleepable APIs have to be used, these can be done from the .irq_bus_lock() + and .irq_bus_unlock() callbacks, as these are the only slowpath callbacks + on an irqchip. Create the callbacks if needed [2]. + GPIO irqchips usually fall in one of two categories: * CHAINED GPIO irqchips: these are usually the type that is embedded on @@ -93,6 +105,38 @@ GPIO irqchips usually fall in one of two categories: Chained GPIO irqchips typically can NOT set the .can_sleep flag on struct gpio_chip, as everything happens directly in the callbacks. + RT_FULL: Note, chained IRQ handlers will not be forced threaded on -RT. + As result, spinlock_t or any sleepable APIs (like PM runtime) can't be used + in chained IRQ handler. + if required (and if it can't be converted to the nested threaded GPIO irqchip) + - chained IRQ handler can be converted to generic irq handler and this way + it will be threaded IRQ handler on -RT and hard IRQ handler on non-RT + (for example, see [3]). + Know W/A: The generic_handle_irq() is expected to be called with IRQ disabled, + so IRQ core will complain if it will be called from IRQ handler wich is forced + thread. The "fake?" raw lock can be used to W/A this problem: + + raw_spinlock_t wa_lock; + static irqreturn_t omap_gpio_irq_handler(int irq, void *gpiobank) + unsigned long wa_lock_flags; + raw_spin_lock_irqsave(&bank->wa_lock, wa_lock_flags); + generic_handle_irq(irq_find_mapping(bank->chip.irqdomain, bit)); + raw_spin_unlock_irqrestore(&bank->wa_lock, wa_lock_flags); + +* GENERIC CHAINED GPIO irqchips: these are the same as "CHAINED GPIO irqchips", + but chained IRQ handlers are not used. Instead GPIO IRQs dispatching is + performed by generic IRQ handler which is configured using request_irq(). + The GPIO irqchip will then end up calling something like this sequence in + its interrupt handler: + + static irqreturn_t gpio_rcar_irq_handler(int irq, void *dev_id) + for each detected GPIO IRQ + generic_handle_irq(...); + + RT_FULL: Such kind of handlers will be forced threaded on -RT, as result IRQ + core will complain that generic_handle_irq() is called with IRQ enabled and + the same W/A as for "CHAINED GPIO irqchips" can be applied. + * NESTED THREADED GPIO irqchips: these are off-chip GPIO expanders and any other GPIO irqchip residing on the other side of a sleeping bus. Of course such drivers that need slow bus traffic to read out IRQ status and similar, @@ -133,6 +177,13 @@ To use the helpers please keep the following in mind: the irqchip can initialize. E.g. .dev and .can_sleep shall be set up properly. +- Nominally set all handlers to handle_bad_irq() in the setup call and pass + handle_bad_irq() as flow handler parameter in gpiochip_irqchip_add() if it is + expected for GPIO driver that irqchip .set_type() callback have to be called + before using/enabling GPIO IRQ. Then set the handler to handle_level_irq() + and/or handle_edge_irq() in the irqchip .set_type() callback depending on + what your controller supports. + It is legal for any IRQ consumer to request an IRQ from any irqchip no matter if that is a combined GPIO+IRQ driver. The basic premise is that gpio_chip and irq_chip are orthogonal, and offering their services independent of each @@ -169,6 +220,31 @@ When implementing an irqchip inside a GPIO driver, these two functions should typically be called in the .startup() and .shutdown() callbacks from the irqchip. +Real-Time compliance for GPIO IRQ chips +--------------------------------------- + +Any provider of irqchips needs to be carefully tailored to support Real Time +preemption. It is desireable that all irqchips in the GPIO subsystem keep this +in mind and does the proper testing to assure they are real time-enabled. +So, pay attention on above " RT_FULL:" notes, please. +The following is a checklist to follow when preparing a driver for real +time-compliance: + +- ensure spinlock_t is not used as part irq_chip implementation; +- ensure that sleepable APIs are not used as part irq_chip implementation. + If sleepable APIs have to be used, these can be done from the .irq_bus_lock() + and .irq_bus_unlock() callbacks; +- Chained GPIO irqchips: ensure spinlock_t or any sleepable APIs are not used + from chained IRQ handler; +- Generic chained GPIO irqchips: take care about generic_handle_irq() calls and + apply corresponding W/A; +- Chained GPIO irqchips: get rid of chained IRQ handler and use generic irq + handler if possible :) +- regmap_mmio: Sry, but you are in trouble :( if MMIO regmap is used as for + GPIO IRQ chip implementation; +- Test your driver with the appropriate in-kernel real time test cases for both + level and edge IRQs. + Requesting self-owned GPIO pins ------------------------------- @@ -190,3 +266,7 @@ gpiochip_free_own_desc(). These functions must be used with care since they do not affect module use count. Do not use the functions to request gpio descriptors not owned by the calling driver. + +[1] http://www.spinics.net/lists/linux-omap/msg120425.html +[2] https://lkml.org/lkml/2015/9/25/494 +[3] https://lkml.org/lkml/2015/9/25/495 diff --git a/Documentation/gpio/sysfs.txt b/Documentation/gpio/sysfs.txt index 0700b55637f5..aeab01aa4d00 100644 --- a/Documentation/gpio/sysfs.txt +++ b/Documentation/gpio/sysfs.txt @@ -20,14 +20,14 @@ userspace GPIO can be used to determine system configuration data that standard kernels won't know about. And for some tasks, simple userspace GPIO drivers could be all that the system really needs. -DO NOT ABUSE SYFS TO CONTROL HARDWARE THAT HAS PROPER KERNEL DRIVERS. +DO NOT ABUSE SYSFS TO CONTROL HARDWARE THAT HAS PROPER KERNEL DRIVERS. PLEASE READ THE DOCUMENT NAMED "drivers-on-gpio.txt" IN THIS DOCUMENTATION DIRECTORY TO AVOID REINVENTING KERNEL WHEELS IN USERSPACE. I MEAN IT. REALLY. Paths in Sysfs -------------- -There are three kinds of entry in /sys/class/gpio: +There are three kinds of entries in /sys/class/gpio: - Control interfaces used to get userspace control over GPIOs; @@ -106,7 +106,7 @@ read-only attributes: "label" ... provided for diagnostics (not always unique) - "ngpio" ... how many GPIOs this manges (N to N + ngpio - 1) + "ngpio" ... how many GPIOs this manages (N to N + ngpio - 1) Board documentation should in most cases cover what GPIOs are used for what purposes. However, those numbers are not always stable; GPIOs on diff --git a/Documentation/hw_random.txt b/Documentation/hw_random.txt index 026e237bbc87..fce1634907d0 100644 --- a/Documentation/hw_random.txt +++ b/Documentation/hw_random.txt @@ -3,7 +3,7 @@ Introduction: The hw_random framework is software that makes use of a special hardware feature on your CPU or motherboard, a Random Number Generator (RNG). The software has two parts: - a core providing the /dev/hw_random character device and its + a core providing the /dev/hwrng character device and its sysfs support, plus a hardware-specific driver that plugs into that core. @@ -14,7 +14,7 @@ Introduction: http://sourceforge.net/projects/gkernel/ - Those tools use /dev/hw_random to fill the kernel entropy pool, + Those tools use /dev/hwrng to fill the kernel entropy pool, which is used internally and exported by the /dev/urandom and /dev/random special files. @@ -32,13 +32,13 @@ Theory of operation: The rng-tools package uses such tests in "rngd", and lets you run them by hand with a "rngtest" utility. - /dev/hw_random is char device major 10, minor 183. + /dev/hwrng is char device major 10, minor 183. CLASS DEVICE. There is a /sys/class/misc/hw_random node with two unique attributes, "rng_available" and "rng_current". The "rng_available" attribute lists the hardware-specific drivers available, while "rng_current" lists the one which is currently - connected to /dev/hw_random. If your system has more than one + connected to /dev/hwrng. If your system has more than one RNG available, you may change the one used by writing a name from the list in "rng_available" into "rng_current". diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/lm75 b/Documentation/hwmon/lm75 index 67691a0aa41d..ac95edfcd907 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/lm75 +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/lm75 @@ -42,8 +42,8 @@ Supported chips: Addresses scanned: none Datasheet: Publicly available at the ST website http://www.st.com/internet/analog/product/121769.jsp - * Texas Instruments TMP100, TMP101, TMP105, TMP112, TMP75, TMP175, TMP275 - Prefixes: 'tmp100', 'tmp101', 'tmp105', 'tmp112', 'tmp175', 'tmp75', 'tmp275' + * Texas Instruments TMP100, TMP101, TMP105, TMP112, TMP75, TMP75C, TMP175, TMP275 + Prefixes: 'tmp100', 'tmp101', 'tmp105', 'tmp112', 'tmp175', 'tmp75', 'tmp75c', 'tmp275' Addresses scanned: none Datasheet: Publicly available at the Texas Instruments website http://www.ti.com/product/tmp100 @@ -51,6 +51,7 @@ Supported chips: http://www.ti.com/product/tmp105 http://www.ti.com/product/tmp112 http://www.ti.com/product/tmp75 + http://www.ti.com/product/tmp75c http://www.ti.com/product/tmp175 http://www.ti.com/product/tmp275 * NXP LM75B diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/max31790 b/Documentation/hwmon/max31790 new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..855e62430da9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/max31790 @@ -0,0 +1,37 @@ +Kernel driver max31790 +====================== + +Supported chips: + * Maxim MAX31790 + Prefix: 'max31790' + Addresses scanned: - + Datasheet: http://pdfserv.maximintegrated.com/en/ds/MAX31790.pdf + +Author: Il Han <corone.il.han@gmail.com> + + +Description +----------- + +This driver implements support for the Maxim MAX31790 chip. + +The MAX31790 controls the speeds of up to six fans using six independent +PWM outputs. The desired fan speeds (or PWM duty cycles) are written +through the I2C interface. The outputs drive "4-wire" fans directly, +or can be used to modulate the fan's power terminals using an external +pass transistor. + +Tachometer inputs monitor fan tachometer logic outputs for precise (+/-1%) +monitoring and control of fan RPM as well as detection of fan failure. +Six pins are dedicated tachometer inputs. Any of the six PWM outputs can +also be configured to serve as tachometer inputs. + + +Sysfs entries +------------- + +fan[1-12]_input RO fan tachometer speed in RPM +fan[1-12]_fault RO fan experienced fault +fan[1-6]_target RW desired fan speed in RPM +pwm[1-6]_enable RW regulator mode, 0=disabled, 1=manual mode, 2=rpm mode +pwm[1-6] RW fan target duty cycle (0-255) diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/nct6775 b/Documentation/hwmon/nct6775 index f0dd3d2fec96..76add4c9cd68 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/nct6775 +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/nct6775 @@ -32,6 +32,10 @@ Supported chips: Prefix: 'nct6792' Addresses scanned: ISA address retrieved from Super I/O registers Datasheet: Available from Nuvoton upon request + * Nuvoton NCT6793D + Prefix: 'nct6793' + Addresses scanned: ISA address retrieved from Super I/O registers + Datasheet: Available from Nuvoton upon request Authors: Guenter Roeck <linux@roeck-us.net> diff --git a/Documentation/input/multi-touch-protocol.txt b/Documentation/input/multi-touch-protocol.txt index b85d000faeb4..c51f1146f3bd 100644 --- a/Documentation/input/multi-touch-protocol.txt +++ b/Documentation/input/multi-touch-protocol.txt @@ -361,7 +361,7 @@ For win8 devices with both T and C coordinates, the position mapping is ABS_MT_POSITION_X := T_X ABS_MT_POSITION_Y := T_Y ABS_MT_TOOL_X := C_X - ABS_MT_TOOL_X := C_Y + ABS_MT_TOOL_Y := C_Y Unfortunately, there is not enough information to specify both the touching ellipse and the tool ellipse, so one has to resort to approximations. One diff --git a/Documentation/ioctl/ioctl-number.txt b/Documentation/ioctl/ioctl-number.txt index df1b25eb8382..91261a32a573 100644 --- a/Documentation/ioctl/ioctl-number.txt +++ b/Documentation/ioctl/ioctl-number.txt @@ -81,6 +81,9 @@ Code Seq#(hex) Include File Comments 0x22 all scsi/sg.h '#' 00-3F IEEE 1394 Subsystem Block for the entire subsystem '$' 00-0F linux/perf_counter.h, linux/perf_event.h +'%' 00-0F include/uapi/linux/stm.h + System Trace Module subsystem + <mailto:alexander.shishkin@linux.intel.com> '&' 00-07 drivers/firewire/nosy-user.h '1' 00-1F <linux/timepps.h> PPS kit from Ulrich Windl <ftp://ftp.de.kernel.org/pub/linux/daemons/ntp/PPS/> @@ -149,6 +152,7 @@ Code Seq#(hex) Include File Comments 'K' all linux/kd.h 'L' 00-1F linux/loop.h conflict! 'L' 10-1F drivers/scsi/mpt2sas/mpt2sas_ctl.h conflict! +'L' 20-2F linux/lightnvm.h 'L' E0-FF linux/ppdd.h encrypted disk device driver <http://linux01.gwdg.de/~alatham/ppdd.html> 'M' all linux/soundcard.h conflict! diff --git a/Documentation/kasan.txt b/Documentation/kasan.txt index 0d32355a4c34..aa1e0c91e368 100644 --- a/Documentation/kasan.txt +++ b/Documentation/kasan.txt @@ -1,36 +1,34 @@ -Kernel address sanitizer -================ +KernelAddressSanitizer (KASAN) +============================== 0. Overview =========== -Kernel Address sanitizer (KASan) is a dynamic memory error detector. It provides +KernelAddressSANitizer (KASAN) is a dynamic memory error detector. It provides a fast and comprehensive solution for finding use-after-free and out-of-bounds bugs. -KASan uses compile-time instrumentation for checking every memory access, -therefore you will need a gcc version of 4.9.2 or later. KASan could detect out -of bounds accesses to stack or global variables, but only if gcc 5.0 or later was -used to built the kernel. +KASAN uses compile-time instrumentation for checking every memory access, +therefore you will need a GCC version 4.9.2 or later. GCC 5.0 or later is +required for detection of out-of-bounds accesses to stack or global variables. -Currently KASan is supported only for x86_64 architecture and requires that the -kernel be built with the SLUB allocator. +Currently KASAN is supported only for x86_64 architecture and requires the +kernel to be built with the SLUB allocator. 1. Usage -========= +======== To enable KASAN configure kernel with: CONFIG_KASAN = y -and choose between CONFIG_KASAN_OUTLINE and CONFIG_KASAN_INLINE. Outline/inline -is compiler instrumentation types. The former produces smaller binary the -latter is 1.1 - 2 times faster. Inline instrumentation requires a gcc version -of 5.0 or later. +and choose between CONFIG_KASAN_OUTLINE and CONFIG_KASAN_INLINE. Outline and +inline are compiler instrumentation types. The former produces smaller binary +the latter is 1.1 - 2 times faster. Inline instrumentation requires a GCC +version 5.0 or later. Currently KASAN works only with the SLUB memory allocator. -For better bug detection and nicer report, enable CONFIG_STACKTRACE and put -at least 'slub_debug=U' in the boot cmdline. +For better bug detection and nicer reporting, enable CONFIG_STACKTRACE. To disable instrumentation for specific files or directories, add a line similar to the following to the respective kernel Makefile: @@ -42,7 +40,7 @@ similar to the following to the respective kernel Makefile: KASAN_SANITIZE := n 1.1 Error reports -========== +================= A typical out of bounds access report looks like this: @@ -119,14 +117,16 @@ Memory state around the buggy address: ffff8800693bc800: fb fb fb fb fb fb fb fb fb fb fb fb fb fb fb fb ================================================================== -First sections describe slub object where bad access happened. -See 'SLUB Debug output' section in Documentation/vm/slub.txt for details. +The header of the report discribe what kind of bug happened and what kind of +access caused it. It's followed by the description of the accessed slub object +(see 'SLUB Debug output' section in Documentation/vm/slub.txt for details) and +the description of the accessed memory page. In the last section the report shows memory state around the accessed address. -Reading this part requires some more understanding of how KASAN works. +Reading this part requires some understanding of how KASAN works. -Each 8 bytes of memory are encoded in one shadow byte as accessible, -partially accessible, freed or they can be part of a redzone. +The state of each 8 aligned bytes of memory is encoded in one shadow byte. +Those 8 bytes can be accessible, partially accessible, freed or be a redzone. We use the following encoding for each shadow byte: 0 means that all 8 bytes of the corresponding memory region are accessible; number N (1 <= N <= 7) means that the first N bytes are accessible, and other (8 - N) bytes are not; @@ -139,7 +139,7 @@ the accessed address is partially accessible. 2. Implementation details -======================== +========================= From a high level, our approach to memory error detection is similar to that of kmemcheck: use shadow memory to record whether each byte of memory is safe diff --git a/Documentation/kernel-docs.txt b/Documentation/kernel-docs.txt index eda1eb1451a0..08913361e054 100644 --- a/Documentation/kernel-docs.txt +++ b/Documentation/kernel-docs.txt @@ -696,18 +696,18 @@ Memory related patches, HOWTOs, links, mm developers... Don't miss it if you are interested in memory management development! - * Name: "Kernel Newbies IRC Channel" + * Name: "Kernel Newbies IRC Channel and Website" URL: http://www.kernelnewbies.org Keywords: IRC, newbies, channel, asking doubts. - Description: #kernelnewbies on irc.openprojects.net. From the web - page: "#kernelnewbies is an IRC network dedicated to the 'newbie' + Description: #kernelnewbies on irc.oftc.net. + #kernelnewbies is an IRC network dedicated to the 'newbie' kernel hacker. The audience mostly consists of people who are learning about the kernel, working on kernel projects or professional kernel hackers that want to help less seasoned kernel - people. [...] #kernelnewbies is on the Open Projects IRC Network, - try irc.openprojects.net or irc.<country>.openprojects.net as your - server and then /join #kernelnewbies". It also hosts articles, - documents, FAQs... + people. + #kernelnewbies is on the OFTC IRC Network. + Try irc.oftc.net as your server and then /join #kernelnewbies. + The kernelnewbies website also hosts articles, documents, FAQs... * Name: "linux-kernel mailing list archives and search engines" URL: http://vger.kernel.org/vger-lists.html diff --git a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt index 22a4b687ea5b..84c0214b64a7 100644 --- a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt +++ b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt @@ -167,7 +167,8 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted. acpi= [HW,ACPI,X86,ARM64] Advanced Configuration and Power Interface - Format: { force | off | strict | noirq | rsdt } + Format: { force | off | strict | noirq | rsdt | + copy_dsdt } force -- enable ACPI if default was off off -- disable ACPI if default was on noirq -- do not use ACPI for IRQ routing @@ -789,8 +790,10 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted. is passed, kernel could allocate physical memory region above 4G, that cause second kernel crash on system that require some amount of low memory, e.g. swiotlb - requires at least 64M+32K low memory. Kernel would - try to allocate 72M below 4G automatically. + requires at least 64M+32K low memory, also enough extra + low memory is needed to make sure DMA buffers for 32-bit + devices won't run out. Kernel would try to allocate at + at least 256M below 4G automatically. This one let user to specify own low range under 4G for second kernel instead. 0: to disable low allocation. @@ -971,6 +974,10 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted. earlycon= [KNL] Output early console device and options. + When used with no options, the early console is + determined by the stdout-path property in device + tree's chosen node. + cdns,<addr> Start an early, polled-mode console on a cadence serial port at the specified address. The cadence serial port @@ -1023,6 +1030,13 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted. serial port must already be setup and configured. Options are not yet supported. + lpuart,<addr> + lpuart32,<addr> + Use early console provided by Freescale LP UART driver + found on Freescale Vybrid and QorIQ LS1021A processors. + A valid base address must be provided, and the serial + port must already be setup and configured. + earlyprintk= [X86,SH,BLACKFIN,ARM,M68k] earlyprintk=vga earlyprintk=efi @@ -1094,6 +1108,21 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted. you are really sure that your UEFI does sane gc and fulfills the spec otherwise your board may brick. + efi_fake_mem= nn[KMG]@ss[KMG]:aa[,nn[KMG]@ss[KMG]:aa,..] [EFI; X86] + Add arbitrary attribute to specific memory range by + updating original EFI memory map. + Region of memory which aa attribute is added to is + from ss to ss+nn. + If efi_fake_mem=2G@4G:0x10000,2G@0x10a0000000:0x10000 + is specified, EFI_MEMORY_MORE_RELIABLE(0x10000) + attribute is added to range 0x100000000-0x180000000 and + 0x10a0000000-0x1120000000. + + Using this parameter you can do debugging of EFI memmap + related feature. For example, you can do debugging of + Address Range Mirroring feature even if your box + doesn't support it. + eisa_irq_edge= [PARISC,HW] See header of drivers/parisc/eisa.c. @@ -1246,6 +1275,11 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted. Format: <unsigned int> such that (rxsize & ~0x1fffc0) == 0. Default: 1024 + hardlockup_all_cpu_backtrace= + [KNL] Should the hard-lockup detector generate + backtraces on all cpus. + Format: <integer> + hashdist= [KNL,NUMA] Large hashes allocated during boot are distributed across NUMA nodes. Defaults on for 64-bit NUMA, off otherwise. @@ -1546,6 +1580,9 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted. hwp_only Only load intel_pstate on systems which support hardware P state control (HWP) if available. + no_acpi + Don't use ACPI processor performance control objects + _PSS and _PPC specified limits. intremap= [X86-64, Intel-IOMMU] on enable Interrupt Remapping (default) @@ -1553,6 +1590,7 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted. nosid disable Source ID checking no_x2apic_optout BIOS x2APIC opt-out request will be ignored + nopost disable Interrupt Posting iomem= Disable strict checking of access to MMIO memory strict regions from userspace. @@ -2314,11 +2352,12 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted. nmi_watchdog= [KNL,BUGS=X86] Debugging features for SMP kernels Format: [panic,][nopanic,][num] Valid num: 0 or 1 - 0 - turn nmi_watchdog off - 1 - turn nmi_watchdog on + 0 - turn hardlockup detector in nmi_watchdog off + 1 - turn hardlockup detector in nmi_watchdog on When panic is specified, panic when an NMI watchdog timeout occurs (or 'nopanic' to override the opposite - default). + default). To disable both hard and soft lockup detectors, + please see 'nowatchdog'. This is useful when you use a panic=... timeout and need the box quickly up again. @@ -3074,9 +3113,12 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted. cache-to-cache transfer latencies. rcutree.rcu_fanout_leaf= [KNL] - Increase the number of CPUs assigned to each - leaf rcu_node structure. Useful for very large - systems. + Change the number of CPUs assigned to each + leaf rcu_node structure. Useful for very + large systems, which will choose the value 64, + and for NUMA systems with large remote-access + latencies, which will choose a value aligned + with the appropriate hardware boundaries. rcutree.jiffies_till_sched_qs= [KNL] Set required age in jiffies for a diff --git a/Documentation/kselftest.txt b/Documentation/kselftest.txt index a87d840bacfe..9bbbcdc598d9 100644 --- a/Documentation/kselftest.txt +++ b/Documentation/kselftest.txt @@ -54,6 +54,22 @@ To run the hotplug tests: - note that some tests will require root privileges. +Install selftests +================= + +You can use kselftest_install.sh tool installs selftests in default +location which is tools/testing/selftests/kselftest or an user specified +location. + +To install selftests in default location: + $ cd tools/testing/selftests + $ ./kselftest_install.sh + +To install selftests in an user specified location: + $ cd tools/testing/selftests + $ ./kselftest_install.sh install_dir + + Contributing new tests ====================== diff --git a/Documentation/locking/lockstat.txt b/Documentation/locking/lockstat.txt index 568bbbacee91..5786ad2cd5e6 100644 --- a/Documentation/locking/lockstat.txt +++ b/Documentation/locking/lockstat.txt @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@ Because things like lock contention can severely impact performance. - HOW Lockdep already has hooks in the lock functions and maps lock instances to -lock classes. We build on that (see Documentation/lokcing/lockdep-design.txt). +lock classes. We build on that (see Documentation/locking/lockdep-design.txt). The graph below shows the relation between the lock functions and the various hooks therein. diff --git a/Documentation/locking/locktorture.txt b/Documentation/locking/locktorture.txt index 619f2bb136a5..a2ef3a929bf1 100644 --- a/Documentation/locking/locktorture.txt +++ b/Documentation/locking/locktorture.txt @@ -52,6 +52,9 @@ torture_type Type of lock to torture. By default, only spinlocks will o "mutex_lock": mutex_lock() and mutex_unlock() pairs. + o "rtmutex_lock": rtmutex_lock() and rtmutex_unlock() + pairs. Kernel must have CONFIG_RT_MUTEX=y. + o "rwsem_lock": read/write down() and up() semaphore pairs. torture_runnable Start locktorture at boot time in the case where the diff --git a/Documentation/lockup-watchdogs.txt b/Documentation/lockup-watchdogs.txt index 22dd6af2e4bd..4a6e33e1af61 100644 --- a/Documentation/lockup-watchdogs.txt +++ b/Documentation/lockup-watchdogs.txt @@ -20,8 +20,9 @@ kernel mode for more than 10 seconds (see "Implementation" below for details), without letting other interrupts have a chance to run. Similarly to the softlockup case, the current stack trace is displayed upon detection and the system will stay locked up unless the default -behavior is changed, which can be done through a compile time knob, -"BOOTPARAM_HARDLOCKUP_PANIC", and a kernel parameter, "nmi_watchdog" +behavior is changed, which can be done through a sysctl, +'hardlockup_panic', a compile time knob, "BOOTPARAM_HARDLOCKUP_PANIC", +and a kernel parameter, "nmi_watchdog" (see "Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt" for details). The panic option can be used in combination with panic_timeout (this diff --git a/Documentation/memory-barriers.txt b/Documentation/memory-barriers.txt index 2ba8461b0631..aef9487303d0 100644 --- a/Documentation/memory-barriers.txt +++ b/Documentation/memory-barriers.txt @@ -617,16 +617,16 @@ case what's actually required is: However, stores are not speculated. This means that ordering -is- provided for load-store control dependencies, as in the following example: - q = READ_ONCE_CTRL(a); + q = READ_ONCE(a); if (q) { WRITE_ONCE(b, p); } Control dependencies pair normally with other types of barriers. That -said, please note that READ_ONCE_CTRL() is not optional! Without the -READ_ONCE_CTRL(), the compiler might combine the load from 'a' with -other loads from 'a', and the store to 'b' with other stores to 'b', -with possible highly counterintuitive effects on ordering. +said, please note that READ_ONCE() is not optional! Without the +READ_ONCE(), the compiler might combine the load from 'a' with other +loads from 'a', and the store to 'b' with other stores to 'b', with +possible highly counterintuitive effects on ordering. Worse yet, if the compiler is able to prove (say) that the value of variable 'a' is always non-zero, it would be well within its rights @@ -636,15 +636,12 @@ as follows: q = a; b = p; /* BUG: Compiler and CPU can both reorder!!! */ -Finally, the READ_ONCE_CTRL() includes an smp_read_barrier_depends() -that DEC Alpha needs in order to respect control depedencies. - -So don't leave out the READ_ONCE_CTRL(). +So don't leave out the READ_ONCE(). It is tempting to try to enforce ordering on identical stores on both branches of the "if" statement as follows: - q = READ_ONCE_CTRL(a); + q = READ_ONCE(a); if (q) { barrier(); WRITE_ONCE(b, p); @@ -658,7 +655,7 @@ branches of the "if" statement as follows: Unfortunately, current compilers will transform this as follows at high optimization levels: - q = READ_ONCE_CTRL(a); + q = READ_ONCE(a); barrier(); WRITE_ONCE(b, p); /* BUG: No ordering vs. load from a!!! */ if (q) { @@ -688,7 +685,7 @@ memory barriers, for example, smp_store_release(): In contrast, without explicit memory barriers, two-legged-if control ordering is guaranteed only when the stores differ, for example: - q = READ_ONCE_CTRL(a); + q = READ_ONCE(a); if (q) { WRITE_ONCE(b, p); do_something(); @@ -697,14 +694,14 @@ ordering is guaranteed only when the stores differ, for example: do_something_else(); } -The initial READ_ONCE_CTRL() is still required to prevent the compiler -from proving the value of 'a'. +The initial READ_ONCE() is still required to prevent the compiler from +proving the value of 'a'. In addition, you need to be careful what you do with the local variable 'q', otherwise the compiler might be able to guess the value and again remove the needed conditional. For example: - q = READ_ONCE_CTRL(a); + q = READ_ONCE(a); if (q % MAX) { WRITE_ONCE(b, p); do_something(); @@ -717,7 +714,7 @@ If MAX is defined to be 1, then the compiler knows that (q % MAX) is equal to zero, in which case the compiler is within its rights to transform the above code into the following: - q = READ_ONCE_CTRL(a); + q = READ_ONCE(a); WRITE_ONCE(b, p); do_something_else(); @@ -728,7 +725,7 @@ is gone, and the barrier won't bring it back. Therefore, if you are relying on this ordering, you should make sure that MAX is greater than one, perhaps as follows: - q = READ_ONCE_CTRL(a); + q = READ_ONCE(a); BUILD_BUG_ON(MAX <= 1); /* Order load from a with store to b. */ if (q % MAX) { WRITE_ONCE(b, p); @@ -745,7 +742,7 @@ of the 'if' statement. You must also be careful not to rely too much on boolean short-circuit evaluation. Consider this example: - q = READ_ONCE_CTRL(a); + q = READ_ONCE(a); if (q || 1 > 0) WRITE_ONCE(b, 1); @@ -753,7 +750,7 @@ Because the first condition cannot fault and the second condition is always true, the compiler can transform this example as following, defeating control dependency: - q = READ_ONCE_CTRL(a); + q = READ_ONCE(a); WRITE_ONCE(b, 1); This example underscores the need to ensure that the compiler cannot @@ -767,7 +764,7 @@ x and y both being zero: CPU 0 CPU 1 ======================= ======================= - r1 = READ_ONCE_CTRL(x); r2 = READ_ONCE_CTRL(y); + r1 = READ_ONCE(x); r2 = READ_ONCE(y); if (r1 > 0) if (r2 > 0) WRITE_ONCE(y, 1); WRITE_ONCE(x, 1); @@ -796,11 +793,6 @@ site: https://www.cl.cam.ac.uk/~pes20/ppcmem/index.html. In summary: - (*) Control dependencies must be headed by READ_ONCE_CTRL(). - Or, as a much less preferable alternative, interpose - smp_read_barrier_depends() between a READ_ONCE() and the - control-dependent write. - (*) Control dependencies can order prior loads against later stores. However, they do -not- guarantee any other sort of ordering: Not prior loads against later loads, nor prior stores against @@ -816,14 +808,13 @@ In summary: between the prior load and the subsequent store, and this conditional must involve the prior load. If the compiler is able to optimize the conditional away, it will have also optimized - away the ordering. Careful use of READ_ONCE_CTRL() READ_ONCE(), - and WRITE_ONCE() can help to preserve the needed conditional. + away the ordering. Careful use of READ_ONCE() and WRITE_ONCE() + can help to preserve the needed conditional. (*) Control dependencies require that the compiler avoid reordering the - dependency into nonexistence. Careful use of READ_ONCE_CTRL() - or smp_read_barrier_depends() can help to preserve your control - dependency. Please see the Compiler Barrier section for more - information. + dependency into nonexistence. Careful use of READ_ONCE() or + atomic{,64}_read() can help to preserve your control dependency. + Please see the Compiler Barrier section for more information. (*) Control dependencies pair normally with other types of barriers. @@ -1710,6 +1701,17 @@ There are some more advanced barrier functions: operations" subsection for information on where to use these. + (*) lockless_dereference(); + This can be thought of as a pointer-fetch wrapper around the + smp_read_barrier_depends() data-dependency barrier. + + This is also similar to rcu_dereference(), but in cases where + object lifetime is handled by some mechanism other than RCU, for + example, when the objects removed only when the system goes down. + In addition, lockless_dereference() is used in some data structures + that can be used both with and without RCU. + + (*) dma_wmb(); (*) dma_rmb(); @@ -1789,7 +1791,6 @@ The Linux kernel has a number of locking constructs: (*) mutexes (*) semaphores (*) R/W semaphores - (*) RCU In all cases there are variants on "ACQUIRE" operations and "RELEASE" operations for each construct. These operations all imply certain barriers: diff --git a/Documentation/mic/mic_overview.txt b/Documentation/mic/mic_overview.txt index 1a2f2c8ec59e..73f44fc3e715 100644 --- a/Documentation/mic/mic_overview.txt +++ b/Documentation/mic/mic_overview.txt @@ -28,6 +28,10 @@ The Symmetric Communication Interface (SCIF (pronounced as skiff)) is a low level communications API across PCIe currently implemented for MIC. More details are available at scif_overview.txt. +The Coprocessor State Management (COSM) driver on the host allows for +boot, shutdown and reset of Intel MIC devices. It communicates with a COSM +"client" driver on the MIC cards over SCIF to perform these functions. + Here is a block diagram of the various components described above. The virtio backends are situated on the host rather than the card given better single threaded performance for the host compared to MIC, the ability of @@ -51,19 +55,20 @@ the fact that the virtio block storage backend can only be on the host. | | | Virtio over PCIe IOCTLs | | | +--------------------------+ +-----------+ | | | +-----------+ -| MIC DMA | | +----------+ | +-----------+ | | MIC DMA | -| Driver | | | SCIF | | | SCIF | | | Driver | -+-----------+ | +----------+ | +-----------+ | +-----------+ - | | | | | | | -+---------------+ | +-----+-----+ | +-----+-----+ | +---------------+ -|MIC virtual Bus| | |SCIF HW Bus| | |SCIF HW BUS| | |MIC virtual Bus| -+---------------+ | +-----------+ | +-----+-----+ | +---------------+ - | | | | | | | - | +--------------+ | | | +---------------+ | - | |Intel MIC | | | | |Intel MIC | | - +---|Card Driver +----+ | | |Host Driver | | - +--------------+ | +----+---------------+-----+ - | | | +| MIC DMA | | +------+ | +------+ +------+ | | MIC DMA | +| Driver | | | SCIF | | | SCIF | | COSM | | | Driver | ++-----------+ | +------+ | +------+ +--+---+ | +-----------+ + | | | | | | | | ++---------------+ | +------+ | +--+---+ +--+---+ | +----------------+ +|MIC virtual Bus| | |SCIF | | |SCIF | | COSM | | |MIC virtual Bus | ++---------------+ | |HW Bus| | |HW Bus| | Bus | | +----------------+ + | | +------+ | +--+---+ +------+ | | + | | | | | | | | + | +-----------+---+ | | | +---------------+ | + | |Intel MIC | | | | |Intel MIC | | + +---|Card Driver | | | | |Host Driver | | + +------------+--------+ | +----+---------------+-----+ + | | | +-------------------------------------------------------------+ | | | PCIe Bus | diff --git a/Documentation/mic/mpssd/mpss b/Documentation/mic/mpssd/mpss index 582aad4811ae..09ea90931649 100755 --- a/Documentation/mic/mpssd/mpss +++ b/Documentation/mic/mpssd/mpss @@ -119,10 +119,10 @@ stop() # Wait for the cards to go offline for f in $sysfs/* do - while [ "`cat $f/state`" != "offline" ] + while [ "`cat $f/state`" != "ready" ] do sleep 1 - echo -e "Waiting for "`basename $f`" to go offline" + echo -e "Waiting for "`basename $f`" to become ready" done done diff --git a/Documentation/mic/mpssd/mpssd.c b/Documentation/mic/mpssd/mpssd.c index 3c5c379fc29d..aaeafa18d99b 100644 --- a/Documentation/mic/mpssd/mpssd.c +++ b/Documentation/mic/mpssd/mpssd.c @@ -43,7 +43,7 @@ #include <linux/mic_common.h> #include <tools/endian.h> -static void init_mic(struct mic_info *mic); +static void *init_mic(void *arg); static FILE *logfp; static struct mic_info mic_list; @@ -116,19 +116,18 @@ static struct { .num = htole16(MIC_VRING_ENTRIES), }, #if GSO_ENABLED - .host_features = htole32( + .host_features = htole32( 1 << VIRTIO_NET_F_CSUM | 1 << VIRTIO_NET_F_GSO | 1 << VIRTIO_NET_F_GUEST_TSO4 | 1 << VIRTIO_NET_F_GUEST_TSO6 | - 1 << VIRTIO_NET_F_GUEST_ECN | - 1 << VIRTIO_NET_F_GUEST_UFO), + 1 << VIRTIO_NET_F_GUEST_ECN), #else .host_features = 0, #endif }; -static const char *mic_config_dir = "/etc/sysconfig/mic"; +static const char *mic_config_dir = "/etc/mpss"; static const char *virtblk_backend = "VIRTBLK_BACKEND"; static struct { struct mic_device_desc dd; @@ -192,7 +191,7 @@ tap_configure(struct mic_info *mic, char *dev) return ret; } - snprintf(ipaddr, IFNAMSIZ, "172.31.%d.254/24", mic->id); + snprintf(ipaddr, IFNAMSIZ, "172.31.%d.254/24", mic->id + 1); pid = fork(); if (pid == 0) { @@ -255,8 +254,7 @@ static int tun_alloc(struct mic_info *mic, char *dev) return err; } #if GSO_ENABLED - offload = TUN_F_CSUM | TUN_F_TSO4 | TUN_F_TSO6 | - TUN_F_TSO_ECN | TUN_F_UFO; + offload = TUN_F_CSUM | TUN_F_TSO4 | TUN_F_TSO6 | TUN_F_TSO_ECN; err = ioctl(fd, TUNSETOFFLOAD, offload); if (err < 0) { @@ -332,7 +330,6 @@ static struct mic_device_desc *get_device_desc(struct mic_info *mic, int type) return d; } mpsslog("%s %s %d not found\n", mic->name, __func__, type); - assert(0); return NULL; } @@ -415,6 +412,13 @@ mic_virtio_copy(struct mic_info *mic, int fd, return ret; } +static inline unsigned _vring_size(unsigned int num, unsigned long align) +{ + return ((sizeof(struct vring_desc) * num + sizeof(__u16) * (3 + num) + + align - 1) & ~(align - 1)) + + sizeof(__u16) * 3 + sizeof(struct vring_used_elem) * num; +} + /* * This initialization routine requires at least one * vring i.e. vr0. vr1 is optional. @@ -426,8 +430,9 @@ init_vr(struct mic_info *mic, int fd, int type, int vr_size; char *va; - vr_size = PAGE_ALIGN(vring_size(MIC_VRING_ENTRIES, - MIC_VIRTIO_RING_ALIGN) + sizeof(struct _mic_vring_info)); + vr_size = PAGE_ALIGN(_vring_size(MIC_VRING_ENTRIES, + MIC_VIRTIO_RING_ALIGN) + + sizeof(struct _mic_vring_info)); va = mmap(NULL, MIC_DEVICE_PAGE_END + vr_size * num_vq, PROT_READ, MAP_SHARED, fd, 0); if (MAP_FAILED == va) { @@ -439,25 +444,25 @@ init_vr(struct mic_info *mic, int fd, int type, set_dp(mic, type, va); vr0->va = (struct mic_vring *)&va[MIC_DEVICE_PAGE_END]; vr0->info = vr0->va + - vring_size(MIC_VRING_ENTRIES, MIC_VIRTIO_RING_ALIGN); + _vring_size(MIC_VRING_ENTRIES, MIC_VIRTIO_RING_ALIGN); vring_init(&vr0->vr, MIC_VRING_ENTRIES, vr0->va, MIC_VIRTIO_RING_ALIGN); mpsslog("%s %s vr0 %p vr0->info %p vr_size 0x%x vring 0x%x ", __func__, mic->name, vr0->va, vr0->info, vr_size, - vring_size(MIC_VRING_ENTRIES, MIC_VIRTIO_RING_ALIGN)); + _vring_size(MIC_VRING_ENTRIES, MIC_VIRTIO_RING_ALIGN)); mpsslog("magic 0x%x expected 0x%x\n", le32toh(vr0->info->magic), MIC_MAGIC + type); assert(le32toh(vr0->info->magic) == MIC_MAGIC + type); if (vr1) { vr1->va = (struct mic_vring *) &va[MIC_DEVICE_PAGE_END + vr_size]; - vr1->info = vr1->va + vring_size(MIC_VRING_ENTRIES, + vr1->info = vr1->va + _vring_size(MIC_VRING_ENTRIES, MIC_VIRTIO_RING_ALIGN); vring_init(&vr1->vr, MIC_VRING_ENTRIES, vr1->va, MIC_VIRTIO_RING_ALIGN); mpsslog("%s %s vr1 %p vr1->info %p vr_size 0x%x vring 0x%x ", __func__, mic->name, vr1->va, vr1->info, vr_size, - vring_size(MIC_VRING_ENTRIES, MIC_VIRTIO_RING_ALIGN)); + _vring_size(MIC_VRING_ENTRIES, MIC_VIRTIO_RING_ALIGN)); mpsslog("magic 0x%x expected 0x%x\n", le32toh(vr1->info->magic), MIC_MAGIC + type + 1); assert(le32toh(vr1->info->magic) == MIC_MAGIC + type + 1); @@ -466,16 +471,21 @@ done: return va; } -static void +static int wait_for_card_driver(struct mic_info *mic, int fd, int type) { struct pollfd pollfd; int err; struct mic_device_desc *desc = get_device_desc(mic, type); + __u8 prev_status; + if (!desc) + return -ENODEV; + prev_status = desc->status; pollfd.fd = fd; mpsslog("%s %s Waiting .... desc-> type %d status 0x%x\n", mic->name, __func__, type, desc->status); + while (1) { pollfd.events = POLLIN; pollfd.revents = 0; @@ -487,8 +497,13 @@ wait_for_card_driver(struct mic_info *mic, int fd, int type) } if (pollfd.revents) { - mpsslog("%s %s Waiting... desc-> type %d status 0x%x\n", - mic->name, __func__, type, desc->status); + if (desc->status != prev_status) { + mpsslog("%s %s Waiting... desc-> type %d " + "status 0x%x\n", + mic->name, __func__, type, + desc->status); + prev_status = desc->status; + } if (desc->status & VIRTIO_CONFIG_S_DRIVER_OK) { mpsslog("%s %s poll.revents %d\n", mic->name, __func__, pollfd.revents); @@ -499,6 +514,7 @@ wait_for_card_driver(struct mic_info *mic, int fd, int type) } } } + return 0; } /* Spin till we have some descriptors */ @@ -575,9 +591,16 @@ virtio_net(void *arg) __func__, strerror(errno)); continue; } - if (!(desc->status & VIRTIO_CONFIG_S_DRIVER_OK)) - wait_for_card_driver(mic, mic->mic_net.virtio_net_fd, - VIRTIO_ID_NET); + if (!(desc->status & VIRTIO_CONFIG_S_DRIVER_OK)) { + err = wait_for_card_driver(mic, + mic->mic_net.virtio_net_fd, + VIRTIO_ID_NET); + if (err) { + mpsslog("%s %s %d Exiting...\n", + mic->name, __func__, __LINE__); + break; + } + } /* * Check if there is data to be read from TUN and write to * virtio net fd if there is. @@ -786,10 +809,16 @@ virtio_console(void *arg) strerror(errno)); continue; } - if (!(desc->status & VIRTIO_CONFIG_S_DRIVER_OK)) - wait_for_card_driver(mic, - mic->mic_console.virtio_console_fd, - VIRTIO_ID_CONSOLE); + if (!(desc->status & VIRTIO_CONFIG_S_DRIVER_OK)) { + err = wait_for_card_driver(mic, + mic->mic_console.virtio_console_fd, + VIRTIO_ID_CONSOLE); + if (err) { + mpsslog("%s %s %d Exiting...\n", + mic->name, __func__, __LINE__); + break; + } + } if (console_poll[MONITOR_FD].revents & POLLIN) { copy.iov = iov0; @@ -1048,8 +1077,9 @@ stop_virtblk(struct mic_info *mic) { int vr_size, ret; - vr_size = PAGE_ALIGN(vring_size(MIC_VRING_ENTRIES, - MIC_VIRTIO_RING_ALIGN) + sizeof(struct _mic_vring_info)); + vr_size = PAGE_ALIGN(_vring_size(MIC_VRING_ENTRIES, + MIC_VIRTIO_RING_ALIGN) + + sizeof(struct _mic_vring_info)); ret = munmap(mic->mic_virtblk.block_dp, MIC_DEVICE_PAGE_END + vr_size * virtblk_dev_page.dd.num_vq); if (ret < 0) @@ -1131,6 +1161,10 @@ write_status(int fd, __u8 *status) return ioctl(fd, MIC_VIRTIO_COPY_DESC, ©); } +#ifndef VIRTIO_BLK_T_GET_ID +#define VIRTIO_BLK_T_GET_ID 8 +#endif + static void * virtio_block(void *arg) { @@ -1297,12 +1331,7 @@ reset(struct mic_info *mic) mpsslog("%s: %s %d state %s\n", mic->name, __func__, __LINE__, state); - /* - * If the shutdown was initiated by OSPM, the state stays - * in "suspended" which is also a valid condition for reset. - */ - if ((!strcmp(state, "offline")) || - (!strcmp(state, "suspended"))) { + if (!strcmp(state, "ready")) { free(state); break; } @@ -1331,34 +1360,50 @@ get_mic_shutdown_status(struct mic_info *mic, char *shutdown_status) assert(0); }; -static int get_mic_state(struct mic_info *mic, char *state) +static int get_mic_state(struct mic_info *mic) { - if (!strcmp(state, "offline")) - return MIC_OFFLINE; - if (!strcmp(state, "online")) - return MIC_ONLINE; - if (!strcmp(state, "shutting_down")) - return MIC_SHUTTING_DOWN; - if (!strcmp(state, "reset_failed")) - return MIC_RESET_FAILED; - if (!strcmp(state, "suspending")) - return MIC_SUSPENDING; - if (!strcmp(state, "suspended")) - return MIC_SUSPENDED; - mpsslog("%s: BUG invalid state %s\n", mic->name, state); - /* Invalid state */ - assert(0); + char *state = NULL; + enum mic_states mic_state; + + while (!state) { + state = readsysfs(mic->name, "state"); + sleep(1); + } + mpsslog("%s: %s %d state %s\n", + mic->name, __func__, __LINE__, state); + + if (!strcmp(state, "ready")) { + mic_state = MIC_READY; + } else if (!strcmp(state, "booting")) { + mic_state = MIC_BOOTING; + } else if (!strcmp(state, "online")) { + mic_state = MIC_ONLINE; + } else if (!strcmp(state, "shutting_down")) { + mic_state = MIC_SHUTTING_DOWN; + } else if (!strcmp(state, "reset_failed")) { + mic_state = MIC_RESET_FAILED; + } else if (!strcmp(state, "resetting")) { + mic_state = MIC_RESETTING; + } else { + mpsslog("%s: BUG invalid state %s\n", mic->name, state); + assert(0); + } + + free(state); + return mic_state; }; static void mic_handle_shutdown(struct mic_info *mic) { #define SHUTDOWN_TIMEOUT 60 - int i = SHUTDOWN_TIMEOUT, ret, stat = 0; + int i = SHUTDOWN_TIMEOUT; char *shutdown_status; while (i) { shutdown_status = readsysfs(mic->name, "shutdown_status"); - if (!shutdown_status) + if (!shutdown_status) { + sleep(1); continue; + } mpsslog("%s: %s %d shutdown_status %s\n", mic->name, __func__, __LINE__, shutdown_status); switch (get_mic_shutdown_status(mic, shutdown_status)) { @@ -1377,94 +1422,110 @@ static void mic_handle_shutdown(struct mic_info *mic) i--; } reset: - ret = kill(mic->pid, SIGTERM); - mpsslog("%s: %s %d kill pid %d ret %d\n", - mic->name, __func__, __LINE__, - mic->pid, ret); - if (!ret) { - ret = waitpid(mic->pid, &stat, - WIFSIGNALED(stat)); - mpsslog("%s: %s %d waitpid ret %d pid %d\n", - mic->name, __func__, __LINE__, - ret, mic->pid); - } - if (ret == mic->pid) - reset(mic); + if (!i) + mpsslog("%s: %s %d timing out waiting for shutdown_status %s\n", + mic->name, __func__, __LINE__, shutdown_status); + reset(mic); } -static void * -mic_config(void *arg) +static int open_state_fd(struct mic_info *mic) { - struct mic_info *mic = (struct mic_info *)arg; - char *state = NULL; char pathname[PATH_MAX]; - int fd, ret; - struct pollfd ufds[1]; - char value[4096]; + int fd; snprintf(pathname, PATH_MAX - 1, "%s/%s/%s", MICSYSFSDIR, mic->name, "state"); fd = open(pathname, O_RDONLY); - if (fd < 0) { + if (fd < 0) mpsslog("%s: opening file %s failed %s\n", mic->name, pathname, strerror(errno)); - goto error; + return fd; +} + +static int block_till_state_change(int fd, struct mic_info *mic) +{ + struct pollfd ufds[1]; + char value[PAGE_SIZE]; + int ret; + + ufds[0].fd = fd; + ufds[0].events = POLLERR | POLLPRI; + ret = poll(ufds, 1, -1); + if (ret < 0) { + mpsslog("%s: %s %d poll failed %s\n", + mic->name, __func__, __LINE__, strerror(errno)); + return ret; + } + + ret = lseek(fd, 0, SEEK_SET); + if (ret < 0) { + mpsslog("%s: %s %d Failed to seek to 0: %s\n", + mic->name, __func__, __LINE__, strerror(errno)); + return ret; + } + + ret = read(fd, value, sizeof(value)); + if (ret < 0) { + mpsslog("%s: %s %d Failed to read sysfs entry: %s\n", + mic->name, __func__, __LINE__, strerror(errno)); + return ret; + } + + return 0; +} + +static void * +mic_config(void *arg) +{ + struct mic_info *mic = (struct mic_info *)arg; + int fd, ret, stat = 0; + + fd = open_state_fd(mic); + if (fd < 0) { + mpsslog("%s: %s %d open state fd failed %s\n", + mic->name, __func__, __LINE__, strerror(errno)); + goto exit; } do { - ret = lseek(fd, 0, SEEK_SET); + ret = block_till_state_change(fd, mic); if (ret < 0) { - mpsslog("%s: Failed to seek to file start '%s': %s\n", - mic->name, pathname, strerror(errno)); - goto close_error1; + mpsslog("%s: %s %d block_till_state_change error %s\n", + mic->name, __func__, __LINE__, strerror(errno)); + goto close_exit; } - ret = read(fd, value, sizeof(value)); - if (ret < 0) { - mpsslog("%s: Failed to read sysfs entry '%s': %s\n", - mic->name, pathname, strerror(errno)); - goto close_error1; - } -retry: - state = readsysfs(mic->name, "state"); - if (!state) - goto retry; - mpsslog("%s: %s %d state %s\n", - mic->name, __func__, __LINE__, state); - switch (get_mic_state(mic, state)) { + + switch (get_mic_state(mic)) { case MIC_SHUTTING_DOWN: mic_handle_shutdown(mic); - goto close_error; - case MIC_SUSPENDING: - mic->boot_on_resume = 1; - setsysfs(mic->name, "state", "suspend"); - mic_handle_shutdown(mic); - goto close_error; - case MIC_OFFLINE: + break; + case MIC_READY: + case MIC_RESET_FAILED: + ret = kill(mic->pid, SIGTERM); + mpsslog("%s: %s %d kill pid %d ret %d\n", + mic->name, __func__, __LINE__, + mic->pid, ret); + if (!ret) { + ret = waitpid(mic->pid, &stat, + WIFSIGNALED(stat)); + mpsslog("%s: %s %d waitpid ret %d pid %d\n", + mic->name, __func__, __LINE__, + ret, mic->pid); + } if (mic->boot_on_resume) { setsysfs(mic->name, "state", "boot"); mic->boot_on_resume = 0; } - break; + goto close_exit; default: break; } - free(state); - - ufds[0].fd = fd; - ufds[0].events = POLLERR | POLLPRI; - ret = poll(ufds, 1, -1); - if (ret < 0) { - mpsslog("%s: poll failed %s\n", - mic->name, strerror(errno)); - goto close_error1; - } } while (1); -close_error: - free(state); -close_error1: + +close_exit: close(fd); -error: +exit: init_mic(mic); pthread_exit(NULL); } @@ -1477,15 +1538,15 @@ set_cmdline(struct mic_info *mic) len = snprintf(buffer, PATH_MAX, "clocksource=tsc highres=off nohz=off "); - len += snprintf(buffer + len, PATH_MAX - len, + len += snprintf(buffer + len, PATH_MAX, "cpufreq_on;corec6_off;pc3_off;pc6_off "); - len += snprintf(buffer + len, PATH_MAX - len, + len += snprintf(buffer + len, PATH_MAX, "ifcfg=static;address,172.31.%d.1;netmask,255.255.255.0", - mic->id); + mic->id + 1); setsysfs(mic->name, "cmdline", buffer); mpsslog("%s: Command line: \"%s\"\n", mic->name, buffer); - snprintf(buffer, PATH_MAX, "172.31.%d.1", mic->id); + snprintf(buffer, PATH_MAX, "172.31.%d.1", mic->id + 1); mpsslog("%s: IPADDR: \"%s\"\n", mic->name, buffer); } @@ -1541,8 +1602,6 @@ set_log_buf_info(struct mic_info *mic) close(fd); } -static void init_mic(struct mic_info *mic); - static void change_virtblk_backend(int x, siginfo_t *siginfo, void *p) { @@ -1553,8 +1612,16 @@ change_virtblk_backend(int x, siginfo_t *siginfo, void *p) } static void -init_mic(struct mic_info *mic) +set_mic_boot_params(struct mic_info *mic) +{ + set_log_buf_info(mic); + set_cmdline(mic); +} + +static void * +init_mic(void *arg) { + struct mic_info *mic = (struct mic_info *)arg; struct sigaction ignore = { .sa_flags = 0, .sa_handler = SIG_IGN @@ -1564,7 +1631,7 @@ init_mic(struct mic_info *mic) .sa_sigaction = change_virtblk_backend, }; char buffer[PATH_MAX]; - int err; + int err, fd; /* * Currently, one virtio block device is supported for each MIC card @@ -1577,12 +1644,38 @@ init_mic(struct mic_info *mic) * the MIC daemon. */ sigaction(SIGUSR1, &ignore, NULL); +retry: + fd = open_state_fd(mic); + if (fd < 0) { + mpsslog("%s: %s %d open state fd failed %s\n", + mic->name, __func__, __LINE__, strerror(errno)); + sleep(2); + goto retry; + } + + if (mic->restart) { + snprintf(buffer, PATH_MAX, "boot"); + setsysfs(mic->name, "state", buffer); + mpsslog("%s restarting mic %d\n", + mic->name, mic->restart); + mic->restart = 0; + } + + while (1) { + while (block_till_state_change(fd, mic)) { + mpsslog("%s: %s %d block_till_state_change error %s\n", + mic->name, __func__, __LINE__, strerror(errno)); + sleep(2); + continue; + } + + if (get_mic_state(mic) == MIC_BOOTING) + break; + } mic->pid = fork(); switch (mic->pid) { case 0: - set_log_buf_info(mic); - set_cmdline(mic); add_virtio_device(mic, &virtcons_dev_page.dd); add_virtio_device(mic, &virtnet_dev_page.dd); err = pthread_create(&mic->mic_console.console_thread, NULL, @@ -1612,24 +1705,29 @@ init_mic(struct mic_info *mic) mic->name, mic->id, errno); break; default: - if (mic->restart) { - snprintf(buffer, PATH_MAX, "boot"); - setsysfs(mic->name, "state", buffer); - mpsslog("%s restarting mic %d\n", - mic->name, mic->restart); - mic->restart = 0; - } - pthread_create(&mic->config_thread, NULL, mic_config, mic); + err = pthread_create(&mic->config_thread, NULL, + mic_config, mic); + if (err) + mpsslog("%s mic_config pthread_create failed %s\n", + mic->name, strerror(err)); } + + return NULL; } static void start_daemon(void) { struct mic_info *mic; + int err; - for (mic = mic_list.next; mic != NULL; mic = mic->next) - init_mic(mic); + for (mic = mic_list.next; mic; mic = mic->next) { + set_mic_boot_params(mic); + err = pthread_create(&mic->init_thread, NULL, init_mic, mic); + if (err) + mpsslog("%s init_mic pthread_create failed %s\n", + mic->name, strerror(err)); + } while (1) sleep(60); diff --git a/Documentation/mic/mpssd/mpssd.h b/Documentation/mic/mpssd/mpssd.h index f5f18b15d9a0..8bd64944aacc 100644 --- a/Documentation/mic/mpssd/mpssd.h +++ b/Documentation/mic/mpssd/mpssd.h @@ -86,6 +86,7 @@ struct mic_info { int id; char *name; pthread_t config_thread; + pthread_t init_thread; pid_t pid; struct mic_console_info mic_console; struct mic_net_info mic_net; diff --git a/Documentation/misc-devices/apds990x.txt b/Documentation/misc-devices/apds990x.txt index d5408cade32f..454d95d623b3 100644 --- a/Documentation/misc-devices/apds990x.txt +++ b/Documentation/misc-devices/apds990x.txt @@ -30,7 +30,7 @@ lead to false interrupt, but that doesn't harm. ALS contains 4 different gain steps. Driver automatically selects suitable gain step. After each measurement, reliability of the results -is estimated and new measurement is trigged if necessary. +is estimated and new measurement is triggered if necessary. Platform data can provide tuned values to the conversion formulas if values are known. Otherwise plain sensor default values are used. diff --git a/Documentation/misc-devices/isl29003 b/Documentation/misc-devices/isl29003 index c4ff5f38e010..80b952fd32ff 100644 --- a/Documentation/misc-devices/isl29003 +++ b/Documentation/misc-devices/isl29003 @@ -29,7 +29,7 @@ Detection The ISL29003 does not have an ID register which could be used to identify it, so the detection routine will just try to read from the configured I2C -addess and consider the device to be present as soon as it ACKs the +address and consider the device to be present as soon as it ACKs the transfer. diff --git a/Documentation/misc-devices/max6875 b/Documentation/misc-devices/max6875 index 1e89ee3ccc1b..2f2bd0b17b5d 100644 --- a/Documentation/misc-devices/max6875 +++ b/Documentation/misc-devices/max6875 @@ -22,7 +22,7 @@ At reset, the MAX6875 reads the configuration EEPROM into its configuration registers. The chip then begins to operate according to the values in the registers. -The Maxim MAX6874 is a similar, mostly compatible device, with more intputs +The Maxim MAX6874 is a similar, mostly compatible device, with more inputs and outputs: vin gpi vout MAX6874 6 4 8 diff --git a/Documentation/mmc/mmc-dev-attrs.txt b/Documentation/mmc/mmc-dev-attrs.txt index 189bab09255a..caa555706f89 100644 --- a/Documentation/mmc/mmc-dev-attrs.txt +++ b/Documentation/mmc/mmc-dev-attrs.txt @@ -72,13 +72,3 @@ Note on raw_rpmb_size_mult: "raw_rpmb_size_mult" is a mutliple of 128kB block. RPMB size in byte is calculated by using the following equation: RPMB partition size = 128kB x raw_rpmb_size_mult - -SD/MMC/SDIO Clock Gating Attribute -================================== - -Read and write access is provided to following attribute. -This attribute appears only if CONFIG_MMC_CLKGATE is enabled. - - clkgate_delay Tune the clock gating delay with desired value in milliseconds. - -echo <desired delay> > /sys/class/mmc_host/mmcX/clkgate_delay diff --git a/Documentation/networking/can.txt b/Documentation/networking/can.txt index fd1a1aad49a9..4636b94518da 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/can.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/can.txt @@ -1018,25 +1018,34 @@ solution for a couple of reasons: $ ip link set can0 type can help Usage: ip link set DEVICE type can - [ bitrate BITRATE [ sample-point SAMPLE-POINT] ] | - [ tq TQ prop-seg PROP_SEG phase-seg1 PHASE-SEG1 - phase-seg2 PHASE-SEG2 [ sjw SJW ] ] - - [ loopback { on | off } ] - [ listen-only { on | off } ] - [ triple-sampling { on | off } ] - - [ restart-ms TIME-MS ] - [ restart ] - - Where: BITRATE := { 1..1000000 } - SAMPLE-POINT := { 0.000..0.999 } - TQ := { NUMBER } - PROP-SEG := { 1..8 } - PHASE-SEG1 := { 1..8 } - PHASE-SEG2 := { 1..8 } - SJW := { 1..4 } - RESTART-MS := { 0 | NUMBER } + [ bitrate BITRATE [ sample-point SAMPLE-POINT] ] | + [ tq TQ prop-seg PROP_SEG phase-seg1 PHASE-SEG1 + phase-seg2 PHASE-SEG2 [ sjw SJW ] ] + + [ dbitrate BITRATE [ dsample-point SAMPLE-POINT] ] | + [ dtq TQ dprop-seg PROP_SEG dphase-seg1 PHASE-SEG1 + dphase-seg2 PHASE-SEG2 [ dsjw SJW ] ] + + [ loopback { on | off } ] + [ listen-only { on | off } ] + [ triple-sampling { on | off } ] + [ one-shot { on | off } ] + [ berr-reporting { on | off } ] + [ fd { on | off } ] + [ fd-non-iso { on | off } ] + [ presume-ack { on | off } ] + + [ restart-ms TIME-MS ] + [ restart ] + + Where: BITRATE := { 1..1000000 } + SAMPLE-POINT := { 0.000..0.999 } + TQ := { NUMBER } + PROP-SEG := { 1..8 } + PHASE-SEG1 := { 1..8 } + PHASE-SEG2 := { 1..8 } + SJW := { 1..4 } + RESTART-MS := { 0 | NUMBER } - Display CAN device details and statistics: @@ -1178,7 +1187,55 @@ solution for a couple of reasons: The CAN device MTU can be retrieved e.g. with a SIOCGIFMTU ioctl() syscall. N.B. CAN FD capable devices can also handle and send legacy CAN frames. - FIXME: Add details about the CAN FD controller configuration when available. + When configuring CAN FD capable CAN controllers an additional 'data' bitrate + has to be set. This bitrate for the data phase of the CAN FD frame has to be + at least the bitrate which was configured for the arbitration phase. This + second bitrate is specified analogue to the first bitrate but the bitrate + setting keywords for the 'data' bitrate start with 'd' e.g. dbitrate, + dsample-point, dsjw or dtq and similar settings. When a data bitrate is set + within the configuration process the controller option "fd on" can be + specified to enable the CAN FD mode in the CAN controller. This controller + option also switches the device MTU to 72 (CANFD_MTU). + + The first CAN FD specification presented as whitepaper at the International + CAN Conference 2012 needed to be improved for data integrity reasons. + Therefore two CAN FD implementations have to be distinguished today: + + - ISO compliant: The ISO 11898-1:2015 CAN FD implementation (default) + - non-ISO compliant: The CAN FD implementation following the 2012 whitepaper + + Finally there are three types of CAN FD controllers: + + 1. ISO compliant (fixed) + 2. non-ISO compliant (fixed, like the M_CAN IP core v3.0.1 in m_can.c) + 3. ISO/non-ISO CAN FD controllers (switchable, like the PEAK PCAN-USB FD) + + The current ISO/non-ISO mode is announced by the CAN controller driver via + netlink and displayed by the 'ip' tool (controller option FD-NON-ISO). + The ISO/non-ISO-mode can be altered by setting 'fd-non-iso {on|off}' for + switchable CAN FD controllers only. + + Example configuring 500 kbit/s arbitration bitrate and 4 Mbit/s data bitrate: + + $ ip link set can0 up type can bitrate 500000 sample-point 0.75 \ + dbitrate 4000000 dsample-point 0.8 fd on + $ ip -details link show can0 + 5: can0: <NOARP,UP,LOWER_UP,ECHO> mtu 72 qdisc pfifo_fast state UNKNOWN \ + mode DEFAULT group default qlen 10 + link/can promiscuity 0 + can <FD> state ERROR-ACTIVE (berr-counter tx 0 rx 0) restart-ms 0 + bitrate 500000 sample-point 0.750 + tq 50 prop-seg 14 phase-seg1 15 phase-seg2 10 sjw 1 + pcan_usb_pro_fd: tseg1 1..64 tseg2 1..16 sjw 1..16 brp 1..1024 \ + brp-inc 1 + dbitrate 4000000 dsample-point 0.800 + dtq 12 dprop-seg 7 dphase-seg1 8 dphase-seg2 4 dsjw 1 + pcan_usb_pro_fd: dtseg1 1..16 dtseg2 1..8 dsjw 1..4 dbrp 1..1024 \ + dbrp-inc 1 + clock 80000000 + + Example when 'fd-non-iso on' is added on this switchable CAN FD adapter: + can <FD,FD-NON-ISO> state ERROR-ACTIVE (berr-counter tx 0 rx 0) restart-ms 0 6.7 Supported CAN hardware diff --git a/Documentation/networking/ieee802154.txt b/Documentation/networking/ieee802154.txt index 1700756af057..aa69ccc481db 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/ieee802154.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/ieee802154.txt @@ -7,11 +7,11 @@ Introduction The IEEE 802.15.4 working group focuses on standardization of bottom two layers: Medium Access Control (MAC) and Physical (PHY). And there are mainly two options available for upper layers: - - ZigBee - proprietary protocol from ZigBee Alliance - - 6LowPAN - IPv6 networking over low rate personal area networks + - ZigBee - proprietary protocol from the ZigBee Alliance + - 6LoWPAN - IPv6 networking over low rate personal area networks -The Linux-ZigBee project goal is to provide complete implementation -of IEEE 802.15.4 and 6LoWPAN protocols. IEEE 802.15.4 is a stack +The linux-wpan project goal is to provide a complete implementation +of the IEEE 802.15.4 and 6LoWPAN protocols. IEEE 802.15.4 is a stack of protocols for organizing Low-Rate Wireless Personal Area Networks. The stack is composed of three main parts: diff --git a/Documentation/networking/ip-sysctl.txt b/Documentation/networking/ip-sysctl.txt index ebe94f2cab98..05915be86235 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/ip-sysctl.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/ip-sysctl.txt @@ -384,6 +384,14 @@ tcp_mem - vector of 3 INTEGERs: min, pressure, max Defaults are calculated at boot time from amount of available memory. +tcp_min_rtt_wlen - INTEGER + The window length of the windowed min filter to track the minimum RTT. + A shorter window lets a flow more quickly pick up new (higher) + minimum RTT when it is moved to a longer path (e.g., due to traffic + engineering). A longer window makes the filter more resistant to RTT + inflations such as transient congestion. The unit is seconds. + Default: 300 + tcp_moderate_rcvbuf - BOOLEAN If set, TCP performs receive buffer auto-tuning, attempting to automatically size the buffer (no greater than tcp_rmem[2]) to @@ -425,6 +433,15 @@ tcp_orphan_retries - INTEGER you should think about lowering this value, such sockets may consume significant resources. Cf. tcp_max_orphans. +tcp_recovery - INTEGER + This value is a bitmap to enable various experimental loss recovery + features. + + RACK: 0x1 enables the RACK loss detection for fast detection of lost + retransmissions and tail drops. + + Default: 0x1 + tcp_reordering - INTEGER Initial reordering level of packets in a TCP stream. TCP stack can then dynamically adjust flow reordering level @@ -1199,7 +1216,8 @@ tag - INTEGER xfrm4_gc_thresh - INTEGER The threshold at which we will start garbage collecting for IPv4 destination cache entries. At twice this value the system will - refuse new allocations. + refuse new allocations. The value must be set below the flowcache + limit (4096 * number of online cpus) to take effect. igmp_link_local_mcast_reports - BOOLEAN Enable IGMP reports for link local multicast groups in the @@ -1645,7 +1663,8 @@ ratelimit - INTEGER xfrm6_gc_thresh - INTEGER The threshold at which we will start garbage collecting for IPv6 destination cache entries. At twice this value the system will - refuse new allocations. + refuse new allocations. The value must be set below the flowcache + limit (4096 * number of online cpus) to take effect. IPv6 Update by: diff --git a/Documentation/networking/ipvs-sysctl.txt b/Documentation/networking/ipvs-sysctl.txt index 3ba709531adb..e6b1c025fdd8 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/ipvs-sysctl.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/ipvs-sysctl.txt @@ -157,6 +157,16 @@ expire_quiescent_template - BOOLEAN persistence template if it is to be used to schedule a new connection and the destination server is quiescent. +ignore_tunneled - BOOLEAN + 0 - disabled (default) + not 0 - enabled + + If set, ipvs will set the ipvs_property on all packets which are of + unrecognized protocols. This prevents us from routing tunneled + protocols like ipip, which is useful to prevent rescheduling + packets that have been tunneled to the ipvs host (i.e. to prevent + ipvs routing loops when ipvs is also acting as a real server). + nat_icmp_send - BOOLEAN 0 - disabled (default) not 0 - enabled diff --git a/Documentation/networking/l2tp.txt b/Documentation/networking/l2tp.txt index c74434de2fa5..4650a00ed012 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/l2tp.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/l2tp.txt @@ -213,15 +213,12 @@ To create an L2TPv3 ethernet pseudowire between local host 192.168.1.1 and peer 192.168.1.2, using IP addresses 10.5.1.1 and 10.5.1.2 for the tunnel endpoints:- -# modprobe l2tp_eth -# modprobe l2tp_netlink - # ip l2tp add tunnel tunnel_id 1 peer_tunnel_id 1 udp_sport 5000 \ udp_dport 5000 encap udp local 192.168.1.1 remote 192.168.1.2 # ip l2tp add session tunnel_id 1 session_id 1 peer_session_id 1 -# ifconfig -a +# ip -s -d show dev l2tpeth0 # ip addr add 10.5.1.2/32 peer 10.5.1.1/32 dev l2tpeth0 -# ifconfig l2tpeth0 up +# ip li set dev l2tpeth0 up Choose IP addresses to be the address of a local IP interface and that of the remote system. The IP addresses of the l2tpeth0 interface can be diff --git a/Documentation/networking/switchdev.txt b/Documentation/networking/switchdev.txt index 476df0496686..91994134efca 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/switchdev.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/switchdev.txt @@ -115,7 +115,7 @@ Switch ID ^^^^^^^^^ The switchdev driver must implement the switchdev op switchdev_port_attr_get -for SWITCHDEV_ATTR_PORT_PARENT_ID for each port netdev, returning the same +for SWITCHDEV_ATTR_ID_PORT_PARENT_ID for each port netdev, returning the same physical ID for each port of a switch. The ID must be unique between switches on the same system. The ID does not need to be unique between switches on different systems. @@ -178,7 +178,7 @@ entries are installed, for example, using iproute2 bridge cmd: bridge fdb add ADDR dev DEV [vlan VID] [self] The driver should use the helper switchdev_port_fdb_xxx ops for ndo_fdb_xxx -ops, and handle add/delete/dump of SWITCHDEV_OBJ_PORT_FDB object using +ops, and handle add/delete/dump of SWITCHDEV_OBJ_ID_PORT_FDB object using switchdev_port_obj_xxx ops. XXX: what should be done if offloading this rule to hardware fails (for @@ -233,26 +233,27 @@ the bridge's FDB. It's possible, but not optimal, to enable learning on the device port and on the bridge port, and disable learning_sync. To support learning and learning_sync port attributes, the driver implements -switchdev op switchdev_port_attr_get/set for SWITCHDEV_ATTR_PORT_BRIDGE_FLAGS. -The driver should initialize the attributes to the hardware defaults. +switchdev op switchdev_port_attr_get/set for +SWITCHDEV_ATTR_PORT_ID_BRIDGE_FLAGS. The driver should initialize the attributes +to the hardware defaults. FDB Ageing ^^^^^^^^^^ -There are two FDB ageing models supported: 1) ageing by the device, and 2) -ageing by the kernel. Ageing by the device is preferred if many FDB entries -are supported. The driver calls call_switchdev_notifiers(SWITCHDEV_FDB_DEL, -...) to age out the FDB entry. In this model, ageing by the kernel should be -turned off. XXX: how to turn off ageing in kernel on a per-port basis or -otherwise prevent the kernel from ageing out the FDB entry? - -In the kernel ageing model, the standard bridge ageing mechanism is used to age -out stale FDB entries. To keep an FDB entry "alive", the driver should refresh -the FDB entry by calling call_switchdev_notifiers(SWITCHDEV_FDB_ADD, ...). The +The bridge will skip ageing FDB entries marked with NTF_EXT_LEARNED and it is +the responsibility of the port driver/device to age out these entries. If the +port device supports ageing, when the FDB entry expires, it will notify the +driver which in turn will notify the bridge with SWITCHDEV_FDB_DEL. If the +device does not support ageing, the driver can simulate ageing using a +garbage collection timer to monitor FBD entries. Expired entries will be +notified to the bridge using SWITCHDEV_FDB_DEL. See rocker driver for +example of driver running ageing timer. + +To keep an NTF_EXT_LEARNED entry "alive", the driver should refresh the FDB +entry by calling call_switchdev_notifiers(SWITCHDEV_FDB_ADD, ...). The notification will reset the FDB entry's last-used time to now. The driver should rate limit refresh notifications, for example, no more than once a -second. If the FDB entry expires, fdb_delete is called to remove entry from -the device. +second. (The last-used time is visible using the bridge -s fdb option). STP State Change on Port ^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ @@ -260,7 +261,7 @@ STP State Change on Port Internally or with a third-party STP protocol implementation (e.g. mstpd), the bridge driver maintains the STP state for ports, and will notify the switch driver of STP state change on a port using the switchdev op -switchdev_attr_port_set for SWITCHDEV_ATTR_PORT_STP_UPDATE. +switchdev_attr_port_set for SWITCHDEV_ATTR_PORT_ID_STP_UPDATE. State is one of BR_STATE_*. The switch driver can use STP state updates to update ingress packet filter list for the port. For example, if port is @@ -277,8 +278,8 @@ Flooding L2 domain For a given L2 VLAN domain, the switch device should flood multicast/broadcast and unknown unicast packets to all ports in domain, if allowed by port's current STP state. The switch driver, knowing which ports are within which -vlan L2 domain, can program the switch device for flooding. The packet should -also be sent to the port netdev for processing by the bridge driver. The +vlan L2 domain, can program the switch device for flooding. The packet may +be sent to the port netdev for processing by the bridge driver. The bridge should not reflood the packet to the same ports the device flooded, otherwise there will be duplicate packets on the wire. @@ -297,6 +298,9 @@ packets up to the bridge driver for flooding. This is not ideal as the number of ports scale in the L2 domain as the device is much more efficient at flooding packets that software. +If supported by the device, flood control can be offloaded to it, preventing +certain netdevs from flooding unicast traffic for which there is no FDB entry. + IGMP Snooping ^^^^^^^^^^^^^ @@ -316,9 +320,9 @@ SWITCHDEV_OBJ_IPV[4|6]_FIB object using switchdev_port_obj_xxx ops. switchdev_port_obj_add is used for both adding a new FIB entry to the device, or modifying an existing entry on the device. -XXX: Currently, only SWITCHDEV_OBJ_IPV4_FIB objects are supported. +XXX: Currently, only SWITCHDEV_OBJ_ID_IPV4_FIB objects are supported. -SWITCHDEV_OBJ_IPV4_FIB object passes: +SWITCHDEV_OBJ_ID_IPV4_FIB object passes: struct switchdev_obj_ipv4_fib { /* IPV4_FIB */ u32 dst; @@ -369,3 +373,22 @@ The driver can monitor for updates to arp_tbl using the netevent notifier NETEVENT_NEIGH_UPDATE. The device can be programmed with resolved nexthops for the routes as arp_tbl updates. The driver implements ndo_neigh_destroy to know when arp_tbl neighbor entries are purged from the port. + +Transaction item queue +^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ + +For switchdev ops attr_set and obj_add, there is a 2 phase transaction model +used. First phase is to "prepare" anything needed, including various checks, +memory allocation, etc. The goal is to handle the stuff that is not unlikely +to fail here. The second phase is to "commit" the actual changes. + +Switchdev provides an inftrastructure for sharing items (for example memory +allocations) between the two phases. + +The object created by a driver in "prepare" phase and it is queued up by: +switchdev_trans_item_enqueue() +During the "commit" phase, the driver gets the object by: +switchdev_trans_item_dequeue() + +If a transaction is aborted during "prepare" phase, switchdev code will handle +cleanup of the queued-up objects. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/vrf.txt b/Documentation/networking/vrf.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..d52aa10cfe91 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/vrf.txt @@ -0,0 +1,393 @@ +Virtual Routing and Forwarding (VRF) +==================================== +The VRF device combined with ip rules provides the ability to create virtual +routing and forwarding domains (aka VRFs, VRF-lite to be specific) in the +Linux network stack. One use case is the multi-tenancy problem where each +tenant has their own unique routing tables and in the very least need +different default gateways. + +Processes can be "VRF aware" by binding a socket to the VRF device. Packets +through the socket then use the routing table associated with the VRF +device. An important feature of the VRF device implementation is that it +impacts only Layer 3 and above so L2 tools (e.g., LLDP) are not affected +(ie., they do not need to be run in each VRF). The design also allows +the use of higher priority ip rules (Policy Based Routing, PBR) to take +precedence over the VRF device rules directing specific traffic as desired. + +In addition, VRF devices allow VRFs to be nested within namespaces. For +example network namespaces provide separation of network interfaces at L1 +(Layer 1 separation), VLANs on the interfaces within a namespace provide +L2 separation and then VRF devices provide L3 separation. + +Design +------ +A VRF device is created with an associated route table. Network interfaces +are then enslaved to a VRF device: + + +-----------------------------+ + | vrf-blue | ===> route table 10 + +-----------------------------+ + | | | + +------+ +------+ +-------------+ + | eth1 | | eth2 | ... | bond1 | + +------+ +------+ +-------------+ + | | + +------+ +------+ + | eth8 | | eth9 | + +------+ +------+ + +Packets received on an enslaved device and are switched to the VRF device +using an rx_handler which gives the impression that packets flow through +the VRF device. Similarly on egress routing rules are used to send packets +to the VRF device driver before getting sent out the actual interface. This +allows tcpdump on a VRF device to capture all packets into and out of the +VRF as a whole.[1] Similiarly, netfilter [2] and tc rules can be applied +using the VRF device to specify rules that apply to the VRF domain as a whole. + +[1] Packets in the forwarded state do not flow through the device, so those + packets are not seen by tcpdump. Will revisit this limitation in a + future release. + +[2] Iptables on ingress is limited to NF_INET_PRE_ROUTING only with skb->dev + set to real ingress device and egress is limited to NF_INET_POST_ROUTING. + Will revisit this limitation in a future release. + + +Setup +----- +1. VRF device is created with an association to a FIB table. + e.g, ip link add vrf-blue type vrf table 10 + ip link set dev vrf-blue up + +2. Rules are added that send lookups to the associated FIB table when the + iif or oif is the VRF device. e.g., + ip ru add oif vrf-blue table 10 + ip ru add iif vrf-blue table 10 + + Set the default route for the table (and hence default route for the VRF). + e.g, ip route add table 10 prohibit default + +3. Enslave L3 interfaces to a VRF device. + e.g, ip link set dev eth1 master vrf-blue + + Local and connected routes for enslaved devices are automatically moved to + the table associated with VRF device. Any additional routes depending on + the enslaved device will need to be reinserted following the enslavement. + +4. Additional VRF routes are added to associated table. + e.g., ip route add table 10 ... + + +Applications +------------ +Applications that are to work within a VRF need to bind their socket to the +VRF device: + + setsockopt(sd, SOL_SOCKET, SO_BINDTODEVICE, dev, strlen(dev)+1); + +or to specify the output device using cmsg and IP_PKTINFO. + + +Limitations +----------- +Index of original ingress interface is not available via cmsg. Will address +soon. + +################################################################################ + +Using iproute2 for VRFs +======================= +VRF devices do *not* have to start with 'vrf-'. That is a convention used here +for emphasis of the device type, similar to use of 'br' in bridge names. + +1. Create a VRF + + To instantiate a VRF device and associate it with a table: + $ ip link add dev NAME type vrf table ID + + Remember to add the ip rules as well: + $ ip ru add oif NAME table 10 + $ ip ru add iif NAME table 10 + $ ip -6 ru add oif NAME table 10 + $ ip -6 ru add iif NAME table 10 + + Without the rules route lookups are not directed to the table. + + For example: + $ ip link add dev vrf-blue type vrf table 10 + $ ip ru add pref 200 oif vrf-blue table 10 + $ ip ru add pref 200 iif vrf-blue table 10 + $ ip -6 ru add pref 200 oif vrf-blue table 10 + $ ip -6 ru add pref 200 iif vrf-blue table 10 + + +2. List VRFs + + To list VRFs that have been created: + $ ip [-d] link show type vrf + NOTE: The -d option is needed to show the table id + + For example: + $ ip -d link show type vrf + 11: vrf-mgmt: <NOARP,MASTER,UP,LOWER_UP> mtu 1500 qdisc pfifo_fast state UP mode DEFAULT group default qlen 1000 + link/ether 72:b3:ba:91:e2:24 brd ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff promiscuity 0 + vrf table 1 addrgenmode eui64 + 12: vrf-red: <NOARP,MASTER,UP,LOWER_UP> mtu 1500 qdisc pfifo_fast state UP mode DEFAULT group default qlen 1000 + link/ether b6:6f:6e:f6:da:73 brd ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff promiscuity 0 + vrf table 10 addrgenmode eui64 + 13: vrf-blue: <NOARP,MASTER,UP,LOWER_UP> mtu 1500 qdisc pfifo_fast state UP mode DEFAULT group default qlen 1000 + link/ether 36:62:e8:7d:bb:8c brd ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff promiscuity 0 + vrf table 66 addrgenmode eui64 + 14: vrf-green: <NOARP,MASTER,UP,LOWER_UP> mtu 1500 qdisc pfifo_fast state UP mode DEFAULT group default qlen 1000 + link/ether e6:28:b8:63:70:bb brd ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff promiscuity 0 + vrf table 81 addrgenmode eui64 + + + Or in brief output: + + $ ip -br link show type vrf + vrf-mgmt UP 72:b3:ba:91:e2:24 <NOARP,MASTER,UP,LOWER_UP> + vrf-red UP b6:6f:6e:f6:da:73 <NOARP,MASTER,UP,LOWER_UP> + vrf-blue UP 36:62:e8:7d:bb:8c <NOARP,MASTER,UP,LOWER_UP> + vrf-green UP e6:28:b8:63:70:bb <NOARP,MASTER,UP,LOWER_UP> + + +3. Assign a Network Interface to a VRF + + Network interfaces are assigned to a VRF by enslaving the netdevice to a + VRF device: + $ ip link set dev NAME master VRF-NAME + + On enslavement connected and local routes are automatically moved to the + table associated with the VRF device. + + For example: + $ ip link set dev eth0 master vrf-mgmt + + +4. Show Devices Assigned to a VRF + + To show devices that have been assigned to a specific VRF add the master + option to the ip command: + $ ip link show master VRF-NAME + + For example: + $ ip link show master vrf-red + 3: eth1: <BROADCAST,MULTICAST,UP,LOWER_UP> mtu 1500 qdisc pfifo_fast master vrf-red state UP mode DEFAULT group default qlen 1000 + link/ether 02:00:00:00:02:02 brd ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff + 4: eth2: <BROADCAST,MULTICAST,UP,LOWER_UP> mtu 1500 qdisc pfifo_fast master vrf-red state UP mode DEFAULT group default qlen 1000 + link/ether 02:00:00:00:02:03 brd ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff + 7: eth5: <BROADCAST,MULTICAST> mtu 1500 qdisc noop master vrf-red state DOWN mode DEFAULT group default qlen 1000 + link/ether 02:00:00:00:02:06 brd ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff + + + Or using the brief output: + $ ip -br link show master vrf-red + eth1 UP 02:00:00:00:02:02 <BROADCAST,MULTICAST,UP,LOWER_UP> + eth2 UP 02:00:00:00:02:03 <BROADCAST,MULTICAST,UP,LOWER_UP> + eth5 DOWN 02:00:00:00:02:06 <BROADCAST,MULTICAST> + + +5. Show Neighbor Entries for a VRF + + To list neighbor entries associated with devices enslaved to a VRF device + add the master option to the ip command: + $ ip [-6] neigh show master VRF-NAME + + For example: + $ ip neigh show master vrf-red + 10.2.1.254 dev eth1 lladdr a6:d9:c7:4f:06:23 REACHABLE + 10.2.2.254 dev eth2 lladdr 5e:54:01:6a:ee:80 REACHABLE + + $ ip -6 neigh show master vrf-red + 2002:1::64 dev eth1 lladdr a6:d9:c7:4f:06:23 REACHABLE + + +6. Show Addresses for a VRF + + To show addresses for interfaces associated with a VRF add the master + option to the ip command: + $ ip addr show master VRF-NAME + + For example: + $ ip addr show master vrf-red + 3: eth1: <BROADCAST,MULTICAST,UP,LOWER_UP> mtu 1500 qdisc pfifo_fast master vrf-red state UP group default qlen 1000 + link/ether 02:00:00:00:02:02 brd ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff + inet 10.2.1.2/24 brd 10.2.1.255 scope global eth1 + valid_lft forever preferred_lft forever + inet6 2002:1::2/120 scope global + valid_lft forever preferred_lft forever + inet6 fe80::ff:fe00:202/64 scope link + valid_lft forever preferred_lft forever + 4: eth2: <BROADCAST,MULTICAST,UP,LOWER_UP> mtu 1500 qdisc pfifo_fast master vrf-red state UP group default qlen 1000 + link/ether 02:00:00:00:02:03 brd ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff + inet 10.2.2.2/24 brd 10.2.2.255 scope global eth2 + valid_lft forever preferred_lft forever + inet6 2002:2::2/120 scope global + valid_lft forever preferred_lft forever + inet6 fe80::ff:fe00:203/64 scope link + valid_lft forever preferred_lft forever + 7: eth5: <BROADCAST,MULTICAST> mtu 1500 qdisc noop master vrf-red state DOWN group default qlen 1000 + link/ether 02:00:00:00:02:06 brd ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff + + Or in brief format: + $ ip -br addr show master vrf-red + eth1 UP 10.2.1.2/24 2002:1::2/120 fe80::ff:fe00:202/64 + eth2 UP 10.2.2.2/24 2002:2::2/120 fe80::ff:fe00:203/64 + eth5 DOWN + + +7. Show Routes for a VRF + + To show routes for a VRF use the ip command to display the table associated + with the VRF device: + $ ip [-6] route show table ID + + For example: + $ ip route show table vrf-red + prohibit default + broadcast 10.2.1.0 dev eth1 proto kernel scope link src 10.2.1.2 + 10.2.1.0/24 dev eth1 proto kernel scope link src 10.2.1.2 + local 10.2.1.2 dev eth1 proto kernel scope host src 10.2.1.2 + broadcast 10.2.1.255 dev eth1 proto kernel scope link src 10.2.1.2 + broadcast 10.2.2.0 dev eth2 proto kernel scope link src 10.2.2.2 + 10.2.2.0/24 dev eth2 proto kernel scope link src 10.2.2.2 + local 10.2.2.2 dev eth2 proto kernel scope host src 10.2.2.2 + broadcast 10.2.2.255 dev eth2 proto kernel scope link src 10.2.2.2 + + $ ip -6 route show table vrf-red + local 2002:1:: dev lo proto none metric 0 pref medium + local 2002:1::2 dev lo proto none metric 0 pref medium + 2002:1::/120 dev eth1 proto kernel metric 256 pref medium + local 2002:2:: dev lo proto none metric 0 pref medium + local 2002:2::2 dev lo proto none metric 0 pref medium + 2002:2::/120 dev eth2 proto kernel metric 256 pref medium + local fe80:: dev lo proto none metric 0 pref medium + local fe80:: dev lo proto none metric 0 pref medium + local fe80::ff:fe00:202 dev lo proto none metric 0 pref medium + local fe80::ff:fe00:203 dev lo proto none metric 0 pref medium + fe80::/64 dev eth1 proto kernel metric 256 pref medium + fe80::/64 dev eth2 proto kernel metric 256 pref medium + ff00::/8 dev vrf-red metric 256 pref medium + ff00::/8 dev eth1 metric 256 pref medium + ff00::/8 dev eth2 metric 256 pref medium + + +8. Route Lookup for a VRF + + A test route lookup can be done for a VRF by adding the oif option to ip: + $ ip [-6] route get oif VRF-NAME ADDRESS + + For example: + $ ip route get 10.2.1.40 oif vrf-red + 10.2.1.40 dev eth1 table vrf-red src 10.2.1.2 + cache + + $ ip -6 route get 2002:1::32 oif vrf-red + 2002:1::32 from :: dev eth1 table vrf-red proto kernel src 2002:1::2 metric 256 pref medium + + +9. Removing Network Interface from a VRF + + Network interfaces are removed from a VRF by breaking the enslavement to + the VRF device: + $ ip link set dev NAME nomaster + + Connected routes are moved back to the default table and local entries are + moved to the local table. + + For example: + $ ip link set dev eth0 nomaster + +-------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +Commands used in this example: + +cat >> /etc/iproute2/rt_tables <<EOF +1 vrf-mgmt +10 vrf-red +66 vrf-blue +81 vrf-green +EOF + +function vrf_create +{ + VRF=$1 + TBID=$2 + # create VRF device + ip link add vrf-${VRF} type vrf table ${TBID} + + # add rules that direct lookups to vrf table + ip ru add pref 200 oif vrf-${VRF} table ${TBID} + ip ru add pref 200 iif vrf-${VRF} table ${TBID} + ip -6 ru add pref 200 oif vrf-${VRF} table ${TBID} + ip -6 ru add pref 200 iif vrf-${VRF} table ${TBID} + + if [ "${VRF}" != "mgmt" ]; then + ip route add table ${TBID} prohibit default + fi + ip link set dev vrf-${VRF} up + ip link set dev vrf-${VRF} state up +} + +vrf_create mgmt 1 +ip link set dev eth0 master vrf-mgmt + +vrf_create red 10 +ip link set dev eth1 master vrf-red +ip link set dev eth2 master vrf-red +ip link set dev eth5 master vrf-red + +vrf_create blue 66 +ip link set dev eth3 master vrf-blue + +vrf_create green 81 +ip link set dev eth4 master vrf-green + + +Interface addresses from /etc/network/interfaces: +auto eth0 +iface eth0 inet static + address 10.0.0.2 + netmask 255.255.255.0 + gateway 10.0.0.254 + +iface eth0 inet6 static + address 2000:1::2 + netmask 120 + +auto eth1 +iface eth1 inet static + address 10.2.1.2 + netmask 255.255.255.0 + +iface eth1 inet6 static + address 2002:1::2 + netmask 120 + +auto eth2 +iface eth2 inet static + address 10.2.2.2 + netmask 255.255.255.0 + +iface eth2 inet6 static + address 2002:2::2 + netmask 120 + +auto eth3 +iface eth3 inet static + address 10.2.3.2 + netmask 255.255.255.0 + +iface eth3 inet6 static + address 2002:3::2 + netmask 120 + +auto eth4 +iface eth4 inet static + address 10.2.4.2 + netmask 255.255.255.0 + +iface eth4 inet6 static + address 2002:4::2 + netmask 120 diff --git a/Documentation/power/pci.txt b/Documentation/power/pci.txt index 62328d76b55b..b0e911e0e8f5 100644 --- a/Documentation/power/pci.txt +++ b/Documentation/power/pci.txt @@ -979,20 +979,45 @@ every time right after the runtime_resume() callback has returned (alternatively, the runtime_suspend() callback will have to check if the device should really be suspended and return -EAGAIN if that is not the case). -The runtime PM of PCI devices is disabled by default. It is also blocked by -pci_pm_init() that runs the pm_runtime_forbid() helper function. If a PCI -driver implements the runtime PM callbacks and intends to use the runtime PM -framework provided by the PM core and the PCI subsystem, it should enable this -feature by executing the pm_runtime_enable() helper function. However, the -driver should not call the pm_runtime_allow() helper function unblocking -the runtime PM of the device. Instead, it should allow user space or some -platform-specific code to do that (user space can do it via sysfs), although -once it has called pm_runtime_enable(), it must be prepared to handle the +The runtime PM of PCI devices is enabled by default by the PCI core. PCI +device drivers do not need to enable it and should not attempt to do so. +However, it is blocked by pci_pm_init() that runs the pm_runtime_forbid() +helper function. In addition to that, the runtime PM usage counter of +each PCI device is incremented by local_pci_probe() before executing the +probe callback provided by the device's driver. + +If a PCI driver implements the runtime PM callbacks and intends to use the +runtime PM framework provided by the PM core and the PCI subsystem, it needs +to decrement the device's runtime PM usage counter in its probe callback +function. If it doesn't do that, the counter will always be different from +zero for the device and it will never be runtime-suspended. The simplest +way to do that is by calling pm_runtime_put_noidle(), but if the driver +wants to schedule an autosuspend right away, for example, it may call +pm_runtime_put_autosuspend() instead for this purpose. Generally, it +just needs to call a function that decrements the devices usage counter +from its probe routine to make runtime PM work for the device. + +It is important to remember that the driver's runtime_suspend() callback +may be executed right after the usage counter has been decremented, because +user space may already have cuased the pm_runtime_allow() helper function +unblocking the runtime PM of the device to run via sysfs, so the driver must +be prepared to cope with that. + +The driver itself should not call pm_runtime_allow(), though. Instead, it +should let user space or some platform-specific code do that (user space can +do it via sysfs as stated above), but it must be prepared to handle the runtime PM of the device correctly as soon as pm_runtime_allow() is called -(which may happen at any time). [It also is possible that user space causes -pm_runtime_allow() to be called via sysfs before the driver is loaded, so in -fact the driver has to be prepared to handle the runtime PM of the device as -soon as it calls pm_runtime_enable().] +(which may happen at any time, even before the driver is loaded). + +When the driver's remove callback runs, it has to balance the decrementation +of the device's runtime PM usage counter at the probe time. For this reason, +if it has decremented the counter in its probe callback, it must run +pm_runtime_get_noresume() in its remove callback. [Since the core carries +out a runtime resume of the device and bumps up the device's usage counter +before running the driver's remove callback, the runtime PM of the device +is effectively disabled for the duration of the remove execution and all +runtime PM helper functions incrementing the device's usage counter are +then effectively equivalent to pm_runtime_get_noresume().] The runtime PM framework works by processing requests to suspend or resume devices, or to check if they are idle (in which cases it is reasonable to diff --git a/Documentation/ptp/testptp.c b/Documentation/ptp/testptp.c index 2bc8abc57fa0..6c6247aaa7b9 100644 --- a/Documentation/ptp/testptp.c +++ b/Documentation/ptp/testptp.c @@ -18,6 +18,7 @@ * Foundation, Inc., 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA. */ #define _GNU_SOURCE +#define __SANE_USERSPACE_TYPES__ /* For PPC64, to get LL64 types */ #include <errno.h> #include <fcntl.h> #include <inttypes.h> diff --git a/Documentation/rbtree.txt b/Documentation/rbtree.txt index 39873ef41bf9..b9d9cc57be18 100644 --- a/Documentation/rbtree.txt +++ b/Documentation/rbtree.txt @@ -203,7 +203,7 @@ functions with the user provided augmentation callback when inserting and erasing nodes. C files implementing augmented rbtree manipulation must include -<linux/rbtree_augmented.h> instead of <linus/rbtree.h>. Note that +<linux/rbtree_augmented.h> instead of <linux/rbtree.h>. Note that linux/rbtree_augmented.h exposes some rbtree implementations details you are not expected to rely on; please stick to the documented APIs there and do not include <linux/rbtree_augmented.h> from header files diff --git a/Documentation/security/Smack.txt b/Documentation/security/Smack.txt index 5e6d07fbed07..945cc633d883 100644 --- a/Documentation/security/Smack.txt +++ b/Documentation/security/Smack.txt @@ -255,6 +255,16 @@ unconfined the access permitted if it wouldn't be otherwise. Note that this is dangerous and can ruin the proper labeling of your system. It should never be used in production. +relabel-self + This interface contains a list of labels to which the process can + transition to, by writing to /proc/self/attr/current. + Normally a process can change its own label to any legal value, but only + if it has CAP_MAC_ADMIN. This interface allows a process without + CAP_MAC_ADMIN to relabel itself to one of labels from predefined list. + A process without CAP_MAC_ADMIN can change its label only once. When it + does, this list will be cleared. + The values are set by writing the desired labels, separated + by spaces, to the file or cleared by writing "-" to the file. If you are using the smackload utility you can add access rules in /etc/smack/accesses. They take the form: diff --git a/Documentation/security/keys.txt b/Documentation/security/keys.txt index c9e7f4f223a5..8c183873b2b7 100644 --- a/Documentation/security/keys.txt +++ b/Documentation/security/keys.txt @@ -1049,12 +1049,12 @@ search a specific keyring, so using keyrings in this way is of limited utility. NOTES ON ACCESSING PAYLOAD CONTENTS =================================== -The simplest payload is just a number in key->payload.value. In this case, -there's no need to indulge in RCU or locking when accessing the payload. +The simplest payload is just data stored in key->payload directly. In this +case, there's no need to indulge in RCU or locking when accessing the payload. -More complex payload contents must be allocated and a pointer to them set in -key->payload.data. One of the following ways must be selected to access the -data: +More complex payload contents must be allocated and pointers to them set in the +key->payload.data[] array. One of the following ways must be selected to +access the data: (1) Unmodifiable key type. @@ -1092,6 +1092,13 @@ data: the payload. key->datalen cannot be relied upon to be consistent with the payload just dereferenced if the key's semaphore is not held. + Note that key->payload.data[0] has a shadow that is marked for __rcu + usage. This is called key->payload.rcu_data0. The following accessors + wrap the RCU calls to this element: + + rcu_assign_keypointer(struct key *key, void *data); + void *rcu_dereference_key(struct key *key); + =================== DEFINING A KEY TYPE @@ -1143,8 +1150,7 @@ The structure has a number of fields, some of which are mandatory: struct key_preparsed_payload { char *description; - void *type_data[2]; - void *payload; + union key_payload payload; const void *data; size_t datalen; size_t quotalen; @@ -1160,10 +1166,9 @@ The structure has a number of fields, some of which are mandatory: attached as a string to the description field. This will be used for the key description if the caller of add_key() passes NULL or "". - The method can attach anything it likes to type_data[] and payload. These - are merely passed along to the instantiate() or update() operations. If - set, the expiry time will be applied to the key if it is instantiated from - this data. + The method can attach anything it likes to payload. This is merely passed + along to the instantiate() or update() operations. If set, the expiry + time will be applied to the key if it is instantiated from this data. The method should return 0 if successful or a negative error code otherwise. @@ -1172,11 +1177,10 @@ The structure has a number of fields, some of which are mandatory: (*) void (*free_preparse)(struct key_preparsed_payload *prep); This method is only required if the preparse() method is provided, - otherwise it is unused. It cleans up anything attached to the - description, type_data and payload fields of the key_preparsed_payload - struct as filled in by the preparse() method. It will always be called - after preparse() returns successfully, even if instantiate() or update() - succeed. + otherwise it is unused. It cleans up anything attached to the description + and payload fields of the key_preparsed_payload struct as filled in by the + preparse() method. It will always be called after preparse() returns + successfully, even if instantiate() or update() succeed. (*) int (*instantiate)(struct key *key, struct key_preparsed_payload *prep); @@ -1197,6 +1201,11 @@ The structure has a number of fields, some of which are mandatory: It is safe to sleep in this method. + generic_key_instantiate() is provided to simply copy the data from + prep->payload.data[] to key->payload.data[], with RCU-safe assignment on + the first element. It will then clear prep->payload.data[] so that the + free_preparse method doesn't release the data. + (*) int (*update)(struct key *key, const void *data, size_t datalen); diff --git a/Documentation/serial/driver b/Documentation/serial/driver index c415b0ef4493..379468e12680 100644 --- a/Documentation/serial/driver +++ b/Documentation/serial/driver @@ -439,11 +439,13 @@ Modem control lines via GPIO Some helpers are provided in order to set/get modem control lines via GPIO. -mctrl_gpio_init(dev, idx): +mctrl_gpio_init(port, idx): This will get the {cts,rts,...}-gpios from device tree if they are present and request them, set direction etc, and return an allocated structure. devm_* functions are used, so there's no need to call mctrl_gpio_free(). + As this sets up the irq handling make sure to not handle changes to the + gpio input lines in your driver, too. mctrl_gpio_free(dev, gpios): This will free the requested gpios in mctrl_gpio_init(). @@ -458,3 +460,9 @@ mctrl_gpio_set(gpios, mctrl): mctrl_gpio_get(gpios, mctrl): This will update mctrl with the gpios values. + +mctrl_gpio_enable_ms(gpios): + Enables irqs and handling of changes to the ms lines. + +mctrl_gpio_disable_ms(gpios): + Disables irqs and handling of changes to the ms lines. diff --git a/Documentation/serial/tty.txt b/Documentation/serial/tty.txt index 973c8ad3f959..bc3842dc323a 100644 --- a/Documentation/serial/tty.txt +++ b/Documentation/serial/tty.txt @@ -39,8 +39,13 @@ TTY side interfaces: open() - Called when the line discipline is attached to the terminal. No other call into the line discipline for this tty will occur until it - completes successfully. Returning an error will - prevent the ldisc from being attached. Can sleep. + completes successfully. Should initialize any + state needed by the ldisc, and set receive_room + in the tty_struct to the maximum amount of data + the line discipline is willing to accept from the + driver with a single call to receive_buf(). + Returning an error will prevent the ldisc from + being attached. Can sleep. close() - This is called on a terminal when the line discipline is being unplugged. At the point of @@ -52,9 +57,16 @@ hangup() - Called when the tty line is hung up. No further calls into the ldisc code will occur. The return value is ignored. Can sleep. -write() - A process is writing data through the line - discipline. Multiple write calls are serialized - by the tty layer for the ldisc. May sleep. +read() - (optional) A process requests reading data from + the line. Multiple read calls may occur in parallel + and the ldisc must deal with serialization issues. + If not defined, the process will receive an EIO + error. May sleep. + +write() - (optional) A process requests writing data to the + line. Multiple write calls are serialized by the + tty layer for the ldisc. If not defined, the + process will receive an EIO error. May sleep. flush_buffer() - (optional) May be called at any point between open and close, and instructs the line discipline @@ -69,27 +81,33 @@ set_termios() - (optional) Called on termios structure changes. termios semaphore so allowed to sleep. Serialized against itself only. -read() - Move data from the line discipline to the user. - Multiple read calls may occur in parallel and the - ldisc must deal with serialization issues. May - sleep. - -poll() - Check the status for the poll/select calls. Multiple - poll calls may occur in parallel. May sleep. +poll() - (optional) Check the status for the poll/select + calls. Multiple poll calls may occur in parallel. + May sleep. -ioctl() - Called when an ioctl is handed to the tty layer - that might be for the ldisc. Multiple ioctl calls - may occur in parallel. May sleep. +ioctl() - (optional) Called when an ioctl is handed to the + tty layer that might be for the ldisc. Multiple + ioctl calls may occur in parallel. May sleep. -compat_ioctl() - Called when a 32 bit ioctl is handed to the tty layer - that might be for the ldisc. Multiple ioctl calls - may occur in parallel. May sleep. +compat_ioctl() - (optional) Called when a 32 bit ioctl is handed + to the tty layer that might be for the ldisc. + Multiple ioctl calls may occur in parallel. + May sleep. Driver Side Interfaces: -receive_buf() - Hand buffers of bytes from the driver to the ldisc - for processing. Semantics currently rather - mysterious 8( +receive_buf() - (optional) Called by the low-level driver to hand + a buffer of received bytes to the ldisc for + processing. The number of bytes is guaranteed not + to exceed the current value of tty->receive_room. + All bytes must be processed. + +receive_buf2() - (optional) Called by the low-level driver to hand + a buffer of received bytes to the ldisc for + processing. Returns the number of bytes processed. + + If both receive_buf() and receive_buf2() are + defined, receive_buf2() should be preferred. write_wakeup() - May be called at any point between open and close. The TTY_DO_WRITE_WAKEUP flag indicates if a call diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/hda_codec.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/hda_codec.txt deleted file mode 100644 index de8efbc7e4bd..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/hda_codec.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,322 +0,0 @@ -Notes on Universal Interface for Intel High Definition Audio Codec ------------------------------------------------------------------- - -Takashi Iwai <tiwai@suse.de> - - -[Still a draft version] - - -General -======= - -The snd-hda-codec module supports the generic access function for the -High Definition (HD) audio codecs. It's designed to be independent -from the controller code like ac97 codec module. The real accessors -from/to the controller must be implemented in the lowlevel driver. - -The structure of this module is similar with ac97_codec module. -Each codec chip belongs to a bus class which communicates with the -controller. - - -Initialization of Bus Instance -============================== - -The card driver has to create struct hda_bus at first. The template -struct should be filled and passed to the constructor: - -struct hda_bus_template { - void *private_data; - struct pci_dev *pci; - const char *modelname; - struct hda_bus_ops ops; -}; - -The card driver can set and use the private_data field to retrieve its -own data in callback functions. The pci field is used when the patch -needs to check the PCI subsystem IDs, so on. For non-PCI system, it -doesn't have to be set, of course. -The modelname field specifies the board's specific configuration. The -string is passed to the codec parser, and it depends on the parser how -the string is used. -These fields, private_data, pci and modelname are all optional. - -The ops field contains the callback functions as the following: - -struct hda_bus_ops { - int (*command)(struct hda_codec *codec, hda_nid_t nid, int direct, - unsigned int verb, unsigned int parm); - unsigned int (*get_response)(struct hda_codec *codec); - void (*private_free)(struct hda_bus *); -#ifdef CONFIG_SND_HDA_POWER_SAVE - void (*pm_notify)(struct hda_codec *codec); -#endif -}; - -The command callback is called when the codec module needs to send a -VERB to the controller. It's always a single command. -The get_response callback is called when the codec requires the answer -for the last command. These two callbacks are mandatory and have to -be given. -The third, private_free callback, is optional. It's called in the -destructor to release any necessary data in the lowlevel driver. - -The pm_notify callback is available only with -CONFIG_SND_HDA_POWER_SAVE kconfig. It's called when the codec needs -to power up or may power down. The controller should check the all -belonging codecs on the bus whether they are actually powered off -(check codec->power_on), and optionally the driver may power down the -controller side, too. - -The bus instance is created via snd_hda_bus_new(). You need to pass -the card instance, the template, and the pointer to store the -resultant bus instance. - -int snd_hda_bus_new(struct snd_card *card, const struct hda_bus_template *temp, - struct hda_bus **busp); - -It returns zero if successful. A negative return value means any -error during creation. - - -Creation of Codec Instance -========================== - -Each codec chip on the board is then created on the BUS instance. -To create a codec instance, call snd_hda_codec_new(). - -int snd_hda_codec_new(struct hda_bus *bus, unsigned int codec_addr, - struct hda_codec **codecp); - -The first argument is the BUS instance, the second argument is the -address of the codec, and the last one is the pointer to store the -resultant codec instance (can be NULL if not needed). - -The codec is stored in a linked list of bus instance. You can follow -the codec list like: - - struct hda_codec *codec; - list_for_each_entry(codec, &bus->codec_list, list) { - ... - } - -The codec isn't initialized at this stage properly. The -initialization sequence is called when the controls are built later. - - -Codec Access -============ - -To access codec, use snd_hda_codec_read() and snd_hda_codec_write(). -snd_hda_param_read() is for reading parameters. -For writing a sequence of verbs, use snd_hda_sequence_write(). - -There are variants of cached read/write, snd_hda_codec_write_cache(), -snd_hda_sequence_write_cache(). These are used for recording the -register states for the power-management resume. When no PM is needed, -these are equivalent with non-cached version. - -To retrieve the number of sub nodes connected to the given node, use -snd_hda_get_sub_nodes(). The connection list can be obtained via -snd_hda_get_connections() call. - -When an unsolicited event happens, pass the event via -snd_hda_queue_unsol_event() so that the codec routines will process it -later. - - -(Mixer) Controls -================ - -To create mixer controls of all codecs, call -snd_hda_build_controls(). It then builds the mixers and does -initialization stuff on each codec. - - -PCM Stuff -========= - -snd_hda_build_pcms() gives the necessary information to create PCM -streams. When it's called, each codec belonging to the bus stores -codec->num_pcms and codec->pcm_info fields. The num_pcms indicates -the number of elements in pcm_info array. The card driver is supposed -to traverse the codec linked list, read the pcm information in -pcm_info array, and build pcm instances according to them. - -The pcm_info array contains the following record: - -/* PCM information for each substream */ -struct hda_pcm_stream { - unsigned int substreams; /* number of substreams, 0 = not exist */ - unsigned int channels_min; /* min. number of channels */ - unsigned int channels_max; /* max. number of channels */ - hda_nid_t nid; /* default NID to query rates/formats/bps, or set up */ - u32 rates; /* supported rates */ - u64 formats; /* supported formats (SNDRV_PCM_FMTBIT_) */ - unsigned int maxbps; /* supported max. bit per sample */ - struct hda_pcm_ops ops; -}; - -/* for PCM creation */ -struct hda_pcm { - char *name; - struct hda_pcm_stream stream[2]; -}; - -The name can be passed to snd_pcm_new(). The stream field contains -the information for playback (SNDRV_PCM_STREAM_PLAYBACK = 0) and -capture (SNDRV_PCM_STREAM_CAPTURE = 1) directions. The card driver -should pass substreams to snd_pcm_new() for the number of substreams -to create. - -The channels_min, channels_max, rates and formats should be copied to -runtime->hw record. They and maxbps fields are used also to compute -the format value for the HDA codec and controller. Call -snd_hda_calc_stream_format() to get the format value. - -The ops field contains the following callback functions: - -struct hda_pcm_ops { - int (*open)(struct hda_pcm_stream *info, struct hda_codec *codec, - struct snd_pcm_substream *substream); - int (*close)(struct hda_pcm_stream *info, struct hda_codec *codec, - struct snd_pcm_substream *substream); - int (*prepare)(struct hda_pcm_stream *info, struct hda_codec *codec, - unsigned int stream_tag, unsigned int format, - struct snd_pcm_substream *substream); - int (*cleanup)(struct hda_pcm_stream *info, struct hda_codec *codec, - struct snd_pcm_substream *substream); -}; - -All are non-NULL, so you can call them safely without NULL check. - -The open callback should be called in PCM open after runtime->hw is -set up. It may override some setting and constraints additionally. -Similarly, the close callback should be called in the PCM close. - -The prepare callback should be called in PCM prepare. This will set -up the codec chip properly for the operation. The cleanup should be -called in hw_free to clean up the configuration. - -The caller should check the return value, at least for open and -prepare callbacks. When a negative value is returned, some error -occurred. - - -Proc Files -========== - -Each codec dumps the widget node information in -/proc/asound/card*/codec#* file. This information would be really -helpful for debugging. Please provide its contents together with the -bug report. - - -Power Management -================ - -It's simple: -Call snd_hda_suspend() in the PM suspend callback. -Call snd_hda_resume() in the PM resume callback. - - -Codec Preset (Patch) -==================== - -To set up and handle the codec functionality fully, each codec may -have a codec preset (patch). It's defined in struct hda_codec_preset: - - struct hda_codec_preset { - unsigned int id; - unsigned int mask; - unsigned int subs; - unsigned int subs_mask; - unsigned int rev; - const char *name; - int (*patch)(struct hda_codec *codec); - }; - -When the codec id and codec subsystem id match with the given id and -subs fields bitwise (with bitmask mask and subs_mask), the callback -patch is called. The patch callback should initialize the codec and -set the codec->patch_ops field. This is defined as below: - - struct hda_codec_ops { - int (*build_controls)(struct hda_codec *codec); - int (*build_pcms)(struct hda_codec *codec); - int (*init)(struct hda_codec *codec); - void (*free)(struct hda_codec *codec); - void (*unsol_event)(struct hda_codec *codec, unsigned int res); - #ifdef CONFIG_PM - int (*suspend)(struct hda_codec *codec, pm_message_t state); - int (*resume)(struct hda_codec *codec); - #endif - #ifdef CONFIG_SND_HDA_POWER_SAVE - int (*check_power_status)(struct hda_codec *codec, - hda_nid_t nid); - #endif - }; - -The build_controls callback is called from snd_hda_build_controls(). -Similarly, the build_pcms callback is called from -snd_hda_build_pcms(). The init callback is called after -build_controls to initialize the hardware. -The free callback is called as a destructor. - -The unsol_event callback is called when an unsolicited event is -received. - -The suspend and resume callbacks are for power management. -They can be NULL if no special sequence is required. When the resume -callback is NULL, the driver calls the init callback and resumes the -registers from the cache. If other handling is needed, you'd need to -write your own resume callback. There, the amp values can be resumed -via - void snd_hda_codec_resume_amp(struct hda_codec *codec); -and the other codec registers via - void snd_hda_codec_resume_cache(struct hda_codec *codec); - -The check_power_status callback is called when the amp value of the -given widget NID is changed. The codec code can turn on/off the power -appropriately from this information. - -Each entry can be NULL if not necessary to be called. - - -Generic Parser -============== - -When the device doesn't match with any given presets, the widgets are -parsed via th generic parser (hda_generic.c). Its support is -limited: no multi-channel support, for example. - - -Digital I/O -=========== - -Call snd_hda_create_spdif_out_ctls() from the patch to create controls -related with SPDIF out. - - -Helper Functions -================ - -snd_hda_get_codec_name() stores the codec name on the given string. - -snd_hda_check_board_config() can be used to obtain the configuration -information matching with the device. Define the model string table -and the table with struct snd_pci_quirk entries (zero-terminated), -and pass it to the function. The function checks the modelname given -as a module parameter, and PCI subsystem IDs. If the matching entry -is found, it returns the config field value. - -snd_hda_add_new_ctls() can be used to create and add control entries. -Pass the zero-terminated array of struct snd_kcontrol_new - -Macros HDA_CODEC_VOLUME(), HDA_CODEC_MUTE() and their variables can be -used for the entry of struct snd_kcontrol_new. - -The input MUX helper callbacks for such a control are provided, too: -snd_hda_input_mux_info() and snd_hda_input_mux_put(). See -patch_realtek.c for example. diff --git a/Documentation/static-keys.txt b/Documentation/static-keys.txt index f4cb0b2d5cd7..477927becacb 100644 --- a/Documentation/static-keys.txt +++ b/Documentation/static-keys.txt @@ -15,8 +15,8 @@ The updated API replacements are: DEFINE_STATIC_KEY_TRUE(key); DEFINE_STATIC_KEY_FALSE(key); -static_key_likely() -statick_key_unlikely() +static_branch_likely() +static_branch_unlikely() 0) Abstract diff --git a/Documentation/sysctl/kernel.txt b/Documentation/sysctl/kernel.txt index 6fccb69c03e7..af70d1541d3a 100644 --- a/Documentation/sysctl/kernel.txt +++ b/Documentation/sysctl/kernel.txt @@ -33,6 +33,7 @@ show up in /proc/sys/kernel: - domainname - hostname - hotplug +- hardlockup_all_cpu_backtrace - hung_task_panic - hung_task_check_count - hung_task_timeout_secs @@ -293,6 +294,17 @@ domain names are in general different. For a detailed discussion see the hostname(1) man page. ============================================================== +hardlockup_all_cpu_backtrace: + +This value controls the hard lockup detector behavior when a hard +lockup condition is detected as to whether or not to gather further +debug information. If enabled, arch-specific all-CPU stack dumping +will be initiated. + +0: do nothing. This is the default behavior. + +1: on detection capture more debug information. +============================================================== hotplug: diff --git a/Documentation/sysctl/net.txt b/Documentation/sysctl/net.txt index 6294b5186ae5..809ab6efcc74 100644 --- a/Documentation/sysctl/net.txt +++ b/Documentation/sysctl/net.txt @@ -54,13 +54,15 @@ default_qdisc -------------- The default queuing discipline to use for network devices. This allows -overriding the default queue discipline of pfifo_fast with an -alternative. Since the default queuing discipline is created with the -no additional parameters so is best suited to queuing disciplines that -work well without configuration like stochastic fair queue (sfq), -CoDel (codel) or fair queue CoDel (fq_codel). Don't use queuing disciplines -like Hierarchical Token Bucket or Deficit Round Robin which require setting -up classes and bandwidths. +overriding the default of pfifo_fast with an alternative. Since the default +queuing discipline is created without additional parameters so is best suited +to queuing disciplines that work well without configuration like stochastic +fair queue (sfq), CoDel (codel) or fair queue CoDel (fq_codel). Don't use +queuing disciplines like Hierarchical Token Bucket or Deficit Round Robin +which require setting up classes and bandwidths. Note that physical multiqueue +interfaces still use mq as root qdisc, which in turn uses this default for its +leaves. Virtual devices (like e.g. lo or veth) ignore this setting and instead +default to noqueue. Default: pfifo_fast busy_read diff --git a/Documentation/thermal/power_allocator.txt b/Documentation/thermal/power_allocator.txt index c3797b529991..a1ce2235f121 100644 --- a/Documentation/thermal/power_allocator.txt +++ b/Documentation/thermal/power_allocator.txt @@ -4,7 +4,7 @@ Power allocator governor tunables Trip points ----------- -The governor requires the following two passive trip points: +The governor works optimally with the following two passive trip points: 1. "switch on" trip point: temperature above which the governor control loop starts operating. This is the first passive trip diff --git a/Documentation/trace/intel_th.txt b/Documentation/trace/intel_th.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..f7fc5ba5df8d --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/trace/intel_th.txt @@ -0,0 +1,99 @@ +Intel(R) Trace Hub (TH) +======================= + +Overview +-------- + +Intel(R) Trace Hub (TH) is a set of hardware blocks that produce, +switch and output trace data from multiple hardware and software +sources over several types of trace output ports encoded in System +Trace Protocol (MIPI STPv2) and is intended to perform full system +debugging. For more information on the hardware, see Intel(R) Trace +Hub developer's manual [1]. + +It consists of trace sources, trace destinations (outputs) and a +switch (Global Trace Hub, GTH). These devices are placed on a bus of +their own ("intel_th"), where they can be discovered and configured +via sysfs attributes. + +Currently, the following Intel TH subdevices (blocks) are supported: + - Software Trace Hub (STH), trace source, which is a System Trace + Module (STM) device, + - Memory Storage Unit (MSU), trace output, which allows storing + trace hub output in system memory, + - Parallel Trace Interface output (PTI), trace output to an external + debug host via a PTI port, + - Global Trace Hub (GTH), which is a switch and a central component + of Intel(R) Trace Hub architecture. + +Common attributes for output devices are described in +Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-intel_th-output-devices, the most +notable of them is "active", which enables or disables trace output +into that particular output device. + +GTH allows directing different STP masters into different output ports +via its "masters" attribute group. More detailed GTH interface +description is at Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-intel_th-devices-gth. + +STH registers an stm class device, through which it provides interface +to userspace and kernelspace software trace sources. See +Documentation/tracing/stm.txt for more information on that. + +MSU can be configured to collect trace data into a system memory +buffer, which can later on be read from its device nodes via read() or +mmap() interface. + +On the whole, Intel(R) Trace Hub does not require any special +userspace software to function; everything can be configured, started +and collected via sysfs attributes, and device nodes. + +[1] https://software.intel.com/sites/default/files/managed/d3/3c/intel-th-developer-manual.pdf + +Bus and Subdevices +------------------ + +For each Intel TH device in the system a bus of its own is +created and assigned an id number that reflects the order in which TH +devices were emumerated. All TH subdevices (devices on intel_th bus) +begin with this id: 0-gth, 0-msc0, 0-msc1, 0-pti, 0-sth, which is +followed by device's name and an optional index. + +Output devices also get a device node in /dev/intel_thN, where N is +the Intel TH device id. For example, MSU's memory buffers, when +allocated, are accessible via /dev/intel_th0/msc{0,1}. + +Quick example +------------- + +# figure out which GTH port is the first memory controller: + +$ cat /sys/bus/intel_th/devices/0-msc0/port +0 + +# looks like it's port 0, configure master 33 to send data to port 0: + +$ echo 0 > /sys/bus/intel_th/devices/0-gth/masters/33 + +# allocate a 2-windowed multiblock buffer on the first memory +# controller, each with 64 pages: + +$ echo multi > /sys/bus/intel_th/devices/0-msc0/mode +$ echo 64,64 > /sys/bus/intel_th/devices/0-msc0/nr_pages + +# enable wrapping for this controller, too: + +$ echo 1 > /sys/bus/intel_th/devices/0-msc0/wrap + +# and enable tracing into this port: + +$ echo 1 > /sys/bus/intel_th/devices/0-msc0/active + +# .. send data to master 33, see stm.txt for more details .. +# .. wait for traces to pile up .. +# .. and stop the trace: + +$ echo 0 > /sys/bus/intel_th/devices/0-msc0/active + +# and now you can collect the trace from the device node: + +$ cat /dev/intel_th0/msc0 > my_stp_trace diff --git a/Documentation/trace/stm.txt b/Documentation/trace/stm.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..ea035f9dbfd7 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/trace/stm.txt @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ +System Trace Module +=================== + +System Trace Module (STM) is a device described in MIPI STP specs as +STP trace stream generator. STP (System Trace Protocol) is a trace +protocol multiplexing data from multiple trace sources, each one of +which is assigned a unique pair of master and channel. While some of +these masters and channels are statically allocated to certain +hardware trace sources, others are available to software. Software +trace sources are usually free to pick for themselves any +master/channel combination from this pool. + +On the receiving end of this STP stream (the decoder side), trace +sources can only be identified by master/channel combination, so in +order for the decoder to be able to make sense of the trace that +involves multiple trace sources, it needs to be able to map those +master/channel pairs to the trace sources that it understands. + +For instance, it is helpful to know that syslog messages come on +master 7 channel 15, while arbitrary user applications can use masters +48 to 63 and channels 0 to 127. + +To solve this mapping problem, stm class provides a policy management +mechanism via configfs, that allows defining rules that map string +identifiers to ranges of masters and channels. If these rules (policy) +are consistent with what decoder expects, it will be able to properly +process the trace data. + +This policy is a tree structure containing rules (policy_node) that +have a name (string identifier) and a range of masters and channels +associated with it, located in "stp-policy" subsystem directory in +configfs. The topmost directory's name (the policy) is formatted as +the STM device name to which this policy applies and and arbitrary +string identifier separated by a stop. From the examle above, a rule +may look like this: + +$ ls /config/stp-policy/dummy_stm.my-policy/user +channels masters +$ cat /config/stp-policy/dummy_stm.my-policy/user/masters +48 63 +$ cat /config/stp-policy/dummy_stm.my-policy/user/channels +0 127 + +which means that the master allocation pool for this rule consists of +masters 48 through 63 and channel allocation pool has channels 0 +through 127 in it. Now, any producer (trace source) identifying itself +with "user" identification string will be allocated a master and +channel from within these ranges. + +These rules can be nested, for example, one can define a rule "dummy" +under "user" directory from the example above and this new rule will +be used for trace sources with the id string of "user/dummy". + +Trace sources have to open the stm class device's node and write their +trace data into its file descriptor. In order to identify themselves +to the policy, they need to do a STP_POLICY_ID_SET ioctl on this file +descriptor providing their id string. Otherwise, they will be +automatically allocated a master/channel pair upon first write to this +file descriptor according to the "default" rule of the policy, if such +exists. + +Some STM devices may allow direct mapping of the channel mmio regions +to userspace for zero-copy writing. One mappable page (in terms of +mmu) will usually contain multiple channels' mmios, so the user will +need to allocate that many channels to themselves (via the +aforementioned ioctl() call) to be able to do this. That is, if your +stm device's channel mmio region is 64 bytes and hardware page size is +4096 bytes, after a successful STP_POLICY_ID_SET ioctl() call with +width==64, you should be able to mmap() one page on this file +descriptor and obtain direct access to an mmio region for 64 channels. + +For kernel-based trace sources, there is "stm_source" device +class. Devices of this class can be connected and disconnected to/from +stm devices at runtime via a sysfs attribute. + +Examples of STM devices are Intel(R) Trace Hub [1] and Coresight STM +[2]. + +[1] https://software.intel.com/sites/default/files/managed/d3/3c/intel-th-developer-manual.pdf +[2] http://infocenter.arm.com/help/index.jsp?topic=/com.arm.doc.ddi0444b/index.html diff --git a/Documentation/usb/authorization.txt b/Documentation/usb/authorization.txt index c069b6884c77..c7e985f05d8f 100644 --- a/Documentation/usb/authorization.txt +++ b/Documentation/usb/authorization.txt @@ -90,3 +90,34 @@ etc, but you get the idea. Anybody with access to a device gadget kit can fake descriptors and device info. Don't trust that. You are welcome. + +Interface authorization +----------------------- +There is a similar approach to allow or deny specific USB interfaces. +That allows to block only a subset of an USB device. + +Authorize an interface: +$ echo 1 > /sys/bus/usb/devices/INTERFACE/authorized + +Deauthorize an interface: +$ echo 0 > /sys/bus/usb/devices/INTERFACE/authorized + +The default value for new interfaces +on a particular USB bus can be changed, too. + +Allow interfaces per default: +$ echo 1 > /sys/bus/usb/devices/usbX/interface_authorized_default + +Deny interfaces per default: +$ echo 0 > /sys/bus/usb/devices/usbX/interface_authorized_default + +Per default the interface_authorized_default bit is 1. +So all interfaces would authorized per default. + +Note: +If a deauthorized interface will be authorized so the driver probing must +be triggered manually by writing INTERFACE to /sys/bus/usb/drivers_probe + +For drivers that need multiple interfaces all needed interfaces should be +authroized first. After that the drivers should be probed. +This avoids side effects. diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134 b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134 index f4b395bdc090..282102014bb9 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134 +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134 @@ -193,3 +193,4 @@ 192 -> AverMedia AverTV Satellite Hybrid+FM A706 [1461:2055] 193 -> WIS Voyager or compatible [1905:7007] 194 -> AverMedia AverTV/505 [1461:a10a] +195 -> Leadtek Winfast TV2100 FM [107d:6f3a] diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/v4l2-pci-skeleton.c b/Documentation/video4linux/v4l2-pci-skeleton.c index 9c80c090e92d..95ae82860092 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/v4l2-pci-skeleton.c +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/v4l2-pci-skeleton.c @@ -37,6 +37,7 @@ #include <media/v4l2-dv-timings.h> #include <media/v4l2-ctrls.h> #include <media/v4l2-event.h> +#include <media/videobuf2-v4l2.h> #include <media/videobuf2-dma-contig.h> MODULE_DESCRIPTION("V4L2 PCI Skeleton Driver"); @@ -162,10 +163,11 @@ static irqreturn_t skeleton_irq(int irq, void *dev_id) * minimum number: many DMA engines need a minimum of 2 buffers in the * queue and you need to have another available for userspace processing. */ -static int queue_setup(struct vb2_queue *vq, const struct v4l2_format *fmt, +static int queue_setup(struct vb2_queue *vq, const void *parg, unsigned int *nbuffers, unsigned int *nplanes, unsigned int sizes[], void *alloc_ctxs[]) { + const struct v4l2_format *fmt = parg; struct skeleton *skel = vb2_get_drv_priv(vq); skel->field = skel->format.field; diff --git a/Documentation/virtual/kvm/api.txt b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/api.txt index d9ecceea5a02..092ee9fbaf2b 100644 --- a/Documentation/virtual/kvm/api.txt +++ b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/api.txt @@ -401,10 +401,9 @@ Capability: basic Architectures: x86, ppc, mips Type: vcpu ioctl Parameters: struct kvm_interrupt (in) -Returns: 0 on success, -1 on error +Returns: 0 on success, negative on failure. -Queues a hardware interrupt vector to be injected. This is only -useful if in-kernel local APIC or equivalent is not used. +Queues a hardware interrupt vector to be injected. /* for KVM_INTERRUPT */ struct kvm_interrupt { @@ -414,7 +413,14 @@ struct kvm_interrupt { X86: -Note 'irq' is an interrupt vector, not an interrupt pin or line. +Returns: 0 on success, + -EEXIST if an interrupt is already enqueued + -EINVAL the the irq number is invalid + -ENXIO if the PIC is in the kernel + -EFAULT if the pointer is invalid + +Note 'irq' is an interrupt vector, not an interrupt pin or line. This +ioctl is useful if the in-kernel PIC is not used. PPC: @@ -1598,7 +1604,7 @@ provided event instead of triggering an exit. struct kvm_ioeventfd { __u64 datamatch; __u64 addr; /* legal pio/mmio address */ - __u32 len; /* 1, 2, 4, or 8 bytes */ + __u32 len; /* 0, 1, 2, 4, or 8 bytes */ __s32 fd; __u32 flags; __u8 pad[36]; @@ -1621,6 +1627,10 @@ to the registered address is equal to datamatch in struct kvm_ioeventfd. For virtio-ccw devices, addr contains the subchannel id and datamatch the virtqueue index. +With KVM_CAP_IOEVENTFD_ANY_LENGTH, a zero length ioeventfd is allowed, and +the kernel will ignore the length of guest write and may get a faster vmexit. +The speedup may only apply to specific architectures, but the ioeventfd will +work anyway. 4.60 KVM_DIRTY_TLB @@ -1774,7 +1784,7 @@ has been called, this interface is completely emulated within the kernel. To use this to emulate the LINT1 input with KVM_CREATE_IRQCHIP, use the following algorithm: - - pause the vpcu + - pause the vcpu - read the local APIC's state (KVM_GET_LAPIC) - check whether changing LINT1 will queue an NMI (see the LVT entry for LINT1) - if so, issue KVM_NMI @@ -2798,7 +2808,7 @@ Returns: = 0 on success, < 0 on generic error (e.g. -EFAULT or -ENOMEM), > 0 if an exception occurred while walking the page tables -Read or write data from/to the logical (virtual) memory of a VPCU. +Read or write data from/to the logical (virtual) memory of a VCPU. Parameters are specified via the following structure: @@ -3309,6 +3319,18 @@ Valid values for 'type' are: to ignore the request, or to gather VM memory core dump and/or reset/shutdown of the VM. + /* KVM_EXIT_IOAPIC_EOI */ + struct { + __u8 vector; + } eoi; + +Indicates that the VCPU's in-kernel local APIC received an EOI for a +level-triggered IOAPIC interrupt. This exit only triggers when the +IOAPIC is implemented in userspace (i.e. KVM_CAP_SPLIT_IRQCHIP is enabled); +the userspace IOAPIC should process the EOI and retrigger the interrupt if +it is still asserted. Vector is the LAPIC interrupt vector for which the +EOI was received. + /* Fix the size of the union. */ char padding[256]; }; @@ -3627,6 +3649,26 @@ struct { KVM handlers should exit to userspace with rc = -EREMOTE. +7.5 KVM_CAP_SPLIT_IRQCHIP + +Architectures: x86 +Parameters: args[0] - number of routes reserved for userspace IOAPICs +Returns: 0 on success, -1 on error + +Create a local apic for each processor in the kernel. This can be used +instead of KVM_CREATE_IRQCHIP if the userspace VMM wishes to emulate the +IOAPIC and PIC (and also the PIT, even though this has to be enabled +separately). + +This capability also enables in kernel routing of interrupt requests; +when KVM_CAP_SPLIT_IRQCHIP only routes of KVM_IRQ_ROUTING_MSI type are +used in the IRQ routing table. The first args[0] MSI routes are reserved +for the IOAPIC pins. Whenever the LAPIC receives an EOI for these routes, +a KVM_EXIT_IOAPIC_EOI vmexit will be reported to userspace. + +Fails if VCPU has already been created, or if the irqchip is already in the +kernel (i.e. KVM_CREATE_IRQCHIP has already been called). + 8. Other capabilities. ---------------------- diff --git a/Documentation/virtual/kvm/arm/vgic-mapped-irqs.txt b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/arm/vgic-mapped-irqs.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..38bca2835278 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/arm/vgic-mapped-irqs.txt @@ -0,0 +1,187 @@ +KVM/ARM VGIC Forwarded Physical Interrupts +========================================== + +The KVM/ARM code implements software support for the ARM Generic +Interrupt Controller's (GIC's) hardware support for virtualization by +allowing software to inject virtual interrupts to a VM, which the guest +OS sees as regular interrupts. The code is famously known as the VGIC. + +Some of these virtual interrupts, however, correspond to physical +interrupts from real physical devices. One example could be the +architected timer, which itself supports virtualization, and therefore +lets a guest OS program the hardware device directly to raise an +interrupt at some point in time. When such an interrupt is raised, the +host OS initially handles the interrupt and must somehow signal this +event as a virtual interrupt to the guest. Another example could be a +passthrough device, where the physical interrupts are initially handled +by the host, but the device driver for the device lives in the guest OS +and KVM must therefore somehow inject a virtual interrupt on behalf of +the physical one to the guest OS. + +These virtual interrupts corresponding to a physical interrupt on the +host are called forwarded physical interrupts, but are also sometimes +referred to as 'virtualized physical interrupts' and 'mapped interrupts'. + +Forwarded physical interrupts are handled slightly differently compared +to virtual interrupts generated purely by a software emulated device. + + +The HW bit +---------- +Virtual interrupts are signalled to the guest by programming the List +Registers (LRs) on the GIC before running a VCPU. The LR is programmed +with the virtual IRQ number and the state of the interrupt (Pending, +Active, or Pending+Active). When the guest ACKs and EOIs a virtual +interrupt, the LR state moves from Pending to Active, and finally to +inactive. + +The LRs include an extra bit, called the HW bit. When this bit is set, +KVM must also program an additional field in the LR, the physical IRQ +number, to link the virtual with the physical IRQ. + +When the HW bit is set, KVM must EITHER set the Pending OR the Active +bit, never both at the same time. + +Setting the HW bit causes the hardware to deactivate the physical +interrupt on the physical distributor when the guest deactivates the +corresponding virtual interrupt. + + +Forwarded Physical Interrupts Life Cycle +---------------------------------------- + +The state of forwarded physical interrupts is managed in the following way: + + - The physical interrupt is acked by the host, and becomes active on + the physical distributor (*). + - KVM sets the LR.Pending bit, because this is the only way the GICV + interface is going to present it to the guest. + - LR.Pending will stay set as long as the guest has not acked the interrupt. + - LR.Pending transitions to LR.Active on the guest read of the IAR, as + expected. + - On guest EOI, the *physical distributor* active bit gets cleared, + but the LR.Active is left untouched (set). + - KVM clears the LR on VM exits when the physical distributor + active state has been cleared. + +(*): The host handling is slightly more complicated. For some forwarded +interrupts (shared), KVM directly sets the active state on the physical +distributor before entering the guest, because the interrupt is never actually +handled on the host (see details on the timer as an example below). For other +forwarded interrupts (non-shared) the host does not deactivate the interrupt +when the host ISR completes, but leaves the interrupt active until the guest +deactivates it. Leaving the interrupt active is allowed, because Linux +configures the physical GIC with EOIMode=1, which causes EOI operations to +perform a priority drop allowing the GIC to receive other interrupts of the +default priority. + + +Forwarded Edge and Level Triggered PPIs and SPIs +------------------------------------------------ +Forwarded physical interrupts injected should always be active on the +physical distributor when injected to a guest. + +Level-triggered interrupts will keep the interrupt line to the GIC +asserted, typically until the guest programs the device to deassert the +line. This means that the interrupt will remain pending on the physical +distributor until the guest has reprogrammed the device. Since we +always run the VM with interrupts enabled on the CPU, a pending +interrupt will exit the guest as soon as we switch into the guest, +preventing the guest from ever making progress as the process repeats +over and over. Therefore, the active state on the physical distributor +must be set when entering the guest, preventing the GIC from forwarding +the pending interrupt to the CPU. As soon as the guest deactivates the +interrupt, the physical line is sampled by the hardware again and the host +takes a new interrupt if and only if the physical line is still asserted. + +Edge-triggered interrupts do not exhibit the same problem with +preventing guest execution that level-triggered interrupts do. One +option is to not use HW bit at all, and inject edge-triggered interrupts +from a physical device as pure virtual interrupts. But that would +potentially slow down handling of the interrupt in the guest, because a +physical interrupt occurring in the middle of the guest ISR would +preempt the guest for the host to handle the interrupt. Additionally, +if you configure the system to handle interrupts on a separate physical +core from that running your VCPU, you still have to interrupt the VCPU +to queue the pending state onto the LR, even though the guest won't use +this information until the guest ISR completes. Therefore, the HW +bit should always be set for forwarded edge-triggered interrupts. With +the HW bit set, the virtual interrupt is injected and additional +physical interrupts occurring before the guest deactivates the interrupt +simply mark the state on the physical distributor as Pending+Active. As +soon as the guest deactivates the interrupt, the host takes another +interrupt if and only if there was a physical interrupt between injecting +the forwarded interrupt to the guest and the guest deactivating the +interrupt. + +Consequently, whenever we schedule a VCPU with one or more LRs with the +HW bit set, the interrupt must also be active on the physical +distributor. + + +Forwarded LPIs +-------------- +LPIs, introduced in GICv3, are always edge-triggered and do not have an +active state. They become pending when a device signal them, and as +soon as they are acked by the CPU, they are inactive again. + +It therefore doesn't make sense, and is not supported, to set the HW bit +for physical LPIs that are forwarded to a VM as virtual interrupts, +typically virtual SPIs. + +For LPIs, there is no other choice than to preempt the VCPU thread if +necessary, and queue the pending state onto the LR. + + +Putting It Together: The Architected Timer +------------------------------------------ +The architected timer is a device that signals interrupts with level +triggered semantics. The timer hardware is directly accessed by VCPUs +which program the timer to fire at some point in time. Each VCPU on a +system programs the timer to fire at different times, and therefore the +hardware is multiplexed between multiple VCPUs. This is implemented by +context-switching the timer state along with each VCPU thread. + +However, this means that a scenario like the following is entirely +possible, and in fact, typical: + +1. KVM runs the VCPU +2. The guest programs the time to fire in T+100 +3. The guest is idle and calls WFI (wait-for-interrupts) +4. The hardware traps to the host +5. KVM stores the timer state to memory and disables the hardware timer +6. KVM schedules a soft timer to fire in T+(100 - time since step 2) +7. KVM puts the VCPU thread to sleep (on a waitqueue) +8. The soft timer fires, waking up the VCPU thread +9. KVM reprograms the timer hardware with the VCPU's values +10. KVM marks the timer interrupt as active on the physical distributor +11. KVM injects a forwarded physical interrupt to the guest +12. KVM runs the VCPU + +Notice that KVM injects a forwarded physical interrupt in step 11 without +the corresponding interrupt having actually fired on the host. That is +exactly why we mark the timer interrupt as active in step 10, because +the active state on the physical distributor is part of the state +belonging to the timer hardware, which is context-switched along with +the VCPU thread. + +If the guest does not idle because it is busy, the flow looks like this +instead: + +1. KVM runs the VCPU +2. The guest programs the time to fire in T+100 +4. At T+100 the timer fires and a physical IRQ causes the VM to exit + (note that this initially only traps to EL2 and does not run the host ISR + until KVM has returned to the host). +5. With interrupts still disabled on the CPU coming back from the guest, KVM + stores the virtual timer state to memory and disables the virtual hw timer. +6. KVM looks at the timer state (in memory) and injects a forwarded physical + interrupt because it concludes the timer has expired. +7. KVM marks the timer interrupt as active on the physical distributor +7. KVM enables the timer, enables interrupts, and runs the VCPU + +Notice that again the forwarded physical interrupt is injected to the +guest without having actually been handled on the host. In this case it +is because the physical interrupt is never actually seen by the host because the +timer is disabled upon guest return, and the virtual forwarded interrupt is +injected on the KVM guest entry path. diff --git a/Documentation/virtual/kvm/devices/arm-vgic.txt b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/devices/arm-vgic.txt index 3fb905429e8a..59541d49e15c 100644 --- a/Documentation/virtual/kvm/devices/arm-vgic.txt +++ b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/devices/arm-vgic.txt @@ -44,28 +44,29 @@ Groups: Attributes: The attr field of kvm_device_attr encodes two values: bits: | 63 .... 40 | 39 .. 32 | 31 .... 0 | - values: | reserved | cpu id | offset | + values: | reserved | vcpu_index | offset | All distributor regs are (rw, 32-bit) The offset is relative to the "Distributor base address" as defined in the GICv2 specs. Getting or setting such a register has the same effect as - reading or writing the register on the actual hardware from the cpu - specified with cpu id field. Note that most distributor fields are not - banked, but return the same value regardless of the cpu id used to access - the register. + reading or writing the register on the actual hardware from the cpu whose + index is specified with the vcpu_index field. Note that most distributor + fields are not banked, but return the same value regardless of the + vcpu_index used to access the register. Limitations: - Priorities are not implemented, and registers are RAZ/WI - Currently only implemented for KVM_DEV_TYPE_ARM_VGIC_V2. Errors: - -ENODEV: Getting or setting this register is not yet supported + -ENXIO: Getting or setting this register is not yet supported -EBUSY: One or more VCPUs are running + -EINVAL: Invalid vcpu_index supplied KVM_DEV_ARM_VGIC_GRP_CPU_REGS Attributes: The attr field of kvm_device_attr encodes two values: bits: | 63 .... 40 | 39 .. 32 | 31 .... 0 | - values: | reserved | cpu id | offset | + values: | reserved | vcpu_index | offset | All CPU interface regs are (rw, 32-bit) @@ -91,8 +92,9 @@ Groups: - Priorities are not implemented, and registers are RAZ/WI - Currently only implemented for KVM_DEV_TYPE_ARM_VGIC_V2. Errors: - -ENODEV: Getting or setting this register is not yet supported + -ENXIO: Getting or setting this register is not yet supported -EBUSY: One or more VCPUs are running + -EINVAL: Invalid vcpu_index supplied KVM_DEV_ARM_VGIC_GRP_NR_IRQS Attributes: diff --git a/Documentation/virtual/kvm/devices/vm.txt b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/devices/vm.txt index 5542c4641a3c..2d09d1ed86d0 100644 --- a/Documentation/virtual/kvm/devices/vm.txt +++ b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/devices/vm.txt @@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ struct kvm_s390_vm_cpu_processor { KVM does not enforce or limit the cpu model data in any form. Take the information retrieved by means of KVM_S390_VM_CPU_MACHINE as hint for reasonable configuration -setups. Instruction interceptions triggered by additionally set facilitiy bits that +setups. Instruction interceptions triggered by additionally set facility bits that are not handled by KVM need to by imlemented in the VM driver code. Parameters: address of buffer to store/set the processor related cpu diff --git a/Documentation/virtual/kvm/locking.txt b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/locking.txt index d68af4dc3006..19f94a6b9bb0 100644 --- a/Documentation/virtual/kvm/locking.txt +++ b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/locking.txt @@ -166,3 +166,15 @@ Comment: The srcu read lock must be held while accessing memslots (e.g. MMIO/PIO address->device structure mapping (kvm->buses). The srcu index can be stored in kvm_vcpu->srcu_idx per vcpu if it is needed by multiple functions. + +Name: blocked_vcpu_on_cpu_lock +Type: spinlock_t +Arch: x86 +Protects: blocked_vcpu_on_cpu +Comment: This is a per-CPU lock and it is used for VT-d posted-interrupts. + When VT-d posted-interrupts is supported and the VM has assigned + devices, we put the blocked vCPU on the list blocked_vcpu_on_cpu + protected by blocked_vcpu_on_cpu_lock, when VT-d hardware issues + wakeup notification event since external interrupts from the + assigned devices happens, we will find the vCPU on the list to + wakeup. diff --git a/Documentation/virtual/kvm/ppc-pv.txt b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/ppc-pv.txt index 319560646f32..e26115ce4258 100644 --- a/Documentation/virtual/kvm/ppc-pv.txt +++ b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/ppc-pv.txt @@ -110,7 +110,7 @@ Flags are passed to the host in the low 12 bits of the Effective Address. The following flags are currently available for a guest to expose: - MAGIC_PAGE_FLAG_NOT_MAPPED_NX Guest handles NX bits correclty wrt magic page + MAGIC_PAGE_FLAG_NOT_MAPPED_NX Guest handles NX bits correctly wrt magic page MSR bits ======== diff --git a/Documentation/vm/page_migration b/Documentation/vm/page_migration index 6513fe2d90b8..fea5c0864170 100644 --- a/Documentation/vm/page_migration +++ b/Documentation/vm/page_migration @@ -92,29 +92,26 @@ Steps: 2. Insure that writeback is complete. -3. Prep the new page that we want to move to. It is locked - and set to not being uptodate so that all accesses to the new - page immediately lock while the move is in progress. +3. Lock the new page that we want to move to. It is locked so that accesses to + this (not yet uptodate) page immediately lock while the move is in progress. -4. The new page is prepped with some settings from the old page so that - accesses to the new page will discover a page with the correct settings. - -5. All the page table references to the page are converted - to migration entries or dropped (nonlinear vmas). - This decrease the mapcount of a page. If the resulting - mapcount is not zero then we do not migrate the page. - All user space processes that attempt to access the page - will now wait on the page lock. +4. All the page table references to the page are converted to migration + entries. This decreases the mapcount of a page. If the resulting + mapcount is not zero then we do not migrate the page. All user space + processes that attempt to access the page will now wait on the page lock. -6. The radix tree lock is taken. This will cause all processes trying +5. The radix tree lock is taken. This will cause all processes trying to access the page via the mapping to block on the radix tree spinlock. -7. The refcount of the page is examined and we back out if references remain +6. The refcount of the page is examined and we back out if references remain otherwise we know that we are the only one referencing this page. -8. The radix tree is checked and if it does not contain the pointer to this +7. The radix tree is checked and if it does not contain the pointer to this page then we back out because someone else modified the radix tree. +8. The new page is prepped with some settings from the old page so that + accesses to the new page will discover a page with the correct settings. + 9. The radix tree is changed to point to the new page. 10. The reference count of the old page is dropped because the radix tree diff --git a/Documentation/vm/slub.txt b/Documentation/vm/slub.txt index b0c6d1bbb434..699d8ea5c230 100644 --- a/Documentation/vm/slub.txt +++ b/Documentation/vm/slub.txt @@ -280,4 +280,63 @@ of other objects. slub_debug=FZ,dentry +Extended slabinfo mode and plotting +----------------------------------- + +The slabinfo tool has a special 'extended' ('-X') mode that includes: + - Slabcache Totals + - Slabs sorted by size (up to -N <num> slabs, default 1) + - Slabs sorted by loss (up to -N <num> slabs, default 1) + +Additionally, in this mode slabinfo does not dynamically scale sizes (G/M/K) +and reports everything in bytes (this functionality is also available to +other slabinfo modes via '-B' option) which makes reporting more precise and +accurate. Moreover, in some sense the `-X' mode also simplifies the analysis +of slabs' behaviour, because its output can be plotted using the +slabinfo-gnuplot.sh script. So it pushes the analysis from looking through +the numbers (tons of numbers) to something easier -- visual analysis. + +To generate plots: +a) collect slabinfo extended records, for example: + + while [ 1 ]; do slabinfo -X >> FOO_STATS; sleep 1; done + +b) pass stats file(-s) to slabinfo-gnuplot.sh script: + slabinfo-gnuplot.sh FOO_STATS [FOO_STATS2 .. FOO_STATSN] + +The slabinfo-gnuplot.sh script will pre-processes the collected records +and generates 3 png files (and 3 pre-processing cache files) per STATS +file: + - Slabcache Totals: FOO_STATS-totals.png + - Slabs sorted by size: FOO_STATS-slabs-by-size.png + - Slabs sorted by loss: FOO_STATS-slabs-by-loss.png + +Another use case, when slabinfo-gnuplot can be useful, is when you need +to compare slabs' behaviour "prior to" and "after" some code modification. +To help you out there, slabinfo-gnuplot.sh script can 'merge' the +`Slabcache Totals` sections from different measurements. To visually +compare N plots: + +a) Collect as many STATS1, STATS2, .. STATSN files as you need + while [ 1 ]; do slabinfo -X >> STATS<X>; sleep 1; done + +b) Pre-process those STATS files + slabinfo-gnuplot.sh STATS1 STATS2 .. STATSN + +c) Execute slabinfo-gnuplot.sh in '-t' mode, passing all of the +generated pre-processed *-totals + slabinfo-gnuplot.sh -t STATS1-totals STATS2-totals .. STATSN-totals + +This will produce a single plot (png file). + +Plots, expectedly, can be large so some fluctuations or small spikes +can go unnoticed. To deal with that, `slabinfo-gnuplot.sh' has two +options to 'zoom-in'/'zoom-out': + a) -s %d,%d overwrites the default image width and heigh + b) -r %d,%d specifies a range of samples to use (for example, + in `slabinfo -X >> FOO_STATS; sleep 1;' case, using + a "-r 40,60" range will plot only samples collected + between 40th and 60th seconds). + Christoph Lameter, May 30, 2007 +Sergey Senozhatsky, October 23, 2015 diff --git a/Documentation/vm/transhuge.txt b/Documentation/vm/transhuge.txt index 8143b9e8373d..8a282687ee06 100644 --- a/Documentation/vm/transhuge.txt +++ b/Documentation/vm/transhuge.txt @@ -170,6 +170,16 @@ A lower value leads to gain less thp performance. Value of max_ptes_none can waste cpu time very little, you can ignore it. +max_ptes_swap specifies how many pages can be brought in from +swap when collapsing a group of pages into a transparent huge page. + +/sys/kernel/mm/transparent_hugepage/khugepaged/max_ptes_swap + +A higher value can cause excessive swap IO and waste +memory. A lower value can prevent THPs from being +collapsed, resulting fewer pages being collapsed into +THPs, and lower memory access performance. + == Boot parameter == You can change the sysfs boot time defaults of Transparent Hugepage diff --git a/Documentation/vm/unevictable-lru.txt b/Documentation/vm/unevictable-lru.txt index 32ee3a67dba2..fa3b527086fa 100644 --- a/Documentation/vm/unevictable-lru.txt +++ b/Documentation/vm/unevictable-lru.txt @@ -531,83 +531,20 @@ map. try_to_unmap() is always called, by either vmscan for reclaim or for page migration, with the argument page locked and isolated from the LRU. Separate -functions handle anonymous and mapped file pages, as these types of pages have -different reverse map mechanisms. - - (*) try_to_unmap_anon() - - To unmap anonymous pages, each VMA in the list anchored in the anon_vma - must be visited - at least until a VM_LOCKED VMA is encountered. If the - page is being unmapped for migration, VM_LOCKED VMAs do not stop the - process because mlocked pages are migratable. However, for reclaim, if - the page is mapped into a VM_LOCKED VMA, the scan stops. - - try_to_unmap_anon() attempts to acquire in read mode the mmap semaphore of - the mm_struct to which the VMA belongs. If this is successful, it will - mlock the page via mlock_vma_page() - we wouldn't have gotten to - try_to_unmap_anon() if the page were already mlocked - and will return - SWAP_MLOCK, indicating that the page is unevictable. - - If the mmap semaphore cannot be acquired, we are not sure whether the page - is really unevictable or not. In this case, try_to_unmap_anon() will - return SWAP_AGAIN. - - (*) try_to_unmap_file() - linear mappings - - Unmapping of a mapped file page works the same as for anonymous mappings, - except that the scan visits all VMAs that map the page's index/page offset - in the page's mapping's reverse map priority search tree. It also visits - each VMA in the page's mapping's non-linear list, if the list is - non-empty. - - As for anonymous pages, on encountering a VM_LOCKED VMA for a mapped file - page, try_to_unmap_file() will attempt to acquire the associated - mm_struct's mmap semaphore to mlock the page, returning SWAP_MLOCK if this - is successful, and SWAP_AGAIN, if not. - - (*) try_to_unmap_file() - non-linear mappings - - If a page's mapping contains a non-empty non-linear mapping VMA list, then - try_to_un{map|lock}() must also visit each VMA in that list to determine - whether the page is mapped in a VM_LOCKED VMA. Again, the scan must visit - all VMAs in the non-linear list to ensure that the pages is not/should not - be mlocked. - - If a VM_LOCKED VMA is found in the list, the scan could terminate. - However, there is no easy way to determine whether the page is actually - mapped in a given VMA - either for unmapping or testing whether the - VM_LOCKED VMA actually pins the page. - - try_to_unmap_file() handles non-linear mappings by scanning a certain - number of pages - a "cluster" - in each non-linear VMA associated with the - page's mapping, for each file mapped page that vmscan tries to unmap. If - this happens to unmap the page we're trying to unmap, try_to_unmap() will - notice this on return (page_mapcount(page) will be 0) and return - SWAP_SUCCESS. Otherwise, it will return SWAP_AGAIN, causing vmscan to - recirculate this page. We take advantage of the cluster scan in - try_to_unmap_cluster() as follows: - - For each non-linear VMA, try_to_unmap_cluster() attempts to acquire the - mmap semaphore of the associated mm_struct for read without blocking. - - If this attempt is successful and the VMA is VM_LOCKED, - try_to_unmap_cluster() will retain the mmap semaphore for the scan; - otherwise it drops it here. - - Then, for each page in the cluster, if we're holding the mmap semaphore - for a locked VMA, try_to_unmap_cluster() calls mlock_vma_page() to - mlock the page. This call is a no-op if the page is already locked, - but will mlock any pages in the non-linear mapping that happen to be - unlocked. - - If one of the pages so mlocked is the page passed in to try_to_unmap(), - try_to_unmap_cluster() will return SWAP_MLOCK, rather than the default - SWAP_AGAIN. This will allow vmscan to cull the page, rather than - recirculating it on the inactive list. - - Again, if try_to_unmap_cluster() cannot acquire the VMA's mmap sem, it - returns SWAP_AGAIN, indicating that the page is mapped by a VM_LOCKED - VMA, but couldn't be mlocked. +functions handle anonymous and mapped file and KSM pages, as these types of +pages have different reverse map lookup mechanisms, with different locking. +In each case, whether rmap_walk_anon() or rmap_walk_file() or rmap_walk_ksm(), +it will call try_to_unmap_one() for every VMA which might contain the page. + +When trying to reclaim, if try_to_unmap_one() finds the page in a VM_LOCKED +VMA, it will then mlock the page via mlock_vma_page() instead of unmapping it, +and return SWAP_MLOCK to indicate that the page is unevictable: and the scan +stops there. + +mlock_vma_page() is called while holding the page table's lock (in addition +to the page lock, and the rmap lock): to serialize against concurrent mlock or +munlock or munmap system calls, mm teardown (munlock_vma_pages_all), reclaim, +holepunching, and truncation of file pages and their anonymous COWed pages. try_to_munlock() REVERSE MAP SCAN @@ -623,29 +560,15 @@ all PTEs from the page. For this purpose, the unevictable/mlock infrastructure introduced a variant of try_to_unmap() called try_to_munlock(). try_to_munlock() calls the same functions as try_to_unmap() for anonymous and -mapped file pages with an additional argument specifying unlock versus unmap +mapped file and KSM pages with a flag argument specifying unlock versus unmap processing. Again, these functions walk the respective reverse maps looking -for VM_LOCKED VMAs. When such a VMA is found for anonymous pages and file -pages mapped in linear VMAs, as in the try_to_unmap() case, the functions -attempt to acquire the associated mmap semaphore, mlock the page via -mlock_vma_page() and return SWAP_MLOCK. This effectively undoes the -pre-clearing of the page's PG_mlocked done by munlock_vma_page. - -If try_to_unmap() is unable to acquire a VM_LOCKED VMA's associated mmap -semaphore, it will return SWAP_AGAIN. This will allow shrink_page_list() to -recycle the page on the inactive list and hope that it has better luck with the -page next time. - -For file pages mapped into non-linear VMAs, the try_to_munlock() logic works -slightly differently. On encountering a VM_LOCKED non-linear VMA that might -map the page, try_to_munlock() returns SWAP_AGAIN without actually mlocking the -page. munlock_vma_page() will just leave the page unlocked and let vmscan deal -with it - the usual fallback position. +for VM_LOCKED VMAs. When such a VMA is found, as in the try_to_unmap() case, +the functions mlock the page via mlock_vma_page() and return SWAP_MLOCK. This +undoes the pre-clearing of the page's PG_mlocked done by munlock_vma_page. Note that try_to_munlock()'s reverse map walk must visit every VMA in a page's reverse map to determine that a page is NOT mapped into any VM_LOCKED VMA. -However, the scan can terminate when it encounters a VM_LOCKED VMA and can -successfully acquire the VMA's mmap semaphore for read and mlock the page. +However, the scan can terminate when it encounters a VM_LOCKED VMA. Although try_to_munlock() might be called a great many times when munlocking a large region or tearing down a large address space that has been mlocked via mlockall(), overall this is a fairly rare event. @@ -673,11 +596,6 @@ Some examples of these unevictable pages on the LRU lists are: (3) mlocked pages that could not be isolated from the LRU and moved to the unevictable list in mlock_vma_page(). - (4) Pages mapped into multiple VM_LOCKED VMAs, but try_to_munlock() couldn't - acquire the VMA's mmap semaphore to test the flags and set PageMlocked. - munlock_vma_page() was forced to let the page back on to the normal LRU - list for vmscan to handle. - shrink_inactive_list() also diverts any unevictable pages that it finds on the inactive lists to the appropriate zone's unevictable list. diff --git a/Documentation/w1/masters/omap-hdq b/Documentation/w1/masters/omap-hdq index 884dc284b215..234522709a5f 100644 --- a/Documentation/w1/masters/omap-hdq +++ b/Documentation/w1/masters/omap-hdq @@ -44,3 +44,9 @@ e.g: insmod omap_hdq.ko W1_ID=2 inamod w1_bq27000.ko F_ID=2 +The driver also supports 1-wire mode. In this mode, there is no need to +pass slave ID as parameter. The driver will auto-detect slaves connected +to the bus using SEARCH_ROM procedure. 1-wire mode can be selected by +setting "ti,mode" property to "1w" in DT (see +Documentation/devicetree/bindings/w1/omap-hdq.txt for more details). +By default driver is in HDQ mode. diff --git a/Documentation/zh_CN/filesystems/sysfs.txt b/Documentation/zh_CN/filesystems/sysfs.txt index e230eaa33122..7d3b05edb8ce 100644 --- a/Documentation/zh_CN/filesystems/sysfs.txt +++ b/Documentation/zh_CN/filesystems/sysfs.txt @@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ Documentation/kobject.txt 文档以获得更多关于 kobject 接口的 内核的对象层次到用户空间。sysfs 中的顶层目录代表着内核对象层次的 共同祖先；例如：某些对象属于某个子系统。 -Sysfs 在与其目录关联的 sysfs_dirent 对象中内部保存一个指向实现 +Sysfs 在与其目录关联的 kernfs_node 对象中内部保存一个指向实现 目录的 kobject 的指针。以前，这个 kobject 指针被 sysfs 直接用于 kobject 文件打开和关闭的引用计数。而现在的 sysfs 实现中，kobject 引用计数只能通过 sysfs_schedule_callback() 函数直接修改。 |